T7 Power Command LWB - A4

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS - according to Directives 2006/42/EC, Annex I 1.7.4.
OPERATOR’S MANUAL
T7.220
T7.235
T7.250
T7.260
Power Command
Part Number 84411764

2nd edition English
January 2011
xx
SECTION SUMMARY
1 -- General Information and Safety
2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation
3 -- Field operation
4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance
5 -- Fault Finding
6 -- Accessories
7 -- Specifications
8 -- First 50 hour Service Forms
9 -- Index
NOTES
CE DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY DOCUMENT
1
On page 1--4 is provided copy of the ”EC” Declaration of Conformity (EC Declaration of Conformity
acc to 2006/42/EC).
The EC Declaration of Conformity is the manufacturer’s declaration about equipment compliance to
relevant EU provisions.
Please keep the original document in a safe place. Local authorities may require you to show this docu-
ment in order to assure compliance of your equipment.
Translation of this declaration in your own country language is provided on the original document
For your better and easier understanding of the document you’ll find original text reproduced hereafter
together with some notes
Clause of EN
EC Declaration of conformity
2006/42/EC According to Directive 2006/42/EC.
Annex II
We, [1]
1.A.1
Represented by Giuseppe Gavioli,

1.A.2 CNH Europe Holding S.A.
13, Rue Aldringen
L--1118 Luxembourg
1.A.3 declare under our sole responsibility, that
the product:
Agricultural tractor
Trade Name: [2]
Model: [3]
Type: [4]
Serial Number: [5]
to which this declaration relates, fulfils all
the relevant provisions of the Directive
1.A.4 2006/42/EC, amended by [6].
For the relevant implementation of the
1.A.7 provisions of the Directive, the following
(harmonised) standards have been
applied:
 ISO 26322--1 part 1 or 2
Other standards: see Operators Manual
Place and date of the declaration: [7]
1.A.9
Name and signature of the authorised per-

1.A.10 son: [8]
HEALTH AND SAFETY RELATED STANDARDS APPLIED TO YOUR TRACTOR

 FOPS level on your tractor cab is certified according to OECD Code 10.
 HVAC (Heating, ventilation Air Conditioning ) CAB is certified Category 2 according to EN 15695- 1.
 NOISE EMISSION LEVELS are rated according to 77/311/EEC.
 VIBRATION LEVELS are rated according to 78/764/EEC.
 ROPS PROTECTION is certified according to EN 15694.
NOTE: See safety section 1 in this manual for further explanation and details on above mentioned stand-
ards and specific terminology.
CONTENTS
Title Page
Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

To the Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--3
Ecology and the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--6
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--8
Safety Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--16
International Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--24
Airborne Noise Emission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--25
Selective Catalytic Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--26
Tractor Vibration Level Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--34
Machine Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--35
Protection offered by the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--39
Intended Use of Your Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--42
Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Electrical Power Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--24
Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--32
Analogue/Digital Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--36
Enhanced Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--42
Brake Controls and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--88
Power Command Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--96
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--119
Front Axle Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--123
Section 3 -- Field Operation

Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
Boosting the Tractor Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--9
Stopping the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--12
Engine Power Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
Engine Speed Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
Headland Turn Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--19
Fast Steer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--36
Rear Power Take--Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--38
Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--55
Electronic Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--81
Hydraulic Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--96
Three--point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--109
Quick Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--115
Linkage Stabilisers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--117
Drawbars and Towing Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--123
Trailer Braking Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--139
Front Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--146
Dynamic Front Fenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--151
Rear Wheel Track Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--154
Ballasting and Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--165
Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
Guard Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
Lubrication and Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--13
Servicing: When Warning Lights Illuminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--16
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--19
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--20
100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--32
300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--31
600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--34
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--42
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--56
General Maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--58
Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--76
Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
3-point hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--9
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--10
Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--11
Section 6 -- Accessories
Rotating Beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Auxiliary Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--2
Battery Isolator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--3
Section 7 -- Specification
General Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--2
Vehicle Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--6
Lubricant and Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Transmission Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
Maximum Operating Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Rear Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
Three-Point Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
Remote control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Front 3--Point Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Front Remote Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
Hardware Torque Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--18
Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
All data given in this manual is subject to production variations. The dimensions and weights provided are
approximate values only and some machine features shown in this manual may not correspond to standard
models. For precise information on specific models, features and specifications, please contact your authorised
dealer.
METRIC AND IMPERIAL UNITS ABBREVIATIONS
RECOMMENDED SI (METRIC) UNITS IMPERIAL UNIT

TYPICAL
APPLICATIONS NAME SYMBOL NAME SYMBOL
AREA
Land area hectare ha acre ha
square meter m2 square foot ft2
square inch in2
square millimetre mm2 square inch in2
ELECTRICITY
ampere A ampere A
volt V volt V
microfarad F microfarad F
ohm  ohm 
FORCE
kilonewton kN pound Ib
newton N pound Ib
FORCE PER LENGTH
newton per metre N/m pound per inch Ib/in
FREQUENCY
megahertz MHz Megahertz MHz
kilohertz kHz kilohertz kHz
hertz Hz hertz Hz
FREQUENCY -- ROTATIONAL
revolution per minute r/min revolution per minute r/min (a)
rpm rpm
LENGTH
kilometre km mile mi
meter m foot ft
centimetre cm inch in
millimetre mm inch in
micrometer m
MASS
kilogram kg pound Ib
gram g ounce oz
milligram mg
TYPICAL
POWER
kilowatt kW horsepower Hp
watt W Btu per hour Btu/hr
Btu per minute Btu/min
PRESSURE or STRESS (FORCE PER AREA)

kilopascal kPa pound per square inch psi
inch of mercury inHg
pascal Pa inch of water inH2O
megapascal Mpa pound per square inch psi
TEMPERATURE (other than THERMODYNAMIC)
degrees Celsius C degrees Fahrenheit F

TIME
hour h hour h
minute min minute min
second s second s
TORQUE (includes BENDING MOMENT, MOMENT OF FORCE, and MOMENT OF A COUPLE)

newton meter Nm pound foot Ib ft
Nm pound inch Ib in
VELOCITY
kilometre per hour km/h mile per hour mph
meter per second m/s foot per second ft/s
millimetre per second mm/s inch per second in/s
meter per minute m/min foot per minute ft/min
VOLUME (includes CAPACITY)
cubic meter m3 cubic yard yd3
cu yd
litre l cubic inch in3
litre l US gallon US gal
UK gallon UK gal
US quart US qt
UK quart UK qt
millimetre ml fluid ounce fl oz
TYPICAL
VOLUME PER TIME (includes DISCHARGE and FLOW RATE)

cubic meter per minute m3/min cubic foot per minute ft3/min
litre per minute l/min US gallon per minute US
gal/min
millilitre per minute ml/min UK gallon per minute UK
gal/min
SOUND POWER LEVEL and SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

decibel dB decibel dB
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
TO THE OWNER
GENERAL CLEANING THE TRACTOR
This Manual has been prepared to assist you in the Your tractor is a state-of-the-art machine with
correct procedure for running--in, driving and sophisticated, electronic controls. This should be
operating and for the maintenance of your new taken into consideration when cleaning the tractor,
tractor. Read this Manual carefully. Your tractor is particularly if using a high pressure washer. Even
intended for use in normal and customary though every precaution has been taken to
agricultural applications. safeguard electronic components and connections,
the pressure generated by some of these machines
If at any time you require advice concerning your is such that complete protection against water
tractor, do not hesitate to contact your authorised ingress cannot be guaranteed.
dealer. He has factory trained personnel, genuine
manufacturers’ parts and the necessary equipment When using a high pressure washer, do not stand too
to carry out all your service requirements. close to the tractor and avoid directing the jet at
electronic components, electrical connections,
Your tractor has been designed and built to give breathers, seals, filler caps, etc. Never direct a cold
maximum performance, economy and ease of water jet at a hot engine or exhaust.
operation under a wide variety of operating
conditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefully ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE (EMC)
inspected, both at the factory and by your dealer to
ensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. To This tractor complies strictly with the European
maintain this condition and ensure trouble--free Regulations on electro-magnetic emissions.
operation, it is important that the routine services, as However, interference may arise as a result of
specified in Section 4 of this Manual, are carried out add-on equipment which may not necessarily meet
at the recommended intervals. the required standards. As such interference can
result in serious malfunction of the unit and/or create
OPERATORS MANUAL unsafe situations, you must observe the following:
The Operators Manual supplied with your tractor is  Ensure that each piece of non-New Holland
an important source of information and should be equipment fitted to the tractor bears the CE
stored safely. mark.
The manual is prepared specifically for your tractor  The maximum power of emission equipment
so it is important that you make a note of the print (radio, telephones, etc.) must not exceed the
number and issue date which can be found on the limits imposed by the national authorities of the
cover. In the event the manual is lost or damaged it country where you use the tractor.
can be replaced with the correct version.
 The electro-magnetic field generated by the
A storage pocket for the Operators Manual can be add-on system should not exceed 24 V/m at any
found on the rear of the seat. The manual should be time and at any location in the proximity of
kept in this pocket at all times when not in use. electronic components.
SAFETY Failure to comply with these rules will render the New
Holland warranty null and void.
Pages 1--8 to 1--42 inclusive list the precautions to
be observed to ensure your safety and the safety of
others. Read the safety precautions and follow the
advice offered before operating the tractor.
1--1
SECTION 1 -- GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY
FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE WARRANTY
In Section 8, at the back of this Manual, you will find Your tractor is warranted according to legal rights in
the 50--hour service reports. your country and the contractual agreement with the
selling dealer. No warranty shall, however, apply if
IMPORTANT: It is important the 50 hour service is the tractor has not been used, adjusted and
carried out as recommended to ensure your tractor maintained according to the instructions given in the
provides optimum performance and efficiency. Operator’s Manual.
After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take BIODIESEL FUELS
your tractor, together with this Manual, to your
dealer. He will then perform the factory IMPORTANT: Before using Biodiesel fuels in your
recommended 50 hour service and complete the tractor, refer to the information on page 4--5
service report sheets (pages 8--1 and 8--3). The first regarding the storage and use of Biodiesel fuels.
sheet (page 9--1) is the dealer’s copy and should be
removed by the dealer after the service has been EMISSION CONTROLS
carried out. The second sheet (page 8--3) is your
copy of the service performed. Ensure that you and
the dealer sign both copies. ATTENTION:The engine and fuel system on your
machine is designed and built to government
emissions standards. Tampering by dealers,
SERVICE PARTS customers, operators and users is strictly
prohibited by law. Failure to comply could result in
It should be pointed out that genuine parts have been government fines, rework charges, invalid warranty,
examined and approved by the Company. The legal action and possible confiscation of the machine
installation and/or use of ‘non-genuine’ products until rework to original condition is completed.
could have negative effects upon the design Engine service and/or repairs must be done by a
characteristics of your tractor and thereby affect it’s certified technician only!
safety. The Company is not liable for any damage
caused by the use of ‘non--genuine’ parts and
accessories. Only genuine New Holland
replacement parts should be used. The use of
non-genuine parts may invalidate legal approvals
associated with this product.
It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the

tractor unless specifically authorised, in writing, by
the After Sales Service department of the Company.
1--2
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
The tractor and major components are identified
using serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.
Tractor identification data must be supplied to the

dealer when requesting parts or service and will also
be needed to aid in identifying the tractor if it is ever 1
stolen.
The following provides the locations of the

identification data.
Vehicle Identification Plate
The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 2 is

located on the left-hand radiator support. Record the
information on the sample identification plate.
Tractor Identification
The serial number and model identification

information is stamped on the right--hand side of the
front support (1). These numbers are also repeated
on the vehicle identification plate reproduced above.
1--3
Engine Information
The engine serial number and date of manufacture

are stamped on the right--hand side of engine block
(1), below the manifold. Record the number below.
Engine Serial No.
The details are repeated on the information plate

located on the left side of the engine oil pan.
Further information relating to engine adjustments

and emission level compliance are also shown on the
engine information plate.
NOTE: The details displayed on the engine

information plate may change according to the
country in which the tractor is sold.
1--4
Driveline Identification
Power Command Transmission
The serial number plate (1) is located on the

right--hand side of the transmission casing behind
the the battery carrier. This number is repeated on
the vehicle identification plate. Record the
information below for quick reference.
Driveline Serial No.
Cab Identification
The cab serial number and other information is on the

OECD certification plate. This plate can be found on
the right--hand side of the cab trim panel, below the
rear window. Record the cab serial number below for
quick reference. 8
Cab Serial No.
Product Identification Number Plate
The Product Identification Number plate provides

important information on tractor and towed
equipment weight combinations. This plate can be
found on the right--hand side of the cab exterior trim
panel, below the rear window.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor. See Drawbars and Towing Attachments
in Section 3.
9
1--5
ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

Soil, air and water are vital factors of agriculture and 4. Avoid spillage when draining off used engine
life in general. Where legislation does not yet rule the coolant mixtures, engine, gearbox and hydraulic
treatment of some of the substances which are oils, brake fluids, etc. Do not mix drained brake
required by advanced technology, common sense fluids or fuels with lubricants. Store them safely
should govern the use and disposal of products of a until they can be disposed of in a proper way to
chemical and petrochemical nature. comply with local legislation and available
resources.
The following are recommendations which may be of
assistance: 5. Modern coolant mixtures, i.e. antifreeze and
other additives, should be replaced every two
 Become acquainted with and ensure that you years. They should not be allowed to get into the
understand the relative legislation applicable to soil but should be collected and disposed of
your country. safely.
 Where no legislation exists, obtain information 6. Do not open the air-conditioning system yourself.
from suppliers of oils, filters, batteries, fuels, anti It contains gases which should not be released
freeze, cleaning agents, etc., with regard to their into the atmosphere. Your dealer or air
effect on man and nature and how to safely store, conditioning specialist has a special extractor for
use and dispose of these substances. this purpose and will have to recharge the
Agricultural consultants will, in many cases, be system anyway.
able to help you as well.
7. Repair any leaks or defects in the engine cooling
HELPFUL HINTS or hydraulic system immediately.
1. Avoid filling tanks using unsuitable containers or 8. Do not increase the pressure in a pressurised
inappropriate pressurised fuel delivery systems circuit as this may lead to the components
which may cause considerable spillage. exploding.
2. In general, avoid skin contact with all fuels, oils, 9. Protect hoses during welding as penetrating
acids, solvents, etc. Most of them contain weld splatter may burn a hole or weaken them,
substances which can be harmful to your health. causing the loss of oils, coolant, etc.
3. Modern oils contain additives. Do not burn 10. Do not adjust the setting of the fuel delivery
contaminated fuels and/or waste oils in ordinary system as this will alter the emission of exhaust
heating systems. fumes.
NOTE: The engines installed on the tractors

comply with anti--pollution legislation.
1--6
PRECAUTIONARY
STATEMENTS
PERSONAL SAFETY
Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“DANGER”,
“WARNING”, and “CAUTION”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personal
safety of you and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.
DANGER
This word “DANGER” indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury. The color associated with Danger is RED.
M1169
WARNING
This word “WARNING” indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.
M1170
CAUTION
This word “CAUTION” indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated
with Caution is YELLOW.
M1171
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “DANGER”, “WARNING”, AND “CAUTION” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT
IN SERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.
MACHINE SAFETY
The precautionary statement (“NOTICE”) is followed by specific instructions. This statement is intended for
machine safety.
NOTICE: The word “NOTICE” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
INFORMATION
NOTICE: Instructions used to identify and present supplementary information.
ASAE S441.3 FEB04

ISO 11684
VERSION -- FEB ’08
1--7
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
A careful operator is the best operator. Most accidents THE TRACTOR
can be avoided by observing certain precautions. To
help prevent accidents, read and take the following 1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully before
precautions before driving, operating or servicing the using the tractor. Lack of operating knowledge
tractor. Equipment should be operated only by those can lead to accidents.
who are responsible and instructed to do so.
2. Only allow properly trained and qualified persons
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS to operate the tractor.
Throughout this Manual you will see text, preceded 3. To prevent falls, use the handrails and step
by the words NOTE, ATTENTION, IMPORTANT, plates when getting on and off the tractor. Keep
CAUTION, WARNING or DANGER. Such text has steps and platform clear of mud and debris.
the following significance:
4. Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety
MACHINE SAFETY decals.
NOTE: This text stresses a correct operating 5. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.
technique or procedure.
ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.
IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

something that he needs to know to prevent minor
machine damage if a certain procedure is not
followed.
PERSONAL SAFETY
CAUTION
The word CAUTION is used where a safe
behavioural practice, according to operating and
maintenance instructions and common safety 6. Do not permit anyone but the operator to ride on
practices will protect the operator and others from the tractor except for driver training or
accident involvement. instruction. When used for these purposes an
additional seat may be fitted in the cab.
Passengers should not be carried on the tractor
WARNING at any time.
The word WARNING denotes a potential or hidden
hazard which could possibly cause serious injury. It 7. Keep children away from the tractor and farm
is used to warn operators and others to exercise due machinery at all times.
care and attention to avoid a surprise accident with
machinery.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
modify or alter the tractor or any of its
components or any tractor function without first
DANGER consulting your dealer.
The word DANGER denotes a forbidden practice in
connection with a serious hazard.
9. Install all guards before starting the engine or
operating the tractor.
Failure to follow the CAUTION, WARNING and
DANGER instructions may result in serious bodily
injury or even death.
1--8
DRIVING THE TRACTOR
1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

driving the tractor.
2. When driving on public roads, have

consideration for other road users. Pull in to the
side of the road occasionally to allow any
following traffic to pass. Do not exceed the legal
speed limit set in your country for agricultural
tractors.
3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

Vehicle warning when driving on public roads to
indicate that the vehicle is slow moving and is a 8. Keep the tractor in the same gear when going
possible hazard. downhill as would be used when going uphill. Do
not coast or freewheel down hills.
4. Dip the tractor lights when meeting a vehicle at
9. For safe operation any towed vehicle whose total
night. Make sure the lights are adjusted to
weight exceeds that of the towing tractor must be
prevent blinding the driver of an oncoming
equipped with a braking system that complies
vehicle.
with the legal requirements of that country.
5. Reduce speed before turning or applying the 10. Never apply the differential lock when turning.
brakes. Brake both wheels simultaneously when When engaged, the differential lock will prevent
making an emergency stop. Ensure that both the tractor from turning.
brake pedals are locked together when travelling
at road speeds or when on public roads to ensure 11. Always check overhead clearance, especially
correct operation of trailer brakes, balanced when transporting the tractor. Watch where you
operation of the tractor brakes and four wheel are going, especially at row ends, on roads and
braking (4WD tractors only). around trees and low overhanging obstacles.
12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

at speeds compatible with safety, especially
when operating over rough ground, when
crossing ditches or slopes and when turning
corners.
6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front

axle is automatically engaged, to provide four
wheel braking, when both footbrakes are
applied. Owners should be aware of the
effectiveness of four wheel braking which greatly 13. Use extreme caution when operating on steep
enhances braking performance. Appropriate slopes.
care should be exercised during fierce braking.
14. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tyres are
7. Use extreme caution and avoid hard application frozen to the ground, reverse the tractor out to
of the tractor brakes when towing heavy loads at prevent overturning.
road speeds.
1--9
OPERATING THE TRACTOR
1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

in the ‘OFF’ position, the lift control lever in the
down position, the remote control valve levers in
the neutral position and the transmission levers
in neutral before starting the tractor.
2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

than externally located hydraulic lift or P.T.O.
switches, if fitted) while standing beside the
tractor. Always sit in the tractor seat when
starting the engine or operating the controls.
3. Do not bypass the transmission and P.T.O. 8. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.
neutral start switches. Consult your authorised
dealer if your neutral start controls malfunction. 9. The cab is designed to provide the minimum
Use jump leads only in the recommended noise level at the operator’s ears and meets or
manner. Improper use can result in a tractor exceeds applicable standards in this respect.
runaway. However, noise (sound pressure level) in the
workplace can exceed 85 dB(A) when working
between buildings or in confined spaces, with
cab windows open. Therefore, it is
recommended that operators wear suitable ear
protectors when operating in high noise level
conditions.
4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

levers while the engine is running. Unexpected
tractor movement can result from such contact.
5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.
6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,

stop the tractor immediately as the tractor will be 10. Do not run the tractor engine in an enclosed
more difficult to control. building without adequate ventilation. Exhaust
fumes are toxic and can cause death.
7. Before leaving the tractor, park the tractor on 11. Pull only from the pick-up hitch, swinging
level ground, apply the parking brake, lower drawbar or the lower link drawbar in the lowered
attached implements to the ground, disengage position. Use only a drawbar pin that locks in
the P.T.O. and stop the engine. place. Pulling from the tractor rear axle or any
point above the axle may cause the tractor to
overturn.
1--10
12. Always select Position Control when attaching OPERATING THE P.T.O.
equipment and when transporting equipment. Be
sure hydraulic couplers are properly mounted 1. When operating P.T.O.- driven equipment, shut
and will disconnect safely in case of accidental off the engine, switch off the P.T.O. and wait until
detachment of the implement. the P.T.O. stops before getting off the tractor and
disconnecting the equipment.
13. If the front end of the tractor tends to rise when

heavy implements are attached to the 2. Do not wear loose clothing when operating the
three--point hitch, install front end or front wheel power take-off or especially when near rotating
weights. Do not operate the tractor with a light equipment.
front end.
3. When operating stationary P.T.O.-driven
14. Engage the clutch slowly when driving out of a equipment, always apply the tractor parking
ditch, gully or up a steep hillside. Disengage the brake and block the rear wheels front and back.
clutch promptly if the front wheels rise off the
ground.
15. Ensure any attached equipment or accessories

are correctly installed, are approved for use with
the tractor, do not overload the tractor and are
operated and maintained in accordance with the
instructions issued by the equipment or
accessory manufacturer.
16. Remember that your tractor, if abused or

incorrectly used, can be dangerous and become
a hazard both to the operator and to bystanders.
Do not overload or operate with attached
equipment which is unsafe, not designed for the
particular task or is poorly maintained.
4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclog or
17. Do not leave equipment in the raised position service P.T.O. driven equipment when the tractor
when the vehicle is stopped or unattended. engine is running. Ensure that the P.T.O. is
switched off.
18. Do not drive equipment near open fires.
5. Make sure the P.T.O. guard is in position at all
times and always replace the P.T.O. cap when
19. Always wear a protective mask when working
the P.T.O. is not in use.
with toxic spray chemicals. Follow the directions
on the chemical container.
1--11
SERVICING THE TRACTOR Unqualified persons should not remove or

attempt to adjust a pump, injector, nozzle or any
other part of the fuel injection or hydraulic
systems. Failure to follow these instructions can
result in serious injury.
 Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a

piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
 Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.
1. The cooling system operates under pressure

which is controlled by the expansion tank cap. It
is dangerous to remove the cap while the system
is hot. Always turn the cap slowly to the first stop
and allow the pressure to escape before
removing the cap entirely. Never remove the cap
from the top of the radiator unless the expansion
tank pressure cap has first been removed.
2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep

any type of open flame away.  Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularly
brakes and steering, maintained in a reliable and  If fluid is injected into the skin obtain medical
satisfactory condition to ensure your safety and attention immediately or gangrene may result.
comply with legal requirements.
8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to
4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep open flames modify or alter the tractor or any of its
away from battery or cold weather starting aids. components or any tractor function without first
To prevent sparks which could cause explosion, consulting an authorised dealer.
use jumper cables according to instructions.
9. Continuous long term contact with used engine
5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioning oil may cause skin cancer. Avoid prolonged
system. It is possible to be severely frost bitten contact with used engine oil. Wash skin promptly
or injured by escaping refrigerant. Special with soap and water. It is recommended to wear
equipment and instruments are required to suitable gloves or use a rag.
service the air conditioning system. See your
authorised dealer for service.
IMPORTANT: Wear suitable personal protective
equipment (PPE) and clothing to suit the conditions
6. Stop the engine before performing any service and regulations in your country. This equates but not
on the tractor. limited to protection of eyes, lungs, ears, head,
hands and feet when operating, servicing or
7. Hydraulic fluid and fuel oil in the injection system repairing the equipment. Always keep hair and
operate under high pressure. Escaping hydraulic clothing away from moving parts. Do not wear loose
fluid or fuel oil under pressure can penetrate the clothing, jewellery or other items that could entangle
skin causing serious injury. with levers and or moving parts.
1--12
10. Keep equipment clean and properly maintained. 5. Sparks from the electrical system or engine
exhaust can cause an explosion and fire. Before
11. Dispose of all drained fluids and removed filters you operate the tractor in an area with flammable
properly. dust or vapours, use a good ventilation system
the remove the flammable dust or vapours.
12. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care
6. Use a non flammable cleaning solvent when
and ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple
cleaning parts on the tractor.
and cause injury.
7. A fire can cause injury or death. It is advisable to
PREVENTION OF FIRE OR EXPLOSION have a fire extinguisher near or on the tractor
when operating in conditions where a fire may
1. Due to the flammable nature of some crop occur. Ensure fire extinguishers are serviced
materials, the risk of tractor fire can be high. This according to the manufacturers instructions.
risk can be minimised by frequent removal of
accumulated crop material from the tractor. If oil 8. If a fire extinguisher has been used, always
leaks appear, correct the fault by re--torquing the recharge or replace the extinguisher before
bolts or replacing the gaskets as necessary. operating the tractor in conditions where a fire
may occur.
2. When operating in flammable crop conditions,
check and remove all trash or debris from the 9. DO NOT store flammable materials (oil soaked
tractor each day, especially around the engine rags etc.) on the tractor.
area and exhaust system.
3. Sparks or open flame can cause the hydrogen

gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an
explosion carry out the following:
 When disconnecting the battery cables, remove
the negative (--) cable first. When re--connecting
the battery cables, connect the negative (--)
cable last.
 When using jumper cables to start the engine,

use only the procedure shown in Section 3 of this
manual.
 Do not short circuit the battery terminals with a
metal object.
 Do not weld, grind or smoke near a battery.
4. Periodically check the tractor electrical system

for loose connections or frayed insulation. Repair
or replace any damaged parts.
1--13
FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Only operate your tractor when an approved fire
extinguisher is installed.
The fire extinguisher designed location is identified
on your tractor with the decal shown in the accompa-
nying image.
CAUTION
Please ensure to install an appropriate and certified
fire extinguisher;
Never alter its position or remove it.
Ensure to replace it or have it checked or refilled after
every usage and/or date of expiry according to
manufacturer’s maintenance prescriptions.
It is not intended for use on an out--of--control fire,
such as one which has reached the ceiling, or the
operator ; it is meant only to help you 10
To check if the extinguisher is still under

pressure,proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the pressure gauge from the valve
2. The needle will go from the green area to ”0” in
thered area
3. Rescrew the pressure gauge on the valve. The
needle will go from ”0” in the red field to the
greenfield
-- Operate the extinguisher from a safe distance.
-- Pull the Pin at the top of the extinguisher.
-- Aim at the base of the fire, not the flames.
-- Squeeze the lever slowly. This will release the

extinguishing agent;extinguishing agent; If the
handle is released, the discharge will stop
-- Sweep from side to side. Using a sweeping

motion, move the fire extinguisher back and forth
until the fire is completely out.
-- Check for re--ignition of fire.
1--14
DIESEL FUEL Diesel and biodiesel fuel specifications

Diesel fuel specifications are covered by the
1. Under no circumstances should gasoline, following:
alcohol or blended fuels be added to diesel fuel.
These combinations can create an increased fire  Europe: EN 590 -- Specification of Diesel fuel.
or explosive hazard. In a closed container such (10ppm sulfur maximum).
as a fuel tank these blends are more explosive  United States: ASTM D975--08A, Standard
than pure gasoline. Do not use these blends. Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils. (15ppm sulfur
maximum).
2. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with the
engine running or hot. Biodiesel blends are covered by:
3. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor or when  European Diesel Fuel Specification EN 590
standing near fuel. Keep any type of open flame allows up to 7% biodiesel since 2009. European
away. fuel suppliers are allowed to use up to 7%
biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the network.
4. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzle when
filling the tank.  United States Diesel Fuel Specification ASTM
D6751--09A allows up to 7% biodiesel since
2009. United States fuel suppliers are allowed to
5. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Fill only to the use up to 7% biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the
bottom of the filler neck to allow room for network.
expansion.
 United States Biodiesel Fuel Specification
ASTM D7467--09A provides specifications for
6. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately. diesel and biodiesel blends from B6 to B20.
7. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.
8. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace it with

an approved cap. A non--approved cap may not
be safe.
9. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.
10. Arrange fuel purchases so that summer grade

fuels are not held over and used in the winter.
WHENEVER YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL IT MEANS: ATTENTION!

BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED!
1--15
SAFETY DECALS
The decals reproduced on the following pages were installed on your tractor in the positions indicated in the drawings
below. They are intended for your safety and for those working with you. Please take this Manual and walk around
your tractor, noting the location of the decals and their significance. Review the decals and operating instructions
detailed in this Manual with the machine operators. Keep the decals clean and legible. If they become damaged or
illegible, obtain replacements from your authorised dealer.
17 1
2
19
21
1
22
4
3
6
25
26 5
16 23
13 7
14
15 8
12
24
10
11
18 11
20
1--16
1. Location:
Left and right-hand side of fan guard
To prevent serious injury, keep hands and clothing

away from rotating fan and drive belt.
Part No. 84269904
2. Location:
Left and right--hand side of radiator
Warning! Pressurised cooling system. Allow to cool

then remove cap carefully. Using a cloth, turn cap to
the first stop and allow pressure to subside before
removing cap completely.
Part No.84269938
3. Location:
Air conditioning compressor
Warning! Fluid under pressure, do not disconnect

any lines. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84386047 1050g
(1050g)
84386047 A
4. Location:
Radar sensor mounting bracket
To avoid possible eye damage from micro-wave

signals emitted by the radar sensor, do not look
directly into the sensor face.
Part No.84270897
1--17
5. Location:
Top of battery
Danger! Corrosive acid. Explosive gas. Wear eye

protection. Avoid producing sparks. See Operator’s
Manual.
6. Location:
Right--hand ’A’ pillar inside cab
Warning! De--activate Turn Assist system before

travelling on the highway. Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.87331567
7. Location:
Front of right--hand control console
Caution! Always use grab handles when entering or

leaving the platform/cab
Part No.81871702
8. Location:
Right--hand access door (where fitted)
Cab exit door only, cannot be opened from outside.

Read Operator’s Manual.
Part No.87390270
1--18
9. Location:
Right hand rear cab pillar
Part No.84269928
Always turn the key to OFF position before

performing any intervention or service on the tractor;
always refer to the Operator’s manual for specific
information.
10.Location:
Left hand rear cab pillar
Wear close fitting clothing and use all the PPE

(Personal Protective Equipment) appropriate for the
task.
Part No.84275352
11.Location:
Rear of both fenders (with external power
controls only)
To avoid injury, do not stand on the implement or

between the implement and tractor while operating
the external lift or P.T.O. controls.
Part No.84269906
12.Location:
Parking Brake Lever
Read the Operator’s Manual.
1--19
13.Location:
Left--hand ‘A’ pillar inside the cab
General Warning.
Read and understand all the warning notes printed
in the Operator’s Manual. In particular, read the
General Information and Safety section in the
Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84270888
14.Location:
Towing the Tractor.

Caution! Read the Operator’s Manual before
attempting to tow the tractor.
Part No.84270901
15.Location:
Caution! The ROPS structure is providing partial

protection in case of roll--over; use always seat belt
(seat retaining system ) provided and hold steering
whell tight in case of roll over.
Part No.84269915
16.Location:
Top of toolbox
Do not stand on toolbox.
Part No.84269908
1--20
17.Location:
Left--hand side of front hitch
To avoid injury, do not stand between the implement

and tractor while operating the external controls.
Part No.84269906
18.Location:
On the left hand door
This decal identifies the instructor’s seat provided

only for training purpose, refer to information
provided along selection 1 in this manual for its usage
and related risks.
Part No.84270900
19.Location:
Hydraulic accumulator/s
Caution! High pressure hydraulic/gas accumulator.

Follow service manual instructions for removal or
repair.
Part No.82029751
NOTE: The number and position of the hydraulic

accumulators may change according to tractor
specification.
20.Location:
Rear window
The decal identifies the emergency exit on your

tractor; use the hammer provided, located on the
rear right hand pillar, to break the rear window glass.
Part No.84276198
1--21
21.Location:
Starter Motor
Warning! Do not start engine by shorting across

starter terminals. Machine will start in gear if normal
circuitry is bypassed. NEVER starter engine while
staying on ground. Start engine only from operator’s
seat, with transmission in neutral.
Part No.84270895
22.Location:
Left--hand side of radiator
Warning! Heater Grid cold start aid. Do not use ether

or risk of explosion will occur.
Part No.8603095
23.Location:
Rear Axle
When parking on a slope, push a wheel chock in front

of or behind one wheel.
24. Part No 84269927, Located right hand side of

seat on cab floor.
WARNING
Always carry a fire extinguisher at the space

provided for your own and others safety.
Failure to comply could result in death or serious

injury.
11
1--22
25.Location: Left hand side on the DEF/AdBlue

tank
Only fill the DEF/AdBlue tank with approved

DEF/AdBlue solution. Do not fill with diesel fuel or
water. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
Part No.84284896C
26.Location: Left hand side on the DEF/AdBlue

tank DEF/AdBlue tank
Only use diesel fuel with a sulfur content of less than

10mg/kg according to standards ASTM D975 or
EN590.
Part No. 87493418A
1--23
INTERNATIONAL SYMBOLS
As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilised on the instruments,
controls, switches, and fuse box. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.
Engine cold
Turn signals Parking brake Fast steer
start aid
Alternator Turn signals Draft

Brake lock
charge trailer 1 control
Turn signals Position

Fuel level Trailer brake
trailer 2 control
Engine speed Windscreen Check parking Rear hitch

(rev min x 100) wiper brake lower
Windscreen Rear hitch

Hours recorded Exhaust brake
washer raise
Engine oil Rear screen Brake fluid Rear hitch

pressure wiper level float
Engine coolant Rear screen Rear hitch

temperature washer N Neutral
height limit
Heated rear Slow or low Front hitch

Coolant level
screen setting height limit
Engine air filter Heated front Fast or high

PTO
blocked screen setting
Creeper Remote valve

Tractor lights Horn
speeds retract
Heater
Headlamp high Forward Remote valve
temperature
beam direction extend
control
Headlamp Reverse Remote valve

Blower fan
dipped beam direction float
Tractor Air conditioning Warning

% wheel slip
sidelamps control STOP
Work lamps Variable control Differential lock Attention!
Malfunction
Hazard warning
Radio 4WD engaged See Operators
lamps
manual
Front Malfunction
Flashing Keep alive
KAM suspension See Operators
beacon memory
locked manual
1--24
AIRBORNE NOISE EMISSION
In accordance with E.E.C. directives, the noise levels of tractors covered by this manual are as follows:
Tractors with Cabin and Fixed Windscreen with Air Cleaner Extraction System
Noise level at operators ear Drive by noise level

Closed (1) Open (2) Moving Stationary
Model Transmission Annex II* Annex II* Annex VI**
T7.220 Power Command 71.0 dB(A) 79.0 dB(A) 80.0 dB(A)

* Test results are in accordance with directive 77/311/EEC Annex II.

Maximum noise level at the operators ear with:
1) all cab windows and doors closed, tractor off load
2) rear window and roof hatch open, tractor off load.
** Test results are in accordance with directive 74/151/EEC Annex VI.
1--25
SELECTIVE CATALYTIC REDUCTION (SCR)

What is Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)?
Your machine is equipped with additional components to comply with national and local exhaust emissions
requirements. The main components of the SCR system include the SCR catalyst, the Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF)/AdBlue injection unit, the DEF/AdBlue tank, and the DEF/AdBlue dosing control unit.
How does Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)

work?
During combustion, harmful Nitrogen Oxide (NOx) molecules are formed in the exhaust. By injecting a
DEF/AdBlue solution into the exhaust prior to a catalyst, the NOx can be converted to harmless elemental
Nitrogen and water. This happens when the NOx molecules react inside the catalyst with the heat generated
by the engine and the ammonia in the DEF/AdBlue solution.
During cold engine operation at low engine coolant and ambient air temperatures, water vapor will be visible from
the exhaust when the engine operates. This water vapor will resemble steam or light white smoke and will
dissipate as the engine and machine components warm and is considered normal.
What is Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue ?

DEF/AdBlue is a non--toxic aqueous urea solution (32.5 %) with a slight ammonia odor used to chemically
reduce NOx emissions from heavy--duty diesel powered vehicles. DEF/AdBlue is neither explosive nor
harmful to the environment and is classified under the minimum--risk category of transportable fluids.
DEF/AdBlue quality is defined by ISO 22241--1. The American Petroleum Institute (API) has a voluntary
certification program for DEF/AdBlue. To ensure DEF/AdBlue satisfies the requirements of ISO 22241, look
for the API DEF Certification Markt whenever you purchase DEF/AdBlue.
1--26
Finding Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

Your dealer is fully equipped to accomodate all your (DEF)/AdBlue needs.
New Holland Agriculture

Toll free number: 00800 64111111
Country Toll free fax Local number E-mail
Italy (0039) 800872693 02 44412 246 EUNewHollandItaly@cnh.com
La chiamata è gratuita. Tuttavia, con alcuni gestori europei le chiamate da telefono cellulare sono a
pagamento. Per qualsiasi informazione sulle tariffe, consultare in anticipo il proprio gestore telefonico. In caso
di difficoltà a chiamare il numero verde, è possibile rivolgersi anche al numero 0244412246.

United Kingdom 8003457995 02030245590 EUNewHollandUKROI@cnh.com
(0044)
The call is free. However some European Operators may apply a charge, if the call is made from a mobile
phone. For any information about charge rate, please enquire in advance from your provider. Should you have
difficulties getting through to the free phone number, you can also call 02030245590.

Republic of Ireland 1800409702 012421881 EUNewHollandUKROI@cnh.com
(00353)
In the Republic of Ireland please only use 00800 64 111 111 if calling from a land line. The call will be free of
charge. However, to call using a mobile telephone please dial 01 2421881. A call made from a mobile telephone
will not be free but will be charged to you. For information about charge rates, please contact your service
provider before making the call.

France (0033) 0800909540 0157323206 EUNewHollandFrance@cnh.com
L’appel est gratuit. Toutefois, certains opérateurs européens peuvent facturer l’appel s’il provient d’un
téléphone portable. Pour plus d’informations sur les tarifs, veuillez vous renseigner à l’avance auprès de votre
opérateur. Si vous rencontrez des difficultés à joindre la ligne téléphonique gratuite, vous pouvez également
appeler le 0157323206.

Spain (0034) 900954480 912754407 EUNewHollandSpain@cnh.com
La llamada es gratuita. No obstante, con algunos operadores europeos la llamada puede ser de pago si se
efectúa desde un teléfono móvil. Para obtener mayor información acerca de las tarifas, consulte previamente
a su proveedor. Si tiene problemas para comunicar con el número de teléfono gratuito, puede llamar al número
de pago 912754407.

Germany (0049) 08001812449 06951709289 EUNewHollandGermany@cnh.com
Der Anruf ist gebührenfrei. Bei Anruf aus dem Mobilnetz könnten einige europäische Netzbetreiber Gebühren
berechnen. Bitte erfragen Sie die Tarife zuvor bei Ihrem Anbieter. Falls Sie Probleme bei der Anwahl der
Freecall-Nummer haben sollten, empfehlen wir Ihnen den Anruf unter unserer kostenpflichtigen Rufnummer
06951709289.
1--27

Austria (0043) 0800298170 0179567160 EUNewHollandAustria@cnh.com
Der Anruf ist gebührenfrei. Bei Anruf aus dem Mobilnetz könnten einige europäische Netzbetreiber Gebühren
berechnen. Bitte erfragen Sie die Tarife zuvor bei Ihrem Anbieter. Falls Sie Probleme bei der Anwahl der
Freecall-Nummer haben sollten, empfehlen wir Ihnen den Anruf unter unserer kostenpflichtigen Rufnummer
0179567160.

Belgium 0032) 080080602 022006116 TopService.Belgium@newholland.com
Benelux - NLO
Dit is een gratis nummer. Als u echter met een GSM vanuit België of Luxemburg telefoneert, kiest u 022006116
voor België en 03420808585 voor Luxemburg. Merk op dat telefoneren met een GSM niet gratis is, maar voor
eigen rekening gebeurt. Voor informatie in verband met het prijstarief neemt u best vooraf contact op met uw
provider.
Benelux - BFO
Si vous appelez de Belgique ou du Luxembourg l’appel est gratuit. Toutefois, à partir d’un téléphone portable,
veuillez appeler le 022006116 pour la Belgique et le 03420808585 pour le Luxembourg. Veuillez noter qu’un
appel à partir d’un téléphone portable ne sera pas gratuit mais vous sera facturé. Pour plus d’informations sur
le tarif, veuillez vous renseigner à l’avance auprès de votre opérateur.

Luxembourg 80027825 03420808585 TopService.Luxembourg@newholland.co
(00352) m
Benelux - NLO
provider.
Benelux - BFO

Denmark (0045) 80887959 038323003 TopService.Danmark@newholland.com
Opkaldet er gratis ved opkald fra fastnet telefon. Visse europæiske udbydere pålægger et gebyr, hvis opkaldet
sker fra en mobiltelefon. Kontakt venligst dit telefonselskab for oplysninger om takster. Hvis der er problemer
med at komme igennem på det gratis telefonnummer, kan du også ringe på 038323003.
1--28

Netherlands (0031) 0800 6411111 0202008278 TopService.Nederland@newholland.com
Benelux - NLO
provider.
Benelux - BFO

Portugal (00351) 800 207592 0217616019 TopService.Portugal@cnh.com
A chamada é grátis. Contudo, alguns operadores europeus podem aplicar uma taxa, se a chamada for feita
de um telemóvel. Para mais informações sobre as taxas, informe-se antecipadamente, junto do seu
fornecedor.

Poland (0048) 0223060103 TopService.Polska@newholland.com
1--29
For countries outside of the toll free access area, please use the table below:
For countries outside of the toll free access area, please use the table below:
New Holland Agriculture
Country Toll Number Spoken Language
Norway (0047) 0044 2030245590 English
Sweden (0046) 0044 2030245590 English
Finland (00358) 0044 2030245590 English
Iceland (00354) 0044 2030245590 English
Estonia (00372) 0044 2030245590 English
Latvia (00371) 0044 2030245590 English
Lithuania (00370) 0044 2030245590 English
Czech Republic (00420) 00800 64111111 Czech
Slovenia (00386) 0044 2030245590 English
Croatia (00385) 0044 2030245590 English
Republic of Serbia (00381) 0044 2030245590 English
Bosnia & Herzegovina (00387) 0044 2030245590 English
Albania (00355) 0044 2030245590 English
Macedonia (00389 0044 2030245590 English
Greece (0030) 0044 2030245590 English
Bulgaria (00359) 0044 2030245590 English
Romania (0040) 0044 2030245590 English
Hungary (0036) 0044 2030245590 English
Cyprus (00357) 0044 2030245590 English
Malta (00356) 0044 2030245590 English
Switzerland (0041) 00800 64111111 German, French, Italian
Maintenance requirements
The operator must maintain appropriate DEF/AdBlue levels at all times. No additional maintenance is required.
NOTE: See your dealer for replacement components and cleaning agents.
Refer to section 4, Lubrication and Maintenance, for lubrication oil quality, maximum lubrication oil consumption
ratings, and fuel requirements. Your SCR system is suitable for use with Biodiesel up to B7 rating. Do not use
Biodiesel higher than B7 as this will damage the SCR functionality.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

consumption
NOTE: DEF/AdBlue consumption is highly dependent on engine loads, humidity levels, DEF/AdBlue fluid
concentration, and engine speed. The “typical” consumption is only a guideline to verify proper function of the
SCR system. CNH recommends to fill the DEF/AdBlue tanks at every fuel refilling interval.
1--30
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue

instrumentation warning
ATTENTION: The fuel system, exhaust after--treatment system, and engine on your machine are designed and
built to government emissions standards. Tampering by dealers, customers, operators, and users is strictly
prohibited by law. Failure to comply could result in government fines, rework charges, invalid warranty, legal
action, and possible confiscation of the machine until rework to original condition is completed. Engine service
and/or repairs must be done by a certified technician only!
Your machine is equipped with a warning system to inform the operator of the DEF/AdBlue level, system
malfunctions, and engine power loss that may result from the SCR system for reducing exhaust emissions.
Engine Power Loss occur- Emission system test in progress

ring
Engine stop Low DEF/AdBlue level
Poor DEF/AdBlue quality Engine start
Engine to be operated to increase

SCR Technical failure temperature
Right hand LCD -- Diesel Exhaust Fluid

(DEF)/AdBlue instrumentation warning
A. DEF/Adblue / SCR system icon

B. SCR Technical failure
C. DEF/Adblue level indicator
During normal operation of your machine, the
instrument cluster displays the DEF/AdBlue fluid
level (C) at all times.
Warning lights and indicators will be illuminated with

a warning on the visual display. The display changes
automatically to allow the operator to view the 12
warning indicator and display message.
1--31
TRACTOR VIBRATION LEVEL INFORMATION SHEET
HAZARDS RELATED TO VIBRATION EXPOSURE

WARNING
The Whole Body Vibration level will depend on a lot NOTE: More information about Whole Body Vibra-
of parameters, some of them machine related, oth- tion (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found on
ers terrain related and many driver related. The prop- specific publications and maybe covered by local
erties of the track or field surface and the driving regulations; in order to correctly estimate statistics
speed will be the predominant parameters. values based on your everyday activity please use a
triaxial seat accelerometer.
WARNING NOTE: Documentation can be downloaded from
website http://www.cema--agri.org/WBV
Machine vibrations cause discomfort to the operator
and in some cases his health and safety may be at
risk.
Make sure the machine is in good condition and that
the service interval work has been carried out
correctly.
Check the tyre pressure, the steering and the brake
system.
Check that the operator’s seat and adjustment
controls are in good condition and then adjust the
seat to suit the operator’s size and weight.
Operate all controls consistently so the machine
works smoothly and modify your driving to suit
working conditions.
During travel, adjust your speed and slow down if
necessary.
In compliance with EU standard, 78/764/EEC you can find in the table below the vibration levels measured for
seats used on your tractor model.
Seat model / type Vibration* m/s2 (ft/s2) at (testing mass)

Light weight operator Heavy weight operator
SEARS / Series 5000 1.21 ( 3.96) 0.96 (3.14)
SEARS / Series D5000 1.13 (3.70) 0.9 (2.95
GRAMMER / MSG 95G/741 1.24 (4.06) 1.1 (3.60)
GRAMMER / MSG 95GL/741 0.91 (2.98) 1.06 (3.47)
* Corrected weighted vibration acceleration
1--32
MACHINE STABILITY The following procedure and calculation is based on

the machine on even ground.
The following procedure describes the requirements
for machine stability, and how to calculate the re- WARNING
quired front mounted and rear mounted ballast.
For the ballast refer also to the ballast recommenda- Not taking into consideration the influence of strong
tions in this manual. inclinations and steep hills can result in instability of
the machine. Risk of severe injury and death. Ballast
For the maximum permitted operating weights refer weights and driving speed have to be adjusted
to the vehicle weights in this manual. accordingly to ensure stable and accurate steering
and to ensure the required brake performance in
WARNING critical situations.
Not following the machine stability requirements, can

result in in stability of the machine. Risk of severe
injury or death. Always consider and follow the
machine stability requirements.
1--33
NECESSARY DATA TO EVALUATE

STABILITY
Legend
To get this Value

Refer to:
MT Mass of the unladen tract- This
or = Tractor with standard manual
equipment, minimum fuel,
no weights or liquid bal-
last, no operator, and
single wheel equipment
MF Front axle load unladen This
tractor Manual
MR Rear axle load unladen This
tractor Manual
a Distance Centre of Gravity Manual of
front load to front axle the equip-
centre ment or to
measure
b Wheelbase This
Manual
c Distance rear axle centre This
to lower hitch point of Manual or
three point linkage to meas-
ure 13
d Distance Centre of Gravity Manual of
rear load to lower hitch the equip- NOTE:
point of three point linkage ment or to
measure 1. Equipment weight together with its filling must be
added to laden values (seed drills, fertilizer
e Distance rear axle centre To calcu-
spreaders, etc).
to centre of gravity (COG) late (For-
of MT (mass of unladen mula on
tractor) following 2. Ballasting weight in the centre of the front or rear
pages) tires, either solid or liquid, must be added to MF,
MR and MT.
BF Mass of front mounted Manual of
equipment or front moun- the equip- 3. In case of an unbalanced trailer, the value c is the
ted ballast ment or to distance between the centre of the rear axle and
measure the hitching point, the value d is 0, and BR is the
BR Mass of rear mounted Manual of vertical load of the trailer on the hitch.
equipment or rear moun- the equip-
ted ballast ment or to
measure
MPT Maximum permissible This
max mass of the laden tractor manual
MPF Maximum permissible This
max front axle load manual
MPR Maximum permissible rear This
max axle load manual
1--34
CONSTANT PARAMETERS
0.2 Minimum ratio: actually Legal re-

axle load of laden front quirement
axle/mass of the unladen
tractor
0.45 Minimum ratio: actually Legal re-
axle load of laden rear quirement
axle/mass of the unladen
tractor
REQUIRED FRONT BALLAST
TO CALCULATE
BFr Ballast required at the front when carry-
ing a load BR at the rear
CALCULATION OF BFr
MT*e = MF * b
e = (MF * b) / MT
BR*(c+d) -- (MT * e)+(MPF * b) = BFr * (a+b)
MPF > 0.2* MT
MPF value must be higher than 0.2*MT
BFr >[ BR*(c+d)--(MF*b)+(0.2*MT*b)] / (a+b)
14
REQUIRED REAR BALLAST
TO CALCULATE
BRr Ballast required at the rear when carry-
ing a load BF at the front
CALCULATION OF BRr
MT*b (b--e) = MR * b
BF*a -- MT * (b--e) + (MPR*b) = BRr *
(b+c+d)
MPR > 0.45* MT
MPR value must be higher than 0.45*MT
BRr > [(BF*a) -- (MR *b)+(0.45 * MT *
b)]/(b+c+d)
1--35
AXLE LOAD LIMITS
TO CALCULATE
MPF MPF < MPF max
MPR MPR < MPR max
MPT MPT < MPT max
CALCULATION OF MPF
(MPF*B) -- BF*(A + B) -- (MT*E) + BR*(C + D)
MPF = [BF * (a+b) + (MF*b) -- BR*(c+d)]/b <
MPF max
CALCULATION OF MPT
MPT = BF + MT + BR < MPTmax
CALCULATION OF MPR
MRT = MPT -- MPF < MPR max
MF Front axle load unladen This

tractor manual
15
1--36
PROTECTION OFFERED BY THE TRACTOR CAB
COMFORT AND SAFETY INSIDE THE CAB protection, a partial protection can be achieved by
following some basic rules:
Definition of Cab Category 1  Keep doors, windows and hatches closed during
Cab is meeting the requirements defined in EN the spraying operation
15695--1. This means that the air delivery and filtra-
tion system does not provide a specified level of pro-
tection against hazardous substances but only from  Keep the cab interior clean
external atmospheric conditions (e.g. rain, wind,
snow .. etc)
 Do not enter the cab with contaminated shoes
Definition of Cab Category 2 and/or clothing
Cab is meeting the requirements defined in EN
15695--1. This means that the air delivery and filtra-
 Keep all used personal protective equipment
tion system provides protection against dust and that
outside the cab
the minimum differential pressure. Necessary
filtered fresh air flow rate can be obtained using A/C
system and adjusting the maximum fan speed,
 Bring the wire harness of the remote sprayer
provided that doors, windows and hatches are
control box into the tractor cab
closed and recirculation device is deactivated
 Remove the outside air delivery cab filter after

the spraying operation and store it in a dry, dust
CAUTION free room, and reserve it for a next spraying oper-
ation; replace with a service part filter.
The cab category 1 does not guarantee a full protec-
tion against dust, aerosols and vapours. The cab cat-  Active carbon filters must be properly stored in a
egory 2 cab is offering protection against dust but sealed plastic bag to preserve their functionality.
only partially from aerosols and vapours; for applica-
tion of plant protection products (e.g. pesticides, fun-
gicides, herbicides.....), please refer to the instruc-  Use only genuine CNH filters and ensure that the
tions provided by the supplier of the chemical agent filter is correctly installed.
as well as instructions provided by the sprayer’s
manufacturer.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) must be used  Check the condition of the sealing material and
when specified by these instructions, also when have it repaired when required.
being inside the cab as well as for tractors without a
cab
Although the air delivery system cannot offer a full
1--37
ROPS, FOPS, OPS PROTECTION
ROPS (roll over protection system)

This tractor is provided with a ROPS cab, offering these conditions, the tractor may roll over earlier
protection against roll over related hazards, all the than expected
same please consider the following:
CAUTION
 Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of terrain
WARNING
gradient and stability as outlined further in this The Protective Structure is a special safety
manual. Using the tractor beyond these limits component of your machine.
may result in a roll over or a tip over. Observe the
recommendations in this manual when going DO NOT attach any device to the Protective
down steep hills in a loaded condition Structure for pulling purposes. DO NOT drill holes to
the Protective Structure.
 Do not use the tractor near or on soft verges of
canals and brooks or banks and verges that are The Protective Structure and interconnecting
undermined by rodents. The tractor may sink components are a certified system. Any damage,
sideways and roll over. fire, corrosion or modification will weaken the
 Do not use the tractor on unstable bridge heads structure and reduce your protection. If this occurs,
and poor bridge floors. These constructions may the Protective Structure MUST be replaced so
collapse and cause roll over of the tractor. Al- that it will provide the same protection as a new
ways inspect the condition and carrying capacity Protective Structure. Contact your dealer for
of bridges and ramps prior to crossing. Protective Structure inspection and replacement.
 Do not use the tractor without wearing the seat After an accident, fire, tip or roll over, the following
restraint system (seat belt) during activities MUST be performed by a qualified technician before
where roll over or tip over hazards exist. The returning the machine to field or job site operation.
ROPS cab or ROPS structure will only be fully ef-
fective when the driver remains attached to his  The Protective Structure MUST be replaced.
seat  The mounting or suspension for the Protective
 Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of dynam- Structure, operator seat and suspension, seat
ic stability. High speed, abrupt manoeuvres and belts and mounting components and wiring
fast and tight cornering will increase the risk of within the operator’s protective system MUST be
roll over. carefully inspected for damage.
 Do not use the tractor for pulling work, in cases
 All damaged parts MUST be replaced.
where you do not know whether the load will
yield, for instance when pulling stumps. The DO NOT WELD, DRILL HOLES, ATTEMPT TO
tractor may flip over backwards when the stump STRAIGHTEN OR REPAIR THE PROTECTIVE
is not yielding STRUCTURE. MODIFICATION IN ANY WAY CAN
 Be extremely cautious when working with the REDUCE THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF
tractor on forage silos without side concrete THE STRUCTURE WHICH COULD CAUSE
walls. Dual wheels or a wide track setting may DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN THE EVENT OF
improve the sideways stability of the tractor. FIRE, TIP, ROLL OVER, COLLISION OR
 Be cautious that the centre of gravity of the tract- ACCIDENT.
or may increase when loads on the front end
loader or the three point linkage are raised. In
1--38
FOPS (FALLING OBJECTS PROTECTION GENERAL PRECAUTIONS TO BE FOL-

SYSTEM) LOWED WHEN WORKING WITH A FRONT--
FOPS certified cab is providing protection against END LOADER
falling objects according to OECD code 10 standard; WARNING
it is recommended to use a certified FOPS structure
 Do not allow bystanders in the manoeuvring
when working with front--end loaders or in forestry
zone of the tractor equipped with a front--end
applications; a cab not FOPS certified is offering
loader. Do not allow bystanders to stand near or
insufficient protection against falling rocks, bricks or
under the lifted bucket of a front – end loader
pieces of concrete.
 Do not use the front – end loader as a lift for per-
sons for activities that must be done at a certain
FOPS level on your tractor cab is certified according height. (e.g. cleaning gutters)
to OECD Code 10.  Do not use the front – end loader in an area with
overhead power lines. In case of contact with
overhead power lines, jump from the tractor
without making instant contact between tractor
and ground. When possible, disconnect the
power lines from the grounds
INSTALLATION AND WORKING WITH
FRONT--END LOADER ON TRACTORS
EQUIPPED WITH CAB
CAUTION
OPS (objects--penetrating--system)
Do not use the front – end loader, without taking pre- This tractor is not provided with OPS structure;
cautions against falling objects. please carefully read the following important inform-
ation especially when working in a forestry environ-
Please consider following precautions when working ment.
with a front end loader:
 Do not lift the front – end loader to a height from
which objects may fall or roll on the driver.
 Always use the correct attachment (grab forks,
buckets.. etc) for the specific task to ensure that FORESTRY APPLICATIONS
the load is securely kept in place.
 It is recommended to install a front – end loader WARNING
with a parallel guidance system and use it all the This tractor is not designed for heavy forestry
time; this system will ensure that the load in the applications; usage is prohibited unless a certified
bucket will remain horizontal, regardless of the FORESTRY KIT is installed; contact your dealer to
height of the lifting booms. verify whether a forestry kit exists for this tractor
model. Only a forestry specific kit will provide
necessary protection against falling trees and
penetrating objects (OPS).
Protection against penetrating objects (OPS) can be
obtained with additional grid--guard protection
installed on the tubular structure; contact your dealer
to check whether an OPS certified KIT exists.
1--39
INTENDED USE OF YOUR TRACTOR  Do not use equipment mounted on the tractor
which is not correctly matching and firmly fixed.
WARNING
Such equipment may increase the risk for roll
Your tractor is designed according to European over and hit the tractor when coming loose.
directives related to health and safety risks; though Ensure that the dimensions of the three – point
it has been designed to minimize all the potential linkage interface of both the tractor and the equi-
pment are matching according to the categories
risks it is mandatory to carefully read, understand
defined in ISO 730. Ensure that the dimensions
and observe all the decals and labels of the PPP and speed of the PTO shaft on the tractors are
(Plant Protection Product) and to always refer to matching those of the equipment.
information and descriptions outlined in this manual  Do not use the tractor in combination with equi-
to prevent all residual potential risks . In case you pment, without having consulted the specific
may need further assistance please do not hesitate Operator’s Manual provided with the equipment.
The tractor is a universal tool to carry, tow and
to contact your dealer.
drive a variety of equipment. This manual alone
cannot provide you with all the information requi-
red for the safe operation of the combination.
Your tractor is designed and made to pull, to carry
and to power a variety of mounted or towed  Do not use the tractor for pulling work, in cases
equipment, although within some physical limits. The where you do not know whether the load will
working speed and performance may depend on a yield, for instance when pulling stumps; the trac-
number of various parameters, such as weather and tor may flip over when the stump is not yielding.
terrain conditions. Though the tractor is designed to  Be cautious that the centre of gravity of the trac-
perform in combination with a variety of equipment, tor may increase when loads on the front – end
there may be a number of combinations of above loader or the three point linkage are raised. In
parameters, for which there is severe degradation of these conditions, the tractor may roll over earlier
performance of the tractor and/or its mounted or than expected.
trailed equipment. If you notice degradation of  Do not step down from the tractor without shut-
performance, contact your dealer for assistance, he ting down the PTO, shifting the transmission to
may have useful information for improvements, or a park or neutral and applying the park brake,
kit may be available to enhance the performance. unless continued PTO operation is required for
some equipment, such as pumps or wood chip-
Please carefully read and consider following
pers. The latter equipment may have an emer-
precautions:
gency stop device on the equipment itself, as
 Do not use the tractor for another purpose other human intervention is needed during operation.
than that intended by the manufacturer and outli- But other equipment, engaged and driven by the
ned in this manual tractor will have no means to stop the power tran-
 Do not use the tractor beyond its limits of terrain smission, other than the PTO clutch of the
gradient and stability. Using the tractor beyond tractor.
these limits may result in roll over or tip over.  You shall take the necessary precautions (e.g.
Observe the recommendations in this manual. assistance) to always be aware of the possible
 Do not use the tractor on higher speeds than allo- presence of bystanders, certainly when manoeu-
wed by the load and the environment. A wet sur- vring in confined areas, such as the farm yard
face or other low adherence conditions may and sheds.
increase the braking distance or result in vehicle Keep people away from the tractor during work.
instability. Always adapt your traveling speed Ask bystanders to leave the field. There is not
according to the load of the vehicle and the cha- only the risk to be overrun by the tractor, but
racteristics of the road objects ejected by some equipment mounted on
 Do not use the tractor near or on soft verges of the tractor, such as a rotary mower, may cause
canals and brooks or banks and verges that are harm. Stones may be thrown further than the
undermined by rodents. The tractor may sink mowed crop. Pay the necessary attention while
sideways and roll over. operating next to public roads or footpaths.
Thrown objects can get projected outside the
 Do not use the tractor on brittle bridge – heads
and poor bridge floors. These constructions may field and hit unprotected people like bikers or
collapse and cause roll over of the tractor. Al- pedestrians. Wait to cut the edge of the field till
ways inspect the condition and carrying capacity it is clear of bystanders
of bridges and ramps prior to crossing.
1--40
INSTRUCTOR’S SEAT
The extra seat provided in the cab of the tractor is
installed in order to allow only a trainer or a trainee
to be seated safely while teaching a new Operator or
by dealer personnel when monitoring the function of
the tractor. It is not meant for road transportation of
a passenger.
WARNING
The instructor’s seat is not intended for use in trans-
ferring passengers between fields, or during opera-
tion in the field. While a passenger is seated, the dri-
ver’s view to the left will be significantly obstructed.
A passenger must not be allowed in the tractor in
conditions where roll–over hazards may occur, as
the ROPS may not provide sufficient protection for
the occupant of the seat.
1--41
ABOUT THIS MANUAL Routine service

This manual gives information for use of your  Routine service and maintenance means activi-
machine, as intended and under the conditions ties that must be done daily by an operator fami-
foreseen by the manufacturer during normal operat liar with the tractor characteristics and complying
ion and routine service and maintenance. with the information for routine service and safe
practices, as specified by the manufacturer in
Read and understand; keep it in good condition and this manual and by decals on the tractor, in order
always safely store it in the provided pocket in the to maintain its proper function.
back of your seat for later easy retrieval. Routine service includes activities such as
fueling, cleaning, washing, topping up fluid
This manual does not contain all the information levels, greasing, replacing of consumable arti-
related to periodical service, converting and repairs cles such as lamp bulbs.
to be carried out by professional service personnel.
The Table of Contents page(s) are provided to have
an overview of main manual’s topics. A detailed
alphabetic index is available at the end of this manual Converting, periodical service and repair
for locating specific items.
 Periodical service means activities that must be
done at defined intervals by trained personnel
familiar with the tractor characteristics and which
are complying with the information for periodical
Normal operation service and safe practices, as partly specified by
the manufacturer in this manual and in other
 Normal operation means the use of the tractor for
the purpose intended by the manufacturer by an Company literature, in order to maintain the
expected life time of the tractor.
operator familiar with the tractor and the moun-
ted or towed equipment and complying with the  Converting means activities that must be done
information for operation and safe practices, as by professional service personnel familiar with
specified by the manufacturer in this manual and the tractor characteristics and complying with the
by the decals on the tractor and the equipment. information for converting, as partly specified by
the manufacturer in this manual, in assembly
 Normal operation includes the preparation and
instructions or in other Company literature, in
storage of the tractor, swinging components into
order to fit the tractor to a specific configuration.
work position and vice versa, adding or removing
ballast and picking up and setting off attach-  Repair means activities that must be done by
ments. professional service personnel only familiar with
the tractor characteristics and complying with the
 Normal operation includes the adjustment and
setting of the tractor and equipment, for the spe- information for repair, as specified by the manu-
facturer in the dealer’s workshop manual, in
cific condition of the field and/or the crop.
order to restore the proper function of the tractor
after a failure or degradation of performance.
1--42
SECTION 2
CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
BEFORE OPERATING PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
CAUTION Your tractor is equipped with CAN BUS (Controlled

Before driving or operating the tractor, study the Area Network), a system that utilises electronic
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual. memory facilities to programme and control various
operating functions. An operating memory
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
Read this section thoroughly. It details the location while operating the tractor and these are transferred
and operation of the various instruments, switches to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
and controls on your tractor. Even if you operate
other tractors, you should thoroughly read this If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
section of the manual and ensure that you are is being transferred between the operating and main
familiar with the location and function of all the memories, some of the data may be lost or
features of the tractor. corrupted.
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate If changes have been made to any memorised
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the settings while operating the tractor, pause for five
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is seconds between key--off and key--on to provide
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of sufficient time for the data to transfer between the
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. operating memory and the main memory. Once
transferred, the new settings will remain unchanged
Pay particular attention to the recommendations for until they are re--programmed.
running-in to ensure that your tractor will give the
long and dependable service for which it was Subject Page
designed.
Cab 2--4
This section is split into various subjects, as follows.
Where a feature requires setting up and running Electrical Power Sockets 2--20
adjustments in the field, detailed instructions will be
found in Section 3, Field Operation. Instructions for Seats 2--24
the operation of various optional accessories will be
found in Section 6. Steering Column Controls 2--32
Lubrication and maintenance requirements will be Analogue/Digital Instruments 2--36

found in Section 4. Tractor specifications are listed in
Section 7. Enhanced Keypad 2--42
Brake Controls and Operation 2--88

A comprehensive index is provided at the end of this
manual.
Power Command Transmission 2--94
Differential Lock and Four Wheel Drive 2--119
Front Axle Suspension 2--123
2--1
SECTION 2 -- CONTROLS, INSTRUMENTS AND OPERATION
SWITCH PANELS
16
Your tractor is equipped with a number of electronic NOTE: The number and location of the switches
control switches located on the right--hand side of the within these panels may change depending on
cab. Depending on the options fitted to your tractor, country and tractor specification.
some of these switches may have more than one
function.
A full explanation of individual switch operation can

be found in the relevant sections of this manual.
Right--Hand Control Console 5. 4WD Auto or Manual engagement
1. Auto Transmission Operation 6. Rear axle differential lock, Auto or Manual

or engagement
Auto Transmission and Cal Select
or 7. Creeper gear engagement
Cal Select function only
8. Engine Speed Management r.p.m. adjustment
2. Auto/Manual HTS selector
9. Engine Speed Management programme switch
3. HTS record switch
10. Front axle suspension lock
4. Fast Steer engagement
or 11. Not used
Autoguide functions
2--2
ADDITIONAL SWITCH PANELS
Right--Hand Cab ’C’ Pillar
1. EHR valve lock
2. EHR valve front/rear selector
3. Hydraulic top link adjust
4. Hydraulic lift rod adjust
5. External mirror heater control
6. Electronic battery isolator
17
Cab Roof, Right--Hand Side
1. Hood mounted worklights
2. Grab rail worklights
3. Roof mounted worklights (front)
4. Rotating beacon switch
5. Roof mounted worklights (rear)
6. Rear pillar or fender mounted worklights
18
2--3
CAB
Introduction
The cab has been designed for operator protection,

comfort and convenience. Inside, the frame, roof,
and floor are insulated to reduce noise to a minimum.
Two wide opening doors permit entry to the cab from

either side, aided by convenient grab handles and
footsteps with anti-slip treads. The doors and rear
window are fitted with gas struts to hold them in the fully
open position. Additionally, the rear window may be
retained in the partially open position for increased
ventilation during operation.
19
The cab features include a fresh air heater/defroster
with recirculation, air conditioning, sun visor, tinted
glass, interior light, auxiliary power socket, storage
facilities, interior/exterior rear view mirrors and a choice
of comfortable seats.
Options include automatic climate control, high visibility

roof panel, radio cassette, CD player, rear windscreen
wash/wipe and electrically operated external rear view
mirrors.
External Door Handle
Each door has an external handle with a push button

(1). The door may be locked from the outside using
the key provided. Insert the key and rotate clockwise
a half turn to lock.
20
Interior Door Handle
To open a door from inside the cab, squeeze up the

trigger (2) on the underside of the grab handle (1).
Use the grab handle to push the door open.
21
2--4
Entering and Exiting the Cab
Wherever possible, the cab should be entered from

the left side.
CAUTION
When entering the cab from the right-hand side, use
only the grab handles to assist in climbing the steps.
If the gear levers are grasped inadvertently, a tractor
runaway may result.
To enter the cab, face the door, then open it. Place
one foot on the lowest step plate and, using the grab
handles on the ‘A’ post and inside the door, climb the
steps and enter the cab. 22
Sit in the seat and, where necessary, adjust the seat

controls to provide a comfortable working position.
Fasten the seat belt.
To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,
grasp the grab handles, back out of the cab and
descend the steps using the grab handles.
Rear Window
The rear window may be locked in the closed position

or retained in the partially open or fully open
positions.
To open the window, lift the central locking handle (1)

up to the vertical position. Allow the window to open
a little then push the handle down so that the locking
tongue engages the slot (2) in the framework.
Alternatively, the window may be allowed to swing
fully open supported by two gas-filled struts.
IMPORTANT: Retain control of the window when

opening it fully. Do not allow it to swing open freely. 23
Using the grab handle, pull the window closed and

push the handle down to lock the window.
2--5
High Visibility Roof Panel
The high visibility roof panel provides the operator

with a view to the bucket or grab when the loader is
in the raised position.
For extra ventilation the roof panel may be opened

in one of three ways. Using the grab handles (1),
push up at the front or rear to angle the panel or,
alternatively, push up in the centre of the grab
handles to fully open the panel.
To close the panel, grasp both handles and pull the

panel down, the spring action of the handles will hold 24
the panel in the closed position.
NOTE: When transporting the tractor on a truck or

trailer at speeds above 50 K/mh (31 MPH) ensure the
roof panel is secured to prevent accidental opening.
See page 3--3 for more information.
A sliding panel may be adjusted to reduce glare or

can be fully closed if required.
25
2--6
Front Screen Sun Visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
26
Rear Screen Sun Visor
Pull down the sun visor (1) to protect the driver’s eyes
from the glare of the sun. The visor will remain in the
chosen position. Push the visor up to retract.
27
2--7
External Rear View Mirrors
With extending arm
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best

rearward view. When the knob (1) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended, as shown. This
feature will be beneficial when towing wide trailers or
equipment. To adjust the angle of the mirror head,
loosen the knob (2). Ensure both knobs are fully
tightened when the mirror is correctly positioned.
The mirror arm may be swivelled forward to clear
obstructions if necessary.
28
With Power adjustment
With the optional power adjust mirrors the position of

the mirror head may be adjusted electrically.
Select the mirror to be adjusted by moving the switch

(1) to the left or right. Then, using the 4--way control
(2) move it sideways to adjust the lateral view or up
and down to adjust the vertical position.
With the selector switch (1) in the mid position the

power adjustment function will be de--activated.
29
Move the mirror arm, as required, to obtain the best
rearward view. When the knob (2) is loosened, the
telescopic arm may be extended or retracted.
To make initial adjustment to the vertical position of

the mirror assembly, remove the four self--tapping
screws and take off the rear cover.
Loosen the clamp screws (1), re--position the mirror

head and re--tighten the screws. Replace the cover.
30
The power adjust mirrors are also electrically heated.
Momentarily depress the switch to turn on the
heating element. The mirror heater will automatically
switch off after 12--14 minutes.
31
2--8
Interior Light
The interior light, 2, has three operating positions.

Depress the left hand side and the light will remain
on, depress the right hand side and the light will
illuminate when either of the doors are opened.
When the switch is in the central position, the light is

off, irrespective of the position of the doors.
The step light (1) operates in conjunction with the

interior light. This light provides illumination of the
step area when the door is opened.
32
Console Light
The light (1) provides a soft glow to the gear levers

and hydraulic console. The light is illuminated when
the tractor lights are turned on.
33
2--9
Cab Climate Controls
Heater Temperature Control
Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase the

temperature of the air from the heater. Turn fully
anti-clockwise to obtain unheated air from the heater
vents.
Blower Control
A 4-speed blower is installed for the heater (and air

conditioner, where fitted). Turn the switch (1)
clockwise to the first position for low speed. Further 34
rotation of the switch in a clockwise direction will
increase the fan speed.
With the windows closed, the blower may be used to

pressurise the cab to exclude dust etc. Provided that
the cab air filters are serviced correctly, maximum
pressurisation and optimum dust exclusion may be
achieved by operating the blower at maximum fan
speed.
Adjustable Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are provided throughout the cab

for even distribution of heated or cooled air. Vents are
located each side of the operators seat and on the
instrument console. Each vent may be
independently adjusted to direct the air flow (with the
blower control actuated) onto the side windows or the
operator. The two vents located on the upper part of
the instrument console may be adjusted to demist
the windscreen.
To open the circular vents (1) each side of the

instrument console, press one side of the disc and 35
then turn it, as required, to direct the air flow.
Lift the tag on the rectangular vents to open, and then

adjust for air flow and direction as required.
2--10
Air Conditioner Switch
Depress the switch (3), to activate the air conditioner

compressor and lower the temperature of the air
within the cab. The air conditioner will only operate
with the blower (1) switched on.
IMPORTANT: The air conditioning system uses

R134A refrigerant. Do not mix with other refrigerants.
To quickly reduce in cab temperature operate the air

conditioner with the blower speed set to maximum
and the heater control fully off. When the air has
cooled sufficiently, adjust the blower control to
maintain the desired temperature. The windows and
doors should remain closed.
36
Under certain conditions, it may be desirable to
operate both the air conditioner and heater together,
e.g. to demist the windscreen and interior door glass
on a cold morning. (The air conditioner, as well as
cooling, also removes moisture from the air).
Run the engine to normal operating temperature,

turn the heater temperature control (2) and blower
control (1) to the maximum settings (fully clockwise).
Turn on the air conditioner (3) and adjust the air vents
to direct the air flow, as required.
When the windows are clear, turn the air conditioner

off and adjust the heater controls to maintain the
desired cab air temperature.
IMPORTANT: Run the engine at idle speed for at

least 3 minutes after switching on the air conditioner,
if the air conditioner has been out of use for more
than 30 days.
2--11
IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner off

when cooled or de-humified air is not required. For
proper operation of the air conditioner, ensure that the
cab air filters are serviced regularly. See section 4.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12 C (10 F).
 Never expose any part of the air conditioner

system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
 Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the

air conditioner system. Escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
 If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the

same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38 C
(90 --100 F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
 If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the

eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. Consult a doctor immediately.
NOTE: It is the normal function of the air conditioner

to extract water from the air. Drain hoses lead from
the air conditioner unit to a point beneath the cab. Do
not be concerned if a pool of water collects beneath
the drain hose outlets when the engine is stopped.
2--12
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

(where fitted)
Automatic Control
With Automatic Temperature Control the operator

can set the temperature inside the cab to maintain a
comfortable working environment. By automatically
adjusting the output of the heating and air
conditioning systems, ATC will provide a stable cab
temperature between 16 C (61 F) and 29 C (84
F).
The blower control switch (1) has five positions, off,

ATC and three blower speeds. With ATC selected
the speed of the blower fan is controlled
automatically.
To set the cab interior temperature, align the mark on 37

the control knob (2) with the desired figure. If
required, the control can be set to the intermediate
positions between the figures to provide additional
temperature levels.
If the temperature in the cab remains within 1.1 C (2

F) of that set on the control, the blower fan will
maintain a low speed. As the differential between the
control setting and the in cab temperature increases,
the blower speed will be raised to re--stabilise the
temperature.
Selecting ’HI’ or ’LO’ on the temperature control will

override the automatic system to provide a maximum
heating or cooling effect.
Manual Control
To manually set the cab temperature, switch the

blower control to position I, II or III and select a
suitable setting on the temperature control. This will
disable the ATC function.
Although the in cab temperature will be maintained

within limits, it will not be as efficient as ATC.
Switching to ’LO’ will provide maximum air
conditioning output with temperature adjustment
through the blower control only.
2--13
Economy and Defrost Switch
The economy and defrost switch has three positions:

1. Left side depressed. ECONomy mode on, air
conditioner off.
2. Central position. ECON and MAX DEF off, air
conditioner on.
3. Right side depressed. MAX DEFrost on.
When the external air temperature is low, operating

the air conditioner may not be necessary to maintain
a constant temperature inside the cab. To turn off the
air conditioner, depress the ECON side of the switch. 38
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor uses engine

horespower to drive it. Turning off the air conditioner
when not required will aid fuel economy.
The cab temperature will be maintained within the

specified limits unless the external air temperature
rises above that set on the control. Should this occur,
select the central switch position to turn on the air
conditioner.
In very cold conditions where the outside of the cab

windows become covered in ice, depress the MAX
DEF side of the switch. This will automatically set the
heater temperature to maximum, activate the air
conditioner (if not already switched on), and select
the highest speed setting on the blower fan.
This function may also be used to clear heavy misting

on the inside of the cab windows.
2--14
Air Recirculation
The cab ventilation system has three filters, two

external filters through which fresh air is drawn into
the cab, and one internal air re--circulation filter (2).
Move the slider control (1) fully to the right for
maximum air re--circulation.
WARNING
The cab air filter is designed to remove dust from the
air but will not exclude chemical vapour. Follow the
chemical manufacturer’s directions regarding
protection from hazardous chemicals.
39
Cab Air Filters
When operating in conditions where chemical

vapours may be present, the external cab air filters
(2) may be replaced with carbonised filters to help
reduce the ingress of some chemical vapours.
Consult your authorised dealer.
CAUTION
Use only genuine New Holland filter elements when
renewing cab air filters. When replacing used filters,
follow local regulations in the disposal of
contaminated elements.
40
Safety Precautions
Although it is possible to pressurise the cab interior

to reduce ingress of chemical vapour, the
recommended safety procedures, as stipulated by
the chemical manufacturer, should be observed at all
times.
Protective clothing worn when filling the sprayer with

pesticides or when carrying out external
adjustments, should be removed and stored away
carefully before re--entering the tractor cab.
To prevent build--up of chemical residue inside the

cab, the interior trim and floor covering should be
wiped clean with a damp cloth on a regular basis.
2--15
Cab Pressurisation Monitor

(where fitted)
To help reduce the amount of dust and chemical

vapours entering the cab, the blower can be used to
raise the air pressure inside the cab above that of the
external air pressure. Ensure all cab apertures are
fully closed. To monitor the internal pressure, a
gauge is mounted inside the cab.
Cab Air Pressurisation Gauge
Observe the reading on the pressure gauge. If the

lower edge (1) of the yellow indicator centres in the
green area you have an adequate differential
between the internal and external air pressure.
Adjust the blower speed to maintain that reading. If
the yellow indicator rises into the red area, increase
blower speed to raise the internal cab pressure.
CAUTION
If the lower edge of the yellow indicator enters the red
section of the gauge, carry out the checks below for
safe operation. 41
With the blower in the off position the yellow indicator

should move into the red area. If the indicator does
not register correctly, the gauge should be replaced.
If the blower is unable to maintain the correct

pressure inside the cab then the following checks
should be made to determine the cause.
1. Check blower is on maximum speed.

NOTE: If Automatic Temperature Control is
activated it may be necessary to switch to manual
control to increase blower speed.
2. Ensure all doors, windows and roof panel are
fully closed.
3. Check external air filters for blockage or
restriction.
4. Examine all cab aperture seals for damage.
5. Check sealing around linkages and levers where
they pass through the cab panels.
If, after all the checks have been made the cab
interior pressure cannot be maintained, consult your
authorised dealer.
2--16
Radio/Cassette/CD Player
(where fitted)
The cab is pre-wired and has two speakers installed

in the roof (four speakers are available as a dealer
installed accessory). A choice of AM/FM stereo
radio/cassette or AM/FM stereo radio/CD players (1)
are also available as a dealer installed accessory.
Separate operating instructions will be supplied with
the radio.
NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-start

switch in the on or accessories position.
42
WARNING
Ensure the aerial is positioned so it cannot touch
overhead power lines.
If the aerial is removed from the tractor, do not use

tools to tighten the aerial when re--fitting, hand
tighten only. The design of the aerial mast and base
will ensure a self tightening action is applied once the
mast has been attached to the base.
Work Lamp and Beacon Switch Panel
NOTE: The work lamps will only operate with the

tractor lights switched on.
The switches are located on a panel mounted in the

roof console (1). Individual switches control the front
and rear work lamps and the rotating beacon (see
accessories section). Depress the switches once to
illuminate, depress again to turn the lamps off.
When the key-start switch is turned on, the switches

will be internally illuminated. The light intensity will
increase as each switch is activated.
43
2--17
Mobile Telephone Usage
A storage bracket (1) is provided on the left--hand

cab ’C’ pillar for a mobile telephone. Auxiliary power
for the telephone may be taken from the cigarette
lighter socket above.
44
Implement Monitor Installation
To facilitate installation of an implement monitor, two

mounting points are provided:
To meet SAE standards, captive bolts (1), protected

by plastic covers, are provided on the the right-hand
cab ’C’ pillar.
It is recommended that a bracket be screwed to the

‘C’ pillar to mount the monitor. A suitable bracket is
available from your authorised dealer.
45
An alternative monitor mounting position (1) is

provided on the inner face of the right-hand ‘A’ pillar.
46
2--18
Cable and Harness Routing
So the operating cable from the monitor may be

conveniently routed to the equipment, a small
aperture is provided in the filler plate each side of the
lower rear window frame. By making a small incision
in the rubber at (1), cables or wiring can be easily
routed through the filler plate.
47
In Cab Storage (where fitted)
A storage box with a hinged lid (1) is located on the

left-hand side of the cab. The lid also incorporates a
drinks holder.
NOTE: The storage box is not available on tractors

equipped with an instructional seat.
A recessed tray (2) is provided to the rear of the

storage box to hold small tools, oddments, etc.
48
Cup Holder
A cup holder may fitted to the right--hand arm rest on

the operator’s seat.
CAUTION
Care should be taken if cups containing hot liquids
are placed in the holder when operating on
undulating surfaces or when leaving the seat as the
liquid could spill.
49
2--19
ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTORS
INTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS
Depending on tractor specification there are a

number of electrical power connectors provided for
various applications. These are as follows:
1. 8 amp. Screw terminals. Connect power wires to

the red terminal (positive), connect ground wires
(earth) to the black terminal (negative).
7 Pole Din/ISO implement socket (with radar option

only) provides the information below.
50
Pin 1. True ground speed. (Radar Sensed)
Pin 2. Theoretical ground speed.
(Wheel Sensed)
Pin 3. Rear P.T.O. speed.
Pin 4. Rear 3--point hitch, in work/out of work.
Pin 5. Not used
Pin 6. 5 amp. power supply.
Pin 7. Common ground connection.
2. ISO/JD implement power socket. Provides

constant and key--start switched live feeds,
Figure 50.
Rating. 51
With round pins -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square pins -- 30 amps (North America).
3. Auxiliary power socket for mobile telephone or

cooler box (where fitted). This socket may also
be used with a cigarette lighter as shown, consult
your authorised dealer.
4. 8 amp Single pole auxiliary power socket. Live

with key--start in ’on’ position.
IMPORTANT: To ensure that the screw terminals

and connecting cables do not get excessively hot
when loaded with near maximum current it is
important to make secure, tight connections to
prevent overheating and damage. Ensure that
equipment is connected to the terminals with cables
of suitable gauge and insulation thickness and fitted 52
with appropriate terminal connectors.
2--20
Multi--Pin Diagnostic Sockets
Your tractor is fitted with two diagnostic sockets (1)

on the rear trim panel behind the seat and on the right
C--pillar.
WARNING
For Dealer use only. The sockets are provided for
dealers to connect diagnostic equipment to the
tractor electrical control systems. Any attempt to
connect other equipment to the diagnostic sockets
may cause damage to the tractor electrical system
or its components.
53
54
2--21
EXTERNAL POWER CONNECTORS
Three Pin Implement Socket (all locations)

A 3-pin socket (1) is standard on all tractors with cab
and is located at the rear of the tractor.
Rating.
With round pins -- 25 amps (Europe).
With square pins -- 30 amps (North America).
NOTE: The Operator should be aware that the screw

terminals (4) Figure 50, share the same fuse as the
3--pin socket. Therefore, the combined output of the
3-pin socket and the screw terminals is limited to the
amperage shown above (25 or 30 amps).
55
Beacon Power Socket
Two power sockets for the rotating beacon are

provided at the rear of the cab, one on each side.
56
ISO Connector (where fitted)
Implements equipped with an ISO standard

electronic control unit/s can be connected to the
Colour Display via the multi--pin ISO connectors.
The ISO connector permits information to be

comunicated between implement and tractor.
57
2--22
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(except North America)
A standard 7-pin trailer lighting socket (1), is provided
and is mounted at the rear of the tractor. With
reference to the picture inset, the socket connections
(viewed from the front of the socket) are as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
2. Not Used --
3. White Earth (Ground)
4. Green R.H. Turn Signal
5. Black R.H. Parking Light
6. Red Brake Lights
7. Brown L.H. Parking Light
58
Seven Pin Electrical Power Outlet

(North America only)
A standard SAE 7-pin connector (1) is provided, to
operate the electrical system on implements and
trailers. With reference to the picture inset, the pin
connections (viewed from the front of the socket) are
as follows:
Pin
No. Wire Colour Circuit
1. White Earth (Ground)
2. Black R.H. Parking Light
3. Yellow L.H. Turn Signal
4. Red Brake Lights
5. Green R.H. Turn Signal
6. Brown L.H. Parking Light
7. Not Used --
59
2--23
SEATS
Various air suspension seat options are available for

your tractor. Whichever seat is installed, you will find
that it has a comprehensive range of adjustments.
NOTE: Depending on model specification, some

seat functions may not be avaiable on the seat fitted
to your tractor.
Before operating the tractor, it is important to adjust

the seat to the most comfortable position. Seat
adjusters are colour coded grey. See the following
text and illustrations for details.
AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made while

sitting in the seat.
Storage pocket
A pocket for storing documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat.
60
Height/weight adjustment
The standard air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Lift the lever (1) and a compressor will
raise the seat. When the lever is released the seat
will stop at the height selected. Push the lever down
to release air and lower the seat.
Backrest adjustment
Lift the lever (2) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The 61
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
2--24
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (1) and move the seat
forward or backward, as required. The seat will lock
in position when the lever is released.
Swivel adjustment
To aid observation to the rear of the tractor, the seat

may be allowed to swivel. Adjustment is available as
follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions 14 or 21 to the left

of centre. 62
b) Lock in one of three positions at 7, 14 and 21

to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (2), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Armrest adjustments
The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

provide a comfortable operating height. To adjust the
height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the
armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob
securely.
Rotate the knurled wheel (2) on the underside of the

left--hand armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest.
When not required, the armrest may be lifted to the
vertical position.
63
The left--hand armrest may also be adjusted for
height by loosening the two clamp bolts (3). Move the
armrest to a comfortable height and re--tighten the
clamp bolts.
2--25
DELUXE AIR SUSPENSION SEAT
The deluxe air suspension seat offers a full range of

adjustments for driver comfort. Optional heating
elements in the seat cushion and backrest are
provided for additional comfort in low temperatures.
NOTE: All seat adjustments should be made with the

tractor stationary and the parking brake applied.
64
Armrest Controls
Seat height adjustment
The deluxe air suspension seat has electrically

controlled, pneumatic suspension. In order to adjust
seat height, it is necessary to turn the key-start
switch on. Press and hold the top of the rocker switch
(2) and a compressor will raise the seat. When the
switch is released the seat will stop at the height
selected. Press the bottom of the switch to release
air and lower the seat.
Heating element (where fitted)
The heating elements in the seat are controlled by a 65

two position switch (1), on the left--hand armrest.
Depressing the upper part of the switch will energise
the heat setting. Depress the lower part of the switch
to turn off. When energised, a red warning light on the
switch will illuminate. The temperature of the seat is
controlled by internal sensors within the seat.
2--26
Ride firmness selector (where fitted)
The optional Semi--Active suspension system

utilises an advanced damper system to reduce
vertical jolts and vibrations caused by operating on
rough terrain.
An electronic controller constantly monitors the

motion of the suspension and updates the damping
effect to significantly improve operator comfort.
A selector switch (3) allows the operator to choose

the most comfortable damping position consistent
with their weight and the movement of the tractor. 66
With the switch in the central position, the firmness

of the ride will suit most average conditions.
Depress the top of the switch to increase the

damping effect.
To reduce the damping effect, depress the bottom of

the switch.
Seat Controls
Cushion tilt
The angle of the seat cushion may be adjusted to

three positions. Lift the lever (1) and pull or push the
front of the seat cushion up or down, as required. The
seat cushion will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Cushion extension
To suit drivers of differing heights, the length of the

seat cushion may be adjusted by up to 60 mm (2.4
in). Lift the lever (3) and move the cushion forward or
rearward, as required. The cushion will lock in 67
position when the lever is released.
Travel adjustment
Lift the travel adjustment lever (2) and move the

complete seat forward or backward, as required. The
seat will lock in position when the lever is released.
2--27
Swivel adjustment
To facilitate observation of an implement attached to

the rear of the tractor, the seat may be allowed to
swivel. Adjustment is available as follows:
a) Lock in one of two positions 14 or 21 to the left

of centre.
b) Lock in one of three positions at 7, 14 and 21

to the right of centre.
To swivel the seat, lift the handle (4), then rotate the
seat to the required position. When the lever is 68
released, the seat will lock at the selected angle.
Backrest inclination adjustment
Lift the lever (1) on the left-hand side of the seat

frame and adjust the inclination of the backrest. The
backrest will lock in position when the lever is
released.
Travel isolator
Having selected the required fore/aft position, the

seat is permitted a limited, spring controlled, fore/aft
movement (float) if the travel isolator (2) is pulled up.
This, in conjunction with the air suspension, will
provide the optimum in ride comfort. To cancel the
float movement, push the travel isolator down while
slowly moving the seat fore and aft until the seat
locks in position.
2--28
Suspension damper
Turn the knob (3) clockwise (toward the rear) for a

softer ride. Turn anti-clockwise if a firmer ride is
required.
NOTE: The suspension damper is not fitted to

tractors with Ride Firmness control.
69
Right--hand armrest height adjustment
The right--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

height of the armrest, loosen the knob (1). Grasp the
armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the clamp knob
securely.
Shoulder support
The deluxe seat features an integrated shoulder

support (2) (upper backrest). The support may be
adjusted vertically by using the handgrip at the rear 70
of the cushion. Push down on the top of the support
to lower.
Lumbar adjustment
The seat has a built-in lumbar support actuated by a

thumb wheel (3) located at the rear of the seat on the
left--hand side.
To increase lumbar support, rotate the thumbwheel

upwards, to decrease support rotate downwards.
2--29
Left--hand armrest height adjustment
The left--hand armrest may be raised or lowered to

height of the armrest, loosen the two bolts (4). Grasp
the armrest at the front and rear then lift or lower the
complete assembly. Re--tighten the two bolts
securely.
Left--hand armrest angle adjustment
Rotate the knurled wheel (5) on the underside of

each armrest to adjust the angle of the armrest to a
comfortable position. When not required, both 71
armrests may be lifted to the vertical position.
Storage pocket
A storage pocket for documents, etc., is provided on

the back of the seat.
2--30
SEAT BELT AND OPERATOR PRESENCE

SWITCH (where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab and
retractable seat belt. Always use the seat belt when
operating the tractor. If any part of the seat belt
becomes worn or damaged it must be replaced
immeadiately.
To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and push
the tongue (1) into the buckle end (2) until a ‘click’
indicates it is properly engaged. To disengage, press 72
the red release button (3) on the buckle and remove
the tongue from the buckle.
The operator presence switch, installed beneath the

seat, is connected to an audible alarm which will
sound if the operator leaves the seat with the P.T.O.
engaged or without applying the parking brake.
INSTRUCTIONAL SEAT
(where fitted)
A folding instructional seat is available where local

legislation permits. To raise the seat backrest, lift to
the upright position. The seat will be retained in the
upright position by the gas strut (1). When not
required fold the upper part of the seat down to reveal
the drinks holder.
WARNING
Always use the seat belt when operating the tractor.
If any part of the seat belt becomes worn or damaged
it must be replaced immeadiately. 73
IMPORTANT: The fold down seat is fitted for

operator training or instructional purposes only, it is
not intended for passenger conveyance.
Passengers should not be carried in the cab at any
time.
2--31
STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS
The following text describes the use of the various

controls mounted on the steering column.
Steering Column Adjustment
The steering column on your tractor may be tilted and

telescoped. Pull the end of the clamp lever (2) up
(toward you). Move the steering column/wheel to the
most convenient position and return the clamp lever
to the fully down position to lock the steering column
assembly.
To alter the steering column height, loosen the centre

boss (1) on the steering wheel by turning
anti--clockwise. Move the steering wheel to the most
convenient position and re--tighten the centre boss.
74
IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped with
hydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steering
wheel at full left or right lock (wheels against the
steering stops) for more than 10 seconds or for more
than a total of 10 seconds in any one minute. Failure
to observe this precaution may result in damage to
steering system components.
Key-start Switch
The key-start switch activates the grid heater cold

start device, accessories and the starting motor. See
‘Starting the Engine’ in Section 3.
75
2--32
Multi-function Switch
The stalk-type switch is mounted on the left-hand

side of the steering column. The switch controls the
tractor lights, horn and turn signals.
The end of the multi--function switch rotates. With

reference to Figure 76, turn the switch away from
you, to position (2), to turn on the instrument and
position lights. Turn the switch to position (1) to select
the headlights.
With the headlights on, push the stalk away from you,
position (3), to change from dipped to high beam. Pull
the stalk toward you, position (4), to change back to 76
dipped beam. With high beam selected, the blue
indicator light on the instrument panel is illuminated.
Pull the stalk towards you, position (5), against

spring pressure, to flash the headlight high beam.
The stalk will return to the central position when
released.
Move the stalk to position (6) to operate the right turn

signals, position (7) will activate the left turn signals.
Indicator lights on the instrument panel will also flash
when the turn signals are actuated.
A warning buzzer will sound if the indicators are not

cancelled within 20 seconds when moving, or 5
minutes when stationary.
NOTE: With the optional self cancelling indicators 77

the warning buzzer is deleted.
NOTE: The turn signals will only operate with the

key-start switch turned on.
Press in the end of the stalk, position (8), to sound the

horn.
2--33
Follow You Home Lights
When leaving the tractor at night, external

illumination can be provided for a limited period by
operating the headlight flasher switch within 30
seconds of key--off. This will illuminate the dip beam
headlights and, depending on switch status, one of
the worklamps.
Each movement of the headlight flasher (5)

Figure 76, will provide 30 seconds of illumination up
to a maximum of 31/2 minutes after which the lights
will automatically extinguish.
Hazard Warning Lights Switch
Press the left-hand side of the switch (1) to operate

all the turn signals simultaneously. The switch will
flash with the turn signals.
78
2--34
Windscreen Wipe/Wash Control
The stalk-type control on the right-hand side of the

steering column controls the front and rear screen
wipe and wash functions.
With the key-start switch on, move the stalk

rearward, to position (2) and the front wiper will
operate at the slower of the two wiper speeds, move
to position (3) for the faster speed.
Press in the end of the stalk, position (1), to operate

the electric screen wash.
79
From the centre ’off’ position move the stalk

downward to position (4) for intermittent front wipe,
Move the stalk upward against spring pressure for

single sweep operation, position (3). On release, the
switch will return to the off position.
To operate the rear screen wiper, rotate the centre

collar anti--clockwise to position (1) for intermittent
rear wipe and to position (2) for rear screen wash.
The switch will return automatically to the intermittent
mode when released.
NOTE: Windscreen washer jets are mounted in the 80

cab frame, immediately beneath the roof. Insert a pin
into the jet nozzle to adjust the angle of the jet.
2--35
ANALOGUE/DIGITAL INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
The instrument panel consists of three analogue

gauges , three liquid crystal displays (LCD’s) and a
dot matrix display (DMD).
In addition to the gauges and LCD displays there are

a number of coloured lights providing other operating
information or warning of system malfunction.
The lower left button on the instrument panel controls

the intensity of back lighting for the LCD’s and dot
matrix displays, the two right--hand buttons are used 81
during diagnostic functions.
ANALOGUE GAUGES
Engine Tachometer
The tachometer (1) indicates engine revolutions per

minute. Each division on the scale represents 100
rev/min., therefore with the needle indicating ‘20’ the
engine is running at 2000 rev/min.
82
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge (2) indicates the

temperature of the engine coolant. If the needle
enters the upper (red) section of the gauge while the
engine is running, stop the engine and investigate
the cause.
Fuel Level Gauge
The gauge (3) indicates the level of fuel in the tank

and is only operative with the key-start switch turned
on. See Section 7 for fuel capacities.
83
2--36
84
INDICATOR AND WARNING LIGHTS
The coloured lights provide operating information or 4. Four wheel drive -- Light will illuminate when the
give warning of system malfunction. Illumination of a drive to the front wheels is engaged.
warning light may be accompanied by an audible
alarm. NOTE: In auto four wheel drive mode, this light will
flash when four wheel drive has been automatically
NOTE: All indicator and warning lights will illuminate disengaged.
for a short period at ’key--on’ as the electrical
systems carry out a self diagnostic check. 5. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
tractor/trailer turn signals when a second trailer
1. Fast Steer -- Green light will illuminate when Fast is attached.
Steer system is energised (isolator switch ’ON’).
6. Trailer turn signal -- Light will flash with
2. Fast Steer -- Orange light will illuminate when tractor/trailer turn signals when a trailer is
steering wheel ring is depressed to engage Fast attached
Steer function.
7. Parking lights -- Light will illuminate when the
3. Rear differential lock -- Light will illuminate when tractor lights are switched on.
the differential lock is engaged.
8. Headlight high beam -- Light will illuminate when
NOTE: In auto diff lock mode, this light will flash the tractor lights are switched to high beam.
when the diff lock is automatically dis--engaged.
2--37
85
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
9. Red Stop light -- If Stop light comes on stop the 14. Trailer brake pressure
tractor immediately and investigate the cause. A
warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix Italy only -- Light will illuminate to indicate that
Display to confirm the location of the fault. hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit
is low. Stop the tractor and investigate the cause.
10. Engine power boost activated -- Light will
NOTE: Light will also illuminate when the handbrake
illuminate when power boost is activated.
is applied as this will release pressure in the trailer
11. Amber Warning light -- Illumination of this light will brake circuit.
be accompanied by a warning symbol in the Dot All air braking systems -- Light will illuminate to
Matrix Display. Stop the tractor and investigate indicate the pressure in the air brake system has
the cause. fallen below 4.5 bar (65.2 lbf.in2). Stop the tractor
and investigate the cause.
12. Front suspesnsion -- Light will illuminate to
indicate front suspension switch is in the locked
position (suspension de--activated). 15. Brake pedals not latched -- Light will illuminate to
show when pedal latch is unlocked (Japan only).
13. Parking brake -- Light will flash with key-start
switch on and parking brake applied. If the 16. Engine oil pressure low -- Steady light
key-start switch is turned off and the parking accompanied by the Red Stop light will indicate
brake not applied, or the operator leaves the seat low engine oil pressure. Stop the engine and
without applying the parking brake, a warning investigate the cause.
buzzer will sound and the parking brake lamp will
flash for approximately 10 seconds or until the
parking brake has been applied.
2--38
86
Indicator and Warning Lights (continued)
17. Not Used. 22. Engine Speed Management -- Light will

illuminate when Engine Speed Management is
18. Rear Auto P.T.O. function -- The light will activated.
illuminate when the Auto P.T.O. function is
enabled. Each time the implement is raised and 23. Left turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor
the P.T.O. is stopped, the light will flash. When left-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
the implement is lowered into work and the P.T.O. sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
engages, the light will cease to flash and become seconds (5 minutes with tractor stationary).
steady.
24. Engine exhaust brake -- Light will illuminate when
19. Fuel level low -- Light will be illuminated when the exhaust brake system is activated.
tractor requires re--fuelling. See Section 8 for fuel
capacities. 25. Cold start device -- Light will illuminate when the
grid heater is activated using the key--start
20. Shuttle lever position. Appropriate symbol will switch.
illuminate to show position of shuttle lever,
forward, neutral or reverse. 26. Alternator -- Light continuously illuminated
indicates that the alternator is not charging the
21. Right turn indicator -- Light will flash with tractor battery.
right-hand turn signal. Intermittent alarm will
sound if indicator is not cancelled after 20
seconds (tractor moving) or 5 minutes (tractor
Stationary).
2--39
INSTRUMENT PANEL DISPLAYS
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with the optional

Intelliview II Monitor, a number of displays and
setting procedures will change. Consult the
Intelliview II Monitor Operator’s Manual for details.
DOT MATRIX DISPLAY
A number of tractor operating and set--up functions

may be shown in the Dot Matrix Display (DMD). To
select a function use the CAL/SEL button or the
Enhanced Keypad (where fitted). A symbol will
appear to confirm the function selected.
If an error occurs in the instrument panel or tractor

systems circuits, a malfunction warning symbol will
appear in this display accompanied by an error code.
87
CENTRAL DISPLAY
The information displayed in the centre LCD, will vary

depending on tractor specification. Use the CAL/SEL
switch or Enhanced Keypad (where fitted) to toggle
between the displays.
The following information may be displayed in the

centre LCD.
1. Rear wheel slip (with radar option only)

2. Power Take Off speed (front or rear)
3. 3--point hitch position (front or rear) 88
Rear Wheel Slip
If your tractor is equipped with optional ground speed

radar, the percentage (%) of rear wheel slip may be
displayed. The slip figure is calculated from
information provided by the transmission speed
sensor (theoretical ground speed) and the radar (true
ground speed).
89
2--40
Power Take Off Speed
When operating the rear Power Take Off the display

may be used to monitor the output shaft speed. Use
the CAL/SEL button or Enhanced Keypad (where
fitted), to select either rear P.T.O. speed or front
P.T.O. speed (where fitted).
90
3--Point Hitch Position
If your tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC) the display may be used to show the
position of the 3--point hitch (and implement) by
means of numbers ranging from ’0’ (fully lowered
position) to ’100’ (maximum lift height).
When a front hitch is installed, the display may be

used to show the height of the front lift arms. ’0’ will
represent the fully lowered position, ’100’ the
maximum lift height.
91
Backlight Control
The brightness of the liquid crystal (LCD) and dot

matrix displays (DMD) may be varied by using the
backlight adjustment button (1). Momentarily
depressing the button will alter the backlighting in
steps. Depress and hold the button to cycle through
the full range of backlighting from low to high
intensity. Release the button when the required
setting is obtained.
92
Right hand LCD -- Diesel Exhaust Fluid
(DEF)/AdBlue instrumentation warning
A. DEF/Adblue / SCR system icon
B. SCR Technical failure
C. DEF/Adblue level indicator
93
2--41
ENHANCED KEYPAD AND

PERFORMANCE MONITOR (where fitted)
ENHANCED KEYPAD
94
The enhanced keypad consists of 16 buttons or 3. Engine Oil Pressure (D). This key will display the
’keys’ that select, control or programme various engine oil pressure bargraph.
functions and displays in the central and dot matrix
screens. Keys 5, 6, 10 and 11 are used to set--up and 4. Programmed Maintenance Reminder (D). The
programme many of the enhanced keypad functions. maintenance schedule key provides two levels of
reminder identified as ’Heavy’ and Light.
Unless otherwise described, depress the keys once
to obtain the appropriate display. A symbol will 5. Menu Enter (D). Depress to select set--up and
appear in the display to confirm the function programming modes.
selected.
6. Menu Scroll Up or Digit Value (D). Depress this
key repeatedly to scroll upwards through the
Legend: (D) = Dot Matrix Display
menu or change the value of a number.
(C) = Centre Digital Display
7. P.T.O. Speed (C). Depress once to display rear
1. Hourmeter (D). Touch the key to view total Power Take Off speed, press again and hold for
number of hours that the tractor has operated. 3 seconds to show front P.T.O. speed (where
The hours recorded should be used as a guide to fitted).
the service intervals for the tractor.
8. Rear Wheel Slip (C). The level of rear wheel slip
2. Odometer (D). The odometer provides a visual will appear as a one or two digit percentage (%)
record of the distance travelled in kilometres or figure (with radar option only).
miles depending on the ground speed unit
selected. Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’.
2--42
Enhanced Keypad (continued)
95
9. Hitch Height Position (C). Depress once to 14. Area Accumulator (D). The total area worked will
display the rear hitch height, press again and be displayed in hectares or acres depending on
hold for 3 seconds to show front linkage height the ground speed unit selected.
(where fitted). The display will show a figure
between ’0’ (fully lowered) and ’100’ (maximum 15. Area Per Hour Forecaster (D). Touch this key
raised position). and the area/hour symbol will display together
with a forecast of the area that will be worked in
10. Exit/Cancel (D). Use this key to Exit or cancel one hour if the current rate of work is continued.
set--up and programming modes.
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area per
11. Menu Scroll Down or Digit Select (D). Depress hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
this key to scroll downwards through the menu or subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
select an alternative digit in the Dot Matrix may occur.
Display.
16. Remote Valve Operation (D). The display will
12. Battery Voltage (D). With the engine running, show the flow rate through each valve as a
touch the key to display the battery symbol percentage (%), the direction of cylinder
together with a digital display of the battery movement (extend or retract) and the number of
voltage. the valve selected. (See Electronic Remote
Control Valves in Section 3).
13. Trailer Brake Air Pressure (D). Depress to
display the trailer brake air pressure bargraph.
2--43
Ground Speed Display
The lower left--hand LCD provides a permanent

display of ground speed (1) in km/h or MPH
dependent upon the country in which the tractor is to
be used. If required, the display may be changed to
read an alternate ground speed unit from that set at
the factory.
NOTE: If the tractor rear tyre size is changed, the

ground speed display may require re--calibrating to
suit the radius of the new tyre.
NOTE: Illustration shows all displays activated. 96
Changing the Ground Speed Units
Using the CAL/SEL Button
 With the key--start switch in the OFF position,

depress and hold in the CAL/SEL button and turn
the key-start switch ON. The Km/h MPH
symbols will appear flashing in the display.
Release the button.
 Press the CAL/SEL button again to toggle between

km/h, MPH (UK) and MPH (US). When the
required ground speed unit is displayed turn off the
key--start to store the selected speed unit in the 97
memory.
Using the Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)
 With the key start ON, depress and hold the

Menu/Enter key (2). SETUP MENU will appear
in the DMD but this will change to the Warning
Symbol. Release the Menu/Enter key.
 Using the Menu Up key (1), scroll through the

menu until the Km/h MPH screen appears.
 Momentarily depress the Menu/Enter key (2)

and, using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the
required speed reading. To store the setting and 98
return to the main menu depress the Menu/Enter
key again. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return
to the original display.
2--44
Calibrating the Ground Speed Display
Should you wish to install alternative rear tyre

equipment that would provide a radius difference of
more than 13 mm (0.5 in), then the electronic control
module should be re--calibrated to display an
accurate ground speed figure. To re--calibrate use
one of the following methods:
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
 Ensure that the tyre pressures are correct for the

load being carried. (See Tyre Load/Inflation
tables in Section 3 of this manual).
 Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
Auto Calibration with CAL/SEL Button

 Park the tractor a short distance from the start
line and, with the engine running, depress and
hold the CAL/SEL button for 3 seconds to enter
the calibration mode. SETUP_MENU will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display. After approximately
two seconds the display will change to CAL.
Depress the CAL/SEL button again to enter the
calibration mode. Using the clock Hour button
select CAL auto. Depress the CAL/SEL button
to confirm selection of CAL auto, the central
LCD display will read 0000.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at 99
any time by turning the key--start off.
 Select a suitable transmission ratio to provide a

speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH) and drive up to
the start line, CAL auto READY will appear in the
display. As the centre of the front tyres pass over
the start line, press and release the CAL/SEL
button. CAL will flash in the speed display, CAL
auto ON will appear in the DMD and the central
LCD will show a four digit figure that will increase
as the tractor moves forward.
NOTE: If the calibration procedure is incorrectly
performed i.e. speed below 3 Km/h (1.8 MPH), CAL
KO will appear in the display, depress CAL/SEL to
restart sequence.
100
2--45
 As the centre of the front tyres pass over the

finish line, press and release the CAL/SEL button
again, CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the CAL/SEL button again select
CAL display. Turn off key--start to save the setting.
Manual Calibration with CAL/SEL Button
The manual calibration allows the operator to set the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre (if known)
without the need to drive over a measured distance.
101
 With the tractor stationary and the key--start on,

depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for 3
seconds to display SETUP_MENU. After 2
seconds this will change to CAL. Depress the
CAL/SEL button again to select CAL manual,
depress again to select CAL man_000.0. (The
figure 000.0 may differ if a calibration number has
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display.
NOTE: The set up procedure may be cancelled at

any time by turning the key--start off.
IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling 102

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--49.
 By depressing the ’h’ and ’m’ clock buttons, the

rolling circumference of the rear tyre may be
entered into the numerical display (000.0).
 Depress the ’h’ button to select the first digit to be

changed, repeated operation of the ’h’ button will
cycle the cursor through all the digits in turn. To
alter the value of the digit selected, momentarily
depress the ’m’ button until the correct figure is
shown.
 With the new rolling circumference figure

entered into the display, depress the CAL/SEL
button again to display CAL. Turn the Key--start
off to save the setting.
2--46
Auto Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)
 Select a stretch of dry, firm, level ground

(preferably concrete) and carefully measure out
a distance of exactly 100.0 m (328 feet). Mark the
start and finish of this measured distance with a
bold chalk line.
 With the the tractor stationary and the engine

running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key
(4). SETUP_MENU will appear in the DMD but
this will change to the Warning Symbol.
Release the Menu/Enter key.
103
 Using the menu up/down keys, select CAL.
 With CAL displayed, depress the Menu/Enter
key to select CAL manual then use the Menu Up
key (1), and scroll through the menu screen until
CAL auto is displayed.
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again and CAL

auto READY will appear in the DMD. Select a
suitable transmission ratio to provide a forward
speed above 3 km/h (1.8 MPH). As the centre of
the front tyres pass over the start line, press and
release the Menu/Enter key. The speed display
will start to flash CAL and the central LCD will show
a four digit figure that will increase as the tractor
moves forward. The DMD will change to display
CAL auto ON.
 As the centre of the front tyres pass over the

finish line, press and release the Menu/Enter
key. CAL auto OK will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. Depress the Menu/Enter key to store the 104
setting. Press and release the Exit/Cancel key (2)
Figure 103, to return to the original display.
2--47
Manual Calibration with Enhanced Keypad

(where fitted)

Menu/Enter key (2). SETUP MENU will appear
in the DMD but this will change to the Warning
 Using the menu up/down keys, select CAL. With

CAL displayed, depress the Menu/Enter key and
CAL manual will appear.
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again to change the

DMD display to CAL_Man_000.0. (The figure 105
000.0 may differ if a calibration number has
previously been entered). CAL will flash in the
speed display.
 Using the Digit Select key (3) move the cursor to

the first digit to be set, enter the number using the
Digit Value key (1). CAL will appear in the speed
display and start to flash. Repeat the procedure
to set the remaining calibration figures that
correspond to the size of rear tyre fitted to your
tractor.
IMPORTANT: When entering new tyre rolling

circumference figures, use metric values
(centimetres) with Km/h speedometer reading and
Imperial values (inches) with MPH reading, see table
on page 2--49.
 Depress the Exit/Cancel key twice to store the 106

setting and return to the main menu screen,
depress again to exit set up and return to the
original display.
2--48
Ground Speed Calibration Numbers Rear Tyre Rolling Circumferences
The rolling circumference for any given tyre size will Tyre Size Tyre Rolling Circumference
vary depending on tyre manufacturer. The figures
shown in the table are an average based on rolling Centimetres Inches
circumference data supplied by several 20.8R -- 38 550.1 216.6
manufacturers. To obtain an accurate figure for your 580/70R -- 38 543.6 214.0
rear tyres, consult your authorised dealer or tyre 650/65R -- 38 545.3 214.7
supplier.
650/75R -- 38 581.1 228.8
710/70R -- 38 576.2 226.8
If the size of tyre on your tractor is not listed, then the
road speed calibration may be carried out using one 710/60R -- 42 567.5 223.4
of the following procedures. 18.4R -- 42 555.7 218.8
20.8R -- 42 581.5 228.9
Carry out the Auto calibration as previously 580/70R -- 42 569.0 224.0
described or measure the rear tyre rolling 650/65R -- 42 577.6 227.4
circumference. 620/70R -- 42 580.9 228.7
14.9R -- 46 554.2 218.2
1. To measure the rolling circumference of the rear 420/80R -- 46 555.5 218.7
tyre, park the tractor on a level surface and make
480/80R -- 46 587.2 231.2
a vertical chalk mark on the sidewall where the
tyre tread contacts the ground. Make a second 520/85R -- 46 608.8 239.7
chalk mark on the ground aligning with the mark 18.4R -- 46 587.0 231.1
on the tyre. 320/90R -- 50 559.0 220.1
320/90R -- 54 529.0 208.3
2. Slowly drive the tractor forward until the rear
wheel has made one revolution and the chalk
mark on the sidewall is again in contact with the
ground. Mark the ground again and measure the
distance between the two chalk marks.
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with the

optional slip control feature, then the ground speed
displayed is a true speed as sensed by a radar unit,
calibration is therefore not required.
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor emits a low intensity
microwave signal which will not cause any ill effects
in normal use. Although the signal intensity is low, do
not look directly into the face of the sensor while in
operation so as to avoid eye damage.
2--49
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(with Keypad)
Odometer (Distance Record)
The odometer provides a visual record of the

distance travelled in kilometres or miles depending
on the ground speed unit selected.
Two displays are available, ’1’ and ’2’. ’1’ may be

used for individual journey distances and ’2’ to
provide a total for all journeys travelled. Both displays
may be reset to zero.
Touch the key once to select reading ’1’, touch again

to select reading ’2’. Keeping the key depressed for
more than 3 seconds will re--set the selected
odometer to zero.
The journey distance in the display will appear in

steps of:
0 to 19.999 Km/Miles 0.001 Km/Miles

2000 to 19999 Km/Miles 1.0 Km/Miles
107
NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, distance
calculations are based on axle rotation and are
subject to inaccuracies caused by any wheel slip that
may occur.
Area per Hour Forecaster
Touch the AREA/HOUR key (1). The ‘AREA/HOUR’

symbol will display, together with a forecast (2) of the
area that will be worked in one hour if the current rate
of work is continued.
The area per hour will appear in steps of 0.01

Ha/Acre.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are
may occur. 108
2--50
Area Accumulator
NOTE: Before activating the area accumulator

function ensure the correct implement width has
been entered into the TPM memory.
The accumulated area (total area worked) can be

displayed by depressing the AREA key (1).
Depending on the unit set in the tractor speed display
(K/mh or MPH) the reading will be in hectares or
acres.
Depress the area accumulator key repeatedly to

toggle through the three displays in the dot matrix
screen:
1. OFF. The area accumulator is off.
2. ON. Area accumulator on. Area will be

accumulated as the tractor moves irrespective of
the position of the implement.
3. A. Area accumulation will start recording

when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop accumulating when the
implement is raised.
The area accumulator symbol (2) will appear in the

display along with the area figure.
With trailed equipment, area accumulation may be 109

temporarily interrupted, for example, at the
headland, by means of a switch connected into the
implement status socket (where fitted). See
‘Electrical Power Panel’ on page 2--20.
The area measurement in the display (3) will appear

in steps of:
0 to 199.99 Ha/acre 0.01 Ha/acre

200 to 1999.9 Ha/acre 0.1 Ha/acre
2000 to 19999 Ha/acre 1.0 Ha/acre
Area accumulation can be reset to zero at any time

by selecting OFF and holding down the AREA key (1)
Figure 109, until the display returns to zero.

hour calculations are based on axle speed and are 110
may occur.
2--51
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.
Programming Keys
Four keys are used to select, change or memorise

the various functions related to the Performance
Monitor and Enhanced Keypad. All programme
information will appear in the Dot Matrix Display
(DMD) along with the relevant symbol for the function
selected.
1. Menu Up/Digit Value Key. Use this key to scroll

upwards through the function menu or to
increase the value of a selected digit during a
calibration procedure. Values will increase by
one digit each time the key is depressed.
2. Exit/Cancel Key. Depress this key to exit the

calibration mode. The key may be used at any
time during a set--up procedure to cancel and exit
the calibration mode, however, information not
saved will be lost.
3. Menu Down/Digit Select Key. In the calibration

mode depress this key to scroll downwards
through the menu or to select a digit for 111
re--calibration. Each time the key is depressed
the flashing cursor showing the current digit
selected will move one space to the right.
4. Menu/Enter Key. Depress and hold this key to

enter the programme mode. SETUP/MENU will
appear in the display but this will change to the
Warning Symbol. Release the Menu/Enter key.
Using the Menu Up/Down keys, the various
display screens can now be accessed.
2--52
Using the Menu Up/Down keys, select the function

to be calibrated. Depressing the Menu Up key will
select the following displays:
CAL
Clock setup
MPH or Km/h select
Beep on/off
Implement width
Wheel slip alarm
Service reminder
Auto engine stop (advisory display only)
Warning symbol
When the appropriate function screen has been

selected, depress the Menu/Enter key again to
access the calibration mode.
Audible Beep -- ON/OFF
Each time one of the keys is pressed, an audible

’beep’ sound will be heard. The beep can be switched
off if required.

Menu/Enter key. SETUP MENU will appear in
the DMD but this will change to the Warning
 Using the Menu Up/Down keys, scroll through

the menu until BEEP ON/OFF is displayed.
112
 Depress the Menu/Enter key again to select the
set--up screen. Using the Menu Up/Down keys,
align the arrow (1) with ON or OFF as required.
 Touch the Menu/Enter key to store the setting

(Value xx saved) and return to the main menu.
Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return to the
original display.
2--53
Setting the Implement Width

In order that the micro-processor may calculate the
cumulative area, the working width of the implement
must be entered into the memory. For example, to
enter an implement working width of 4.5 metres
(14.76 ft.) carry out the following procedure.


the menu until the Implement width symbol is 113
displayed.

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’0’ then move the cursor one space to
the right with the Digit Select key and enter ’4’.
Move the cursor to the right of the decimal point
and enter ’5’. The reading displayed should now
be 04.50 mtrs (14.76 ft.).
original display.
NOTE: The micro--processor cannot calculate the 114
area worked unless the correct implement width is
entered.
2--54
Calibrating for Wheel Slip

Before setting the slip alarm point, a zero wheel slip
factor has to be determined. This calibration must be
carried out on a hard level surface where wheel slip
is unlikely to occur.
NOTE: The Electronic Draft Control auto slip
function (see EDC operation) will not operate unless
this procedure is carried out.
 With the tractor stationary and the engine

running, depress and hold the Menu/Enter key.
SETUP MENU will appear in the DMD but this
will change to the Warning Symbol. Release 115
the Menu/Enter key.

the menu screens until the wheel slip symbol is
displayed.
 Drive the tractor at a constant speed above 5

Km/h (3.1 MPH). When a steady speed has been
reached, depress the Menu Enter key, CAL ON
will appear in the display. After a short distance
touch the Menu Enter key again, the display will
change to CAL OK.

original display.
2--55
Setting the Slip Alarm Point
NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, the

slip alarm function will be omitted from the display.
The slip alarm point may be set as a one or two digit

figure that, if exceeded, will cause an audible alarm
to sound. To set a wheel slip limit of 15% carry out the
following procedure.

Symbol. Release the Menu/Enter key. 116

the menu until the wheel slip symbol (1) is
displayed.

set--up screen, a flashing cursor will appear at
the first number to be set. Using the Digit Value
key enter ’1’, move the cursor to the right with the
Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value key,
enter ’5’. The slip alarm point is now set at 15%.
 Depress the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting (Value xx saved) and return to the main
menu. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return to
the original display.
If wheel slip exceeds the pre--set limit, the slip symbol

will appear in the DMD and the amber warning light
will illuminate on the instrument console.
2--56
Programming the Service Reminder
The service reminder function allows the operator to

programme two service interval reminders using the
Enhanced Keypad. The following procedure is the
same for LIGHT and HEAVY service intervals.


the menu until the service reminder symbol (1) 117
appears in the display.
Setting a Light Service Reminder

Service Reminder sub--menu. Using the Menu
Up/Down keys display ’LIGHT’, touch the
Menu/Enter key and a flashing cursor (1) will
appear at the first number to be set.
 Using the Digit Value key enter the first number

to be set, move the cursor one space to the right
with the Digit Select key and, with the Digit Value
key, enter the second digit, repeat for the third
digit. The display will now read LIGHT xxx
(where xxx will be the selected hours). 118
NOTE: Where no setting has been made, the display

will show ’0’.
 Touch the Menu/Enter key to memorise the

setting and return to the main menu. Depress the
Exit/Cancel key to return to the original display.
The service reminder is now set for the selected
period.
Two hours before the service is due the Light Service

symbol and the hours remaining will appear in the
DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for 4
seconds after the engine is started.
2--57
Setting a Heavy Service Reminder
Select HEAVY on the main menu and repeat the

procedure used for setting the LIGHT service
reminder.
Ten hours before the service is due the Heavy

Service symbol and the hours remaining will appear
in the DMD at ’key--on’ and will remain displayed for
4 seconds after the engine is started.
119
Time Expiry Warnings
As the time to service expires, the relevant symbol

will appear hourly in the display for 20 seconds. The
number of hours remaining before the service will
also be shown and this will be accompanied by the
Amber warning light. When time to service has
expired, only the symbol will appear hourly in the
display.
If required, the service time count--down may be

terminated by re--setting the Service Reminder
interval to zero or by changing the period until the
next service is due.
2--58
Auto Engine Shutdown (Advisory Only)
The engine on your tractor has an automatic engine

shutdown feature that can be set by your authorised
dealer to operate in one of three modes, see
Automatic Engine Shutdown in Section 3.
To check the setting on your tractor carry out the

following:

Symbol. Release the Menu/Enter key. 120

the menu until the engine shutdown symbol
appears.

display screen. This will indicate whether
programme 1, 2 or 3 has been activated. These
settings can only made by your authorised dealer
using specialised equipment.
 Touch the Menu/Enter key to return to the main

menu. Depress the Exit/Cancel key to return to
the original display.
2--59
COLOUR DISPLAY
(where fitted)
The colour display provides the operator with a

comprehensive range of detailed operating
information including Precision Farming. For those
requiring a higher level of operating functions,
Autoguidance is available as an option.
121
The display is touch sensitive and has five main
information displays which can be accessed simply
by touching the appropriate area of the display.
1. Status Display. Various symbols relating to

tractor functions will appear in this area. This
would include hydraulic applications,
(EHR/EDC) Virtual Terminal and Autoguidance
status (where fitted) and service period
warnings.
2. HTS Display. When in record and play--back

modes, HTS symbols will appear in this display.
These will be accompanied by a text description
to the right of the symbol when the main HTS
operating screen is in use.
2--60
3. Main Screen Display. This is the main display

area in which the various information screens will
appear. Information screens can be created,
edited, saved and deleted through this part of the
colour display.
4. Function Select. Use the touch area to display

the required screen.
5. Transmission Display. In this area, details

regarding transmission operation, direction and
speed are shown. The illustration shown depicts
details of the transmission.
The position of the colour display can be altered to

suit the individual operator. Loosen the knurled knob
at the rear of the display and tilt to the most suitable
position.
Where applicable, programming and operating

instructions for both Enhanced Keypad and the
colour display are included in the relevant sections of
this manual.
In the following pages, where . is shown in the text,

touch the relevant part of the screen display to
access information or pop--up screens.
NOTE: For clarity, all displays featured in this manual

are Mixed/Text (text and icons).
2--61
Pop--up Screens
Pop--up screens may contain text or figures allowing

the operator to input programming information,
implement details and working conditions.
Other pop--up screens allow the operator to activate

or deactivate functions, edit saved information and
update work conditions.
Where a text or number pop--up screen appears, the

operator simply touches the relevant letter or number
to enter the character in the description box.
122
To save the description, touch Enter, the pop--up will
automatically close and the display will return to the
application screen, in this case Implement setup.
To exit a pop--up screen without making changes,

touch X to return to the application screen.
123
When making adjustments using pop--up screens,
setting changes can be made by touching A" or,
alternatively touching the bar graph.
To quickly increase a setting touch the screen at (2),

to decrease touch at (1). The bar graph will
automatically go to the spot where the screen was
1 2
touched.
After making the intitial adjustment, use A" to

make finer adjustments where required.
124
2--62
Setting Colour Display Operating Parameters
Before operating with the colour display, a number of

basic settings must be applied. These settings are
accessed through Display Setup and Operator
Setup screens.
. Toolbox
. Disp (Display Setup)
By touching each ’box’ on the screen a pop--up will

appear allowing the operator to enter information.
Where a pop--up is accessed without making a
change, touch X to exit and return to the setup
screen.
Display setup information includes:

Month, day and year.
Hour and minute.
Language.
125
Backlight. (illumination level for the colour
display).
Current Vehicle. Will provide information on the
the tractor model in which the colour display is
installed.
Interface Level. Allows the operator to select a
basic or advanced level of information on the
Profile Setup screen in Performance displays.
. Oper (Operator setup)
Operator setup information includes:

Operator name/identification.
Units. Select the appropriate unit from Metric,
USA or Imperial. This setting will control all units
of measurement within the colour display.
Grid Lines. This adds or removes the grid lines
dividing some display areas.
Time format. AM/PM or 24 hour format.
Display mode. Allows the operator to choose the
most suitable display heading from a choice of 126
text/text, text/icon or icon/icon.
NOTE: For clarity, all displays featured in this manual
are Mixed/Text (text and icons).
2--63
Date Format. In this screen the operator can

choose the way the date is appears in the colour
display.
Decimal Symbol. This screen allows the operator

to seletect either Point (.) or Comma (,).
Display Volume. Changes the sound level of

programming ’beeps’ and alarms in the colour
display.
127
Colour Display Backlighting
The level of backlighting in the colour display can be

adjusted as follows:
. Toolbox
. Disp
. Backlight
128
Touch A" to adjust the light level, the bar graph will
confirm the setting between 1 and 100, touch Enter
to save the setting
129
2--64
Setting the clock
Where a tractor is equipped with the colour display,

setting the time clock in the display and instrument
panel can be done using the touch screen.
The Display Setup screen also allows the operator to

set the Month, Day, Year and select the appropriate
Language.
. Toolbox
. Disp
130
. Hour or Minute
Using the pop--up screen, set the correct time for the
hour or minute then touch Enter to save the setting
and return to the Display Setup screen.
To exit the pop--up menu without making a change

touch X.
131
2--65
Setting Alarm Reminder
NOTE: To exit pop--up screens without making

changes touch X.
. Utilities
. Alarms
The alarm function provides up to five programmable
timer alarms that can be used as a reminder where
it is necessary to carry out a task at a specific time.
1. Current Date. 132
2. Current Time.
3. Alarm Symbol
The alarm symbol confirms alarm status, OFF, ON

or MUTE.
4. . Time Display
Touch YB to set the desired time at which the

alarm will sound, touch Ok to set.
5. . Memo
Touch MEMO to create a description of the timed

event. Use pop--up screen to enter the description,
a maximum of 18 characters may be used. To toggle
between upper and lower case, touch the arrow
symbol. Touch Enter to set.
6. . Alarm Mode
Touch B to set ON, OFF and MUTE. The alarm

icon will confirm selection.
7. . Del/Set. Touch Del to delete current alarm

setting, touch Set to create a new alarm setting.
At the set time the alarm pop--up will appear in the

display showing the memo text. With MUTE selected
there is no audible alarm.
. Back to return to the main display.
2--66
Calculator
. Calc.
The calculator screen allows a maximum of 10 digits
to be entered.
. Back to return to the main display.
133
Setting the Work Condition

changes touch X.
NOTE: Changing the descriptions for Implement or

Work Condition in any screen will automatically
update all Work Condition screens.
Implement Setup
. Work condition
. Impl
134
The implement screen allows the operator to select,
edit or create implement descriptions and working
conditions.
. Implement (1)
Select an implement from the pop--up list, modify a

current implement description or add a new
implement category to the list.
NOTE: A more comprehensive implement setup list

can be found in Toolbox, Implement setup.
. Work Condition (2)
Select the current work condition from the pop--up

list, modify the current condition or add a new work
category to the list.
2--67
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(with Colour Display)

changes touch X.
Productivity Screen
The productivity screen displays work rates, timer

count--down and distance travelled.
. Performance
A number of different screens are available in the

performance folder, the main ones are as follows.
Details of other screens can be found in the Colour
Display Operator’s Manual.
. Prod
1. Work rate. The area per hour figure is displayed

here, depending on the measurement unit set in
Operator Setup, the reading will be in hectares or
acres per hour.
. work rate bar graph to enter or change the

work rate value. Set the target rate using the
pop--up menu. As work commences the bar
graph will fill to provide a visual display of the
actual rate per hour against the target set by the
red line.
Work rate will start recording when the tractor 135

moves and the implement is lowered. It will stop
when the implement is raised.
2. Area worked. This figure shows the

accumulative figure for the area worked during
the current operation.
. area worked bar graph to enter or change

the area value. Set the total area figure using the
pop--up menu. As work commences the bar
graph will fill to provide a visual display of the
accumulated area against the target set by the
red line.
Area accumulation will start recording when the
tractor moves and the implement is lowered. It
will stop when the implement is raised.
2--68
3. Time remaining. The count--down timer

displays the remaining time left to complete the
task. This figure is automatically calculated from
the area remaining, tractor speed and implement
width.
4. Distance.
Total distance travelled will start recording as
soon as the tractor starts to move.
5. Dist. in work.
Distance travelled in work, will start recording
when the tractor moves and the implement is
lowered. It will stop when the implement is 136
raised.
6. . Reset to clear both Dist. in work and

Distance figures.
Instant Performance Screen
. Instant
The Performance inst. display provides the current

operating figures for:
 Current work rate in ha/h (ac/h).
 Engine speed (r.p.m.).
 P.T.O. and hydraulic load (%).
 Current engine load (%).

 Fuel economy in Km/L (mi/gal).
 Fuel rate. Current fuel consumption in L/h 137
(gal/h).
 Fuel economy in L/ha (ac/gal).
 Fuel economy per kWh/L (kWh/gal).
 Current wheel slip (%).
2--69
Fuel Range
. Range
Displays figures for Distance, Time and Area left

before the tractor has to be re--fuelled. Figures are
based on current tractor performance settings and
fuel remaining in the tank.
138
Run Screens
. Run
A number of Run screens are available to the

operator in which tractor operating information can
be displayed.
Each screen can be constructed by the operator in

respect to the number of information displays, and
their content.
139
2--70
. Toolbox
. YB to access Layout screen.
. Layout
With the Run Layout screen displayed, the operator

can recall, edit and consruct new screens. In the
upper part of the screen there are three basic setup
displays, Current Layout, Run Screen and Number
of Windows.
1. . Current Layout 140
Select, edit or create a new name for a run screen by

using the pop--up menu.
2. . Run Screen
Select the number of the screen to be displayed.
3. . Number of Windows
Select the number of ’windows’ to be displayed in the

run screen. This can vary from 1 column x 4
’windows’ to 2 columns x 6 ’windows’.
. Information Window
A pop--up menu providing a large selection of

headings can be accessed by touching the relevant
’window’. Touch the appropriate heading and it will be
transferred to the display ’window’.
2--71
PROGRAMMING THE DISPLAYS
WARNING
The radar ground speed sensor, located in front of
the right-hand footsteps, emits a low intensity
microwave signal which is completely safe in normal
use. Although the signal intensity is low, do not look
directly into the face of the sensor while in operation
so as to avoid eye damage.
Setting the Implement Width
Selecting the implement setup screen allows the

operator to identify the implement type and operating
width, record the current working/ground conditions
and the width of the swath.
NOTE: The figures will be displayed will be in the unit

of measurement as selected in the Operator Setup
screen, consult your Intelliview Operator’s Manual.
. Toolbox
. YB to access Impl screen.
. Impl
1. . Operation to access a pop--up in order to

select a reference for the current operation from
a pre--installed list or to create a new description.
2. . Task to access a pop--up in order to select,

edit or create a task description. This can be
number or text based.
3. . Impl. width to set the width of the current

141
implement attached to the tractor. The pop--up
screen allows the operator to select a previously
stored figure, edit the current one or create a new
figure.
4. . Impl. offset allows the operator to enter the

offset between the tractor and implement centre
lines. For use where the implement operates in
an offset position to the tractor.
2--72
5. . Implement to specify implement type. A

pop--up menu allows the operator to select a
stored implement type, edit the description or
create a new implement type.
6. . Work Condition box to enter current

operating conditions. A pop--up menu permits
the operator to select a previously stored
condition, edit a current description or create a
new work condition.
7. . Swath width to set the width of the swath

for baler, forager or similar implement. Use the
pop--up screen to select a previously stored 142
figure, edit the current one or create a new figure.
8. . Max steer ang to enter details of the front

axle steering angle.
Setting the Slip Alarm Point
. Work condition
. Settings
. Settings
. Implement. Use the pop--up screen to select,

change or add a new implement category.
. Work condition. Use the pop--up screen to

select, change or add a new category of work 143
condition.
1. Percentage slip figure, this will change as wheel

slip increases and decreases.
2. Same as (1) above but in bar graph format.
3. . to set wheel slip alarm threshold. This figure

will remain constant indicating the setting made.
2--73
Programming a Service Reminder

changes touch X.
The service reminder function allows the operator to

monitor and programme service interval reminders.
. Toolbox
Touch YB to access Service screen.
. Service
1. Total engine hours.
2. Total transmission (driving) hours.
3. Operational hours accrued since counter last

reset.
4. Time duration and content of Service Interval. 144

. 10 h to access details of 10 hour service
requirements. Touch YB to toggle through list
of service items, touch Ok to return to main
service screen.
5. Set the service period.

. YB to select a service hours display or
disable service reminder (Off). Touch hour figure
to change time interval. Select Service done to
reset counter and update maintenance history.
Touch Off to disable service reminder function.
NOTE: Service Off cannot be selected for the 1200

hour service interval.
6. . YB to scroll through all service intervals.
2--74
ALARM FUNCTIONS
The illumination of a warning light may be

accompanied by an audible alarm. Depending on the
severity of the malfunction, one of the following
alarms may be heard.
Critical Alarm
A continuous pulse alarm accompanied by the red

warning light (1). The tractor must be stopped
immeadiately. The alarm will sound until the fault is
corrected or the engine switched off.
Non Critical Alarm
A 4 second pulsating alarm will be accompanied by

the amber warning light (2). A failure or error has
occurred but the operator may continue work. The
fault should be rectified as soon as possible.
145
Action Required
A two pulse alarm will sound for 1 second to advise

the operator that a certain action is required. The
alarm will continue to be present until the operator
carries out the appropriate action or the tractor
engine is switched off.
Safety and General Alarms
A continuous alarm will sound if the operator

attempts to carry out an inappropriate action i.e.
driving the tractor with the parking brake applied.
Parking Lights
A pulse alarm will sound for a short period if the

engine is switched off and the parking lights are left
on.
Status ’Beep’
A ’beep’ will sound each time a key is depressed on

the keypad. This sound may be disabled if required,
see page 2--53.
2--75
ERROR CODES AND WARNINGS
The advanced electronics on your tractor are able to

detect a malfunction or error occurring in key areas
such as engine, transmission, electrical and
hydraulic systems. Should a malfunction or error
occur, the relevant symbol and error code will appear
in the Dot Matrix Display.
NOTE: See page 2--80 to 2--87 for an explanation of

warning and advisory symbols.
This may be accompanied by the illumination of a

warning light and an audible alarm depending on the 146
severity of the fault. Consult your authorised dealer.
Active and Non Active Warnings
In addition to the error codes previously described,

there are a number of other warning symbols that
may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. These
symbols will be accompanied by either a Red
(critical) or Amber (non--critical) warning light.
Critical symbols appearing with a Red warning light

will remain permanently displayed until the tractor is
stopped and the fault rectified.
Depending on the severity of the fault, non critical

symbols accompanied by the Amber light will be
displayed for five seconds before the DMD defaults
to the symbol previously shown. The amber warning
light will continue to illuminate. However, if the fault
is of a simple nature then the Amber light may go out
when the fault code disappears from the display.
For more severe faults the Amber warning light may

remain illuminated until the fault is recified.
By using the CAL/SEL button, or the Enhanced

Keypad where fitted, active warnings that are not
permanently displayed may be recalled.
2--76
Accessing Stored Error Codes
Using the CAL/SEL button
 Depress and hold the CAL/SEL button for three

seconds to enter SETUP MENU, after two
seconds the display will change to CAL. Using
the clock set buttons H and M to toggle the
display, select the the active warning symbol (1),
Figure 147.
 Depress the CAL/SEL button and the active

symbol will be replaced with a symbol
corresponding to the fault detected.
 If more than one warning symbol has been 147

stored, the display will cycle through each one in
turn. After the fault symbols have been
displayed, the screen will default back to the
active warning symbol.
 Momentarily depress the dimming button to exit

the display.
Using the Enhanced Keypad

the DMD but this will change to the active
Warning Symbol. Release the Menu/Enter key.
 By momentarily depressing the Menu/Enter key

again, the active symbol will be replaced with a
symbol corresponding to the fault detected.
 If more than one non--active symbol has been

stored, the display will cycle through each one in
turn. 148
 After the fault symbols have been displayed, the
screen will default back to the active warning
symbol.
Depress the Exit/Cancel key to exit and return to the

original display.
149
2--77
Using the Colour Display

(where fitted)
. Diagnostic
. Fault
. Display
From the pop--up menu touch Select List to view

stored error codes.
Touch Erase all to clear the memory. 150
If the list of error codes does not view correctly, touch

Refresh List to reformat.
Touch X to exit the fault code pop--up menu.
2--78
WARNING AND ADVISORY SYMBOLS
There are a number of warning/advisory symbols

that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display. The
symbols can be categorised into four main groups.
1. Warning. These symbols advise of a fault that is

critical to the operation of the tractor. Stop the
tractor as soon as possible, investigate the
cause and rectify the fault.
2. Maintenance. These symbols tell the operator

there is a concern relating to the basic functions
of the tractor, ie. water contamination in the fuel,
alternator not charging etc.
151
3. System Fault. The system fault symbols relate
to an operational fault in one or more of the
tractors main components, either electrical or
mechanical. May be accompanied by a four or
five digit fault code. Consult your authorised
dealer.
4. Advisory. The advisory symbols are not

detrimental to the operation of the tractor but
should not be ignored. Take appropriate action
where necessary.
152
2--79
ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
DMD PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

LAMP LAMP
Amber Handbrake applied with

Safety Release handbrake.
flashing vehicle moving.
Operator leaves seat

Amber
Safety without Apply handbrake.
flashing
applying handbrake.
Handbrake not released

Action
-- during Release handbrake.
required
auto take--off.
Handbrake not applied

-- -- Safety Apply handbrake.
at key OFF
Action Drive engaged without

-- -- Cycle clutch pedal.
required depressing clutch pedal.
Action Place shuttle lever

-- -- Shuttle lever in drive.
required in neutral.
Action Transmission park lock

-- -- Engage park lock.
required not engaged.
Action Transmission park lock

-- -- Disengage park lock.
required engaged.
Action Transmission oil Run tractor until oil

-- --
required temperature too low. temperature increases.
Action Key ON, engine not Turn key OFF or start

-- --
required running. engine.
-- -- General Indicators not cancelled. Cancel indicators.
Parking Parking lights ON at

-- -- Turn parking lights OFF.
lights key--off.
Rear Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged, operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
Front Power Take--Off

Amber If accompanied by critical
-- Safety engaged operator not
flashing alarm apply parking brake.
present.
2--80
ADVISORY DISPLAYS and INFORMATION (continued)

LAMP LAMP
Amber Incorrect use of PTO Do not engage PTO until

-- Non critical
flashing control -- Timed Out. DMD symbol clears.
Amber Engine speed too low to Increase engine speed and

-- Non critical
flashing allow PTO engagement. re--engage PTO drive.
Amber
Reduce tractor or
-- flashing/ Non critical Wheel slip limit exceeded.
implement draft load.
continuous
Instrument display Adjust backlighting to

-- -- None
backlighting. required level.
Front remote valve Reduce oil flow

Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
Rear remote valve Reduce oil flow
Amber not functioning due to requirements to other
-- flashing/ Non critical insufficient oil flow. services.
continuous Lever or joystick not in Move lever or joystick
neutral at key--on. control to neutral.
2--81
WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Red Transmission oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure low.
Amber These symbols advise of a

Transmission oil fault that is critical to the
-- flashing/ --
temperature too high. operation of the tractor.
continuous
Red Engine coolant Stop the tractor as soon as

-- Critical possible, investigate the
flashing temperature too high.
Red Engine oil pressure If the fault cannot be easily

Critical rectified, consult your
flashing too low.
authorised dealer.
Red Power steering oil

-- Critical
flashing pressure too low.
Red Hydraulic pump charge

-- Non critical
flashing pressure too low.
Amber These symbols advise of

-- Non critical Network malfunction. a fault that may be critical
flashing
to the operation of the
tractor.
Amber
Non critical Air brake pressure low.
flashing Stop the tractor as soon as
possible, investigate the
Amber cause and rectify the fault.
-- flashing/ -- Battery voltage too high.
continuous If the fault cannot be easily
rectified, consult your
authorised dealer.
Amber
-- Non critical Battery voltage too low.
flashing
Red Brake boost pressure

-- Non critical
flashing too low.
2--82
WARNING DISPLAYS and INFORMATION - WITH ENGINE SHUTDOWN ACTIVATED

LAMP LAMP
Red Engine oil pressure

Critical
flashing too low.
Red Transmission oil These symbols advise

-- Critical of a fault that is critical
flashing pressure low.
to the operation of the
tractor.
Red Transmission oil Automatic engine
-- Critical
flashing temperature too high. shutdown will be
activated and the engine
will STOP.
Red Engine coolant
-- Critical Investigate the cause
flashing temperature too high.
and rectify the fault.
If the fault cannot be

Red Engine control system easily rectified, consult
-- Critical
flashing malfunction. your authorised dealer.
Red Engine ECU control

-- Critical
flashing data compromised.
The Dot Matrix Display will cycle ENGINE STOP symbol with the appropriate warning symbol.
2--83
DEF/AdBlue level faults, failures and engine power loss levels
Visual Indicator Right LCD Audible Description

display light alarm
warning
’C’ flashing 4s pulsating DEF/AdBlue level is less than 10 % of tank
continuously volume, refill DEF/AdBlue and reset the system
by cycling the key switch OFF then ON. No
flashing 4s/
engine power loss.
continuously
’C’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue level is less than 5 % of tank

continuously volume, (0% will be displayed), refill
DEF/AdBlue immediately and reset the system
flashing by cycling the key switch OFF then ON.
Up to 65% torque reduction and 40% engine
speed reduction within 40 min of engine running
time.
’C’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue level has been empty for 60 min,
continuously refill DEF/AdBlueimmediately and reset the
system by cycling the key switch OFF then ON.
flashing Up to 80% torque reduction and 40% rated
engine speed within 30 min of engine running
time.
’C’ flashing pulsating Emergency re--start is active
continuously No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
30 s of continued operation. Refill DEF/AdBlue
immediately and reset the system by cycling the
30 flashing
key switch OFF then ON.
DEF/AdBlue quality faults, failures and engine power loss levels
’A’ flashing 4s pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is

continuously questionable. Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean
and refill with approved DEF/AdBlue solution.
Contact your local authorised dealer if failure
flashing 4s/ persists.
continuously No engine power loss.
’A’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is
continuously questionable 60 min after the initial warning.
Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
approved DEF/AdBlue solution. Contact your
flashing 4s/
local authorised dealer if failure persists.
continuously Up to 65% torque reduction and 40% engine
speed reduction within 40 min of engine running
time.
’A’ flashing pulsating DEF/AdBlue quality/concentration is
continuously questionable 220 min after the initial warning.
Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
flashing
approved DEF/AdBlue solution. Contact your
local authorised dealer if failure persists.
Up to 80% torque reduction within 30 min of
engine running time.
’A’ flashing pulsating Emergency re--start is active.
continuously Drain DEF/AdBlue tank, clean and refill with
approved DEF/AdBlue solution.
No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
30 flashing
30 s of continued operation. Contact your local
authorised dealer if failure persists.
2--84
SCR system technical faults, failures and engine power loss levels
Visual Indicator Right LCD Audible Description

display light alarm
warning
’A’ + ’B’ 4s pulsating SCR fault/failure detected. Up to 25% torque
flashing reduction within 25 min of engine running time.
continuously Contact your local authorised dealer for repair.
flashing 4s/
continuously
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating SCR fault/failure detected 90 min after the initial
flashing warning. Up to 65% torque reduction and 40%
continuously engine speed reduction within 40 min of engine
flashing
running time. Contact your local authorised
dealer for repair.
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating SCR fault/failure detected 240 min after the
flashing initial warning.
continuously Up to 80% torque reduction within 30 min of
flashing engine running time. Contact your local
authorised dealer for repair.
’A’ + ’B’ pulsating Emergency re--start is active.
flashing No engine power loss. Engine will shutdown after
continuously 30 s of continued operation. Contact your local
flashing authorised dealer for repair.
30
SCR system reset symbols and validation re--start counter
Visual Indicator Indicator Audible Description

display light light status alarm
warning
-- -- Engine start required to perform system reset.
Validation re--start counter is enabled. Follow the
x/3 instructions on the machine display.
flashing 4s/
continuously
-- 3s pulsating Exhaust temperature is low.

x/3
Operate the machine for approximately 20 min.
at a minimum of 50% load to check SCR system
flashing 4s/ performance
continuously
-- 3s pulsating SCR system test in progress.

Maintain current operating conditions.
x/3 If all three validation re--starts have been used
and the system has not been reset, the machine
flashing 4s/
continuously
is limited to emergency re--starts only. Contact
your local authorised dealer for repair.
NOTE: x/3 denotes the number of remaining re--start attempts out of 3 possible validation re--starts.
2--85
Resetting the Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR) system
After a failure or warning has been set, the SCR system must perform automatic tests to determine if failures
or warnings have been resolved. The system must perform the following actions in order to recognise the
resolved failures or warnings and reset itself.
 For DEF/Adblue level warnings:

 Key switch must be cycled OFF then ON.
 For poor DEF/Adblue quality warnings:
 Machine must be operated for approximately 20 min at a minimum of 50% load.
 For SCR system warnings, one of the following conditions must occur, depending on the exact cause of the
warning:
 Requires the machine to be operated for approximately 20 min at a minimum of 50% load to operate
the SCR system.
 Requires starting and running the engine, but does not require the SCR system to operate.
 Requires the key switch to be cycled OFF then ON.
Validation re--starts
Validation re--starts allow operation of the machine for up to 30 min without power loss after a poor DEF/Adblue
quality or SCR system fault has been detected . Up to three re--starts are permitted. Re--starts are counted if
either of the following conditions are met:
 Engine speed exceeds 1000 RPM
 Engine running time exceeds 5 min

Normal operation will resume if a reset is detected within the 30 min window.
If a reset is not detected within 30 min, power loss will occur as described in the table above.
If all three validation re--starts have been used and the system has not been reset, the machine is limited to
emergency re--starts only. Contact your local authorised dealer for repair.
Emergency re--start
NOTE: Emergency re--starts are only enabled after the allowable number of validation re--starts have expired.
If full power loss is experienced, it may be impossible for the machine to move under its own power. Emergency
re--starts are available to provide the capability to move the machine.
 Allows 30 s of operation without power loss.
 After 30 s the engine shuts down automatically.
 There is no limit to the number of emergency re--starts.
2--86
MAINTENANCE DISPLAYS and INFORMATION
PANEL WARNING ALARM CAUSE ACTION

DMD
LAMP LAMP
Amber
flashing/ -- Alternator not charging.
continuous
Amber
Engine intake filter
-- flashing/ --
blocked.
continuous
Amber
Water contamination
-- flashing/ Non critical
in the fuel.
continuous
These symbols advise of
Amber a fault that may be critical
Transmission/Hydraulic
-- flashing/ -- to the operation of the
oil filter blocked.
continuous tractor.
Amber
Stop the tractor as soon as
-- flashing/ -- Vaccum switch blocked.
possible, investigate the
continuous
Amber
Transmission vane pump If the fault cannot be easily
-- flashing/ --
oil filter blocked (CVT). rectified, consult your
continuous
authorised dealer.
Red
Transmission piston pump
-- flashing/ Critical
boost pressure too low
continuous
Amber HEAVY maintenance
-- flashing/ -- schedule due in
continuous ’xx’ hours*.
LIGHT maintenance
-- -- -- schedule due in
’xx’ hours*.
* ’xx’ represents number of hours before next service.
2--87
BRAKE CONTROLS AND OPERATION
Tractor Brake Controls
Handbrake
A conventional parking brake lever is installed to the

left of the driver’s seat.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up. A

warning light will illuminate in the instrument panel
when the parking brake is applied. To release, ease
the lever up further, depress the button (1) on the end
and lower the lever fully.
IMPORTANT: Ensure that the parking brake is fully

released before driving off.
153
Electronic Park Brake

(where fitted)
In addition to the handbrake, the transmission on

your tractor may be fitted with an electronically
operated park brake (EPB). This is engaged using
the shuttle lever.
EPB will automatically engage at key--off irrespective

of the shuttle lever position or if the operator leaves
the seat. for more than 1 second with transmission
drive disengaged.
From the Neutral position (3), move the shuttle lever 154
downward against spring pressure and forward to
the park brake position (5).
Moving the shuttle lever to the electyronic park brake

position while the tractor is in motion will cause the
transmission to slow the tractor to a stop and then the
brake will be applied.
When the electronic park brake is engaged, ’P’ will

appear in the transmission display to confirm
engagement.
To disengage the brake, move the shuttle lever from

position (5) to the drive position. The symbol in the
display will disappear, the park brake will release and
drive will be engaged.
2--88
EPB can also be released by moving the shuttle lever

to the drive position with the clutch pedal depressed.
The symbol in the display will disappear and the park
brake will disengage. The tractor will drive when the
clutch pedal is released.
Alternatively, EPB may be released without selecting

drive by moving the shuttle lever to the Neutral
position (3). Before carrying out this procedure, the
handbrake MUST be applied as the tractor may
inadvertently move.
The park brake is automatically engaged in the

following situation. 155
 At engine stop (key--off).
 The operator leaves the seat for more than one

second.
To disengage the brake, sit in the seat, depress the

clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever into forward
or reverse drive.
2--89
Manual Release of the Electronic Park Brake
In the unlikely event that EPB cannot be disengaged

using the shuttle lever, it is possible to release the
brake manually. Before releasing the brake, apply
the handbrake and chock the rear wheels to prevent
unexpected tractor movement.
The park brake unit is located at the rear of the tractor

on the left--hand side of the cab. Access to the motor
drive can be gained through a hole in the bottom of
the guard.
NOTE: For clarity, the illustration shows the park 156

brake assembly with the cover removed.
Remove the rubber plug (1) from the end of the motor
drive and insert the special tool (2) upwards through
the guard until it connects with the motor drive shaft.
It may be necessary to rotate the tool slowly until it
is felt to engage with the motor drive.
NOTE: The release tool is attached to the handbrake

cover in the cab.
Rotate the tool clockwise until the park brake is

released. When it has been released, remove the
tool and re--attach to the handbrake cover. Replace
the rubber plug in the motor drive.
157
NOTE: After the park brake has been manually
released, tractor speed will be restricted to 2 Km/h
(1.2 MPH) until the fault is rectified and the park
brake has been re--programmed.
2--90
Re--Programme Electronic Park Brake

Operation
In the event EPB has to be mechanically released,

or if there has been a failure of the power supply to
the lock, operation of the park brake will need to be
re--configured.
Should a fault occur, the brake engaged symbol will

appear in transmission display, this will be
accompanied by the park brake and amber warning
lights flashing.
158
With the vehicle stationary, move the shuttle lever to

position (3), park brake disengaged. Release the
handbrake then depress and hold the footbrakes.
With the footbrakes applied, move the shuttle lever

to the engaged position (5). The park brake symbol
will appear in the display to confirm engagement.
Once the EPB is fully engaged, normal operation will
be reinstated.
If the fault does not clear, consult your authorised

dealer.
NOTE: In an emergency, the tractor may be driven 159

a short distance with the park brake engaged,
however the speed will be limited to a maximum of
2 Km/h (1.2 MPH).
2--91
Electronic Park Brake (EPB) -- Auto Apply Inhibit
Where it is necessary to leave the tractor in neutral

and temporarily prevent the self--engagement of
EPB or Park Lock (with engine running or for key--off)
with the operator out of the driver’s seat, this can be
achieved by carrying out the following procedures:
NOTICE: The following procedures are independent

of each other and must be selected individually.
1. EPB Auto Apply Inhibit -- Engine Off.
This allows the tractor to be maneuvered with engine

shut off and EPL temporarily released.
1. With the Key start in the ON position and EPB

released.
2. Press and hold the shuttle lever fully down (to
position 4) and depress the brake pedals for
more than 3 seconds.
160
3. The EPB inhibit symbol will be displayed and
park brake warning lamp will be displayed.
4. Key--off whilst holding shuttle lever and brake
pedals down. The EPB will not be applied.
5. If the tractor is keyed on again, standard
operation will be returned.
NOTICE: This procedure will not release the EPB
if already applied.
161
2. EPB Auto Apply Inhibit -- Engine Running.
With the engine running and the EPB released:
1. Press and hold the shuttle lever fully down (to

position 4) and depress the brake pedals for
2. The EPB inhibit symbol will be displayed and
park brake warning lamp will be displayed.
3. Release the shuttle lever to position 3 and
release the brake pedals.
The operator can now leave the seat. The EPB will
162
not be applied.
2--92
The instrument display will cycle between the

standard display information and the EPB inhibit icon
every 5 seconds.
If the key switch is turned OFF and ON standard

operation will be returned.
If the shuttle lever is shifted to park, forward or

reverse, standard operation will be returned. Driver
must be in the seat and cycle the clutch pedal to
engage drive.
NOTICE: This procedure will not release the EPB

if already applied.
163
Footbrakes
The brakes on your tractor are power assisted and

actuated by the two foot pedals (1) and (2). When
operating in the field they may be unlocked and
operated independently, to aid turning in confined
spaces.
When independent braking is not required, ensure

both pedals are locked together to provide normal
braking.
WARNING
On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle 164
can be programmed to automatically engage at
speeds between 1 k/mh (0.62 MPH) and 8.5 Km/h (4
MPH) to provide four wheel braking when the brakes
are applied. Consult your authorised dealer.
Owners should be aware of the effectiveness of four
wheel braking which greatly enhances braking
performance. Appropriate care should be exercised
during heavy braking.
IMPORTANT: Hydraulic and air applied trailer

brakes will only operate when both brake pedals are
applied.
WARNING
For your safety, always lock the brake pedals
together when travelling at transport speeds or if a
hydraulically braked trailer is attached to the tractor.
To lock the pedals together, engage the locking pin
in the right pedal and swivel the latch (1), over the left
pedal support to lock, as shown in Figure 164.
NOTE: In some countries a warning light will be 165

displayed on the instrument panel when the brake
pedals are unlocked.
2--93
POWER COMMAND TRANSMISSION
Clutch and Throttle Operation
Clutch/Inching Pedal
A clutch pedal (1) is provided but is not required for

gear changes or forward/reverse shuttle operations.
The clutch pedal is required only for positioning the

tractor to attach equipment or if operating in confined
spaces where the low ratios do not provide a slow
enough speed to give precise control.
NOTE: The clutch pedal incorporates a safety start

device and must be depressed when starting the
tractor engine.
166
NOTE: To avoid premature wear, do not use the
clutch pedal as a footrest.
Foot Throttle
The foot throttle (1) may be used independently of

the hand throttle to control the speed of the tractor.
It is recommended that you use the foot throttle when
driving on the highway.
NOTE: When the foot throttle is released, engine

speed will reduce to the level set by the hand throttle.
167
Hand Throttle
The hand throttle (1) may be used independently of

the foot throttle to control engine speed. Move the
throttle lever forward to increase engine speed.
IMPORTANT: Always return the hand throttle to the

idle position when using the foot throttle for road
transport applications.
168
2--94
Transmission Operation
Power Command is an electronically controlled full

powershift transmission of an advanced design that
offers many automated functions for easier
operation.
IMPORTANT: In cold conditions where the
temperature of the transmission oil falls below 10C
(50F), upshifts may be restriced to the lower gears
until the transmission oil temperature is sufficienly
wamed for full operation. See page 3--5.
Subject to legal requirements in your country, the

following transmissions are available
50 km/h transmission.
19 forward and 6 reverse ratios
plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range
IMPORTANT: When travelling at high road speeds

with trailed or semi--mounted equipment attached to
the tractor, ensure the equipment is rated for 50 km/h
operation in respect to its construction, brakes and
tyres.
40 km/h Economy transmission

plus optional 10 x 6 creeper range.
40 km/h transmission
30 km/h transmission
(18th. gear cannot be selected)
Details of creeper gear operation will be found on

page 2--112.
IMPORTANT: A tractor fitted with Power Command

transmission cannot be tow--started and must not be
towed other than to remove it from a field or onto a
trailer or truck. When towing the tractor, the speed
should not exceed 5k/mh (3.1 MPH) with the engine
switched off, or 10 k/mh (6.2 MPH) with the engine
running.
2--95
Powershift Control
Power Command transmission is operated by

means of a powershift control incorporating two push
buttons. The buttons are used to make upward or
downward gear changes on the move, even when
performing operations such as ploughing, etc.
Each one of the gear ratios may be sequentially
selected using the upshift button (2) or downshift
button (1). A digital display (3) indicates the gear ratio
selected. It is not necessary to depress the clutch
pedal when using the upshift or downshift buttons.
169
The powershift control may be repositioned to suit

the operator. Loosen the clamp knob (2), move the
control to the most comfortable position by rotating
left or right, or by extending the arm forwards or
rearwards. Tighten the knob securely to clamp the
powershift control in the new position.
To adjust the height of the armrest, loosen the knob
(1). Grasp the armrest at the front and rear then lift
or lower the complete assembly. Re--tighten the
clamp knob securely.
170
2--96
Shuttle Lever
To select the direction of travel, lift the shuttle lever

from the neutral position (3) towards the steering
wheel and move it to the forward (1) or reverse
position (2). The shuttle lever will remain in the drive
position. Symbols in the transmission display will
confirm the direction of travel selected.
If the optional electronic park brake is fitted, move the

lever from position (5) to select drive direction. When
stationary, move the lever to position (5) to engage
the electronic park brake. See page 2--88.
Where the park brake is not fitted, the shuttle lever

will not have positions (4) and (5). 171
NOTE: It is not necessary to depress the clutch pedal

when operating the shuttle lever.
NOTE: If the shuttle lever is moved to the forward or

reverse position with the parking brake engaged, an
audible alarm will be heard.
NOTE: To select forward or reverse drive the

operator must be in the tractor seat. If the shuttle
lever is inadvertently moved from the neutral position
without the operator in the seat, one of the following
actions must be taken to re--enable drive:--
With the operator in the seat and the shuttle lever in
neutral, depress and release the clutch pedal.
OR
Release the parking brake with the shuttle lever in
the neutral position.
WARNING
To prevent inadvertent tractor movement, always
stop the engine, place the shuttle lever in neutral and
firmly apply the parking brake before leaving the
tractor. The transmission will not prevent the tractor
from rolling when the engine is shut off.
NOTE: When operating in temperatures below --18 C

(0 F) with cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle
operations, as far as practicable, until the oil has
warmed up.
2--97
Driving the Tractor
Start the engine with the shuttle lever in neutral and

the clutch pedal depressed. The LCD on the
instrument panel will display ’N’. This will be repeated
in transmission gear display by a frame surrounding
the ‘N’ (for neutral) symbol. The figure ‘7’ will also
appear in the upper gear display. (When the tractor
is initially started, the transmission will automatically
select 7th. gear).
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in neutral
and the clutch pedal depressed. 172
For forward travel, with the engine idling, pull the

shuttle lever toward the steering wheel, against light
spring-pressure, and move it up. The frame around
the ’N’ will move up to enclose the forward direction
symbol. Each time the shuttle lever is operated, the
’frame’ will move to highlight the forward, neutral or
reverse symbol.
173
Once moving, select the required gear with the

upshift button (2) or downshift button (1), as
previously described. An example of the display that
you will see is shown at (3), where the upper tractor
symbol indicates forward and ‘10’ indicates that 10th.
gear is selected. The LCD segment for 10th. gear will
also be displayed.
An alternative lower or higher gear may be

preselected before pulling away. However, if a gear
higher than 12 is selected then the electronic control
will select 12, this being the highest gear permissible
when pulling away from a standstill.
174
2--98
If, for example, 15th. gear is selected before pulling

away, the 15th. gear segment will flash and the 12th.
gear segment will be steady. The tractor will pull
away in 12th. gear and change up, sequentially, to
the selected gear as engine load, engine speed and
road speed are optimised. The segments for 13th.
and 14th. gears will appear, as these ratios are
automatically selected, then the 15th. gear segment
will stop flashing and become steady as that gear is
reached.
NOTE: In very cold conditions it may be necessary

to allow the transmission oil to warm up before
attempting to shift into the higher gears. Should this
occur, a warning symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display. When the symbol disappears from the
display the transmission will function normally. See
page 2--80 for details.
To reverse the direction of travel, reduce engine

speed, pull the shuttle lever toward the steering
wheel, then move it down.
NOTE: When changing from forward to reverse

travel, the nearest available ratio will be selected. As
there are six ratios available in reverse, the ground
speed in reverse gear may be different to the speed
in the selected forward gear.
175
When performing shuttle operations in a high gear,
for example forward F15 selected, when the shuttle
lever is moved to the reverse position, the
transmission will select the highest available ratio in
reverse (R6).
When the shuttle lever is moved forward again, ratio

F12 will be selected and the corresponding segment
will appear in the display.
176
2--99
Auto Shift Function
Engaging Auto shift permits automatic gear

changing in the forward ratios. Two auto shift ranges
are available:
Auto Field mode --

a range of five gears may be selected between
ratios 1 and 14.
Auto Transport mode --

1 -- 17 (30 km/h transmission)
or, 1 -- 18 (40 km/h transmission)
or, 1 -- 19 (50 km/h and 40 km/h (E) transmissions)
177
Auto Transport Mode
While travelling forward in any gear between 1st and

14th, press and release the AUTO function switch
Figure 177, this will provide Auto shifting from 1st
gear upwards.
If required, the range of Auto shift gears can be

programmed to provide a higher Start Off Gear
(SOG) than the default gear (1st). Any gear between
1 and 12 can be selected as the Start Off Gear. To set
the SOG, carry out the following procedure.
 With the key-start off, move the shuttle lever to

the forward gear position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the

programme procedure.
 Press and hold down the AUTO switch

Figure 177.
 While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the

key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The
central display will show ’OPt’.
 Release the AUTO switch and, using the clock 178

’H’ or ’M’ buttons, select ’OPt 2’. Pause for two
seconds until the display changes to show the
currently selected Start Off Gear.
2--100
 Using the clock buttons again, select a new Start

Off Gear between 1 and 12. Depressing the hour
button (1) will select a higher gear, depressing
the minute button (2) will select a lower gear.
 When the new SOG has been selected, turn off

the key--start to store the setting.
Once selected, the transmission will make automatic

shifts, up and down from the Start Off Gear to the
highest gear, as dictated by engine torque, speed,
and the use of brakes and foot throttle.
179
Programming Start Off Gear with Colour

Display (where fitted)
. Work condition
. Driveline
Touch the Auto Trans. Lower Gear display (1), a

pop--up menu will appear listing the alternate SOG
gears. Select the new SOG by touching the
appropriate figure. The setting will be automatically
saved and the display will return to the Driveline
screen.
180
. Back to return to the main screen.
NOTE: Where a situation demands, i.e moving off on

a steep hill with a fully loaded trailer, a lower start off
gear than the one programmed may be required. In
this instance, the tractor will move off in the SOG but
will quickly downshift to a lower gear for acceleration.
Once moving, the tractor will upshift again. This will
not affect the SOG setting.
If the tractor is brought to a halt by depressing the

clutch pedal with a gear below the SOG currently
engaged, then the tractor will move off in the same
gear when the clutch pedal is released. As the speed
increases the transmission will automatically upshift
and the SOG setting will not be affected.
The driver can, if required, manually select a higher

gear to move off i.e. on a downhill slope.
2--101
During road transport operations, it is possible to

override the auto function and manually select a
lower gear by depressing the downshift button.
Providing the downshift does not exceed the preset
auto shift load and speed parameters, the auto
function will remain engaged.
To disengage the Auto shift function and return to

manual shifting, press and release the AUTO switch
Figure 181.
Alternatively, Auto Transport may be cancelled by

using the shuttle lever to select reverse.
Shifting in Auto Field Mode
While operating in any forward gear between 1 and

11, press and release the AUTO function switch. This
will cause the transmission to momentarily upshift to
establish a torque output value from the engine. As
the engine speed drops the transmission will
downshift again.
This sequence will establish the shift parameters and

these will be entered into the auto memory.
Dependent on load and speed, the transmission is
now able to make automatic shifts within a span of
five gears. 181
The gear currently selected will already be shown in

the Display of Gears with the appropriate LCD
segment. When Auto Field is engaged a plough
symbol will appear in the lower display.
Example 1: While operating in 7th. gear, ‘7’ is
displayed along with the 7th. gear segment. If the
AUTO switch is pressed, the segments for both 5th.
and 9th. gear will flash to indicate that automatic
upshifts or downshifts can occur within the 5 to 9 gear
span.
Example 2: With 13th gear selected and displayed,

press the AUTO function switch. The segments for
11th and 14th gears will start to flash indicating the 182
tractor will automatically shift between 11th and 14th
gears.
2--102
Auto Shifting and ’Go To’ modes
If the transmission is already in ’Go To’ mode (see

page 2--107) when the Auto Field function is selected,
the lowest ’Go To’ gear will become the lowest gear
of the Auto span unless the current operating gear
is lower. If the currently selected gear is lower, then
it will become the lowest ’Go To’ gear. With both Auto
Field and ’Go To’ modes selected, the lowest limit
gear for both functions will always be the same.
Changing the Auto Shift Point
IMPORTANT: Changes to the Auto Shift point must

be made before engaging the Auto Shift function.
To suit different applications, the point at which the

transmission makes an automatic gear shift may be
adjusted from the default setting of 20%. Auto Shift
gear changes are related to an increase or decrease
in engine speed which can be set at 5, 10, 15, 20, 25
or 30 percent.
NOTE: For Auto Transport operations the shift point

will automatically default to 20% and remain at that
setting.
With the shift point set at 10%, a transmission upshift

will occur every time the engine speed increases by
10%. Consequently, as the engine speed decreases
by the same amount, the transmission will make a
downshift.
It is recommended that during field operations the
shift point is set at a low percentage.
To change the shift point, depress and hold the

AUTO function switch for at least one second. The
current shift point appears at the top of the display
and the ’auto’ and ’ramp’ symbols begin to flash.
Depress the AUTO function switch repeatedly to
scroll through the shift points.
With the new shift point selected, release the AUTO

switch and pause for five seconds. The new setting
will be memorised and the display will return to
normal.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), electronic
programme settings made during tractor operation
are transferred from the operating memory to the 183
main memory. To provide sufficient time for the data
to transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
2--103
Changing the Gear Span
The range of five auto gears may be expanded both

up and down on the move, using the downshift and
upshift buttons (1) and (2).
Example 1: Expanding the upper gear limit:

When operating in Auto mode in 7th. gear, as
described previously, the segments for 5th. and 9th.
gear will flash. On reaching 9th gear press the upshift
button (2) once to select 10th gear. When the tractor
has upshifted to 10th, press the button again to
select 11th gear. Auto shifting is now provided
between 5th and 11th gears. The segment for 5th will 184
continue to flash identifying this as the lowest limit
gear currently available.
Example 2: Expanding the lower gear limit:

Assuming 5th has been selected as the lowest Auto
gear, slow the tractor until 5th gear has been
engaged. Then, using the downshift button (1),
select 4th gear and further reduce speed until 4th
gear engages. 3rd gear may now be selected if
required. Applying this technique it is possible to
select gears 1 to 14 in the Auto Field.
2--104
Reducing the gear span
If necessary, the number of gears available in the

Auto Field range may be reduced by using the upshift
and downshift buttons in the following way.
Example 1: Reducing the upper gear limit:

With the upper gear limit set as 9th in the display,
slow the tractor until the desired upper auto gear is
engaged. Momentarily depress the downshift button
(1) Figure 184 until the flashing segements above
the currently engaged gear are removed, the
engaged gear is now the new upper auto gear.
185
Example 2: Reducing the lower gear limit:
With the tractor stopped and the engine running,
depress the AUTO function switch. Momentarily
depress the upshift button (2) Figure 184, to move
the lower auto gear upwards until the desired gear is
engaged. With the flashing segments below this
removed, the engaged gear becomes the new lower
auto gear
Changing gear shift threshold
The point at which the gears change is established

by the original throttle setting and torque applied to
the engine at the time the AUTO function switch was
depressed. It is possible to alter the upshift or
downshift point to a higher or lower engine rpm if
required.
Higher ERPM: Move the hand throttle (2), to a higher
erpm setting than originally set. The parameters for
the upshift will automatically update and gear shifts
will occur at a higher engine speed.
Lower ERPM: Reset the hand throttle (2), to provide 186
a lower engine speed than previously set and
depress the upshift button (1). The transmission will
upshift and the shift parameters will be updated. Auto
gear shifting will now occur at a lower engine speed.
NOTE: Changing the gear shift parameters may
cause the shift point for one or more gears to fall
outside the original 5 gear span. If this should occur,
widen the gear span using the procedure outlined on
the previous page.
2--105
Standby mode
Auto Field and Auto Transport function will be put

into the standby mode when:
 The 3 point hitch is raised.
 The clutch pedal is depressed.
 Shuttle lever is moved from the forward drive
position.
While in the standby mode the gear segment LCD’s
will continue to flash (unless reverse direction is
selected) and the established shift parameters will
remain in the Auto function memory.
To exit the programme
The Auto Field function may be exited in two ways:

1. Momentarily depress the AUTO function switch
while in Auto Field mode.
2. Engage creeper gears.
187
2--106
Go To Mode
An additional feature on your tractor is the ‘Go To’

mode. The ’Go To’ system can be programmed to
downshift to a lower gear below that of the working
gear whenever the implement is raised. This feature
can be further enhanced by selecting the Auto Field
function whereby the tractor will also automatically
upshift again on lowering the implement.
To programme ’Go To’ mode, proceed as follows.
With the engine running, press and hold the AUTO

function switch . 188
Within one second, press and release the top of the

fast raise switch (1) to raise the implement. Continue
to press and hold the AUTO function switch.
The gear display will show 7th gear along with the 7th
gear segment.
With the AUTO function switch still depressed, select

the required ‘Go To’ gear using the upshift or
downshift buttons.
The segment for the ’Go To’ gear selected will flash
in the display, release the AUTO switch.
189
To activate ’Go To’ mode, lower the implement by
momentarily depressing the bottom of the fast raise
switch. When the fast raise switch is used to raise the
implement the ’Go To’ gear will be engaged.
NOTE: Auto shift in the field range is disengaged

every time the implement is raised and re-engaged
when it is lowered.
190
2--107
To disengage ’Go To’ mode and return to normal

shifting, press and hold the AUTO switch. Within one
second depress the fast raise switch (1) Figure 190,
to raise the implement.
NOTE: With Auto shift selected in conjunction with

the ’Go To’ mode, the lowest gear in the Auto function
becomes the ’Go To’ gear.
191
Speed Matching
When decelerating in the transport range of gears,

the transmission is able to automatically select a
gear to match engine speed and road speed.
As the tractor slows, either depress and release the

clutch pedal or, momentarily place the shuttle lever
in neutral. The transmission will automatically select
a lower gear to match engine speed with road speed.
NOTE: Speed Matching will function down to the

Start Off Gear.
If the clutch pedal is depressed and the tractor

stopped, Speed Matching will enter standby mode.
Releasing the clutch pedal will re--engage the Speed
Matching function.
If required, the operator can manually select a

different gear to move off. Providing the chosen gear
is within the auto shift range, Speed Matching will
continue to operate across the full range of gears
from the Start Off Gear to the highest gear.
2--108
Programming Reverse Gear Ratios
When changing from forward to reverse, the

transmission will normally select the same or closest
possible ratio in reverse as was selected for forward
travel.
For applications such as loader work, the Power

Command transmission offers the ability to
programme a reverse gear ratio up to three ratios
higher or lower than the currently engaged forward
gear ratio.
To programme an alternative reverse gear, proceed

as follows:
 Turn the key-start switch off.
 Move the shuttle lever to the forward gear

position.
NOTE: Do not depress the clutch pedal during the

programme procedure.
192
 Press and hold down the AUTO switch.
 While holding down the AUTO switch, turn on the

key-start switch (but do not start the engine). The
central display will show ’OPt’.
193
 Release the AUTO switch and, using the clock
’H’ or ’M’ buttons, select ’OPt 1’.
194
2--109
To programme a higher reverse ratio
 Pause for two seconds and the display will

change to show the currently programmed
reverse ratio.
NOTE: If the reverse ratio has not been previously

changed, the figure will be ’0’.
 Press the upshift button once, twice or three

times, as required. The display will show ‘1’, ‘2’
or ‘3’. This indicates that when reverse is
selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios
higher than the forward gear ratio. 195
To programme a lower reverse ratio
 Press the downshift button once, twice or three

times, as required. The display will show ‘--1’, ‘--2’
or ‘--3’. This indicates that when reverse is
selected the gear will be one, two or three ratios
lower than the forward gear ratio.
To exit the programme
 Turn the key-start switch off. The transmission is

now programmed.
NOTE: Remember that only six reverse gears are

available. Consequently, if travelling forward in ratio
F13 or above, the transmission will always behave as
if ratio F12 (the highest ratio in the field range) is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios lower in reverse, then
R4 will be selected.
Conversely, if travelling forward in ratios F1--6, the 196

transmission will always behave as if ratio 7 is
selected. Therefore, if the transmission has been
programmed to select 2 ratios higher in reverse, then
R3 will be selected.
2--110
Programming Reverse Gear Ratios with

Colour Display (where fitted)
When changing from forward to reverse, the

transmission will normally select the same or closest
possible ratio in reverse as was selected for forward
travel.
For applications such as loader work, this

transmission offers the ability to set the reverse gear
up to three ratios higher or lower than the current
forward ratio.
To change the reverse ratio offset, proceed as

follows:
. Work condition
. Driveline
Touch the FWD/REV Gear Offset display (1) a

pop--up menu will appear from which the gear offset
can be selected. Choose the gear offset (+ or --) by
touching the appropriate figure. The setting will be
automatically saved and the display will return to the
Driveline screen.
197
To set the forward/reverse gear offset to standard (no
offset) touch +0.
. Back to return to the main screen.
2--111
CREEPER GEARS
(where fitted)
For operations requiring extra low ground speeds,

creeper gears are available.
With the reduction gears, an additional 10 forward

and 6 reverse creeper gear ratios are provided. The
reduction gear set has the effect of reducing the
ratios within the main transmission to provide very
low operating speeds.
The creeper gears are selected by means of a rocker

switch located on the right-hand control console.
With the engine running, clutch depressed and the

shuttle lever in neutral, apply and hold down the
tractor footbrakes. Momentarily depress the upper
part of the switch to engage the creeper gears.
198
The creep speed symbol (1), will appear flashing in

the transmission display. When the creep gears are
fully engaged the symbol will cease to flash and
become steady.
To disengage creeper gears, repeat the above

procedure and depress the selector switch again.
The creep speed symbol will cease to illuminate.
IMPORTANT: The creeper gears offer very low

ground speeds. Do not use the low gearing
advantage to apply excessive draft loads to the
tractor.
199
2--112
Error Codes
In the unlikely event of a fault occurring in the

transmission controls or electronic circuit, the
malfunction symbol (1) and a four-digit error code
(2), will appear in the Dot Matrix Display on the 1
instrument panel. Error codes for the transmission
will start with the figure ’2’.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the

type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. In 2
this event, the tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become

disabled, contact your authorised dealer and report 200
the error code displayed.
There are a number of ’action reqired’ error codes

which can also appear in the Dot Matrix Display,
these are listed below.
Error
Code Action Required
P Park brake on, release brake lever.
CP Depress clutch pedal to enable
transmission (restore drive).
N Place the shuttle lever in neutral.
Transmission Calibration
Should transmission shifts become slow or jerky, the

clutches in the transmission may require
re--calibrating. Consult your authorised dealer.
2--113
Ground Speed Charts
The ground speed of your tractor may be displayed

on the instrument panel. If your tractor is equipped
with radar then the ground speed displayed will be a
true reading. Tractors without radar will display a
ground speed that is subject to minor inaccuracies
due to the effects of wheel slip, tyre pressures,
change of tyre size, etc. See Calibrating the Ground
Speed on page 2--45.
The charts starting on page 2--115 show the ground

speeds in km/h and MPH. To find the road speed for
your tractor in any given gear ratio, use the column
with your rear tyre size in the heading.
IMPORTANT: The gear speeds shown in the charts

are approximate and will vary depending on the
make of tyre, pressure and load.
If tyres of a different size are fitted to your tractor,

ensure the Ground Speed Calibration procedure has
been carried out to provide an accurate ground
speed in the instrument panel display (see page
2--45).
Calculating P.T.O. Speeds
The gear speeds shown in the ground speed charts

are calculated at a rated engine speed of 2200 r.p.m.
To determine the ground speeds for P.T.O.
operations divide the ground speeds in the chart by
the rated engine speed and multiply by the P.T.O.
engine speed.
For example, to determine the ground speed at 540

rev/min P.T.O. speed in gear F8 (6.3 Km/h) use the
following calculation:
6.3 (Km/h)  2200 (rated speed) x 1950 (P.T.O. erpm)

= 5.58 Km/h
2--114
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Models T7.220, T7.235 and T7.250
Gear Ratio Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
Km/h MPH Km/h MPH Km/h MPH
F1 1.7 1.0 1.8 1.1 1.9 1.1
F2 2.1 1.3 2.2 1.3 2.3 1.4
F3 2.4 1.4 2.6 1.6 2.7 1.6
F4 3.0 1.8 3.1 1.9 3.3 2.0
F5 3.6 2.2 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4
F6 4.3 2.6 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9
F7 5.0 3.1 5.3 3.2 5.6 3.4
F8 6.0 3.7 6.3 3.9 6.7 4.1
F9 7.2 4.4 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0
F10 8.7 5.4 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0
F11 10.5 6.5 11.1 6.8 11.7 7.2
F12 12.5 7.7 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7
F13 14.4 8.9 15.3 9.5 16.2 10.0
F14 17.4 10.8 18.4 11.4 19.5 12.1
F15 20.9 12.9 22.1 13.7 23.4 14.5
F16 25.1 15.5 26.6 16.5 28.2 17.5
F17 30.2 18.7 32.0 19.8 33.9 21.0
F18 36.3 22.5 38.5 23.9 40.7 25.2
F19 46.1 28.6 48.9 30.3 51.7 32.1
*F19 E 38.3 23.7 42.5 26.4 42.5 26.4
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.8 2.3 4.0 2.4 4.2 2.6
R2 4.6 2.8 4.8 2.9 5.1 3.1
R3 5.5 3.4 5.8 3.6 6.1 3.7
R4 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
R5 7.9 4.9 8.4 5.2 8.9 5.5
R6 9.6 5.9 10.1 6.2 10.7 6.6
2--115
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Models T7.220, T7.235 and T7.250
Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.28 0.17 0.30 0.18 0.32 0.19
F2 0.34 0.21 0.36 0.22 0.38 0.23
F3 0.41 0.25 0.44 0.27 0.46 0.28
F4 0.50 0.31 0.53 0.32 0.56 0.34
F5 0.60 0.37 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41
F6 0.72 0.44 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50
F7 0.83 0.51 0.88 0.54 0.93 0.57
F8 1.00 0.62 1.06 0.65 1.12 0.69
F9 1.20 0.74 1.28 0.79 1.35 0.83
F10 1.45 0.90 1.54 0.95 1.62 1.0
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.63 0.39 0.67 0.41 0.71 0.44
R2 0.76 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
R3 0.92 0.57 0.97 0.60 1.03 0.64
R4 1.10 0.68 1.17 0.72 1.24 0.77
R5 1.33 0.82 1.41 0.87 1.49 0.92
R6 1.60 0.99 1.69 1.05 1.79 1.11
2--116
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) for 30 Km/h (17 x 6), 40 Km/h
Transmission (18 x 6) or 50 Km/h Transmission (19 x 6), Model T7.260
Gear Ratio Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Standard Speeds
F1 1.5 0.9 1.6 0.9 1.7 1.0
F2 1.9 1.1 2.0 1.2 2.1 1.3
F3 2.3 1.4 2.4 1.4 2.5 1.5
F4 2.7 (1.6 2.9 1.8 3.1 1.9
F5 3.4 2.1 3.6 2.2 3.6 2.2
F6 4.1 2.5 4.4 2.7 4.6 2.8
F7 4.6 2.8 4.9 3.0 5.1 3.1
F8 5.5 3.4 5.9 3.6 6.2 3.8
F9 6.6 4.1 7.0 4.3 7.4 4.5
F10 8.0 4.9 8.5 5.2 9.0 5.5
F11 10.0 6.2 10.6 6.5 11.2 6.9
F12 12.0 7.4 12.7 7.8 13.5 8.3
F13 13.3 8.2 14.1 8.7 14.9 9.2
F14 16.0 9.9 17.0 10.5 16.0 9.9
F15 19.3 11.9 20.4 12.6 21.6 13.4
F16 23.2 14.4 24.6 15.2 26.0 16.1
F17 26.9 16.7 30.7 19.0 32.4 20.1
F18 34.6 21.5 36.9 22.9 39.0 24.2
F19 42.6 26.4 45.2 28.0 47.8 29.7
*F19 E 35.6 22.1 37.8 23.4 39.9 24.7
NOTE: Ratios F18 and F19 are not available on 30 Km/h transmissions.
NOTE: Ratio F19 is only available with 50 Km/h and 40 Km/h economy transmissions.
NOTE: *With 40 Km/h economy transmission the maximum speed in F19E is electronically regulated.
Reverse Ratios -- Standard Speeds

R1 3.5 2.1 3.7 2.2 3.9 2.4
R2 4.2 2.6 4.5 2.7 4.7 2.9
R3 5.1 3.1 5.4 3.3 5.7 3.5
R4 6.1 3.7 6.5 4.0 6.8 4.2
R5 7.6 4.7 8.1 5.0 8.5 5.2
R6 9.2 5.7 9.7 6.0 10.3 6.4
2--117
GROUND SPEEDS in Km/h and (MPH) at Rated Engine Speed (2200 rev/min) with optional Creeper Gears,
Model T7.260
Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size Rear Tyre Size

Gear Ratio
18.4R--38 20.8R--38 20.8R--42
Forward Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
F1 0.26 0.16 0.28 0.17 0.29 0.18
F2 0.32 0.19 0.33 0.20 0.35 0.21
F3 0.38 0.23 0.40 0.24 0.43 0.26
F4 0.46 0.28 0.49 0.30 0.51 0.31
F5 0.57 0.35 0.61 0.37 0.64 0.39
F6 0.69 0.42 0.73 0.45 0.77 0.47
F7 0.77 0.47 0.81 0.50 0.86 0.53
F8 0.92 0.57 0.98 0.60 1.04 0.64
F9 1.14 0.70 1.18 0.73 1.25 0.77
F10 1.34 0.83 1.42 0.88 1.50 0.93
Reverse Ratios -- Creeper Speeds
R1 0.58 0.36 0.62 0.38 0.66 0.41
R2 0.70 0.43 0.75 0.46 0.79 0.49
R3 0.85 0.52 0.90 0.55 0.95 0.59
R4 1.02 0.63 1.08 0.67 1.14 0.70
R5 1.27 0.78 1.35 0.83 1.43 0.88
R6 1.53 0.95 1.82 1.13 1.71 1.06
2--118
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
Four wheel drive tractors have a differential lock

installed in the front and rear axles to lock all four
wheels together in conditions where wheel slip may
occur. Two wheel drive tractors have a differential
lock in the rear axle only.
The differential locks are controlled by a spring

centred rocker switch on the console to the right of
the seat.
The differential lock(s) may be operated in manual

mode or automatic mode. To confirm mode selected, 201
the appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate
when engaged.
WARNING
Avoid using the differential lock at speeds above
8km/h (5 MPH) and never at speeds above 15 km/h
(9 MPH) or at any time when turning the tractor.
When engaged, the differential lock will make
steering the tractor very difficult.
IMPORTANT: If wheel spin is encountered, reduce

engine speed before engaging the differential lock,
to avoid shock loads to the transmission.
Operating in Manual Mode (all models)
In slippery conditions, momentarily depress the

bottom of the switch Figure 201 , to lock both wheels
together. The differential lock(s) will engage and a
warning light in the switch and on the instrument
panel (1) will light up.
When one or both brake pedals are applied or if the

switch is returned to the off (central) position,
disengagement will occur and the warning lights in
the switch and instrument panel will go out.
Alternatively, depress the bottom of the switch again
to disengage the differential lock(s). 202
NOTE: The lock(s) will remain engaged until traction

at the wheels equalises.
2--119
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage both front and rear differential locks in

automatic mode, depress the top of the switch. The
warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (1) Figure 204 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while the
differential locks are engaged.
NOTE: If the differential lock is active when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain active when the
key--start is switched on again.
In automatic mode, disengagement of the locks will 203

occur as follows:
Fast raise switch Temporary
activated (to raise the disengagement, will
rear 3--point hitch) re--engage when
3--point hitch is lowered
Either brake pedal is Temporary
applied disengagement
Both brake pedals are Differential lock
applied simultaneously remains engaged
Tractor speed exceeds Differential locks will
15 Km/h (9 MPH) permanently disengage
Front steering angle Temporary
exceeds pre--set limits* disengagement, will
(where fitted) re--engage when 204
steering angle is
reduced
Momentarily press the Differential locks will
top of the switch permanently disengage
NOTE: Where the dfferential locks are temporarily

disengaged, the warning light will flash until the locks
re--engage.
*Wheel speed 0 -- 10 Km/h (0 -- 6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeding 15 right, 13.5 left (9 and
7.7 with Supersteer). Differential lock will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
*Wheel speed is between 10 and 15 Km/h (6.2 and

9.3 MPH) and steering angle exceeding 5 right, 4.5
left (2 and 1.6 with Supersteer). Differential lock will
re--engage when the steering angle is reduced.
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.
2--120
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (where fitted)
Four wheel drive greatly improves traction in difficult

conditions. The drive to the front wheels is designed
to be engaged or disengaged with the tractor
stationary or moving.
NOTE: The drive to the front wheels is actuated by

a three position rocker switch on the right--hand
control console. To confirm mode selected, the
appropriate symbol on the switch will illuminate when
engaged.
205
Operating in Manual Mode
Press the bottom of the switch to engage the drive to

the front wheels. Warning lights in the switch and
instrument panel will illuminate when four wheel drive
is engaged. To disengage four wheel drive return the
switch to the off (central) position.
NOTE: If four wheel drive is engaged when the

key--start is turned off, it will remain engaged when
the key--start is switched on again.
Operating in Automatic Mode
To engage automatic four wheel drive mode, depress

the top of the four wheel drive switch Figure 205. The
warning light in the switch will illuminate. The
indicator light (1) Figure 206 on the instrument panel
will also illuminate but will only remain lit while four
wheel drive is engaged.
Four wheel drive will remain permanently engaged

unless one of the following occurs:
 Wheel speed exceeds 20 Km/h (12.4 MPH).

Four wheel drive will re--engage when wheel 206
speed falls below 18 Km/h (11.1 MPH)
2--121
NOTE: The following applies only to tractors fitted

with a steering angle sensor.
 Wheel speed falls below 10 Km/h (6.2 MPH) and

steering angle exceeds 15 right and 13.5 left
(9 and 7.75 with SuperSteer). Four wheel drive
will re--engage when the steering angle is
reduced.
 Wheel speed is between 10 and 20 Km/h (6.2

and 12.4 MPH) and steering angle exceeds 10
right and 9.25 left (5.5 and 4.75 with
Supersteer). Four wheel drive will re--engage
when the steering angle is reduced. 207
NOTE: The above steering angles are set during

manufacture, if an alternative angle setting is
required, consult your authorised dealer.
The indicator light (1) Figure 207 on the instrument

panel will also illuminate but will only remain lit when
four wheel drive is engaged.
4WD Operating Precautions NOTE: Keep the tractor in the same gear going
downhill as would be used when going uphill.
WARNING
Four wheel drive greatly increases traction. Extra CAUTION
caution is needed on slopes. Compared to two-wheel On four wheel drive tractors, drive to the front axle is
drive, a 4WD tractor maintains traction on steeper automatically engaged when both brake pedals are
slopes, increasing the possibility of overturning. applied simultaneously to provide four wheel
braking. Additionally, you may have the optional front
disc brakes. The effectiveness of four wheel braking
IMPORTANT: To avoid excessive tyre wear when greatly enhances tractor braking performance
travelling on the public highway or any hard surface, therefore appropriate care should be exercised
it is recommended that four wheel drive be during heavy braking.
disengaged. Always use the specified front/rear tyre Front tyres should never be inflated above the
combinations to ensure acceptable tyre wear. recommended pressure. Ideally, rear tyre pressures
should be maintained at least 0.4 bar (6 lbf/in 2) above
front tyre pressures, provided the manufacturers’
WARNING
recommendations are not exceeded.
Tractors with four wheel drive engaged or
disengaged should not be allowed to exceed 50 km/h
(31 MPH) where permitted. Overspeeding by towing IMPORTANT: Never attempt to drive the tractor with
or coasting downhill with clutch depressed or the drive shaft removed, even if you have no intention
transmission in neutral may cause loss of control, of using four wheel drive. With the drive shaft
personal injury to the operator or bystanders or removed, application of the brakes will result in
mechanical failure. severe damage to transmission components.
2--122
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION

(where fitted)
The optional, self-levelling, front axle suspension will

provide improved stability, control, comfort and
traction. Terraglide is automatically activated each
time the tractor is started but will not function at
speeds below 1.5 k/mh (0.9 MPH).
When operating at speeds up to 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH),

the front axle suspension may be locked out if not
required.
To lock out the suspension, press the top of the 208

switch on the right--hand control panel, a warning
light (2) on the instrument panel will illuminate to
confirm the suspension is locked. Press the top of the
switch again to reactivate the suspension facility.
At speeds above 12 k/mh (7.4 MPH), the suspension

will automatically re--engage, overriding axle lock
out. In this situation the warning light will remain on.
NOTE: Should the lock out switch warning light begin

to flash, this would indicate a malfunction of the
suspension system. Consult your authorised dealer.
IMPORTANT: See Ballasting and Tyres, page

3--165, regarding the use of front end weights with
front axle suspension.
WARNING
Hydraulic oil in the front axle suspension system 209
operates under very high pressure. Escaping
hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin
causing serious injury. Unqualified persons should
not attempt to disconnect any pipework in the front
axle hydraulic system. Failure to follow these
instructions can result in serious injury.
WARNING
If a transmission ratio is engaged, with the engine
running and the tractor supported on axle stands, the
self-levelling function of the suspension may cause
the axle to make corrections (move up and down).
The suspension should be locked out to maintain
stability.
2--123
2--124
SECTION 3
FIELD OPERATIONS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
BEFORE OPERATING THE TRACTOR Page Subject
Before operating your tractor in the field it is Important Information 3--1

important you read the following information.
Boosting the Tractor Battery 3--8
CAUTION
Starting the Engine 3--9
Before driving or operating the tractor, study the
safety precautions in Section 1 of this Manual.
Stopping the Engine 3--12
Engine Power Management (EPM) 3--14

Read this section carefully for a thorough
understanding of operational requirements. Even if Engine Speed Management (ESM) 3--16
you operate other tractors, you should thoroughly
read this section of the manual and ensure that you Headland Turn Sequence (HTS) 3--19
are familiar with the location and function of all the
features of your tractor. Fast Steer 3--36
Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operate Rear Power Take--Off 3--38
the tractor until you are fully accustomed with all the
controls. It is too late to learn once the tractor is Front Power Take--Off and Hydraulic Lift 3--55
moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation of
the tractor, consult your authorised dealer. Electronic Draft Control 3--81
Hydraulic Remote Control Valves 3--96

PROGRAMMING TRACTOR FUNCTIONS
Hydraulic Power Beyond Port 3--104
Your tractor is equipped with a sophisticated
electronic network system which utilises various Three-point Hitch 3--109
memory facilities to programme and control many of
the tractor functions. The operating memory Quick Hitch 3--115
temporarily stores settings and adjustments made
while operating the tractor and these are transferred Linkage Stabilisers 3--117
to the main memory when you key--off (engine stop).
Drawbars and Towing Attachments 3--123
If you key--off and key--on again too quickly as data
is being transferred between the operating and main Trailer Braking Systems 3--139
memories, some of the data may be lost or
corrupted. Front Wheel Track Adjustment 3--146
Dynamic Front Fenders 3--151

If changes have been made to any memory settings
while operating the tractor, pause for five seconds Rear Wheel Track Adjustment 3--154
between key--off and key--on to allow sufficient time
for data to transfer between the operating memory Ballasting and Tyres 3--165
and the main memory. Once transferred, the new
settings will remain unchanged until they are
re--programmed.
3--1
SECTION 3 -- FIELD OPERATIONS
RUNNING--IN PROCEDURE  Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.
IMPORTANT: Your new tractor will provide long and  Tyres for damage
dependable service if given proper care during the 50  Hardware for looseness
hour running--in period and if serviced at the
recommended intervals.  Driveline and hydraulic pump/filter areas for
leaks or debris accumulation
Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too high
a gear under heavy load may cause excessive Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.
engine overloading. Overloading occurs when the
engine will not respond to a throttle increase. PRESSURE WASHING THE TRACTOR
Do not operate without a load on the engine. This can Your tractor is fitted with a number of Electronic
be as harmful to the engine as overloading. Vary the Control Units (ECU’s) that are linked to various
type of operation undertaken so that the engine is sensors throughout the vehicle. These units
subjected to heavy as well as light loads during the electronically control many tractor functions
running--in period. including engine, transmission, P.T.O. and hydraulic
systems.
Use the lower gear ratios when pulling heavy loads
and avoid continuous operation at constant engine
It is very important therefore, when cleaning the
speeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear with
tractor body or chassis with a high pressure water jet,
a light load and high engine speed will waste fuel. You
that care should be taken not to aim the jet directly
will save fuel and minimise engine wear by selecting
at any electrical component, wiring harness or
the correct gear ratio for each particular operation.
connector.
Check the instruments and warning lights frequently
and keep the radiator and various oil reservoirs filled CARRYING THE TRACTOR ON A
to the recommended levels. TRANSPORTER
PRE-OPERATION CHECKS Transport the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bed
trailer or truck. Securely chain the tractor to the
Before operating the tractor, ensure that you are transporter.
thoroughly familiar with the location and operation of
the controls. IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheel
drive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axle
Perform all daily lubrication and maintenance or other components that could be damaged by
operations in accordance with Section 4. contacting the chain or by heavy loading.
After completing the daily maintenance operations, Use the drawbar or drawbar hanger for a rear tie
perform a walk around visual inspection of the down point.
tractor. Pay particular attention to the following
items: IMPORTANT: Cover the silencer outlet so that the
wind does not spin the turbocharger and damage the
 Poly ’V’ belt for cracks or damage bearings. Turbocharger turbine freewheeling
 Engine and exhaust areas for accumulation of (turning without engine running) must be avoided
debris since lubrication will not be provided to the
turbocharger bearings.
3--2
TILTING HIGH VISIBILITY ROOF PANEL
Where road speeds in excess of 50 Km/h (31 MPH)

are likely to occur when transporting the tractor, it is
advisable to secure the high visibility roof panel with
ties to prevent it from opening.
Secure both handles to the sun--visor support using

a flexible strap such as a cable tie (1) as shown in the
illustration above. Do not use wire or metal straps as
these may damage the paintwork.
1
TOWING THE TRACTOR
IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed a To avoid damaging the transmission or other
short distance, such as out of a building. Do not tow components that turn but are not lubricated during
on roadways or as a method of transport. towing, observe the following:
 Only tow a short distance
IMPORTANT: Where the tractor is equipped with an  Keep speed below 5 MPH (8 K/mh)
Electronic Park Lock it is important the lock is
released before attempting to tow the tractor.  If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication
Instructions for electronically and manually releasing and power steering.
the park lock can be found in Section 2, Brake
Controls and Operation. IMPORTANT: The brakes on your tractor are
hydraulically power assisted. With the engine off, the
IMPORTANT: If it is necessary to tow the tractor, all brakes will still function but with a higher pedal effort.
transmission controls must be moved to the
neutral position before stopping the engine CAUTION
otherwise damage to transmission components may Do not tow the tractor faster than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
occur during towing. If creeper gears (reduction gear The steering is much slower and steering wheel
set) are fitted, then the creeper gears must be effort is much greater without the engine running.
disconnected before towing the tractor.
WARNING
Use a strong chain when towing the tractor. Tow the
Do not use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If the
tractor from the rear using only the drawbar, rear tow
cable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip with
hitch or the three-point hitch. Tow the tractor from the
sufficient force to cause serious injury. When using
front using the tow pin in the front weights or front
a chain, attach the chain with the hook open side
support. Have an operator steer and brake the
facing up. If the hook slips, it will drop down instead
tractor.
of flying up.
NOTE: Four wheel drive will be engaged if the engine

is not running, regardless of the position of the 4WD
activation switch.
3--3
OPERATING IN COLD TEMPERATURES Maintaining Operating Temperatures
To start and operate your tractor during ambient IMPORTANT: During cold ambient temperatures,
temperatures of --1 C (30 F) and below, observe the never run the engine at low idle speed for long
following instructions. periods of time or when the coolant temperature is
below normal.
 BATTERIES -- Ensure the batteries are fully
charged and the terminals are clean and tight. During cold ambient temperatures, the engine may
not reach or maintain the correct operating
 FUEL -- Must be clean and free of water. Consult temperature. Slow engine speeds in cold
your fuel supplier for cold weather fuel temperatures can cause damage to the engine. Use
requirements in your area. the following procedure to warm the engine and
transmission oils and to maintain the correct
 ENGINE OIL -- Ensure the oil is the correct operating temperatures.
viscosity for the ambient temperature range. See
page 4--12.
Warming the Engine
 TRANSMISSION/HYDRAULIC OIL -- Use low
ambient temperature transmission oil. See page  Start the engine using the procedure shown in
4--12. the ’Starting the Engine’ section of this manual.
NOTE: If continuous operation is required in NOTE: During engine warm up, an electronically
temperatures below --28 C (--20 F), change the controlled engine may not run smoothly until the
transmission/hydraulic oil to one of a lower temperature increases.
temperature rating, see page 4--12. This oil is more
fluid at extremely cold temperatures. NOTE: At low temperatures, the tractor must be run
until it warms up. Transmission response may be
 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM -- Must have a compromised and heavy steering may occur until the
minimum of 50% ethylene glycol solution for oil is warm. Always use a transmission oil heater and
system protection. engine coolant heater to reduce warm up time.
 TYRES -- If the tyres contain liquid ballast they Maintaining Engine Temperature
must be protected against temperatures below
0 C (32 F). Consult your dealer. When the engine is operating in cold ambient
temperatures without load, maintain correct
 CONDENSATION IN THE FUEL TANK -- To operating temperature as described below.
prevent condensation forming in the fuel tank
and water entering the fuel system, fill the fuel  Run the engine at approximately 1500 r.p.m.
tank at the end of each day.
 Cover the front grille of the tractor to control the
 WATER IN THE FUEL SYSTEM. Drain the amount of air passing through the engine
pre--filter and water separator on a regular basis radiator.
to prevent build up of water in the system.
 TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER. Use a Stopping the Engine When Hot
transmission oil heater to maintain oil
temperature when the tractor is not being used.  Run the engine at a slow speed for a short period
of time. This will permit the engine temperature
to decrease gradually before stopping the
engine.
3--4
Warming the Transmission Oil

When operating in low temperatures, upshifting may
be restricted to the lower gears until the transmission
oil temperature reaches 10 C (50 F). Restricted
upshifting will be accompanied by a warning symbol
appearing in the transmission display, Figure 2.
With cold transmission oil, avoid shuttle operations, as

far as practicable, until the oil has warmed up.
When the warning symbol disappears, the

transmission is fully operable.
2
3--5
COOLANT IMMERSION HEATER

(where fitted)
WARNING
To avoid shocks or other injuries, never use an
unearthed or inadequate extension lead with the
coolant or oil heater. Always use an earthed, three
core extension lead, which is rated for at least a 15
amp load, in conjunction with a residual current
circuit breaker or earth leakage trip device.
This accessory consists of a heating element fitted

into one of the core plug apertures on the right--hand
side of the block. The heater is available in 120 or 240
volts A.C only. This accessory provides easier
starting down to --29 C (--20 F).
3
To operate the heater, connect the heater extension

cable to the socket (1) adjacent to the right--hand cab
steps. Plug the free end of the heater cable into a
suitable outlet (using a voltage transformer, if
necessary) for up to four hours before carrying out
the cold weather starting procedure.
FUEL HEATER
(where fitted)
The fuel heater consists of a heating element

installed in the primary fuel filter. The heater operates
in conjunction with the grid heater in the engine inlet
manifold.
Operation of the grid heater/fuel heater is automatic

when the ambient temperature falls to --29 C (--20
F).
See Grid Heater Cold Start Aid on page 3--10.

4
3--6
TRANSMISSION OIL HEATER

(where fitted)
This accessory consists of a 120 volt or 240 volt A.C.

heating element installed in the transmission
housing.
This accessory provides for faster warm up of the

transmission/hydraulic oil when operating in low
ambient temperatures.
Connect the 120 volt heater extension cable to the

plug at (1), Figure 5.
5
Connect the 240 volt heater extension cable to the
plug at (1), Figure 6.
To operate the heater, connect the plug on the free

end of the heater cable to a suitable outlet (using a
voltage transformer, if necessary) for up to four hours
before starting the engine.
NOTE: Do not use the heater when the oil is very cold
as this may ’scorch’ the oil. Use the heater after the
tractor has been operated and the transmission oil is
still wram. This will maintain oil temperature for
easier starting in very cold weather.
6
3--7
BOOSTING THE TRACTOR BATTERY
WARNING
Always sit in the driver’s seat to operate the starter
motor. If the key-start switch is by-passed and the
tractor has been left in gear, sudden and unexpected
movement of the tractor or a tractor runaway may
result which could cause serious injury. Wear eye
protection when starting the tractor with jump leads
or when charging the battery.
Your tractor is equipped with remote jump terminals

installed on the right-hand side of the engine.
If it is necessary to use jump leads (booster cables)

to start the tractor, use only heavy duty leads.
Proceed as follows:
The positive terminal (1), mounts on the starter

solenoid, and is protected by an insulated cover (2)
which can be lifted to gain access to the terminal.
The negative terminal (2) attaches to the upper

mounting bolt of the starter.
7
Connect one end of red jump lead, to the positive,
(+), remote jump terminal (1), and the other end to
the positive (+), terminal of the auxiliary battery.
Connect one end of black jump lead, to the negative,

(--), remote jump terminal (2), and the other end to
negative, (--), terminal of auxiliary battery. Follow the
starting procedure as described later in this Section.
When the engine starts allow it to run at idle speed,

turn on all electrical equipment (lights, etc.) then
disconnect the jump leads in the reverse order to the
connecting procedure. This will help protect the
alternator from possible damage due to extreme load
changes.
Close the cover (2) to protect the positive (+)

terminal.
3--8
Turn off all electrical equipment and run the tractor

engine until the battery is fully charged.
IMPORTANT: When using an auxiliary battery to

start the engine, ensure that the polarity of the jump
leads is correct -- positive to positive, negative to
negative, otherwise the alternator may be damaged.
Only use an auxiliary battery if the tractor batteries
are discharged. Excessive amperage (above 1600
cca) may damage the starting motor. In the event of
the batteries being severely discharged, such that
terminal voltage is below 7 volts, recovery will require
a special charging procedure. See your authorised
dealer.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting the engine, always carry out the

following procedure:
 Sit in the driver’s seat.
 Ensure the handbrake is firmly applied.
 Ensure the shuttle lever is in the neutral (3) or

park position (5).
 Ensure all P.T.O. controls are in the ‘off’ position.
 Place all remote control valve levers in neutral.
 Move the 3--point hitch Position Control lever

fully forward.
WARNING
Check the area beneath the equipment to ensure
that no injury or damage will be caused when
equipment is lowered. 8
 Depress and hold the clutch pedal.
IMPORTANT: The high operating speed of the

turbo-charger makes it essential that adequate
lubrication is assured when the engine is started.
Therefore, idle the engine at 1000 rev/min for
approximately one minute before driving the tractor.
3--9
GRID HEATER COLD START AID

(where fitted)
WARNING
Your tractor may be equipped with an electronic cold
weather starting aid. Do not use ether with the cold
start aid installed. It will explode in the intake
manifold. If any difficulty is experienced when trying
to start your tractor in cold temperatures, consult
The grid heater, which is effective in ambient

temperatures down to --18 C (0 F), consists of a
heating element installed in the intake manifold.
Operation of the grid heater is automatic when the
the engine coolant temperature falls to --3 C (26.6
F) or below.
A warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate
to confirm operation.
If temperatures below --18 C (0 F) are

encountered, a block coolant heater is available as
an accessory. The block coolant heater is effective
in ambient temperatures down to --29 C (--20 F)
when used in conjunction with the grid heater.
Key Start Switch
A five-position key-start switch is installed. The

key-start switch positions are as follows:
Position 1 Not used

Position 2 Off
Position 3 Accessories on
Position 4 Warning lights, instruments and
Grid Heater on
Position 5 Grid heater on, Starter motor
engaged
IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to start 9

the engine. Use an auxiliary battery and jump leads.
NOTE: Neutral start switches prevent operation of

the starting motor unless the shuttle lever is in the
neutral (N) position.
3--10
Starting in cold weather (with a cold engine)
 Open the hand throttle halfway and turn the

key-start switch clockwise to position (4). An
indicator light (1) Figure 11, on the instrument
panel will illuminate for 10 to 15 seconds to show
the grid heater has been activated.
 When the light extinguishes, turn the key fully

clockwise to position (5). Crank the engine until
it starts but do not operate the starting motor for
NOTE: If cranking is not carried out within 30 10

seconds of the light extinguishing, turn the key--start
to the ’off’ position, pause and re--start the sequence.
 If the engine fails to start, repeat the foregoing

procedure. If the engine still fails to start, allow
the battery to recover for 4 -- 5 minutes then
repeat the procedure.
 When the engine starts, return the throttle to the

idle position and check that all warning lights
extinguish and gauge readings are normal.
Starting in warm weather or when the engine is

hot
 Turn the key-start switch fully clockwise to

position (5) Figure 10, to operate the starting 11
motor. It is not neccessary to open the throttle in
these conditions. Crank the engine until it starts
but do not operate the starting motor for more
than 60 seconds.
NOTE: Once the starter motor has been operated,

it is necessary to return the key-start switch back to
the ‘off’ position before the starting motor can be
re-activated.
 Check that all warning lights extinguish and

gauge readings are normal.
3--11
STOPPING THE ENGINE
IMPORTANT: Before stopping, idle the engine at

1000 rev/min for approximately one minute. This will
allow the turbo--charger and manifold to cool and
prevent possible distortion of components.
To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:
 Sit in the driver’s seat.

 Close the throttle.
 Ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied.
 Ensure the P.T.O. is disengaged.

 Place the remote control valve levers in the
neutral position.
 Lower 3 point hitch mounted equipment to the
ground.
 Turn the key--start switch off -- position (2).
AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWN
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to start an engine

that has automatically shutdown, trace and rectify
the fault that caused the engine to be stopped.
Automatic engine shutdown is operated through the

Engine Control Unit (ECU). In the unlikely event that
one or more of the following conditions occurs then
the engine will be shut down after 30 seconds.
 A critical error is detected within the engine
control system.
 The generated engine horsepower attempts to
exceed the specified design limit.
Should either of the above occur and the engine
shuts down, consult your authorised dealer before
attempting further operations with the tractor.
NOTE: Automatic engine shutdown function is

permanantly activated and cannot be switched off.
3--12
Automatic Engine Shutdown with Enhanced

Keypad (where fitted)
The automatic engine shutdown system on tractors

equipped with the optional Enhanced Keypad
provides a further level of protection. The system
monitors four key areas that are critical to the safe
operation of engine and driveline and, in the unlikely
event that one or more of these reaches a critical
condition, the engine will be shut down.
 Engine oil pressure falls below safe limits.

 Engine coolant temperature exceeds safe limits.
 Driveline oil pressure falls below safe limits.

 Driveline oil temperature rises above safe limits.
Prior to engine shutdown the red Stop light will start

to flash and the critical alarm will sound. In addition,
the engine fault warning and malfunction symbols
will flash alternately in the Dot Matrix Display. If, after
30 seconds, the operator has not stopped the
engine, the automatic shutdown feature will be
activated and the engine will be shut down.
12
After the engine has shut down, the red Stop light will
remain on but the alarm will cease to sound. Both
engine and malfunction symbols will continue to flash
alternately.
The automatic engine shutdown function may be

programmed by your authorised dealer to operate in
one of three modes, these may be shown in the DMD
as YES1 (2 or 3):
1. No engine shutdown. In this mode the engine is

not capable of automatic shutdown.
2. Always engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown at any time if one or more of the
monitored conditions reaches a critical level.
3. Stationary engine shutdown. The engine will

shutdown only during stationary operations if
one or more of the monitored conditions reaches
a critical level.
Although the Automatic Engine Shudown linked to

the Keypad can be disabled, the system monitored
by the Engine Control Unit will continue to function in
the normal way.
3--13
ENGINE POWER MANAGEMENT
Engine Power Management (EPM) is an

electronically controlled engine power boost function
which increases power levels where high loads may
compromise tractor performance.
When the system is activated, the EPM light (1) in the

instrument cluster will illuminate. As the power
requirement reduces and EPM is de--activated, the
light will extinguish.
PM boost levels are variable depending on engine

load, driveline torque and tractor speed. Dependent
on tractor model, the available power increase is
between 1 and 26 kW (1.3 and 35 hp) and will vary
as the load on the engine changes.
EPM is a totally automated function requiring no

input from the operator. Engine power boost can be
activated during P.T.O. operations, road transport
applications and when operating with externally
powered hydraulic equipment.
P.T.O. Operations
Engine Power Management will only function when

the following criteria are met:
Engine sped above 1300 e.r.p.m.
PTO fully engaged.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
PTO power output is above 27 kW (36.2 hp.).
PTO driveline torque is above 250 Nm.
Engine coolant temperature below 105 C
(221 F)
NOTE: Engine Power Management will operate at all

P.T.O. speeds, i.e. 540, 540E and 1000 r.p.m.
With the tractor moving and the engine speed above 13

1300 r.p.m. engaging the rear P.T.O. will put EPM
into standby mode.
As the torque and load on the PTO reaches or

exceeds the above levels, the warning light (1) will
illuminate and Engine Power Management will be
activated.
3--14
As the load on the engine is reduced, boost levels will

gradually decrease until engine power levels are
within normal limits.
Road Transport Applications

Engine speed is above 1300 r.p.m.
16th gear or above is engaged.
(221 F)
EPM will be de--activated if the following occurs:

Engine speed falls below 1300 r.p.m.
Transmission downshifts below 16th gear
Engine coolant temperature exceeds 105 C 14
(221 F)
High Demand for External Hydraulics
Engine Power Management monitors the load on the

main hydraulic pump and in situations where there is
significant increase in horsepower requirements to
operate external hydraulic services, EPM will
respond by boosting engine power.
To compensate for additional hydraulic loads, EPM

gradually increases engine power to maintain tractor
performance. As the load on the hydraulic system
decreases then the level of power boost will also be
reduced.

Engine speed above 1300 r.p.m.
Tractor forward speed above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH).
(221 F)
EPM will be de--activated if the following occurs:
Engine speed falls below 1300 r.p.m.

Tractor forward speed falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3
MPH).
Engine coolant temperature exceeds 105 C
(221 F)
3--15
ENGINE SPEED MANAGEMENT
With Engine Speed Management, the operator may

pre--set one or two fixed engine speeds appropriate
to the work in hand. ESM will maintain a fixed engine
speed, it cannot be used to provide a constant
groundspeed (cruise control).
With ESM activated the indicator light on the

instrument panel (1), will illuminate when the system
is in operation.
When activated, ESM constantly monitors engine

load and speed for any change. If engine load 15
increases and r.p.m. drops, ESM will adjust the
engine speed control unit to compensate, thereby
maintaining a constant engine r.p.m.
Setting Engine Speed Management
With the engine running, set the hand throttle to 1000

r.p.m. To activate Speed Management, momentarily
depress the top of the switch (2) on the right--hand
console. To deactivate, depress the top of the switch
again.
Select programme 1 by momentarily depressing the

bottom of switch (2) and then, using the speed
control switch (1), increase the engine speed to the
desired level. When the speed for programme 1 has
been entered, programme 2 can then be selected (if
required) by momentarily depressing the bottom of 16
switch (2) again. Repeat the above procedure to set
the second speed.
NOTE: Momentarily depressing the speed

adjustment switch will increase or decrease the
speed in 10 rpm increments. Maintaining pressure
on the switch will permit the speed to ramp up or
down at 100 rpm/second, providing there is no load
on the engine.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), programme

settings made during tractor operation are
transferred from the operating memory to the main
memory. To provide sufficient time for the data to
transfer, allow a minimum of five seconds delay
before turning the key on again.
3--16
Setting with Colour Display (where fitted)
. Work condition
. Settings
. CRPM
The Constant RPM setting screen is used to set or

adjust engine speed settings for CRPM
programmes.
1. CRPM programme 1.
. CRPM 1. Adjust the engine speed in the 17

pop--up screen by touching A or ". When the
desired speed has been set, touch Enter to store
the setting.
2. CRPM programme 2.
. CRPM 2. Repeat the above procedure to

set a second CRPM speed.
Operating with Engine Speed Management
The Engine Speed Management function can be

engaged at any time providing the engine is running
above 1000 r.p.m. Momentarily depress the Speed
Control switch (2) to activate ESM. The system will
automatically default to programme 1, depress the
bottom of the control switch to select programme 2.
When operating in the field, shuttling between

programmes 1 and 2 may be achieved by repeatedly
depressing the bottom of the control switch or, if
more convenient, the Headland Turn Sequence step
switch (3) Figure 19. 18
NOTE: If the HTS step switch is used to shuttle

between ESM speeds, the control switch (2),will be
disabled. To re--enable switch operation, exit and
re--enter the ESM function.
NOTE: Moving the hand throttle in ESM mode will

disable the speed settings and return engine speed
control to the hand or foot throttle.
3--17
Accessing a Previously Stored Setting
To access a previously stored speed setting, depress

and hold the top of the ESM switch (2), Figure 18.
The indicator light will start to flash in the instrument
panel.
NOTE: The hand throttle must be set to 1000 e.r.p.m.

before depressing the switch.
Continue to hold the switch until the light stops

flashing and goes out, the engine speed will increase
or decrease to the previously stored setting. Depress
the bottom of the control switch (2) or the HTS step 19
switch (3) to select the required ESM programme.
NOTE: If the ESM switch (2) is released whilst the

light is flashing, Engine Speed Management will
reset to the default setting, depress and hold the
ESM switch again to re--start the procedure.
To exit Engine Speed Management:
Depress the ESM control switch.

Move the hand throttle to idle.
Turn the key--start to the off position.
3--18
HEADLAND TURN SEQUENCE
Quick Guide to Headland Turn Sequence (HTS)
Where there is a need to repeat a sequence of actions, such as those made during a headland turn, HTS can
be used to create, store and play--back a programme of these actions.
The following text is provided as a quick guide to the operation of Headland Turn Sequence. A more
comprehensive guide to the operation of HTS can be found beginning on page 3--21.
NOTE: For HTS to function in record or play modes, the hand throttle must be set above 900 e.r.p.m. and the
tractor travelling at a speed above 0.5 K/mh (0.3 MPH).
ACTION -- RECORDING CONTROL VISUAL

1. Depress and hold the top of the record switch for three
seconds. The recording symbol will flash in the Display of
Gears.
2. To start recording a sequence, momentarily depress the step

switch. The recording symbol will stop flashing and remain
permanently displayed.
3. Carry out the headland turn sequence in the normal way. As

each step in the sequence is recorded, the relevant symbol
will appear in the Display of Gears. When a step is completed
and a new one started, the symbol for the completed step will
scroll downwards to be replaced by the new one.
To record a second HTS sequence go to paragraph 4. To end

the current recording go to paragraph 6.
4. To record a second sequence after the first one is completed,

depress and hold the step switch for three seconds, the
recording symbol will start to flash.
5. To start recording, depress the step switch again. The

recording symbol will cease to flash and will remain on, the
second sequence can now be started.
6. When the HTS recordings are completed, momentarily

depress the top of the record switch to save the recorded
sequences and exit HTS.
3--19
ACTION -- PLAYBACK CONTROL VISUAL
1
1. To enter play--back mode, depress and hold the top or
bottom of the play--back switch. The programme number will
appear below the playback icon.
Release the switch and the programme symbols will start to
flash indicating HTS is in standby mode.
NOTE: Depress the top of the switch to provide AUTOMATIC

re--play of all programme steps, depress the bottom of the
switch to select MANUAL re--play of each individual step.
2. If a second sequence was recorded, continue to depress the

top or bottom of the play--back switch until the required
programme number, 1 or 2 is displayed, then release the
switch.
2
The programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.
3. To begin play--back, depress and hold the step switch for 1

second until a ’beep’ is heard. The play--back symbol will stop
flashing and will remain on.
NOTE: In MANUAL re--play the programme will pause after

each step is completed, momentarily depress the step switch
to re--play the next step.
3. During play--back, the function symbols will scroll upwards

towards the top of the HTS display.
4. After the current sequence has been re--played, the next

sequence will be held in standby mode (play--back symbol
flashing). Depress and hold the step switch for 1 second until
a ’beep’ is heard, release the switch to begin play--back of the
next sequence.
5. To skip a play--back sequence it will be necessary to exit HTS

by depressing the play--back switch. To re--enter HTS, start at
paragraph 1 above.
See page 3--25 for an explanation of HTS symbols.
3--20
Headland Turn Sequence Operation (HTS)
In the recording mode a sequence of actions or

’steps’ are recorded to create a programme. In
play--back mode, HTS will re--play the sequence
exactly as recorded.
Programmes may be re--played as a continuous

operation (AUTOMATIC) or as a series of individual
steps (MANUAL) each one initiated by depressing
the step switch.
HTS permits up to 28 individual steps to be recorded

as one or two separate programmes.
Three switches control the operation of HTS:

1. Play--back switch. To re--play a programme
momentarily depress the top of this switch (A) for
AUTO re--play, depress the bottom of the switch
for MANUAL re--play.
2. Record switch. This switch is used to select the
recording mode.
3. Step switch. The step switch is used to start,
pause or stop a programme. The step switch can
also be used to insert pauses during a recording 20
or to pause a programme during play--back.
NOTE: Each pause inserted during a recording will

be recognised as a programme step by HTS.
Where HTS is used to create a recording, the

following actions or functions may be included in the
programme.
 Regulate engine speed.

 Shift transmission gears up, and/or down.
 Raise and lower the rear three point hitch.
 Raise and lower the front three point hitch.
21
3--21
IMPORTANT: When operating In Field Auto Mode,

activating HTS will suspend the Auto Mode function.
After completing a headland manoeuvre
programme, HTS will be suspended and the Field
Auto Mode programme will be resumed.
In a similar way, ESM will also be disabled when HTS
is active and will be re--enabled when HTS is
suspended. However, the ESM light will still remain
illuminated while the programme is disabled.
When activated, the HTS symbol will appear in the

Display of Gears.
The symbol at (1) will show whether HTS is in record

or play--back mode.
When recording or re--playing a programme, each

action or step will be represented by the appropriate
symbol, i.e. a gear change or series of gear changes
will be accompanied by a transmission symbol.
See page 3--25 for an explanation of HTS symbols.
As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol 22

will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately
below the record symbol.
During play--back, symbols will scroll upwards from

the bottom of the display. When a symbol reaches
the top of the display (below the play--back symbol)
the corresponding function will begin to operate.
A maximum of seven symbols may be displayed at

one time.
IMPORTANT: If a programme fault occurs and the

error symbol is displayed, exit and re--enter HTS to
clear the fault.
3--22
HTS with Colour Display (where fitted)
When activated, a symbol will appear at the top of the

vertical HTS symbol bar (1).
The symbol will confirm whether HTS is in the record,

save or play--back mode.
When recording or re--playing a sequence, each

action or step will be represented by a new symbol
and description appearing in the HTS bar.
See page 3--25 for an explanation of HTS symbols

and their function. The list is comprehensive and 23
may include functions not available on your tractor.
As each step is recorded the accompanying symbol

will move down the display as the next step begins.
The symbol for the new step will appear immediately
below the record symbol. Active symbols will appear
with an orange background, recorded symbols will
have a red background.
During play--back, step symbols will scroll upwards

from the bottom of the display. When a symbol
reaches the top of the display (below the play--back
symbol) the corresponding function will begin to
operate.
A maximum of five step symbols may be displayed

in addition to the HTS mode symbol.
To view the full sequence select HTS Editor or

Manager screens and use the YB to scroll through
the symbols.
IMPORTANT: If a fault occurs and the error symbol

is displayed, exit and re--enter HTS to clear the fault.
3--23
Depending on the operating mode, the colour of the

HTS bar will change and will appear as shown in
following chart.
HTS Status HTS Bar

Normal Mode White
Record enabled White
Record active Red
Record paused Yellow
Record suspended Yellow
Record saving White
HTS Status HTS Bar
Play sub--sequence select White
Play enabled White
24
Play active Green
Play paused Yellow
Play suspend Yellow
Play halted (all symbols flashing) Yellow
HTS error Orange
3--24
Explanation of HTS Symbols

The symbols shown below are examples of those which may, depending on programme content, appear in the
transmission gear display when HTS is active.
HTS Programme Error
2 Programme Number Engine Speed -- Increase
Switch Symbol -- Record Mode Engine Speed -- Decrease
Record Mode Transmission Upshift
Switch Symbol
Transmission Downshift
Manual Playback Mode
Switch Symbol Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Raise

Automatic Playback Mode
Auto Playback Mode Rear 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
Manual Playback Mode Front 3--Point Hitch -- Raise
Pause Programme Front 3--Point Hitch -- Lower
3--25
Recording a Programme
NOTE: For HTS to function, the hand throttle must

be set to provide an engine speed above 900 e.r.p.m.
To record a Headland Turn Sequence, depress and

hold the top of the record switch (2), for three
seconds. This will activate HTS but the system will
remain in standby mode.
The HTS symbol will appear in the upper part of the

display accompanied by the recording symbol which
will start to flash.
25
To start a recording, momentarily depress the step

switch (3). As each HTS function is activated, a grey
coloured symbol will appear in the display
immediately below the recording symbol.
As each symbol moves down the display to be

replaced by the next one, the colour will change from
grey to black.
NOTE: Symbols relating to the function in current

use, either in record or play--back mode, will always
appear inversed (grey symbol on black background).
After the first HTS sequence has been completed, a 26

second (opposite headland) sequence may be
recorded.
Depress and hold the step switch (3) for three

seconds to end the first recording and enter standby
mode. The recording symbol will start to flash.
To start recording a second sequence, momentarily

depress the step switch (3).
NOTE: Transmission shifts made whilst the tractor is

in reverse will not be recorded or played back by
HTS. A pause will be automatically entered in the
programme at this point.
3--26
During a recording, pauses may be inserted into the

programme by momentarily depressing the step
switch (3). HTS recording will pause at this point and
a pause symbol will be inserted in the sequence,
depress the step switch again to resume recording.
To store a recorded sequence, depress the the top

of the record switch (2) Figure 25. This will
de--activate the HTS function and no further
recording will occur.
NOTE: If, during a recording sequence, the engine

is stopped (key--off) then all steps recorded up to that
point will be saved. 27
NOTE: Shuttling actions are not recorded but a

pause is automatically inserted into the sequence
when the shuttle lever is operated.
IMPORTANT: At key--off (engine stop), any

adjustments to electronically stored settings made
during tractor operation are transferred from the
operating memory to the main memory. To allow
sufficient time for the data to transfer, pause for a
minimum of five seconds before turning the key on
again.
3--27
HTS and Colour Display Screens
. HTS
The HTS system has three basic operating screens,

these are the main screen, the editor screen and the
manager screen. The editor and manager screens
have a number of sub screens and pop--ups which
can be used for editing, saving and downloading
sequences.
HTS main
NOTE: The function of this screen is to display a

sequence in the record and playback modes, they
cannot be edited or saved in the main screen.
. Main
The HTS main screen provides a visual reference of

each step in a sequence as it is recorded or played
back. The number and/or description of a sequence
appears at the top of the screen under the heading
’Current sequence’.
28
Where a new sequence is being recorded the
’Current sequence’ will be shown as ’Not available’.
When the sequence is saved, HTS will automatically
generate a reference number.
Each step is identified by a symbol and a short

description, a list of these can be found on page
3--25.
Up to 32 steps may be recorded in one sequence.

Where a pause has been inserted during recording
it will be recognised as a step. If an operator attempts
to record more than 32 steps a pop--up screen will
appear informing them the current sequence is full
and no more steps are available.
Where it is necessary to record more than 32 steps

for one field operation, a second sequence with a
new number will have to be generated.
3--28
HTS Editor
The Editor screen allows the operator to review HTS

sequences, change the names, add pauses and
re--save the updated sequence. Pauses added by
the operator can be removed in Editor but steps and
pauses which were recorded by HTS cannot be
changed.
Editor can only access the sequence currently held

in the HTS controller memory, sequences in the
database will need to be recalled using the manager
screen.
29
. Editor
Each sequence number appears in the Editor screen

(2). This number is generated automatically when a
sequence is saved. However, the number may be
edited by the operator to create a new description
which relates to the work in hand or to a particular
field or area.
1. . Sequence to recall an HTS sequence. The

pop--up menu will allow you to select or edit the
name of a saved sequence.
Select. Touch to access current list of
sequences.
Edit Name. Touch to display character screen.
Make the necessary changes then touch Enter to
return to the editor screen.
NOTE: Touching New will have no effect in this

screen. Sequence identification is generated
externally by the HTS system.
2. . Save to store a sequence after manually

changing the description or after adding and
removing pauses.
3. . Add Pause. To add a pause to an existing

sequence, touch Add Pause (4). A pause will be
inserted below the step and a delete box will be
added to the new pause step. Confirm the
change by touching Yes in the pop--up menu.
4. Where a sequence has more than 5 steps, use

the YB arrows to scroll through the sequence.
3--29
. Manager
In the manager screen, the operator can create a

new implement description, recall and change
exsisting sequence details and/or delete sequences
in the database.
Where an HTS sequence can be used for more than

one implement, such as a non reversible plough and
cultivator, then the same sequence can be saved
under different headings i.e. ’Plough’ and ’Cultivator’.
This can only be applied to implements working at
the same depth.
30
The manager screen also permits the operator to
recall a sequence from the database and upload it
into the controller memory for playback.
1. . Implement to open the pop--up menu.

implements.
Edit Name. Touch to display pop--up character
screen. Make the necessary changes then touch
Enter to save the new description.

screen. New sequence identification is generated
2. . Sequence to recall an HTS sequence. The

pop--up menu will allow you to select or edit the
name of a saved sequence.
sequences.
Edit Name. Touch to display character screen.
Make the necessary changes then touch Enter to
return to the editor screen.

screen. Sequence identification is generated
3--30
3. . Download. New sequences are initially

held in the HTS controller, these are then
transferred to the database when a new
sequence is recorded or an exsisting one
recalled.
Before an exsisting sequence can be

downloaded into the controller, it must be
recalled from the database. Touch Sequence to
access the database list, select the required
sequence then touch Enter.
The required number will appear in the sequence

box, touch Download to transfer the sequence 31
to the controller memory.
4. Sequences displayed in the manager screen can

viewed using the YB to scroll through the
sequence step by step.
3--31
Playback a Sequence
CAUTION
Before commencing work, it is recommended that
HTS programmes are given a ’dry run’ to ensure all
programme steps have been retained in the memory.
To replay a recorded sequence, momentarily

depress the top of the play--back switch (1) for AUTO
re--play, depress the bottom of the switch for
MANUAL re--play. Play--back will be activated but will
remain in standby mode.
If the suspend/resume function (step switch) was

used to record a second programme, the operator
may now cycle between programmes 1 and 2 by
holding down the AUTO or MANUAL side of the
play--back switch.
When the correct number appears at the top of the

transmission display, release the switch. The 32
programme number will be replaced by a flashing
play--back symbol.
Before reaching the point at which the programme is

to commence, depress and hold the step switch (3)
until a ’beep’ is heard. When the programme start
point is reached, release the switch. Play--back will
start as soon as the switch is released and the first
symbol in the sequence will appear below the
play--back symbol.
NOTE: To initiate playback, the engine speed must

be above 900 e.r.p.m. and the groundspeed must be
above 0.5 K/mh (0.31 MPH).
When play--back begins, the symbol will stop

flashing and will remain displayed. 33
As each function comes into play, the corresponding

symbol will appear immediately below the play--back
symbol. At this point it will change from black on grey
to grey on black (inversed).
3--32
Subsequent symbols in the programme sequence

will appear below the one currently in play. As each
step is completed, the corresponding symbol will
disappear from the display to be replaced by the next
one.
If play--back is activated in MANUAL mode,

depressing the step switch will only play the first step
in the sequence. When the first step is completed the
programme will pause until the step switch is
depressed again to start the next action in the
sequence.
In play--back, each step will be re--played exactly as

it was recorded.
NOTE: If necessary, the foot throttle may be used to

increase engine speed during HTS play--back.
If pauses were inserted into the sequence during

recording, play--back will automatically stop at each
pause point. To resume the sequence, depress and
hold the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard. The next
step will start immediately the switch is released.
By delaying the point at where the step switch is used

to re--start a programme in AUTOMATIC mode,
adjustments can be made to the time span of a
sequence or to extend the delay between individual
steps. This only applies to pauses inserted at the
recording stage.
In play--back mode, the programme may be stopped

at any time by depressing the step switch (3). The 34
programme will pause and play--back symbol will
begin to flash.
3--33
IMPORTANT: If the step switch is used to suspend

a function in play, all current HTS actions will be
aborted and it may be necessary to manually
complete the paused step before re--starting HTS
play--back.
To resume programme play--back, depress and hold

the step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, release the
switch.
IMPORTANT: During play--back, one or more of the

following actions will cause HTS to be stopped and
all automated functions to be terminated:
 Tractor speed drops below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH),
or is stationary for more than 10 seconds.
 The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds.
 Fender mounted 3--point hitch or P.T.O. controls
are operated.
 Hand throttle is set to idle.
 Operating one or more of the HTS linked tractor
controls to override the programme.
NOTE: A control is not regarded as overridden by

HTS until the sequence reaches the point at which
the automated operation of that control begins. At
this time, the sequence will be stopped.
To continue the programme, depress and hold the

step switch until a ’beep’ is heard, then release the
switch.
NOTE: When a HTS programme is suspended, the

symbols will flash in the display until the step switch
is depressed to re--start the programme.
IMPORTANT: If an HTS programme is halted by the

operator leaving the seat for more than 2 seconds,
the current engine speed will be maintained until the
operator returns to the seat, the throttle setting is
changed or the HTS sequence is cancelled.
Before leaving the seat, always deactivate HTS
and apply the tractor parking brake.
3--34
Deleting HTS Sequences
Select from the main menu screen:
. Data management
. Delete
. B on the Data Type box.
A Pop--up screen will appear providing a choice of

data type to be edited. Touch Sequence, to access
the Delete screen. 35
Touch the down arrows on the right of the ’Sequence’

box and a drop down menu listing all saved
sequences will appear. All sequences will have a X
to the left of the number/description.
. None to clear all X’s then use the YB arrows

to scroll through the list until the appropriate
sequence appears.
Touch the box to the left of the sequence and X will

appear in the box. Touch Enter and the sequence
number/description will appear in the sequence box.
. Delete to clear the sequence. Another pop--up

will appear asking to Confirm Delete, touch Yes and
the sequence will be deleted from the memory.
In the case where more than one sequence is to be

deleted, a figure in the box will show the total number
of sequences to be deleted, touch Yes to delete all.
36
3--35
FAST STEER (where fitted)
The optional Fast Steer system is designed to

provide quick steering response when required i.e.
when operating with a front loader or carrying out a
headland manoeuvre.
From the straight ahead position, Fast Steer will

provide full right or left hand steering lock with less
than a 8 movement of the steering wheel.
The speed at which the front wheel angle changes is

dependent on how far the steering wheel is turned.
Turning the steering wheel 1 or 2 degrees will
produce a slow steering response although full lock
can still be achieved. Increasing the steering wheel
angle will produce a faster steering response.
Fast Steer Isolator Switch
To activate the Fast Steer function, depress the top

of the isolator switch.
IMPORTANT: Before travelling on the public

highway Fast Steer must be de--activated and
normal steering re--instated.
To check normal steering operation, turn the wheel
fully from lock to lock before starting your journey.
NOTE: Fast Steer will not operate if the tractor speed

is above 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH).
37
A green warning light (3) Figure 38, in the instrument
panel will illuminate to confirm the system is in
standby mode.
NOTE: If Fast Steer is activated at engine key--off,

the system will not function at key--on. The green
warning light (3) will not illuminate and the yellow
indicator light (2) will flash when the centre ring is
depressed. To re--activate the system, turn the
isolator switch OFF and then ON again.
38
3--36
Fast Steer Operation
To operate Fast Steer, depress and hold the centre

ring (4) on the steering wheel, to disengage, release
the ring. With the centre ring depressed, a yellow
indicator light (2) Figure 40 will illuminate on the
instrument panel. It will extinguish when the centre
ring is released.
Fast Steer can only be operated if the all the following

conditions are met. Attempting to use the Fast Steer
function without meeting these conditions, will cause
the yellow indicator light to flash.
1. The isolator switch is ON and the green warning 39
light is illuminated.
2. The speed of the tractor is below 10 K/mh
(6.2 MPH).
3. The transmission oil temperature is above 5 C
(41 F).
NOTE: Where the transmission oil temperature is

low and Fast Steer is to be used, it is recommended
to turn the steering wheel twice, from full lock to full
lock, before operating with Fast Steer.
NOTE: If tractor speed exceeds 10 K/mh (6.2 MPH)

with Fast Steer in operation, it will be disengage and
the green indicator light will flash.
Fast Steer will be disabled if a fault occurs. Should

the system become disabled, an audible warning will
sound and an error code will appear in the instrument
panel display. If the fault is of a critical nature, the
’STOP’ warning lamp will also flash on the instrument 40
panel, consult your authorised dealer.
To re--activate Fast Steer, depress the isolator switch

to turn the system ’OFF’, correct the fault, then
depress the switch again to re--energise the system.
IMPORTANT: To promote safe operation of Fast

Steer, it is advised that the operator become familiar
with the system before operating in the field.
3--37
REAR POWER TAKE--OFF
Description
The rear Power Take Off on your tractor is equipped

with a modulated clutch engagement system to
provide smooth transfer of power when operating
with heavy, high inertia, P.T.O. driven equipment.
Various types of rear P.T.O. system are available,

dependent upon tractor model and the country in
which it is to be used.
a) 540/1000 speeds with interchageable output

shafts and the option of fender--mounted
switches.
b) 540/1000 shiftable with inter--changeable output

shafts and the option of fender--mounted
switches.
c) 540E/1000 shiftable with inter-changeable output

shafts and the option of fender-mounted
switches.
d) 1000/1000E shiftable and the option of

fender-mounted switches.
P.T.O Switch Operation
The P.T.O. is engaged and disengaged by means of

a knob (1), on the right-hand console. The adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate when the P.T.O. is
engaged.
To engage P.T.O. drive, depress the knob (1), lift the

collar (3), and then pull the switch upwards. P.T.O.
drive is disengaged by pushing the switch down. It is
not necessary to support the collar (3), when
disengaging P.T.O. drive.
If P.T.O. drive has been engaged using the fender 41

mounted switches, it can be stopped by either
operating the fender mounted switch again or by
depressing the top of the switch in the cab.
3--38
P.T.O. Switch Operation -- Anti--Stall Feature
If, when operating with high inertia equipment, the

P.T.O. is engaged at too low an engine speed, an
Auto Stall feature will automatically disable P.T.O.
start--up and a symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display.
The system will be disabled until the P.T.O. control is

returned to the OFF position at which time the Auto
Stall symbol will be extinguished. Re--engage the
P.T.O. at a higher engine speed.
42
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
To engage the PTO, depress the knob (1) then lift the
collar (3) and knob together. This movement should
be decisive in its application as hesitant or incorrect
operation of the knob or collar may cause the PTO
system to Time--Out.
Do not:
 Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 30
seconds.
 Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (3)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the 43
PTO.
 Operate the fender mounted and internal PTO
controls simultaneously or within 2 seconds of
each other.
Any or all of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds and
a Time--Out symbol will appear in the Dot Matrix
Display.
Should this occur, the non--critical alarm will sound

for 4 seconds and the amber warning light on the
instrument panel will flash for 10 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
44
When the Time--Out period is complete and the
symbol disappears from the display, normal P.T.O.
operation is re--enabled.
3--39
P.T.O. Brake Operation
An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed to stop shaft

rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is disengaged. To
avoid overstressing the P.T.O. brake, slow down the
implement by reducing engine speed before
disengaging the P.T.O. This is particularly important
with implements having a high inertia.
Such implements should, ideally, be fitted with an

overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake when
operating high inertia implements, hold down the top
of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow
the implement to come to rest naturally. 45
DANGER
To avoid inadvertent movement of the implement,
disengage the P.T.O. after each use.
P.T.O. Range Lever
With shiftable P.T.O., a range lever is provided. The

lever is used to select one of two or three P.T.O.
speed ranges to provide power or economy. The
range lever is located at the rear of the right-hand
console.
Depending on country and vehicle specification, your

tractor may be fitted with a P.T.O. range lever as
shown in Figure 46 or the alternative ’T’ handle lever
featured in Figure 47.
Conventional Lever
With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the required
speed by means of the range lever. Lift the
spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob (1) and
move the lever to engage the required P.T.O. speed.
To aid smooth shifting between P.T.O. speeds,

depress and hold the P.T.O. brake release switch (3)
while selecting an alternate range.
46
3--40
’T’ Handle Lever
With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the required
speed by means of the range lever. Lift the
spring-loaded collar (3) beneath the ’T’ handle (2)
while simultaneously depressing the P.T.O. brake
release button (1). Move the lever to engage the
appropriate P.T.O. speed.
47
3--41
TWO--SPEED P.T.O. SYSTEMS
General Information Operating with Stationary P.T.O. Equipment
Generally speaking, P.T.O. driven equipment not Before operating static P.T.O. equipment, make sure
having a high power requirement is designed to run the tractor is safely positioned and the parking brake
at 540 P.T.O. rev/min and will have a 6--spline female is applied. Sitting in the seat, engage P.T.O. drive
coupling. and, observing the instrument panel display, set the
appropriate speed.
Equipment having a high power requirement is
designed to operate at 1000 P.T.O. rev/min and will NOTE: On tractors fitted with Engine Speed
be provided with a 21--spline female coupling. Management, it may be prudent to use the ESM
function to maintain a constant speed if the load on
With two--speed selectable P.T.O., 540 equipment the P.T.O. is subject to variations.
with a very low power requirement may be run in the
higher P.T.O. speed range but at a reduced engine On leaving the tractor seat an intermittent alarm will
speed. This will promote lower fuel consumption and sound for approximately 10 seconds, the amber
engine wear. warning light will illuminate and the P.T.O. symbol will
appear in the Dot Matrix Display. If the alarm sound
Tractors with 540 Economy P.T.O. already have the is a constant tone, check to ensure the parking brake
advantage of running 540 P.T.O. driven equipment at is firmly applied.
a lower engine speed. Select the 540E position on
the range lever.
IMPORTANT: Implements with a high power

requirement should be operated with the 1000
rev/min. P.T.O. (21--spline shaft). If it is necessary to
use the 6--spline shaft (at 540 rev/min.) to operate
implements having a power requirement of more
than 75 horsepower, then it is strongly
recommended that the implement is fitted with a slip
clutch to avoid damage to the P.T.O. output shaft and
other tractor components.
NOTE: When required, change the P.T.O. shaft to

suit the operation and equipment in use, as
described under ‘Changing the P.T.O. Output Shaft’
on page 3--51 .
3--42
TWO--SPEED P.T.O. WITH INTER-

CHANGEABLE SHAFTS
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
A 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,

designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is also
supplied with the tractor.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated.
P.T.O. Combinations/Speeds
PTO Engine Speed

Combination (rev/min)
540/1000 1950/2154
48
540/1000 1950/1893
540E/1000 1569/1893
NOTE: Engne speed for 20 spline shaft is same as

21 spline shaft.
With the P.T.O. engaged, gradually increase engine

r.p.m. using the hand throttle until the appropriate
shaft speed is displayed at (1).
NOTE: The warning light will be illuminated when

the P.T.O. is engaged. When changing from 540 to
1000 rev/min/shaft speed, the warning light may
flash (but can be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed
passes through the 630 rev/min range. This will only
occur the first time the P.T.O. is used after changing
the speed setting. 49
3--43
When operating in the 1000 speed setting, the light

may also flash again at 1100 P.T.O. rev/min to
indicate that overspeeding has occurred in the 1000
rev/min P.T.O. range.
To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure

any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat.
DANGER
NOTE: If the engine is stopped with P.T.O. drive 50

engaged, the P.T.O. will not operate when the engine
is restarted until the P.T.O. knob (1) is reset. Return
the control knob manually to the ‘off’ position (by
pressing the knob down) then re-engage the P.T.O.,
as previously described.
IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia.
Such implements should, ideally, be equipped with
an overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake
when operating high inertia implements, hold down
the top of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and
allow the implement to come to rest naturally.
51
3--44
TWO--SPEED, SHIFTABLE P.T.O.

(540/1000 or 540E/1000)
A 6--spline P.T.O. output shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm)

diameter is supplied, designed to operate at 540
rev/min.
A 21--spline shaft of 1.375 in. (34.9 mm) diameter,

designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is also
supplied with the tractor.
An alternative 20--spline shaft of 1.75 in. (44.45 mm)

diameter, designed to operate at 1000 rev/min., is
available from your dealer.
Operating
Before engaging the P.T.O., select a P.T.O. ratio, as

follows:
With 6--spline shaft installed
 With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, select the
required speed by means of the range lever (1).
Lift the spring-loaded collar (2) beneath the knob
and move the lever to engage 540, 540E or 1000
P.T.O. speeds.
IMPORTANT: The P.T.O. range lever cannot be

moved until the spring-loaded collar beneath the
knob is lifted.
52
With 21--spline shaft installed
 With the tractor stationary and the P.T.O. control

knob in the disengaged position, lift the
spring-loaded collar (2), beneath the knob, and
move the lever (1) fully to the right. This will
provide a P.T.O. speed of 1000 rev/min at 2154
engine rev/min.
NOTE: The P.T.O. range lever should always be in the

1000 rev/min position when the 21--spline shaft is
installed. If you only ever operate with a 21--spline
shaft, leave the range lever in this position.
53
3--45
With the engine running at 1000 rev/min. or less,

press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and knob up
to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain up while
the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent warning light
(2) will be illuminated.
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the control knob manually to the
‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
54
With the P.T.O. engaged gradually increase engine

r.p.m. using the hand throttle until the appropriate
speed is displayed at (1), Figure 55.
P.T.O. Combinations/Speeds
PTO Engine Speed

Combination (rev/min)
540/1000 1950/2154
540E/1000 1569/2154
540E/1000 1569/1893
1000E/1000 1700/1893
55
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 630 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady.
When the 1000 rev/min shaft is in use, the light may
also flash (but may be ignored) as P.T.O. shaft speed
passes through the 630 rev/min range.
The light will flash again at 1100 P.T.O. rev/min to
indicate that overspeeding has occurred in the 1000
rev/min P.T.O. range. This will only occur the first
time the P.T.O. is used after changing the speed
setting.
56
3--46
To disconnect P.T.O. drive, reduce engine speed and

press the knob (1) firmly down to disengage the
Power Take Off.
If it is necessary to dismount from the tractor ensure

any P.T.O. driven equipment is allowed to come to a
complete stop before leaving the seat.
IMPORTANT: An automatic P.T.O. brake is installed

to stop shaft rotation quickly when the P.T.O. is
disengaged. To avoid overstressing the P.T.O.
brake, slow down the implement by reducing engine
speed before disengaging the P.T.O. This is
particularly important with implements having a high
inertia.
Such implements should, ideally, be fitted with an
overrun clutch. To avoid damage to the brake when
operating high inertia implements, hold down the top
of the switch (1), to disengage the brake and allow
the implement to come to rest naturally.
DANGER 57
3--47
Setting the Auto P.T.O. Function (where fitted)
The Auto P.T.O. function provides automatic

engagement or disengagement of the rear P.T.O.
drive when using the EDC raise/lower switch (1).
Operating the switch to raise the implement will
automatically disengage P.T.O. drive. Lowering the
implement with the switch will re--engage P.T.O.
drive.
The height at which the P.T.O. is engaged or

disengaged can be set using the following method.
IMPORTANT: The tractor must be stationary and the 58

P.T.O. switched off before attempting this procedure.
 With the engine running and the P.T.O. switched

off, operate the lift control to capture the hitch.
 Depress and hold the P.T.O. switch for 2

seconds. The central display will show ’u’
followed by two figures, for example, ’u38’. The
figure 38 representing the current height of the
hitch.
 Raise the hitch to point at which the P.T.O. is to

disengage. Depress the P.T.O. switch once, the
central display will show ’d xx’ (where ’xx’ is the
current height of the hitch).
 Lower the hitch to the point where the P.T.O. is

to re--engage and depress the P.T.O. switch
again. The central display will show ’End’ for two
seconds and then return to the option selected
prior to entering set--up mode.
Providing the tractor is stationary and the P.T.O. is

disengaged, this procedure can be carried out at any
time. The new settings will remain in the memory until
re--programmed.
3--48
Setting with Colour Display

(where fitted)
. Work condition
. A. PTO
. Implement to select/add implement type.
. Work Condition to select a memorised

working condition or create a new one.
1. . to access pop--up menu for adjusting or 59

setting the height at which rear P.T.O. drive is
engaged when the 3--point hitch is lowered.
2. . to access pop--up menu for adjusting or

setting the height at which rear P.T.O. drive is
disengaged when the 3--point hitch is raised.
3. . Adjust setting for front P.T.O as described

in (1) above (where fitted).
4. . Adjust setting for front P.T.O as described

in (2) above (where fitted).
3--49
Activating Auto P.T.O.
To activate the Auto function, engage the P.T.O. as

previously described and then depress and hold the
switch (1), for more than one second. The Auto
P.T.O. lamp on the instrument panel will illuminate to
confirm activation.
NOTE: For the Auto P.T.O. to function, the speed of

the tractor must be above 5km/h (3.1 MPH).
With the 3 point hitch in the lowered position and the

P.T.O. engaged, the Auto lamp will remain on.
Raising the implement will disconnect P.T.O. drive 60
and cause the Auto lamp to flash. Lowering the
implement will re--engage P.T.O. drive, the Auto lamp
will cease to flash and will remain on.
Depressing the Auto P.T.O. switch again will

de--activate the function and the Auto lamp will
extinguish.
NOTE: The Auto P.T.O. function will be de--activated

every time the key start is switched off.
Auto P.T.O. will be de--activated should one or more

of the following occur:
 The tractor speed is above 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH)
with the 3 point hitch in the raised position for
more than 2 minutes.
 With the 3 point hitch raised, the tractor speed
falls below 0.5 Km/h (0.3 MPH), or the tractor is
stationary for more than 10 seconds with the
3--point hitch in the raised position.
 If one of the external switches for P.T.O. or 3 point
hitch are operated.
 The P.T.O. is switched off using the internal or
external switches.
 Operating both internal and external P.T.O.
switches simultaneously.
 Ground drive P.T.O. is selected.
 The operator leaves the seat for more than 2
seconds with Auto P.T.O. activated and the 3
point hitch in the raised position.
To re--activate Auto P.T.O., clear the error and

re--engage the function as previously described.
3--50
CHANGING THE P.T.O. OUTPUT SHAFT
Using a suitable tool, compress and remove the

circlip (1) from the P.T.O. housing and carefully
withdraw the P.T.O. stub shaft.
With the shaft removed, check the ’O’ ring seal in the
P.T.O. housing for any damage. Replace ’O’ ring if
worn or damaged.
Thoroughly clean the replacement stub shaft before

inserting it into the housing. Replace the circlip
ensuring it engages fully with the groove in the P.T.O.
housing.
61
Protect the removed shaft by wrapping in a clean
cloth and place in the tool box.
EXTERNAL P.T.O. CONTROLS

(where fitted)
An optional, fender-mounted P.T.O. switch (1), may

be installed on both rear fenders to aid alignment of
the P.T.O shaft splines with equipment and facilitate
stationary P.T.O. operations.
With the engine running, touch the switch

momentarily to cause the P.T.O. shaft to index round
to align the shaft splines. If the switch is pressed for
less than 5 seconds, the shaft will stop turning when
the switch is released.
62
Press and hold in the switch for more than 5 seconds
and the P.T.O. will operate continuously. Press the
switch again to stop the P.T.O. Alternatively, the
P.T.O. may be stopped by means of the in-cab
controls, as previously described.
NOTE: The warning light, on the P.T.O. control

panel, will illuminate when the P.T.O. is engaged,
momentarily or permanently.
NOTE: The P.T.O. may be engaged or disengaged

from the fender switch, whether the in-cab control is
in the on or off position.
NOTE: Simultaneous operation, within two seconds,

of in cab and external P.T.O. controls will result in the
PTO delay symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix
Display. A 10 second delay will occur before P.T.O.
control operation will recommence.
NOTE: The soft start function will operate 63

irrespective of whether the P.T.O. is engaged from
inside the cab or from a fender switch.
3--51
WARNING
Before leaving the tractor to operate the external
Power Take Off switches:
 Move all transmission controls to neutral.
 Disengage the P.T.O.
 Apply the handbrake.
With the engine running, move the hand throttle lever
to the low idle position (fully rearwards).
The operator must only activate the external Power

Take Off switches (1) while standing to the side of the
tractor (outboard of the rear tyres). Operation of the
in cab and external P.T.O. switches should not be
carried out simultaneously.
WARNING
Before using the external Power Take Off switches,
ensure that no person or object is in the area of the
implement, 3-point hitch or P.T.O. shaft.
Never operate the external switches while standing:
 Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
64
 Between the lower links.
 On or near the implement.
 Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or

any object into the area near the 3-point hitch,
P.T.O. shaft or implement while operating the
external switch.
 Never have an assistant working the opposite set 1 1

of controls.
 When moving to the opposite set of controls,

move around the tractor or implement. Do not
cross between the implement and tractor.
65
3--52
ATTACHING P.T.O. DRIVEN EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Before attaching or detaching equipment or
changing the P.T.O. shaft:
 Firmly apply the handbrake.
 Place the shuttle lever in the Neutral or Park
Brake position.
 Disengage the P.T.O. and wait until the P.T.O.
and equipment stops.
 Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
Mount or hitch the equipment to the tractor as

outlined in THREE--POINT HITCH on page 3--109.
With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is released

and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.
A flip-up P.T.O. guard is fitted as standard. Remove

the ’R’ clip (1) from the locating pin and slide the
guard upwards to clear the pin. Rotate the guard to
gain access to the P.T.O. shaft. A second locating pin
allows the guard to be fixed at 45 if required.
The P.T.O. guard also serves as a support for 66

drive-line shields used with P.T.O.-driven equipment
and provides for your safety. Do not modify the
guard.
NOTE: Tractors with slider type, vertically adjustable

drawbars have a flip--up P.T.O. guard plate fixed to
the slider frame.
To connect P.T.O. driven equipment to the P.T.O.

shaft, tilt the guard up for access. Pull the plastic cap
(1) from the shaft and store it in the tractor toolbox.
The plastic P.T.O. cap should always be installed

over the shaft when the P.T.O. is not in use
67
3--53
Attach the implement to the P.T.O. shaft, ensuring

that the implement driveshaft coupler lock pin (3) or
detent balls engage the groove in the P.T.O. shaft (2).
If the coupler does not have a locking arrangement,
pin the coupler to the shaft. Lower the flip-up guard
and replace the ’R’ clip.
IMPORTANT: After attaching mounted equipment,

carefully raise and lower using Position Control and
check clearances and P.T.O. shaft slide range and
articulation. When attaching trailed equipment,
ensure that the drawbar is correctly set.
68
P.T.O. Operating Precautions
WARNING
Whenever operating P.T.O. equipment, observe the
following precautions:
 Check that you are using the correct P.T.O.

speed for the implement. Follow the instructions
in the equipment operator’s manual.
 Ensure that the P.T.O. guard is installed when

using P.T.O. driven equipment.
 Do not wear loose clothing when operating

P.T.O. driven equipment. 69
 Firmly apply the handbrake, place the shuttle

lever in neutral and block all four wheels before
operating any stationary P.T.O. equipment.
 Do not approach, clean or adjust P.T.O. driven

equipment while the tractor engine is still
running. Disengage the P.T.O. (knob fully down)
and wait until the P.T.O. and equipment stops.
Switch off the engine before getting off the
tractor.
 With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is

released and the shaft may be turned by hand to
aid the installation or removal of the implement 70
P.T.O. shaft.
3--54
FRONT P.T.O. AND 3--POINT HITCH

(where fitted)
FRONT P.T.O.
The front power take--off (P.T.O.) transfers engine

power directly to front-mounted equipment via a 6
spline shaft (1). The P.T.O. shaft rotates
anti-clockwise (as viewed from the front).
A plastic cap is provided to protect the P.T.O. shaft

when not in use.
The front P.T.O. is electro--hydraulically operated

and is activated by a knob on the right-hand console,
similar to the rear P.T.O. When P.T.O. drive is
disconnected a hydraulically operated brake is
applied to slow the shaft.
71
NOTE: With the engine stopped, the P.T.O. brake is
released and the shaft may be turned by hand to aid
implement shaft alignment.
With the engine running at approximately 1000

rev/min., press the knob (1) and lift the collar (3) and
knob up to engage the P.T.O. The knob will remain
up while the P.T.O. is engaged and the adjacent
warning light (2) will illuminate to confirm
engagement.
P.T.O. speed @ Engine Speed

1000 P.T.O. @ 2100 e.r.p.m.
IMPORTANT: Do not engage the P.T.O. at engine

speeds above 1200 rev/min.
Open the throttle to increase engine speed to 2100 72

rev/min and provide a P.T.O. shaft speed of 1000
rev/min. To disengage the P.T.O., press the P.T.O.
selector knob (1), down.
NOTE: If overspeeding of the P.T.O. occurs (i.e.

P.T.O. speed exceeds 1100 rev/min) the light (2) will
flash for 5 seconds, then remain steady. Reduce
engine speed to 2100 rev/min.
3--55
NOTE: If the engine is stopped, the P.T.O. will not

operate when the engine is restarted until the P.T.O.
knob is reset. Return the selector knob manually to
the ‘off’ position (by pressing the knob down) then
re-engage the P.T.O., as previously described.
DANGER
PTO Switch Operation -- Time--Out
Engagement of the PTO control should be decisive

in its application as hesitant or incorrect operation of
the knob or collar may cause the PTO system to
Time--Out.
Do not:
 Depress and hold the knob (1) for more than 10
seconds.
 Depress and hold the knob and lift the collar (2)
for more than 10 seconds without engaging the
PTO. 73
 Operate the externally mounted and internal

P.T.O. controls simultaneously or within 2
seconds of each other (where fitted).
Any of the above actions will cause the PTO to

become inoperable (Timed--Out) for 10 seconds.
Should this occur, the PTO Time--Out symbol will

appear in the Dot Matrix Display and the amber
warning light will flash for 10 seconds.
The non--critical alarm will sound for 4 seconds.
During the 10 seconds when the PTO system has

Timed Out, avoid operating any of the PTO controls
as this may extend the duration of the Time--Out
period.
74
3--56
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH (where fitted)
The optional front hitch, consists of an adjustable top

link (1) and a pair of folding lower links (2). The top
link and the lower links have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements.
The claws are equipped with self-locking latches to
ensure positive retention of the 3--point hitch to the
implement.
75
The front hitch can be operated by a rear or

mid--mount remote valve (where fitted). The height
of the hitch (1) can be shown in the Central Display
as a percentage (%) ranging from 0 (fully lowered) to
100 (full raise).
A rotary adjuster on the EDC panel can be used to

limit the operating height of the hitch where required.
76
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin.
The two plain ball-bushings (2) with their additional

guides (3) should be installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
77
3--57
Operating the Front Hitch
The front hitch may be operated by mechanical rear

remote valves or, where fitted, electronic mid-mount
remote valves.
A height limit control permits the operator to set a

pre--determined limit on the maximum lift height of
the hitch .
With Mechanical Rear Remote Valves:

With the front hitch connected to the appropriate
valve, pull the lever rearwards (R) to raise the front
hitch. Move the lever to (N) to halt hitch movement,
the hitch will maintain its height position. Select (L)
to lower the hitch. With the lever in the float position
(F), the hitch can move up and down (float) allowing
the implement to follow the ground contours.
The front hitch may be connected to any of the rear

remote valves.
Where an implement requires additional hydraulic

services, these may be connected to any unused 78
valve.
Setting the Height of the Front Hitch
Height limit control is provided by a rotary knob (1) on

the right-hand console. Turn fully clockwise for
maximum height. Turn anti-clockwise to reduce the
height.
The height setting will be shown in the Dot Matrix

Display as a percentage (%) between 0 (fully lowered)
and 100 (full raise).
Turn the control fully anti--clockwise to disable the

height limit function.
79
3--58
With Joystick and Electronic Mid Mount Remote

Valves:
Where a front hitch is provided as a factory option,

the tractor will be equipped with mid--mounted
electronically controlled remote valves. Valve
number one will be programmed to operate the front
hitch.
The mid--mount valves are controlled by a joystick

mounted on the armrest.
At key--on, the joystick indicator lamp (2) will start to

flash but the joystick will remain disabled. To activate
the joystick the operator must be in the seat and the
tractor engine running for a minimum of five seconds.
Once activated, the mid--mount valve indicator lamp

will stop flashing and remain illuminated.
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat, joystick

operation will be de--activated. When the operator is
re--seated, joystick operation will be re--activated 80
after two seconds.
Mid--mount electronic remote valves offer the

following functions when operated by the joystick.
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards or

backwards to operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and
Float.
Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to

operate Raise, Neutral and Lower.
Where a third valve is fitted, the joystick functions as

follows.
Remote valve 3: Depress and hold the button (1) 81

and move the joystick forwards or backwards to
operate Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float.
Remote valve 4: Depress and hold the button (1)

and move the joystick left or right to operate Raise,
Neutral and Lower.
3--59
Move the joystick rearwards (R) to raise the

implement. When the front hitch reaches the position
set by the height limit control the hitch will stop.
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will cause the implement to lower to the ground at a
controlled rate of descent.
Further forward movement of the joystick will select

‘float’ (F) which will allow the implement to lower
under its own weight. Float can also be used to let the
hitch lift cylinder extend or retract freely allowing front
mounted equipment to follow ground contours.
82
NOTE: Always use the ’float’ position to lower a
single--acting cylinder. The ’lower’ position is for
double--acting cylinders only.
The joystick may also be moved laterally, (R) and (L),

to provide oil flow for equipment connected to the
optional front couplers.
By moving the joystick diagonally, two cylinders may

be operated simultaneously.
83
3--60
Button Functions
Where additional hydraulic services are required, the

joystick can provide optional functions activated by
depressing and holding the buttons on top of the
joystick.
Button Function
Number
1 Operates valve 3 or 4
Operates valve number 2 via a
2
diverter valve
Operates valve number 2 via a
3
diverter valve
Buttons 1 and 3
Where a tractor is equipped with 2 mid--mount
valves, buttons (1) and (3) can be used to provide
additional hydraulic services when operated through 84
diverter valves. The diverter valves would be
mounted on the implement and connected to remote
valve number 2.
By depressing buttons (1) or (3), the oil flow from

valve 2 is re--directed by the diverter valves to
operate the additional hydraulic services. Depress
the appropriate button and move the joystick left or
right to operate the Raise, Neutral and Lower
functions.
WARNING
If a loader has been installed on a tractor where the
mid--mount remote valves are configured for front
hitch operation or front coupler operation, it is most
important that the valves are re--configured for
loader operation.
It is essential this procedure is completed so that
mid--mount remote valve HTS programme and timer
functions are disabled for front loader operation.
Re--configuration of the remote valves requires the
use of special tools and MUST be carried out by an
authorised dealer.
Re--configuring the remote valves will also provide
the advanced features available when the loader is
used in conjunction with the colour display.
3--61
Joystick Functionality Screen
On tractors fitted with the colour display, the operator

can access the joystick screen which provides
details on joystick functionality.
. Remote Valves
Use YB to scroll the through the menu until

Joystick is displayed.
. Joystick
The joystick functionality screen identifies the

number of valves controlled by the joystick and the
corresponding movement required to operate each
valve. Valves marked with a black border can be
operated by simply moving the joystick, valves with
a red border require the button to be depressed
before moving the joystick, see page 3--61.
When the button is depressed a symbol will appear

in the screen on the lower right--hand side.
As a valve is operated the white background will 85

change to orange.
If the tractor is fitted with a front hitch the joystick

functionality screen also identifies the valve used to
operate the front hitch.
Where tractors are equipped with a factory fitted

front loader, the functionality screen will show
joystick movement for loader arm raise/lower and
bucket roll out/roll back.
At key--off, the joystick function is de--activated. The

joystick will be reactivated when the operator is in the
seat with the engine running for more than three
seconds.
86
3--62
EHR Visual Displays
Depress the remote valve key on the keypad and the

following information will be displayed in the DMD for
each valve:
1. Momentary oil flow from the valve. The shaded

area represents the percentage of oil flow, this
will change as the flow increases or decreases.
2. Maximum flow rate (%) as set by the operator.

The extend/retract directional arrows represent
the maximum flow setting.
3. Number of the remote valve in operation.
4. Direction of cylinder movement, extend (Raise)

4 3
or retract (Lower). The direction of cylinder travel
is identified by the arrow.
87
Additional Displays
As each of the electronic remote valve functions are

selected, a corresponding visual display will appear
in the Dot Matrix Screen.
Number 1 remote valve lever in NEUTRAL position.
Number 1 remote valve operating at maximum

flow set by the operator. Illustration shows
cylinder operating in RETRACT mode.
Number 1 remote valve lever in FLOAT position.
Electronic remote valve system switched OFF.

All remote valve functions de--activated.
3--63
Setting the Mid--Mount Valve Oil Flow
To adjust the remote valve flow rate, the key--start

must be switched ON.
To select a mid--mount valve for adjustment, use the

EHR key (1) on the Enhanced Keypad. Depress and
hold the key until the required valve appears in the
Dot Matrix Display (the number will be followed by
the letter ’F’).
Select the appropriate valve number and then carry

out the following procedure.
88
Use the MENU UP/DOWN keys (1 and 2), to

increase or decrease the maximum flow rate of the 1
selected valve. The flow rate will be saved in the EHR
memory, turning the key--start off will not erase the
setting.
NOTE: The remote valve flow rate setting (1),

Figure 90, will apply to both extend and retract
movements of the cylinder.
IMPORTANT: During remote valve set--up, a pause

of more than two seconds in key operation will exit 2
set--up and return to the previous setting, re--enter
set--up mode again to continue. 89
90
3--64
Setting Mid Mount Remote Valve Priority
A remote valve with oil flow priority will always take

precedence over other remote valves for hydraulic oil
flow. Irrespective of flow demand by the other valves,
the priority valve will always maintain a constant
output.
With electronic mid--mount valves, the operator can

select which remote valve has oil flow priority.
 With the key--start in the ON position, depress

and hold the Menu/Enter key (4) until SET--UP
MENU appears in the Dot Matrix Display. Pause
for 2 seconds and one of the following displays
will appear:
CAL (tractors without groundspeed radar)

OR
Clock setup (tractors with groundspeed radar)
NOTE: In the following text, ’x’ denotes where the

valve number will appear, i.e. 1, 2 or 3.
91
 Release the Menu/Enter key, pause for 5

seconds and depress the EHR key (1) Figure 92.
PEhr will appear in the central display.
 Momentarily depress the EHR key and this will

change to show the remote valve currently
prioritised.
NOTE: If the display shows FEh_, the remote valves

have not been prioritised.
 Depress the EHR key repeatedly and the display

will scroll through each valve number FEh1,
FEh2 etc.. When the required valve number 92
appears, depress/hold the EHR key until the
display returns to its original setting.
 Depress the Exit/Cancel key (2) Figure 91, to

exit the remote valve set--up sequence and
return to the original Dot Matrix screen.
3--65
Mid Mount EHR Valve Settings with Colour

Display (where fitted)
A number of settings and adjustments can be made

to the mid mount EHR valves. This can be done using
the colour display.
Adjustments and settings will include:

1. Oil flow adjustment, retract and extend.
2. Timer period settings, retract and extend.

3. Timer on/off.
4. Valve lock or unlock.
5. EHR valve priority
. Remote valves to access adjustment screens.
Performance Screen
1 2 3 4
When operating with EHR’s, a performance screen
depicting the flow settings, valve and timer modes for
each valve can be shown in the colour display.
. F--Flow to access flow setting screen.
The information displayed is as follows:
1. EHR valve number, location and operating

mode. This can be neutral, locked or, as shown
on F1, valve functionality.
93
2. Retract Mode. Maximum oil flow setting depicted
by the vertical line and instant oil flow shown in
the bargraph.
3. Timer armed or disarmed. When X is displayed

across the timer symbol (clock), the timer is
disarmed.
The figure ’10’ represents the timer period for
cylinder retract. Conversely, the figure ’15’
shows the timer period for the cylinder to extend.
All timer periods are in seconds.
3--66
4. Extend Mode. Maximum oil flow setting depicted

1 2 3 4
by the vertical line and instant oil flow shown in
the bargraph.
Instant oil flow is displayed as a solid bar moving

within the bargraph. As the oil flow increases or
decreases, the solid bar will move correspondingly.
Direction arrows above the bargraph identify the

direction in which the cylinder will travel, i.e. extend
or retract.
94
Setting the Flow Rate
. F--Flow to access flow setting screen.
1. . Hydraulic cylinder retract bargraph (1), and

a pop--up will appear. The flow can be adjusted
using A" to set the required percentage.
Touch Ok to save setting.
2. . Hydraulic cylinder extend bargraph (2), and

a pop--up will appear. The flow can be adjusted
using A" to set the required percentage.
Touch Ok to to save setting.
95
3. By touching the bargraph at the 50% flow
position, oil flow will automatically be set to this
level. To make finer adjustments from the 50%
point use the A" arrows. Touch Ok to save
setting.
The flow settings will remain in the EHR memory to

be recalled for future use or until changed.
3--67
Setting EHR Valve Priority
. Priority to access valve priority screen.
. EHR box to access pop--up remote valve select

menu. Use YB to scroll through remote valve list.
Touch the # box (1) to select the required valve, this

will save the setting and return to the prority screen.
Where it is not required to have a prioritised valve

touch None.
96
Where the total flow demanded by the implement

exceeds the output of the hydraulic pump at the
current engine speed, then the system will balance
the available flow between all valves currently in
operation.
However, where a valve has oil flow priority, this

valve will continue to receive maximum flow.
Should a situation arise where the demand for oil flow

through the priority valve exceeds system capacity,
then non prioritised valve/s will be electronically shut
down by placing them in neutral.
Should this occur, N will appear against the relevant

valve/s in EHR display indicating they have been
shut down. When flow demand reduces, the valve/s
which have been placed into neutral by the system
will resume their function.
3--68
Creating a Manual Timer Programme
Manual programming of EHR valves is carried out

using the colour display and can be applied to both 1 2 3 4
lever and joystick.
NOTE: A timed sequence for electronic valves

controlled by the the joystick can only be created
using the colour display.
. Remote valves
. YB to scroll through remote valve list.
. F--Timer to access the EHR timer screen. 97
1. Identifies the remote valve number.
2. . EHR retract box to access pop--up menu to

set time duration for the cylinder retract cycle.
Touch A or " to decrease or increase time
duration. Touch Ok to memorise setting and
return to timer screen.
By repeatedly touching A or " the fill line

can be extended the full length of the bar graph,
this is the infinity setting. In this setting the oil will
continue to flow from the valve until the lever is
returned to the neutral position manually.
3. . EHR timer button to arm or disarm the

timer. Symbol will change to confirm whether
timer is armed or disarmed (X).
4. . EHR extend box to access pop--up menu to

set time duration for the cylinder extend cycle.
Touch A or " to decrease or increase time
duration. Touch Ok to memorise setting and
return to timer screen.
For single acting services the setting procedure is

the same as double acting. However, it is
recommened that the unused timer period is set to
zero (0s).
3--69
Engaging the EHR Lock
. Lock to bring up EHR lock screen
1. Identifies the remote valve number. (The

illustration shows a tractor equipped with front
and rear valves).
2. . Remote valve lock symbol to lock or unlock

the required valve.
Touch YB to access other EHR setting screens,

touch Back to return to main menu screen.
98
When the valve is locked, a lock symbol (1) will

appear in the main EHR information screen to 1
confirm valve status.
99
Replaying a Timed Programme

1
A timer sequence can only be activated through the
colour display. Select the front timer screen and
touch the timer symbol (3).
This will arm the timer function and the timer light will
start to flash, move the appropriate lever, joystick or
quad switch to initiate oil flow.
To disable the timer function touch the screen again.

A cross on the timer symbol will indicate the timer has
been disarmed.
100
3--70
Setting the Hitch Operating Mode
Located on the front of the hitch assembly, the two

selector levers permit the front hitch to be operated
in single--acting mode, double--acting mode, or to be
set at a fixed height.
101
Position P1:
Right--hand lever horizontal, left--hand lever vertical.
Front hitch operates in single--acting mode being

hydraulically raised but lowered using weight of
implement.
Position P2:
Both levers vertical.
Hitch operates in double--acting mode being

hydraulically raised and lowered. Operating in this
mode will provide additional penetration for ground
engaging equipment in hard soil conditions or when 102
using a front mounted scraper blade.
Lock Position:
Both levers horizontal.
With the levers in this position, both lift cylinders are

hydraulically ’locked’ preventing movement of the
lower link arms. It is recommended this mode should
be selected when transporting front mounted
equipment on the highway.
3--71
Auxiliary Front Couplers (where fitted)
Two auxiliary couplers with 1/2 inch female couplings

may be fitted to the front of the hitch frame. These will
provide a double--acting hydraulic service for
equipment mounted on the front 3--point hitch.
When operated by the joystick, lateral movement of

the joystick (left or right) will provide pressurised oil
at the couplings. See page 3--59 for details.
NOTE: When the front couplers are not in use always

re--insert the protective plug into the coupler to
prevent dust or debris from entering the hydraulic
system.
Disconnecting Hydraulic Hoses from Front

Couplers
Before disconnecting hoses from the front couplers,

any residual pressure in the hydraulic lines must be
released. Pressure can be released by using one of
the following procedures.
NOTE: All procedures must commence with the

tractor engine running.
Valve numbers 1 and 3 (where fitted):

On tractors equipped with a joystick and 3 mid mount
remote valves, the joystick can be used to release
pressure in valves 1 and/or 3 by selecting the float
position and switching off the engine. (Depress and
hold the joystick button to select valve 3 as previously
described).
Valve number 2 or 4:
To release pressure in valve 2 or 4, start the engine
and apply the following procedure.
 Depress and hold the Menu/Enter key (2) until

SET--UP MENU appears in the Dot Matrix
Display. Pause for 2 seconds and one of the
following displays will appear:
CAL (tractors without groundspeed radar)

OR
Clock setup (tractors with groundspeed radar)
103
3--72
 Depress the EHR key and the display will change

to show PEhr.
 Depress and hold the joystick button (1) for 2

seconds and the display will change to FEhr,
release the button. After a short pause the
display will change to show F2.
If you wish to select an alternative remote valve, i.e.

valve 3, momentarily depress the joystick button
again to select valve F3 in the display.
 With the correct valve selected, depress and

hold the joystick button and the display will start
to countdown showing:
F2 3
F2 2 104
F2 1
F2 FL
 When the display shows F2FL, the pressure at

the hydraulic couplers for the selected valve will
be zero. Release the button and the display will
return to F2 (or F4). Switch off the engine, apply
the handbrake and disconnect the hydraulic
hoses.
NOTE: On re--starting the engine, the remote valves

will return to normal operation.
WARNING
Make sure no one will be injured by moving
equipment when relieving pressure in the system.
Before disconnecting cylinders or equipment, make
sure the equipment or implement is supported
securely.
3--73
Transport Locks
When travelling on the highway, the mid--mounted

remote valves can be locked to prevent inadvertent
lowering of the front hitch which may cause damage
to the tractor or road surface.
Electronic Remote Valves

To isolate rear or mid--mount remote valve operation,
depress the top of the switch on the cab ’C’ pillar. The
warning lamp on the joystick will illuminate to confirm
the valves are disabled.
To re--enable operation of the valves, depress the

bottom of the switch.
105
Joystick
The electronic joystick is provided with a mechanical

transport lock. To engage the lock, grip the joystick,
push down and rotate clockwise. This will lock the
joystick in the neutral position. Reverse the
procedure to unlock the joystick.
106
3--74
Hitch Settings and Adjustments
Transport Position
The top link and lower links should be placed in the

transport position when not in use. Raise the top link
(1) to the vertical position and secure by sliding the
adjuster handle extensions (2) into the slots in the
support (3).
107
The lower links pivot about the pin (2). This pin
should not be removed unless it is required to
remove the lower links. To raise the lower link, extract
the pin (3) from the support assembly and raise the
link (1) to the vertical position, as shown. Re--insert
the pin through the support when the holes in the
lower link and support are correctly aligned. Before
operating the tractor ensure both pins are fully
secured using the lock pins.
To convert to the working position, remove the pin (3)

Figure 108 and manually lower the link down to the
operating position, as shown. Re--install the pin in
one of the holes (4) or (5), as required and secure.
108
When installed in the rear hole (5), the lower link will
be locked as a rigid unit. If the pin is installed in the
front hole (4), the lower link will be allowed to move
up and down freely (float) through a range of approx.
75 mm (3 in). Secure the pin using the lock pins.
Repeat on the other lower link, ensuring that both

lower links are set up the same, i.e., both are locked
as rigid units or both are allowed to float.
IMPORTANT: When transporting heavy front

mounted implements at speed it is advisable to install
the pivot pin (1) in the rear hole (2) (rigid position) to
help reduce implement bounce which may affect 109
steering control.
3--75
NOTE: With the lower links pinned in the float

position, the left and right-hand sides of the
implement can move up and down independently to
allow for operation on uneven surfaces. In addition,
the remote control valve float function will allow the
whole implement to move up or down as it passes
over uneven ground.
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Start the engine. Move the remote valve lever or

joystick (where fitted) from neutral (N) to lower (L)
until the link arms are just clear of the ground.
Position the tractor so that the open claw ends are
beneath the implement hitch pins.
Slowly move the remote valve lever or joystick

rearward to raise the lower links until the claw
couplers engage the ball-bushings.
110
An audible click will be heard as the self-locking

latches (1) engage the ball-bushings (2) on the
implement. The lift control should be returned to the
neutral position before the lower links start to lift the
implement from the ground.
IMPORTANT: Before operating the tractor, ensure

the release latches (1), are fully retracted into the link
end.
111
3--76
Attach the top link to the implement, adjusting to the

correct length by rotating the threaded centre section
(1) using the handles (2) as leverage. To prevent the
centre section from rotating while in work, place the
locking latch (3) over one of the adjuster handles.
The top link has a similar claw end to the lower links.
Lower the top link claw onto the upper implement
ball-bush and press down until the latch is heard to
engage.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the front hitch.
112
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the remote lever or joystick, lower the

implement to the ground, ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the front hitch. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull back the lever on the top link to release the claw
from the implement upper hitch pin.
Lift and rotate the release lever (1) fully rearwards on

both lower links. The lever will lock in position with the
latch retracted, as shown. This will allow the links to
clear the ball-bushings on the implement lower hitch 113
pins when the links are lowered fully.
Fully lower the lower links using the remote lever or

joystick and reverse the tractor clear of the
implement.
3--77
External Front Hitch Controls

(where fitted)
External raise and lower buttons are provided on the

left--hand side of the front hitch assembly. Depress
and hold the appropriate button to raise or lower the
hitch, release the button to halt movement of the
hitch.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
controls for the external front 3--point hitch.
NOTE: The external front 3--point hitch controls are

disabled when the operator is in the seat. 114

controls:
 Place all transmission controls in neutral.
 Apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Before using the external front 3--point hitch controls,
implement or 3-point hitch.
Never operate the external controls while standing:

WARNING
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the front 3-point hitch or
implement while operating the external controls.
3--78
OPERATING WITH A FRONT LOADER AND

PROPORTIONAL JOYSTICK
Where a front loader is installed as a factory option,

a proportional joystick is provided to control the
electro--hydraulic remote valves (EHR’s) used for
operating the loader and attachments. Up to three
remote valves may be operated simultaneously by
the joystick.
Remote valve 1: Move the joystick forwards (L) or

backwards (R) to raise and lower the loader boom.
Pushing the joystick forward to the ‘lower’ position (L)

will allow the loader boom to lower to the ground at
a controlled rate of descent.
By moving the joystick fully forward into ‘float’ (F) the

loader boom will lower quickly under its own weight.
When float is engaged with the boom in the fully
lowered position, the bucket or attachment will follow
the ground contours.
NOTE: The ’float’ position is not available on remote 115

valves 2.
Remote Valve 2: Move the joystick left or right to

operate bucket roll--back and dump.
NOTE: By moving the joystick diagonally, both

loader boom and bucket actions can be operated
simultaneously.
Remote Valve 3 (where fitted): Where a third

hydraulic service is required to operate an
attachment such as a bale fork eject plate or 4 in 1
bucket jaw, switch (2) is used to control the third
valve.
The control for this valve is a progressive, self

centring rocker switch. This type of switch allows the
operator to control the speed at which a hydraulic
cylinder is extended or retracted.
3--79
By lightly depressing the switch, a minimal oil flow is

generated to provide a slow speed, depressing the
switch further will increase the flow and therefore the
speed.
NOTE: Switch (1) is only used in conjunction with the

advanced performance monitor (where fitted).
At key--off, the joystick function is de--activated. To

activate the joystick, the operator must be in the seat
with the engine running for more than five seconds.
When the joystick is de--activated, the warning light

(2) will flash. 116
NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat with the engine

running, joystick operation will be de--activated and
the warning light (2) will start to flash. When the
operator is re--seated, joystick operation will be
re--activated after two seconds. The warning light will
stop flashing and will remain illuminated.
IMPORTANT: Where a loader has been retro--fitted

to a tractor having the remote valves configured for
front hitch operation or front coupler operation, it is
most important the valves are re--configured by your
authorised dealer for loader operation.
This will provide the advanced features available
when the loader is used in conjunction with the colour
display, and will also disable the auto function so
joystick operation cannot be included in HTS
programmes.
The re--configuration procedure requires the use of
special tools and MUST be carried out by an
authorised dealer.
3--80
ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL
The system described here is known as Electronic

Draft Control. This electronically controlled hydraulic
system senses changes in the draft loading via
sensors in the lower link pins of the 3--point hitch and
changes in the position of the hitch via a sensor on
the cross shaft. The system functions in Position
Control or Draft Control.
Position Control provides accurate control of

implements, such as sprayers, rakes, graders, etc.,
that operate above the ground. Once implement
height has been set, the system will maintain the
selected position irrespective of any external forces
acting upon it.
Draft Control is designed for mounted or

semi-mounted implements operating in the ground.
Changes in soil resistance cause the draft loading on
the implement to increase or decrease.
Draft Control Operational Notes
Draft control sets the working depth in the soil by

maintaining a constant draft load. If the Position
Control lever (1), is set just below the normal Draft
Control working depth, it will prevent the implement
from ‘diving’ or working too deep if an area of soft or
light soil is encountered.
Position Control will override draft control when the

Position Control lever is moved above the working
depth set by the draft loading wheel (2). Therefore,
the Position Control lever can be used to lift the
implement out of the ground, from the normal Draft 117
Control working depth, without changing the Draft
Control setting.
This function can be useful when a gradual lift out is

required. The thumbwheel stop can be set so that the
Position Control lever can be returned quickly to a
lower limit position just below the normal Draft
Control working depth.
The raise/lower switch would normally be used to

raise or lower an implement during a work cycle.
3--81
Control Pod
The thumbwheel (5), when rotated, will move the

adjustable stop (1).
The position control lever (2), is used to set

implement height, when operating in Position
Control. Use it to set the maximum implement depth
when operating in Draft Control.
The draft loading wheel (3), determines the draft load

and therefore implement working depth by setting a
force on the draft sensitivity pins. Selecting position
10 will provide maximum load and therefore 118
maximum implement depth.
The raise/lower switch (4) Figure 118, is a three

position, spring centred switch that enables the
operator to rapidly raise the implement to the position
set by the height limit control and to lower the
implement back down to the working depth/height
set by the Position or Draft Controls, without
disturbing the settings. The switch also provides for
faster ground engagement, if required. For detailed
information, see text on page 3--90.
NOTE: A second raise/lower switch (1), is

conveniently located on the transmission powershift
control.
119
EDC Panel
The draft sensitivity control (1), is used to make the

system more sensitive or less sensitive to changes
in draft loading. Maximum sensitivity is obtained by
rotating the control fully clockwise.
The drop rate control (2), adjusts the speed at which

the three--point hitch drops during the lowering cycle.
Position 1 selects the slowest drop and is denoted by
the tortoise symbol, position 7 provides the fastest
rate of drop.
The height limit control knob (3), limits the height to

which the hitch may be raised. Adjust this knob to
avoid the possibility of a large implement damaging 120
the tractor when fully raised.
The slip limit control knob (4), available only with the
optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold, above which the
implement will raise until wheel slip returns to the set
level.
3--82
Work Condition with Colour Display

(where fitted)
Tractors with the colour display have the ability to

record operational settings made to the EDC system
and 3--point hitch. These settings may be stored in
the tractor memory and recalled for future use.

changes touch X.
NOTE: Changing the descriptions for Implement or

Work Condition in any screen will automatically
update all Work Condition screens.
Implement Setup
121
. Work conditions
. Impl
The implement screen allows the operator to select,

edit or create implement descriptions and working
conditions.
. Implement (1)
Select an implement from the pop--up list, modify a

current implement description or add a new
implement to the list.
. Work Condition (2)
Select the current work condition from the pop--up

list, modify the current condition or add a new work
category to the list.
3--83
Rear Hitch Setting with Colour Display

(where fitted)
. Hitch
The implement description and operating conditions

appear at the top of the screen. A choice of two hitch
settings are available, #1 and #2.
1. Quadrant lever setting. The red line on the bar

graph identifies the position of the lower links as
set by the EDC Position Control lever (1)
Figure 123.
2. Draft loading wheel setting. The red line shows

the amount of draft load set by the draft loading
wheel (2) Figure 123. As the load increases or 122
decreases the black fill line will move to indicate
the change.
3. Drop rate setting. As set on the 3--point hitch drop

rate control (2) Figure 124. The red line indicates
the current setting on the drop rate control.
4. Draft sensitivity level. The red line identifies the

level of draft sensitivity set on the EDC sensitivity
control (3) Figure 124.
5. Height limit setting. Shown as a percentage of

total hitch travel, the red line indicates the height
at which the lower links will stop when the fast
raise button is used to lift the hitch. Rotate the
limit setting control (4) Figure 124, clockwise to
increase height.
123
6. Wheel slip limit. The red line shows the
percentage setting on the wheel slip control (1)
Figure 124. A low setting will provide a higher
correction rate to maintain traction. However,
this setting will result in more hitch corrections
and therefore a more uneven depth control.
A higher setting will result in less corrections and
therefore a more even depth of cultivation. 4 3 5 6
7. . Save to memorise settings for Rear hitch

set. #1. To recall the settings touch Rear#1
124
3--84
Indicator Lights
The malfunction warning light (4), serves two

purposes:
 Flashing light indicates a malfunction in the
system circuits.
 Steady light signifies the hitch is disabled.
The above lights will be accompanied by the hitch

error symbol appearing in the Dot Matrix Display.
The indicator lights (1) and (2), operate when the
position control lever is used to raise or lower the
implement or as lift and lower corrections occur 125
during normal tractor operation. The lower light (2)
will illuminate when the 3--point hitch lowers. The
upper light (1) will illuminate when the hitch raises.
A slip limit ‘on’ indicator (3), illuminates when the

wheel slip limit control is activated.
Hitch Position Display
The digital display in the instrument panel indicates

the position of the lower links over a scale of ‘0’ to
‘100’. A display of ‘0’ indicates that the links are fully
lowered. ‘100’ indicates they are fully raised. Select
the display using the CAL/SEL switch or the
Enhanced keypad (where fitted).
126
3--85
Malfunction Warning Light and Display
In the unlikely event that a fault occurs in the EDC,

the malfunction warning light (4) Figure 128, will start
to flash. The warning light will be accompanied by the
appearance of the hitch symbol (1), and error code
(2), in the Dot Matrix Display.
The code indicates the tractor circuit or sensor in

which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g. short
circuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. In this event
your tractor will require the attention of your
authorised dealer.
127
A steady malfunction warning light (4) signifies that

the hitch has been disabled and the setting of the
position control knob does not correspond to the
height position of the lower links.
The ‘hitch disabled’ warning will display if:
 The Position Control lever has been moved with

the engine stopped.
 One of the external power lift switches has been

operated to raise or lower the three-point hitch.
See ‘External Hydraulic Power Lift Controls’ on
page 3--94.
128
To re--phase the Position Control lever with the lower

links, start the engine and move the lever (1) slowly
in either direction until the position of the lever
matches the height of the hitch. This will be
confirmed by the ’hitch disabled’ warning light going
out.
Alternatively, use the fast raise switch to raise or

lower the hitch until the hitch disabled light goes out.
During the re--phase sequence, the lower links will
raise slowly but once the Position Control lever and
hitch are in phase, the lower links will operate
normally.
129
3--86
PRE--OPERATION SETTINGS
Attach the implement to the 3--point hitch.
Turn the draft loading wheel (2) fully forward to

position 10 -- this is the Position Control setting.
Start the engine and, using the Position Control lever

(1), raise the implement in stages, ensuring that
there is at least 100 mm (4 in.) clearance between the
implement and any part of the tractor.
Note the digital display reading on the instrument

panel. If the reading is less than ‘100’ it means that 130
the implement is not fully raised.
Adjust the height limit control knob (2) to prevent the

hitch being raised further and so avoid the possibility
of the implement damaging the tractor when fully
raised.
When the raise/lower switch or the Position Control

lever is used to raise the implement, it will only raise
to the height set by the height limit control, as
determined in the previous step.
Adjust the rate of drop, to suit the size and weight of

the attached implement, by rotating the drop rate
control knob (1). Turn the knob clockwise to speed up
the drop rate or anti-clockwise to slow down the drop 131
rate.
IMPORTANT: When first setting the implement up

for work, keep the drop rate control knob in the slow
drop position (‘tortoise’ symbol).
When the raise/lower switch is used to lower the

implement, it will lower at a controlled rate as
determined in the previous step.
3--87
DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION
To operate in Draft Control adjustment of several

controls is necessary to suit the implement and field
conditions.
The draft loading wheel (2), determines implement

depth by setting a required force on the draft sensing
pins Set the wheel to the mid-position (position 5)
prior to commencing work.
132
The position of the draft sensitivity knob (1),

determines the sensitivity of the system. Set the
knob to the mid-position before entering the field.
133
Drive the tractor into the field and lower the

implement into work by moving the Position Control
lever (2), forward. Use the Position Control lever to
set the maximum depth and so prevent ‘diving’ when
areas of light soil are encountered. Set the required
implement working depth by rotating the draft loading
wheel (3).
Rotate the thumbwheel (4) to move the adjustable

stop (1) against the Position Control lever so that the
selected setting may be quickly found.
134
3--88
Observe the implement as it pulls through the soil

and adjust the draft sensitivity knob (1), until the
tendency to raise or lower, due to variations in soil
resistance, is satisfactory. Once set, the tractor
hydraulic system will automatically adjust implement
depth to maintain an even pull (draft load) on the
tractor.
The optimum setting will be achieved by observing

the movement indicator lights (2) and (3). The upper
light (2) will illuminate every time the system raises
the implement as normal draft corrections occur. The
lower light (3) will illuminate as the implement lowers.
135
Turn the draft sensitivity knob (1) slowly clockwise.

The system will respond with smaller, quicker
movements as will be seen by both the indicator
lights flickering. At this point, turn the knob slightly
anti-clockwise until either of the indicator lights
flashes once every 2 or 3 seconds or, as required, to
suit the soil conditions.
Once the required working conditions have been

established there is no need to move the position
control lever again until the work in hand is
completed.
136
Upon reaching the headland, momentarily depress

the top of the raise/lower switch (3) to quickly lift the
implement to the position set by the height limit
control knob. When re-entering the working area,
momentarily depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will descend at the rate set by the drop
rate control knob and stop when it reaches the depth
set by the draft loading wheel (2).
During the raise cycle, momentarily depressing the

top of the raise/lower switch will pause implement lift.
NOTE: Depressing the top of the raise/lower switch

during the lift cycle will temporarily disable the hitch. 137
Depressing the top of the switch again will re--enable
hitch operation but initial movement will be slow.
3--89
Faster implement penetration may be required, for

example, after turning at a narrow headland. Also,
some implements are reluctant to penetrate,
particularly if the ground is heavy. Press and hold the
bottom of the raise/lower switch (3) and the
implement will lower at the rate set by the drop rate
control knob, until it contacts the ground.
The drop rate and the Position Control settings will

then be overridden and the implement will quickly
penetrate the ground, rising to the preset working
depth when the switch is released.
Alternatively, the adjustable stop may be used to set 138

the implement depth. When the required implement
depth has been established, rotate the thumbwheel
(4). This will move the stop (1) so that it is against the
front edge of the position control lever (2). Whenever
the implement is raised, using the Position Control
lever, it will always return to the same working depth
when the lever is moved forward to contact the stop.
NOTE: If required, the Position Control may be

eased sideways (to the left), in order to bypass the
stop, to lower the implement further.
The slip limit control (1), available only with the

optional radar sensor unit, enables the operator to
select a wheel slip threshold which, if exceeded, will
result in the implement working depth being adjusted
to reduce wheel slip.
When slip control is activated, the Draft Control

system will temporarily reduce the working depth of
the implement. As rear wheel slip reduces, Draft
Control will lower the implement back to its original 139
working depth.
Care must be taken not to select a wheel slip limit that

is either too high or too low. Setting the slip limit to a
very low level, unobtainable in wet conditions, may
have a detrimental effect on the work rate and depth.
NOTE: The wheel slip function does not work in

Position Control.
The slip limit ‘on’ indicator (2) will illuminate when slip
control is activated and the implement is raising to
restore the selected slip rate. The knob is detented
at the ‘off’ position (knob fully clockwise).
140
3--90
Setting the Slip Limit with Colour Display

(where fitted)
. Settings
. Implement. Use the pop--up screen to select,

change or add a new implement category.
. Work condition. Use the pop--up screen to

select, change or add a new category of work
condition.
1. Percentage slip figure, this will change as wheel 141

slip increases and decreases.
2. Same as (1) above but in bar graph format.
3. . to access the pop--up for setting wheel slip

alarm threshold. Set the figure using A or "
then press Enter. The selected figure will appear
in the slip alarm box.
3--91
POSITION CONTROL OPERATION
To operate in Position Control, the draft loading

wheel (3) should, ideally, be rotated fully forward to
position 10.
Use the Position Control lever (2) to raise and lower

the 3--point hitch. The implement will raise and stop
at the height set by the height limit control knob.
NOTE: The rate of lift will be adjusted automatically.

If a large movement of the position control lever is
made then the lower links will respond by moving
rapidly. As the links approach the position set by the 142
Position Control lever, implement movement will be
slower.
When the implement is at the required working

height, use thumbwheel (5) to set the adjustable stop
(1) against the Position Control lever (2). Every time
the Position Control lever is moved, it may be quickly
returned to it’s original position, against the stop, to
maintain the required implement height.
If it is required to raise the implement at the headland,

momentarily depress the top of the raise/lower
switch (4) to lift the implement to the position set by
the height limit control knob. When re-entering the
work area, depress the lower part of the switch and
the implement will return to the height originally set
by the Position Control lever (2).
3--92
TRANSPORT LOCK
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch, turn

the drop rate control knob (2), fully anti-clockwise to the
transport lock position (padlock symbol). This will
prevent the implement from accidentally lowering and
damaging the road surface.
DYNAMIC RIDE CONTROL
When transporting equipment on the 3-point hitch,

implement bounce can lead to lack of steering control
at transport speeds. With Ride Control selected,
when the front wheels hit a bump, causing the front
of the tractor to rise, the hydraulic system will
immediately react to counter the movement and
minimise implement bounce to provide a smoother
ride.
To engage Ride Control, turn the draft sensitivity

knob (1), fully anti-clockwise. Using the raise/lower
switch (4) Figure 144, raise the implement to the 143
height set by the height limit control (3).
Turn the drop rate control knob (2) fully

anti-clockwise to the transport lock position (padlock
symbol).
Ride Control will only operate at speeds above 8 kph

(5 MPH). When tractor speed exceeds 8 K/mh (5
MPH), the implement will drop by 4 -- 5 points (as
displayed on the instrument panel) as the hydraulic
system makes corrections to counteract implement
bounce. When tractor speed falls below 8 K/mh (5
MPH) the implement will raise again to the height set
by the height limit control and Ride Control will become
inoperative.
144
3--93
EXTERNAL 3--POINT HITCH CONTROLS

(where fitted)
Two external switches (1) are provided on each rear

fender assembly. Depress the upper switch to raise
the 3--point hitch, depressing the lower switch will
cause the hitch to drop.
WARNING
Do not stand on or near the implement or between
the implement and tractor when operating the
external 3--point hitch controls.
145
controls:
 Move all transmission controls to neutral.
 Apply the parking brake.

WARNING
Before using the external 3--point hitch controls,
implement or 3-point hitch.
Never operate the external controls while standing:

 Directly behind the tractor or tyres.
WARNING 1 1
Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body or any
object into the area near the 3-point hitch or
implement while operating the external controls.
Never have an assistant working the opposite set of

controls. When moving to the opposite set of 146
controls, move around the tractor or implement. Do
not cross between the implement and tractor.
3--94
The operator must only activate the external

switches while standing to the side of the tractor
(outboard of the rear tyres).
Pressing the upper switch (1) will cause the hitch to

raise slowly. Pressing the lower switch will cause the
hitch to lower. When the lower links align with the
implement, release the switch and attach the
implement to the 3-point hitch in the normal way.
NOTE: Using the external lift control will cause the

hitch to become out of phase with the Position
Control lever in the cab.
147
To re--phase the Position Control lever with the lower
links, start the engine and move the Position Control
lever (1) slowly forward or rearward, as required, until
the position of the lever matches the height of the
hitch. This will be confirmed by the ’hitch disabled’
warning light going out.
Alternatively, use the fast raise switch (3) to raise or

lower the hitch until the hitch disabled light goes out.
During the re--phase sequence, the lower links will
raise slowly but once the Position Control lever and
hitch are in phase, the lower links will operate
normally.
148
IMPORTANT: When control of the 3-point hitch is
transferred back to the lift control lever, an attached
implement may raise fully and damage the rear of the
cab. Operator’s should be aware of this and take
appropriate action to stop raising before full lift height
is reached. Adjust the height limit control knob as
described under Position Control Operation.
3--95
HYDRAULIC REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

(where fitted)
NOTE: See page 3--107 for available oil quantities

when powering external hydraulic equipment.
The hydraulic remote control valves described here

are of the load-sensing type. By automatically
sensing oil demand from the implement, load
sensing valves continually adjust the oil flow from the
tractor to suit implement requirements.
The valves are used to operate external hydraulic

cylinders, motors etc. Up to four remote control
valves may be installed and are located at the rear
of the tractor. All remote valves incorporate an
automatic lock valve in the lower (raise) port to
prevent inadvertent leak down of the implement.
The valves are operated by levers which are located

in the console to the right of the operator’s seat. The
levers and their respective valves are colour coded
for identification.
Valve number 1 is located at the right--hand side of

the rear axle with additional valves to the left. 149
Control Levers
Each remote control valve lever has four operating

positions, as follows:
1. Raise (R) -- Pull a lever rearward to extend the

cylinder to which it is connected and raise the
implement.
2. Neutral (N) -- Push the lever forward from the
raise position to select neutral and de-activate
the connected cylinder.
3. Lower (L) -- Push the lever further forward, past
neutral, to retract the cylinder and lower the 150
implement.
4. Float (F) -- Push the lever fully forward, beyond
the ‘lower’ position, to select ‘float’. This will
permit the cylinder to extend or retract freely,
thereby allowing equipment such as scraper
blades to ‘float’ or follow the ground contour.
3--96
The Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions are

identified by symbols on a decal next to the control
levers.
A detent will hold the lever in the raise (extend) or

lower (retract) position until the remote cylinder
reaches the end of the stroke when the control lever
will automatically return to neutral.
Alternatively, the lever may be returned to neutral

manually. The lever will not return automatically from
the float position.
NOTE: Do not hold the lever in the extend or retract 151

position once the remote cylinder has reached the
end of the stroke as this will cause the hydraulic
pump to generate maximum pressure. Maintaining
maximum system pressure for extended periods
may overheat the oil and cause premature failure of
hydraulic or driveline components.
Operating with Detents

A detent will hold the lever in the selected extend or
retract position until the remote cylinder reaches the
end of the stroke when the control lever will
automatically return to neutral. Alternatively, the
lever may be returned to neutral manually. The lever
will not return automatically from the float position.
NOTE: Do not hold the lever in the extend or retract

position once the remote cylinder has reached the
end of the stroke as this will cause the system to
operate at maximum pressure. Over an extended
period, this could overheat the oil and may lead to
failure of hydraulic and driveline components.
WARNING
Operating loaders with detented valves may result in
uncontrolled movement, resulting in spillage of
material from the bucket or objects rolling down the
loader arms onto the operator. If required, your
authorised dealer can convert the control valve to
operate without the detent feature.
3--97
Configurable Detent Operation
Your tractor may be fitted with load sensing remote

valves having configurable detents. The rotary
control (1), is used to select one of five detent
settings.
To select a setting, rotate the control until the number

(1), on the end cap, aligns with the mark (2), on the
valve body.
NOTE: If the number on the rotary control is not

aligned correcty with the reference mark on the valve
body, the performance of the valve may be affected. 152
Before turning the selector, ensure any residual

pressure in the hydraulic system is exhausted. To do
this, stop the tractor engine, cycle the remote valve
lever through all positions and then place the lever in
neutral.
Each position offers the follwing functions:
I. Raise (R), Neutral (N), Lower (L) and Float (F) *To select position 5, place the remote valve lever in
positions available. neutral, select position I or IV then move the lever to
Detent position in Float only. the Float position. With the lever in Float select
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). position V.
II. Raise, Neutral and Lower positions only. To de--select position V, put the remote valve lever
No Float facility. into float, turn the selector control to position I or IV
No detent positions available. and then move the remote valve lever to neutral. It
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out). is now possible to select positions I, II, III and IV.
III. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions IMPORTANT: To prevent inadvertent movement of
available. attached equipment when starting the tractor engine,
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float. ensure the remote valve levers are in the correct
Lever auto return to neutral (kick out) in Raise position before operating the key--start switch:
and Lower positions.
With the selector in positions I to IV -- Neutral
With the selector in position V -- Float
IV. Raise, Neutral, Lower and Float positions
available.
Detents in Raise, Lower and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
V. *Raise and Float positions available.

Detents in Raise and Float.
No lever auto return to neutral (kick out).
3--98
Flow Control
Each remote valve has its own flow control (1), this
provides individual flow settings for each valve.
Turn the flow control knob anti-clockwise to

increase the rate of oil flow.
Turn the knob clockwise to decrease the rate of flow.

For flow rates, see Section 7 -- Specifications.
153
Connecting Remote Cylinders

Each remote control valve has a pair of 1/2 in.
quick-disconnect, female couplers. These are of a
self--sealing/locking design but will allow remote
cylinder hoses to pull free if the implement should
become disconnected from the tractor.
The lower (retract) coupler (1), is mounted above the

raise (extend) coupler (2). The couplers referred to
in this illustration are for remote control valve No. I.
Hinged, spring-loaded dust caps are provided on

each coupler. To connect a remote cylinder, lift the
dust cap (1) and insert the feed and/or return hose 154
into the coupler, ensuring that it is correctly seated.
Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the hose(s) to

allow the tractor/implement to turn in either direction.
To disconnect, grip the hose a short distance from
the coupler, push the hose forward, into the coupler,
then quickly pull on the hose to ‘pop’ the coupler free.
155
3--99
Connecting and Operating Double-Acting

Cylinders
Connect the pressure hose (1) from a double-acting

cylinder to the lower coupler (3) on the remote control
valve. Connect the return hose (2) to the upper
coupler (4) on the same valve.
156
To extend a double-acting cylinder, pull the control

lever rearwards, to the ‘raise’ position.
To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the control

lever forward, past neutral to the ‘lower’ position.
Further forward movement of the lever will select

‘float’ which will allow the cylinder to extend or retract
freely. This feature is of material assistance when
carrying out work with equipment such as scraper
blades and loaders.
157
3--100
Connecting and Operating Single-Acting

Cylinders
Connect the hose (1) from a single-acting cylinder to

the lower coupler (2) on the remote control valve, as
previously described.
To extend a single-acting cylinder, move the control

lever to the raise position.
Manually return the lever to the neutral position to

stop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allow
the valve to return to the neutral automatically when
the cylinder reaches the end of it’s stroke. 158
To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the lever

fully forward, to the ‘float’ position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the ‘float’ position to lower

a single-acting cylinder. The ‘lower’ position is for
double-acting cylinders only.
NOTE: If a single-acting cylinder is disconnected in

the extended position, while supporting a load, the
hose may be reconnected to the remote control valve
but will not operate until the pressure is released.
Proceed as follows:
 Connect the hose, as previously described. 159
 Start the engine and momentarily pressurise the

cylinder by moving the remote control valve lever
to the extend position and then immediately to
the float position to retract the cylinder and lower
the implement.
3--101
Connecting and Operating Continuous Flow

Hydraulic Equipment
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment (e.g. hydraulic

motors) should be connected to the remote control
valve coupler with the pressure hose (1) connected
to the upper coupler (4) and the return hose (2)
connected to the lower coupler (3) of the same valve.
With the remote control valve lever in the ‘float’

position the motor will be stationary. The hydraulic
motor will operate if the lever is moved to the ‘lower’
position.
160
NOTE: With configurable detents, select position V,
see page 3--98.
IMPORTANT: To stop the motor, always move the

lever to the float position. The motor will then slow to
a halt and not stop abruptly causing internal line
pressures which could damage the motor seals.
To further protect the tractor and equipment observe

the following:
 Do not open any by-pass valve in the equipment
or motor. Use the flow control valve to control the
rate of flow or speed of the motor.
 To assure optimum hydraulic oil cooling and
prevent overheating, operate continuous flow
equipment at the highest flow setting (by use of
161
the flow control valve) and lowest engine speed
that will give the required machine performance
and speed.
 It is recommended that a temperature gauge,
where available, is installed in the remote circuit
when using hydraulic motors for continuous
operation. If over-heating occurs, stop the
hydraulic motor, put all hydraulic controls into
neutral and run the tractor engine to circulate the
oil through the hydraulic oil cooler until the oil cools.
If operating conditions are normal and high

temperatures persist, install an oil cooler in the motor
return circuit. The maximum recommended
operating temperature of the oil is 125C (257F).
Your authorised dealer can supply a suitable oil
cooler and the necessary fittings or make the
162
installation for you.
3--102
Operating Several Remote Valves Bleeding Remote Cylinders

Simultaneously or Remote Valves and 3--Point
Lift Simultaneously When connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., a
new cylinder, one that has been out of service or one
If operating two or more remote control valves that has had the hoses disconnected, it will be
simultaneously or remote valves and 3--point lift, all necessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.
the flow control valves should be adjusted to provide
a partial flow. If not so adjusted, all the available flow With the hoses connected to the remote control valve
may be directed to the full flow circuit when the couplers at the rear of the tractor, position the
pressure in that circuit is less than that of the other cylinder with the hose end uppermost and extend
circuits in use. and retract the cylinder seven or eight times using the
remote control valve operating lever.
NOTE: The hydraulic load-sensing system on your
tractor adjusts the oil flow according to the individual Check the rear axle oil level before and after
flow control settings up to the maximum output operating a remote cylinder.
possible, dependent upon engine speed. The oil flow
will be relatively constant in the remote control valve
circuits if the flow control valves are used to regulate WARNING
the flow, thus providing constant operating speed for Hydraulic fluid escaping under pressure can
hydraulic motors, etc., even if engine speed varies. penetrate the skin causing serious injury. If any fluid
Maintain the engine speed above the minimum is injected into the skin, obtain medical attention
required for simultaneous operation of all the immediately or gangrene may result.
required circuits and vary ground speed by selection
of the appropriate gear ratio.  Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
piece of cardboard or paper.
Operating with a Front Loader
connecting or disconnecting hydraulic lines.
WARNING
Operating loaders with non configurable, detented  Tighten all connections before starting the
valves may result in uncontrolled movement, engine or pressurising lines.
resulting in spillage of material from the bucket or
objects rolling down the loader arms onto the tractor IMPORTANT: All hydraulic hoses should have a
cab. If required, your authorised dealer can convert minimum temperature rating of 125 C (257 F).
non configurable control valves to operate without Pressure and sensing hoses should be rated at 295
the detent feature. bar (4278 psi) working pressure.
If your tractors is fitted with configurable detent

remote valves, the valves can be adjusted to operate
with front loaders.
To operate the boom raise and lower set the detent

selector on the appropriate valve to position I (detent
position in Float only).
For bucket operation, set the detent selector on the

appropriate valve to position II, this will eliminate
detent operation on the raise (roll--back) and lower
(dump) positions. See page 3--98 for details.
3--103
HYDRAULIC POWER BEYOND PORT for

EXTERNAL SERVICES
NOTE: See page 3--107 for available oil quantities

when powering external hydraulic equipment.
For implements or attachments requiring continuous

or high oil flow from the tractor hydraulic system,
provision is made to connect directly into the main
hydraulic circuit at the rear of the tractor.
To operate correctly the implement must be fitted

with a closed centre hydraulic valve system that will,
through a sensing line, control oil flow from the main
tractor hydraulic pump.
IMPORTANT: Before attempting to remove any

blanking plugs or attach pipework, ensure the areas
around the plugs and pipe connections are
thoroughly clean to prevent contamination of the
tractor hydraulic system.
Power Beyond Ports
Return Oil Line (1)

The return oil line from the implement control valves
should be connected to the M27 x 2/19 (ISO 6149)
port (1) using a ’T’ connector available from your
authorised dealer. This will permit the oil to return
directly back into the tractor hydraulic system.
163
3--104
Alternative Return Oil Line (4)

Where access is difficult to port (1) and it is not
possible to utilise a ’T’ connector, the return oil line
from the implement control valves should be
connected to the M27 x 2 (ISO 6149) port (4) using
a straight connector and O--ring available from your
authorised dealer.
The hose connection thread is 13/16“ -- 12 with O--ring

ORFS.
Where the return line has been disconnected, the

elbow should be sealed using a cap nut and O--ring
available from your authorised dealer. 164
Pressure Line (2)
To connect the implement pressure line, remove the

plug (2) from the external services ’power beyond’
port on top of the remote valve manifold. Using a
suitable connector, M22 x 1.5/15.5 (ISO 6149),
attach the implement supply line to this port. With the
implement control valve in neutral, a low standby
pressure of 21 to 24 bar (305 to 348 lbf. in.) will be
maintained in the pressure line connected to this
port.
NOTE: Ensure the hoses have a suitable capacity to

accommodate the required oil flow, and that both the
sensing line and hoses are sufficiently long enough
to allow for implement movement or articulation
165
when in work.
3--105
Load Sensing Line (3)

Connect the sensing line from the M12 x 1.5/11.5
(ISO 6149) port (3), to the implement control valve.
It is the sensing line which generates and controls the
oil pressure and flow from the tractor hydraulic pump.
When an implement control valve is operated, the
low standby pressure from port (2), is diverted down
the sensing line to ’switch on’ the tractor hydraulic
pump. In operation, the load sensing line constantly
monitors pressure and flow to ensure supply never
exceeds demand.
IMPORTANT: To ensure correct operation of the

system, the implement control valve, when in 166
neutral, must be capable of directing the pressure
from the load sensing line back to sump through the
return oil line.
ISO Power Beyond Couplings
Where an oil supply from the Power Beyond ports is

required on a frequent basis, it is recommended that
dedicated ISO Power Beyond couplings are fitted to
your tractor. These are available from your
authorised dealer as an accessory.
The ISO coupling consists of three ports.

1. Return oil line.
Coupling size: 25
Port size: M30 x 2/19
2. Oil supply (pressure) port. 167
Coupling size: 19
Port size: M27 x 2/19
3. Load sensing port.
Coupling size: 6.3
Port size: M14 x 1.5/11.5
The maximum flow available through the ISO

pressure port will depend on the output from the
tractor hydraulic pump. Full flow will be available
from a 120 litre pump assuming there are no other
hydraulic demands on the system.
With the high capacity pump, up to 140 litre/min is

available.
IMPORTANT: Always relieve hydraulic pressure in

remote cylinders before connecting or disconnecting
hydraulic hoses.
3--106
REAR AXLE/HYDRAULICS OIL LEVEL WHEN

USING REMOTE HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good

practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark in
the sight glass with the tractor parked on level ground
and the three--point hitch in the fully raised position.
However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to
the remote control valves it should be remembered
that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and
could seriously lower the oil level. Operating the
tractor with a low oil level may result in damage to the
rear axle and transmission components.
NOTE: Before connecting remote cylinders, stop the
engine and thoroughly clean the connections to
prevent oil contamination.
With the rear axle oil level at the Normal,
Intermediate or Extra marks in the sight glass, the
following maximum oil volumes may be taken from
the rear axle to power auxiliary equipment without
the need to further top up the system:
Operating Parameters
a) Operating while driving in normal conditions,
including long periods of use.
b) Operating while driving in normal conditions
(flat fields) for short periods only.
c) Operating stationary equipment on level ground.
Maximum Oil Volumes, All Transmissions

Extra Level (1)
a) 23 litres (24.3 U.S. qts.)
b) 27.5 litres (29.0 U.S. qts.)
c) 33 litres (34.8 U.S. qts.)
Intermediate (max) Level (2)

a) 12.5 litres (13.2 U.S. qts.)
b) 17.5 litres (18.4 U.S. qts.)
Normal Level (3)

a) 8 litres (8.4 U.S. qts.) 168
b) 12 litres (12.6 U.S. qts.)
3--107
Addititional Oil Reserves

Conversely, the maximum amount of oil that may be
added to the rear axle above the level indicators is 7
litres (7.3 U.S. qts.). With this quantity added to the
rear axle, the quantities stated may be increased by
the same amount, 7 litres (7.3 U.S. qts.), but no
more.
WARNING
Hydraulic fluid or diesel oil escaping under pressure
can penetrate the skin causing serious injury.
 Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use a
piece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.
connecting or disconnecting lines by moving the
remote control valve lever(s) fully forward to the
‘float’ position then back to neutral.
 Tighten all connections before starting the
engine or pressurising lines.
If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medical
attention immediately or gangrene may result.
WARNING
Never work under or allow anyone near raised
equipment as it will drop when relieving pressure in
the system or in the event of hose failure, etc. Before
disconnecting cylinders or equipment ensure the
equipment or implement is supported securely.
Always use a secure support for equipment which
must be serviced while in the raised position.
3--108
THREE-POINT HITCH
NOTE: Before attaching equipment to the

three--point hitch, read the following text, carefully.
ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENT
NOTE: Before attaching equipment, adjust lift rods IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating
and select the correct top link hole for the implement equipment, ensure that the flexible link ends (where
and work to be carried out. fitted) are locked in the operating position.
Ensure that the telescopic stabilisers or sway blocks 3. With the engine stopped and parking brake
are installed and correctly adjusted. Remove the engaged, adjust the top link until the implement
swinging drawbar, if close-mounted equipment is mast pin can be inserted through the mast and
being attached. top link.
IMPORTANT: Always select Position Control or set 4. Connect remote equipment, where applicable.
the draft loading wheel to position 10 when attaching
equipment, transporting equipment, when no 5. After attaching implement and before actual
equipment is attached or at any time when not operation check that:
operating in Draft Control.
 No interference occurs with tractor
components.
NOTE: See also ‘External Power Lift Control’ on
page 3--94 for more details.  The top link does not contact the PTO guard
with the implement at its lowest position.
Most equipment can be attached to your tractor as
follows: IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven
equipment, check to make sure that the PTO
1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitch driveline will not over-extend so as to become
points are level with and slightly ahead of the disengaged, bottom out or be at an excessive angle.
implement hitch pins. Ensure that the driveline shield does not contact the
PTO guard or drawbar. See ‘Attaching P.T.O.--Driven
2. Attach the implement to the lower links, as Equipment’ on page 3--53.
described in ‘Flexible Link Ends’ on page 3--114 or
’Quick Hitch’ on page 3--115. IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or
semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or
CAUTION when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or
Engage the parking brake before leaving the tractor hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance
to make the connections. It is essential to have the between the implement and the tractor.
engine running to operate the external lift controls Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere
when making lower link connections. If your tractor with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
does not have these switches or when making other steering stops, sway blocks or stabilisers.
connections, stop the engine.
3--109
IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE When attaching mounted equipment to the

three-point hitch, the following adjustments may be
CAUTION made to ensure satisfactory operation:
Some mounted and semi-mounted equipment may
interfere with or damage the cab. You may be injured  Set the lift rods in the front hole in the lower links.
by broken glass or the cab ROPS may be damaged This will reduce the lift height (dependent upon
if equipment interferes with the cab. the lift rod length).
 Lengthen the lift rods.

To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:
 Connect the top link to the upper hole in the top
 Attach the equipment as outlined previously. link attachment bracket and use the lowest
possible equipment mast hole.
 Rotate the draft loading wheel to select full
position control. Check for adequate clearance  Make only the minimum adjustments required to
by slowly raising the equipment with the 3--point clear the cab. If equipment performance is
hitch lift control. If any part of the equipment unsatisfactory, it may be necessary to modify the
comes closer than 100 mm (4 in.) to the cab, equipment, consult your authorised dealer.
adopt one of the following options:
Removing Equipment
Where the tractor is equipped with Electronic Draft
Control, adjust the height limit control knob to limit When removing equipment, the procedure is the
upward movement. reverse of attaching. The following information will
make disconnection easier and safer.
If Draft Control is needed or if insufficient ground
clearance is obtained with adequate cab clearance,  Always park the equipment on a firm, level
you can adjust the lift linkage, open the cab rear surface.
window, or modify the equipment to clear the cab.
 Support equipment so that it will not tip or fall
NOTE: Linkage adjustments, while increasing cab when detached from the tractor.
clearance, may have an adverse effect on the
implement operating characteristics  Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remote
cylinders by selecting the float position before
disconnecting.
3--110
ADJUSTMENT of LIFT RODS, LOWER LINKS

and TOP LINK (mechanical adjust)
CAUTION
Before disconnecting a lift rod from the lower link,
lower attached equipment to the ground and stop the
engine. Before removing the securing pin, ensure
that attached equipment is correctly supported and
that no residual pressure remains in the hydraulic
system.
Lift Rod Adjustment
The lift rods are adjusted by rotating the upper part

of the lift rod by means of the handle (1) on the
turnbuckle.
Before the turnbuckle can be rotated, it is necessary

to lift the handle to disengage it from the lock (2)
Figure 170, on the lower section of the lift rod. Rotate
the turnbuckle to lengthen or shorten the lift rod
assembly.
169
When adjustment is satisfactory, allow the

turnbuckle to lower into position. Ensure that the
turnbuckle is fully down and engaged with the lock to
prevent unintentional rotation.
Each lower link has two holes for attaching the lift
rods. Attach the lift rods to the front hole (nearest the
tractor) for maximum lift height. Use the rear hole for
maximum lift capacity.
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or

semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or
when coupling trailed equipment to the drawbar or
automatic pick-up hitch, ensure that there is 170
adequate clearance between the implement and the
cab or rear window in any open position.
3--111
Hitch Float
The float facility allows a limited amount of vertical
movement on the lower link when operating with
wide implements or equipment which requires to
move independently of the lower links.
Remove the lower link retaining clip and lock plate

(1). Withdraw the pin (2) Figure 171, from the lift rod
to permit the outer lock plate to be rotated into the
vertical position. Replace the pin, inner lock plate and
retaining clip as shown. The hitch is now in the float
position.
IMPORTANT: When travelling on the road with a 171
heavy implement mounted on the 3--point hitch,
ensure that both lift rods are connected to the lower
links in the FIXED position to prevent excessive
implement bounce.
Top Link Adjustment
The top link has a threaded centre section (1) , which,

when rotated, will shorten or lengthen the top link, as
required. Lift up the spring retainer (2) to allow the
centre section to rotate. To ease adjustment, lift the
handle (3) and use it as a lever. Alternatively, rotating
the link end (4) will permit limited adjustment of top
link length.
To lock the sleeve after adjustment, push the spring

retainer down so that it holds the handle (3) flush
against the sleeve.
172
When not in use, the top link can be removed and
stored in the tractor or left in an upright position and
retained by hooking the ball end of the handle (2) into
the bracket (1) on the rear axle housing.
173
3--112
Top Link Bracket
Two holes are provided in the bracket for attachment

of the top link.
Insert the pin (2) through the upper hole, as shown,

for maximum lift capacity and the greatest implement
to cab clearance. Use the lower hole (3) for the best
ground penetration and greatest implement to
ground clearance (when the implement is raised).
To relocate the top link, pull out the ‘R’ clip (1) and
extract the securing pin. Relocate the top link and
pin, as required, ensuring that the tang on the end of 174
the securing pin handle locates in the other hole.
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with an automatic

pick--up hitch, the pin may foul the hitch lift rods
during removal. If necessary, use hydraulic power to
move the hitch lift rods to permit removal of the top
link securing pin.
TOP LINK AND RIGHT-HAND LIFT ROD

(hydraulic adjust)
The hydraulic adjust top link (1) is available for your

tractor. This may be fitted in conjunction with a
hydraulic adjust right-hand lift rod (2). Both the top
link and the lift rod incorporate a double--acting ram
cylinder connected into the tractor hydraulic system.
Two switches located on the cab ’C’ pillar operate the

hydraulic top link and right--hand lift rod. Both
switches are spring centered and will return to the
neutral position when released.
175
Depress and hold the top of the left--hand switch (1)

to retract the top link, depress the bottom of the
switch to extend the link.
Depressing the top of the right--hand switch (2) will

retract the hydraulic cylinder and raise the link arm,
depress the bottom of the switch to extend the
cylinder and lower the link arm.
Automatic check valves on the top link and lift rod

cylinders will prevent them from ’creeping’.
176
3--113
FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS

(where fitted)
A release ring (1) is provided on the upper surface of

each link end. Pull up the ring to release the latch and
slide the link end rearwards. With the link ends
released, connection to the implement will be easier.
The link end (4) is shown in the extended position.
The link end (2) is shown in the closed (operating)
position.
With both link ends extended, as at (4), connect the

link ends to the equipment and secure with lynch
pins. Start the engine and carefully inch the tractor 177
rearwards until the latches lock in the detent (3) on
each link arm. Stop the engine and engage the
parking brake.
Attach the top link and adjust accordingly.
IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating the

equipment, make sure the flexible link ends are
locked in the operating position. Remove the
drawbar if it interferes with close-mounted
equipment.
3--114
QUICK HITCH
The Quick Hitch consists of an alternative pair of

lower links (2) and an adjustable top link (1). The
lower links and the top link have open claw ends that
permit rapid coupling and uncoupling of implements
without leaving the cab. The claws are equipped with
self-locking latches to ensure positive retention of
the tractor hitch to the implement. Cables are
provided for attachment to the latches.
An adjustable spacer spring is available as an

accessory. The spring can be adjusted to set the
width of the lower links to match that of the implement 178
hitch points.
Three ball-bushings are supplied for installation on the

implement, if required. The ball-bushing with projecting
lips (1) should be installed on the implement upper
hitch pin.
The two plain ball-bushings (2) with their detachable

guides (3) should be installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
179
Coupling Implement to Tractor
Adjust the lower link stabilisers to maintain the tractor

lower links at the correct distance apart so they align
with the ball-bushings installed on the implement lower
hitch pins.
Place the top link in the transport position. With the

link arms fully lowered and the self-locking latches in
the operating position (1), reverse the tractor until the
link ends are beneath the implement hitch pins.
The combination of large claw openings and the

guides on the implement ball-bushes make accurate 180
alignment of tractor to implement unnecessary.
3--115
Raise the lower links until the claw couplers engage

the ball-bushes. An audible click will be heard as the
self-locking latches engage the implement
ball-bushes. Lower the top link claw onto the upper
implement ball-bush and press down until the latch
is heard to engage. Increase or decrease top link
length, as necessary.
The implement supports, where fitted, may now be

removed or retracted and the implement supported
on the 3-point hitch.
Uncoupling Implement from Tractor
Using the hydraulic lift control lever, fully lower the

implement to the ground ensuring that it cannot fall
when disconnected from the tractor. Use the
implement supports (where fitted).
Pull the release cable on the top link to release the

claw from the implement hitch.
Pull the release cable (2) on both lower links. The

lever will lock in position with the latch retracted (1).
This will allow the links to clear the ball-bushings on
the implement lower hitch pins when the links are 181
lowered fully. Fully lower the lower links and drive the
tractor forward, clear of the implement.
NOTE: Ensure the release cables do not foul wheels,

or moving parts of the 3--point hitch or implement.
When not in use, secure the cables to the rubber
strap on the rear right-hand side of the cab frame.
3--116
LINKAGE STABILISERS
CAUTION
Never operate steerable equipment unless the
telescopic stabilisers are installed and correctly
adjusted to prevent excessive lateral movement.
ROUND SECTION SCREW TYPE

(where fitted)
Telescopic stabilisers control the side to side

movement (sway) of the lower links and attached
equipment when in work or when being transported.
This is especially important when operating on
slopes or near fences, walls or ditches and with
certain implements. Check your implement
Each stabiliser consists of a fabricated tube (2) with

a coupling at each end. The end with the pin (4) is
attached to the 3--point hitch. The screw thread (3)
screws into the rear end of the tube to provide
adjustment. The ball end (6) is attached to a
mounting bracket (1) bolted to the outer end of the
rear axle housing. This ball end is a loose, sliding fit
within the tube. The pin (5) may be passed through
drillings in the tube and rod, as shown, to lock the
assembly as a unit.
In practice, the locating pin (5) should be removed

from both stabilisers and the implement attached to
the 3--point hitch. To remove the pin, pull back the
182
securing clip. When the implement is satisfactorily
aligned, the tube should be rotated until the holes in
the front end of the tube and the sliding ball end are
aligned. The locating pin should then be passed
through the holes and the securing clip replaced.
With the pins inserted in this manner, both stabilisers

will be locked as a rigid unit and the implement will be
prevented from swaying both in work or in the
transport position.
3--117
Under certain conditions or when using equipment

such as ploughs etc., it may be desirable to allow the
3--point hitch (and implement) to sway from side to
side.
If the pin is removed from the front hole, a limited

degree of sway will be permitted. The pin should be
re-inserted through the rear hole, as shown at (1).
The pin will act as a stop to limit the degree of sway.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length,

particularly if using the sway facility, ensure that
there is no possibility of the rear tyres fouling the
stabilisers or lower links. 183
NOTE: When using an Automatic Pick--Up Hitch,

ensure the stabilisers are adjusted to provide
adequate clearance between the lower links and the
hitch.
3--118
AUTOMATIC STABILISERS
(where fitted)
Automatic telescopic stabilisers may be fitted in

place of the standard telescopic stabilisers,
described previously.
Each stabiliser consists of a telescopic tube

assembly internally threaded at the rear end. The
tube assembly is attached to a mounting bracket
bolted to the outer ends of the rear axle housing.
An externally threaded rod (3) is attached to the

lower links. The threaded rod engages with the
screwed thread in the tube assembly and the overall
length of the assembly is determined by screwing the
rod in or out, as required.
An adjustable chain (4) is attached, at one end, to

the rear cab support and at the other end, via a
spring, to a hinged cover (1) on the telescopic part 184
of the stabiliser. A lug (2) on the telescopic part of
the stabiliser engages a notch in the cover.
When the chain is correctly adjusted it will be slack

when the lower links are raised from the operating
position, so allowing the cover to drop down over the
lug on the stabiliser. When the cover is down, as
shown, the stabiliser is locked at the preset length.
The lower links are, therefore, retained at a set
distance apart, preventing them (and attached
equipment) from moving from side to side (swaying).
However, when the 3--point hitch is lowered into the

work position, the chain becomes taut and lifts the
cover from the stabiliser allowing it to telescope
freely. The stabilisers (and implement) will then sway
when engaged in the ground. This feature is useful
as it provides greater implement control when turning
on the headlands of a field.
3--119
Adjusting the Stabilisers

In practice, the implement should be attached to the
3--point hitch with the cover (4) on both stabilisers
raised, so as to allow the stabilisers to telescope
freely.
Lift the locking/adjusting lever (2) up over the peg (1)
so that the lever is at right-angles to the stabiliser. Turn
the telescopic section, by means of the lever, so that
the threaded section (3) screws into or out of the
stabiliser. When the length is satisfactory, i.e., the notch
in the cover aligns with the lug on the stabiliser, lower
the lever back down over the peg and close the cover.
185
The chain should then be adjusted, by placing the
appropriate link over the attaching hook, so that the
cover on the stabiliser is lifted when the implement
is lowered into work.
IMPORTANT: When setting the stabiliser length to

provide sideways movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the rear tyres fouling the stabilisers or
lower links.

hitch.
3--120
SWAY BLOCK STABILISERS

(where fitted)
Sway block stabilisers may be installed as an

alternative to telescopic stabilisers and will control
the side to side movement (sway) of the lower links
and attached equipment when in work or when being
transported. This is especially important when
operating on slopes or near fences, walls or ditches
and with certain implements. Check your Implement
Sway blocks consist of reversible blocks (1) bolted to

either side of the drawbar hanger. A steel wear pad 1 1
(2) bolted to the inner surface of each lower link,
contacts the sway block to prevent excessive sway
(lateral movement) of the lower links. The thickness
of the pad (and therefore the degree of sway) is
controlled by two spacer shims of 8 mm and 10 mm
thickness, respectively.
The positioning of the shims relative to the pad

depends upon the required width setting of the lower
links (to suit the attached implement) or the degree
of sway required.
186
Shim/Wear Pad Position

1 1
The left-hand side of Figure 187 shows both spacer
shims (3) and (4) installed between the wear pad (2)
and the lower link (1). This will increase the distance
between the lower links to suit a wider implement.
The right-hand side of Figure 187 shows the 8 mm

shim (4) on the outer surface of the lower link with the
10 mm shim (3) installed between the pad and the
lower link. Alternatively, the shims may be omitted
altogether to reduce the distance between the lower
links when operating with a narrower implement.
187
3--121
Sway Block Position
To allow lateral movement of the lower links (and

attached equipment) in both the operating and
transport positions, attach both sway blocks (1) so
that the flat surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown
in the right-hand side of Figure 188.
When it is desirable to have sideways movement of

the equipment in the operating position, but remain
rigid in the transport position, remove the bolts
securing the sway blocks to the drawbar hanger and
relocate the sway blocks (1) so that the curved
surface faces the wear pad (2) as shown in the 188
left-hand side of Figure 188.
This will allow the implement to sway when the lower

links are lowered into the working position but
become rigid when raised.
IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks to

provide lateral movement, ensure that there is no
possibility of the lower links or implement contacting
the rear tyres. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance between the wear pads and the sway
blocks to allow the 3-point hitch to raise and lower
without the possibility of the lower links binding or
becoming bent.

hitch.
3--122
DRAWBARS AND TOWING ATTACHMENTS
IMPORTANT: Before attaching trailed equipment to

the tractor, read the following text carefully.
Maximum Permissible Towing Weights
The Product Identification Number plate, located on

the rear of the cab, provides important information on
tractor and towed equipment weight combinations.
The figures shown are the maximum permissible

vehicle and towing weights and should not be
exceeded, to do so may affect the safe operation of
the tractor.
189
Towing Speeds For towed equipment without brakes
Your tractor may be capable of operating at speeds Do not tow equipment that does not have brakes,
that exceed the maximum allowable transport speed
for most towed equipment.  At speeds over 32 km/h (20 MPH); or
 That, when fully loaded, has a mass (weight)
Before transporting towed equipment, read the over 1.5 metric tonnes (3300 lbs.) and more than
Operator’s Manual for the equipment. Ensure that 1.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
equipment is correctly installed, know how to
transport it safely, and determine the maximum  When trailer brakes are required by law.
permissible transport speed. Ensure that the
combination of tractor and towed equipment is in  That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
compliance with local and national legislation. values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).
Never transport at speeds that exceed the
equipment’s maximum transport speed. Exceeding For towed equipment with brakes
the equipment’s maximum transport speed may
result in reduced braking performance and/or loss of Do not tow equipment that has brakes,
control of the tractor and its towed equipment.
 At speeds over 40 km/h (25 MPH); or
Unless otherwise specified by the equipment  That when fully loaded has a mass (weight) more
manufacturer or legislation, observe the following than 2.5 times the mass (weight) of the tractor.
when towing.
 That has a mass (weight) that exceeds the
values declared on the tractor Product
Identification Number plate (as applicable).
3--123
ATTACHING/DETACHING TRAILED
EQUIPMENT
IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas require Always use a safety chain installed between the
brakes on towed equipment when operating on the tractor and implement hitch when transporting
public highway. Before travelling on public roads, equipment on the highway. See page 3--132.
make sure you comply with the legal requirements
for your country. Observe the following precautions for towing
equipment not equipped with brakes:
To attach the tractor to trailed equipment and
implements:  Do not tow equipment weighing more than twice
the tractor weight.
1. Ensure that the implement is at draw bar height.
 Do not exceed 10 MPH (16 km/h) if towed
2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar and equipment weighs more than the tractor.
implement hitch to align.
 Do not exceed 20 MPH (32 km/h) while towing
3. Apply the handbrake and stop the engine.
equipment that weighs less than the tractor.
4. Insert the hitch pin and ensure that the retainer
is in the latched position. DRAWBAR SAFETY
IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or WARNING

semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point hitch or Do not pull from the lower links with the links above
when attaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or the horizontal position. Always use the drawbar,
hitch, ensure that there is adequate clearance pick-up hitch or lower links in the lowered position for
between the implement and the tractor. pull-type work, otherwise the tractor may overturn
Semi-mounted or trailed equipment may interfere rearwards.
with the tractor rear tyres. If necessary, adjust
steering stops (four wheel drive only), sway blocks or
stabilisers. NOTE: When supporting equipment on the drawbar
ensure that the total weight on the rear axle does not
NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensions exceed the maximum static downward load or the
or interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and store rear tyre load capacity, whichever is the lower (see
the clevis and hitch pin. Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads at the end of
Section 3).
IMPORTANT: When transporting equipment on the

highway it is recommended that a safety chain
having a tensile strength equal to the gross weight of
the implement be installed between the tractor and
implement hitch. See Safety Chain on page 3--132.
3--124
SWINGING DRAWBARS
Two types of swinging drawbar are available. The

sliding type is illustrated in Figure 190. This drawbar
may be installed as part of a tow hitch or as an
independent unit.
The roller type, shown in Figure 193, is

recommended when heavy draft, trailed equipment
is used for extended periods. This drawbar is
mounted on rollers and offers additional turning ease
when compared with the sliding type.
Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar
The drawbar (2) pivots about a single pin at the front

end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar to swing
the full width of the hanger. By inserting the swing
limiter pins (1) in the appropriate holes, restricted
movement of the drawbar is permitted.
Alternatively, the drawbar can be pinned in any one

of three positions by insertion of the pins in the
appropriate holes. In Figure 190, the drawbar is
shown pinned in the central position to prevent
swinging.
190
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling
equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment.
Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling ground

engaging equipment which does not require
accurate positioning. This will make steering and
turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
3--125
All Countries Except North America
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of three

holes in the drawbar to vary the P.T.O. shaft to hitch
point distance. See Figure 191 and the following
table:
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 191) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
Drawbar clevis uppermost
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1440 kg (3175 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1680 kg (3700 lb.)
191
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 2575 kg (5675 lb.)
Drawbar clevis underneath
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2300 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)
3 243 mm (9.6 in.) 1305 kg (2875 lb.)
Use of hole 1 is required for 1000 rev/min P.T.O.

operations and hole 2 for 540 rev/min P.T.O.
operations.
When towing equipment exerting high static

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use the close-coupled position -- hole 3, with the
clevis in the uppermost position..
3--126
North America only
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of four

point distance. See Figure 192 and the following
table:
Hole (see P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 192 ) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 1000 kg (2204 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 1215 kg (2678 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1620 kg (3571 lb.)
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1900 kg (4188 lb.)
1 600 mm (23.6 in.) 780 kg (1719 lb.)
2 500 mm (19.6 in.) 885 kg (1951 lb.)
3 400 mm (15.7 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
192
4 350 mm (13.7 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

operations.

downward forces, such as two--wheeled trailers,
etc., use the close-coupled positions -- holes 3 or 4
with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3--127
Roller Type Swinging Drawbar

(where fitted)
The drawbar (2) Figure 193, pivots about a single pin

at the front end so as to allow the rear of the drawbar
to swing the full width of the hanger.
By inserting the swing limiter pin (1) in the

appropriate hole and through the drawbar, the
drawbar can be pinned in any one of seven positions.
Alternatively, the drawbar may be allowed to swing
the full width of the hanger (3).
Pin the drawbar to prevent swinging when pulling 193

equipment which requires accurate positioning and
when transporting equipment. Allow the drawbar to
swing when pulling ground engaging equipment
which does not require accurate positioning. This will
make steering and turning easier.
WARNING
When transporting equipment or when operating
ground engaging equipment, always secure the
drawbar to prevent swinging.
The drawbar is adjustable for height and projection

relative to the end of the P.T.O. shaft. To vary the
height of the drawbar/implement hitch point, remove
the drawbar and invert it.
IMPORTANT: When towing equipment exerting high

static downward forces, such as two-wheeled
trailers, etc., use hole 2 with the clevis in the
uppermost position.
The front securing pin may be inserted in one of two

point distance. See Figure 194 and the
accompanying table.
3--128
Hole (see P.T.O. Shaft to Maximum Static

Fig. 194) Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1360 kg (2995 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1630 kg (3590 lb.)
1 406 mm (16 in.) 1045 kg (2303 lb.)
2 356 mm (14 in.) 1225 kg (2700 lb.)

operations. 194

downward forces, such as two-wheeled trailers, etc.,
use hole 2 with the clevis in the uppermost position.
3--129
Automatic Pick--Up Hitch and Drawbar

(where fitted)
The automatic pick--up hitch on your tractor is a

hydraulically extending, drop down type which is
raised and lowered using the 3--point lift. It is fully
self-supporting when locked in the operating (raised)
position. .
The pick--up hitch is equipped with interchangeable

hook and clevis drawbars.
195
Raising and Lowering the Hitch
Rotate the thumb wheel (2) fully forward to position

10. Move the Position Control lever (1) fully
rearwards until the 3-point lift is supporting the weight
of the hitch.
To unlock the hitch, slide the collar (1) upwards

Figure 195, and then pull up and hold the release
handle. Move the Position Control lever forward to
lower the hitch. When the hitch has cleared the
locking latches, allow the release handle to lower.
The extendible pick--up hitch can be hydraulically 196

extended to aid visibility when attaching towed
equipment.
Operated through one of the rear remote valves, the

hitch is extended or retracted using the remote valve
lever. The hoses should be connected in such a way
that moving the remote valve lever to E (Extend) will
extend the hitch, moving the lever to R (Retract) will
retract the hitch.
Lower the hitch until it is clear of the locking latches

and then extend the hook or clevis rearwards by
moving the remote valve lever to (E). With the
drawbar extended continue to lower the hitch until it
is just above the ground.
197
3--130
Position the tractor so that the hitch hook (2) is

beneath the eye of the implement drawbar and, using
the Position Control lever, raise the hitch until the
implement drawbar is just clear of the ground.
Fully retract the pick--up hitch by moving the remote

valve lever to (R). To assist in retracting the hitch
release the tractor brakes to allow movement of the
tractor towards the implement.
With the hitch in the fully retracted position raise it

slowly until an audible click indicates the locking
latches (1) have engaged the cross tubes (3).
Re--apply the handbrake before leaving the tractor 198
seat.
IMPORTANT: The hitch must be fully retracted

before it will latch correctly. If difficulty is experienced
in latching or unlatching the hitch, refer to page 4--62
for adjustments to the latching mechanism.
Push the position control lever forward so that the

weight of the pick--up hitch (and attached implement)
is supported by the locking latches.
CAUTION
Before operating the tractor, visually check to ensure
the locking latches fully support the pick--up hitch by
slightly lowering the 3--point lift.
NOTE: The maximum static downward load on the

hitch hook must not exceed 3000 kg (6610 lb.)
1
To change from the hook to drawbar, lower the
pick--up hitch, extract the securing pin (1) and
withdraw the hook assembly.
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the front pin (1) as this

retains the hydraulic cylinder inside the hitch slider
frame. 2
Install the clevis drawbar assembly and secure with

the pin (2).
199
3--131
Maximum Permissible Drawbar Load
P.T.O Shaft to Maximum Static

Drawbar Hitch Point Downward Load
400 mm (15.7 in.) 1500 kg (3300 lb.)
IMPORTANT: When supporting equipment on the

drawbar or pick-up hitch ensure that the total weight
on the rear axle does not exceed the maximum static
downward load or the rear tyre load capacity,
whichever is the lower (See Rear Tyre Pressures and
Loads at the end of Section 3).
Storing the Drawbar
When not in use, the hook or clevis drawbar may be

stored in a bracket which is located at the rear of the
tractor or on the right--hand step support. Ensure the
clamp screw is fully tightened to retain the drawbar
in the bracket.
If the hydraulic hitch pressure lines are disconnected

from the remote valve, ensure the male couplings
are protected from contamination and the pressure
lines secured to the tractor to avoid possible
damage.
SAFETY CHAIN
When towing implements on public roads, use a

safety chain (2) with a tensile strength equal to or
greater than the gross weight of the implement to be
towed. This will control the implement (1) in case the
drawbar (3) and implement become disconnected.
After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run by

driving the tractor to the right and to the left for a short
distance to check the safety chain adjustment. If
necessary, re-adjust to eliminate a tight or loose
chain.
200
Check the implement operator’s manual for
implement weight and attaching hardware
specifications.
Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guide

are available from your authorised dealer.
3--132
REAR TOW HITCH
Description
Various rear tow hitch options are available. All

versions consist of a fabricated steel frame bolted to
the rear axle centre housing. A tow pin or ball is
provided, adjustable for height.
The slider type frame is is equipped with rotating pins

that engage in notches in the frame to secure the
hitch at the required height.
With this type of frame, a second, fixed tow pin (piton)

is available as an option. The piton is installed at the
bottom of the assembly.
Four types of hitch assembly are available :--
 Heavy duty non-swivelling tow pin.

See Figure 201.
 Swivelling tow pin -- manual operation.

See Figure 205.
 Swivelling tow pin -- auto operation.

See Figure 203.
 K 80 ball.
See Figure 209 .
A swinging drawbar may also be provided as part of

the assembly. See ‘Sliding Type Swinging Drawbar’
on page 3--125 for details of drawbar operation.
NOTE: The tow hitch is designed primarily for use

with four wheel trailers which do not place a heavy
downward load on the tow pin. Observe the
maximum static downward loads quoted in the text.
3--133
Slider Frame with non-swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, non-swivelling, tow pin assembly.
Remove the securing clip (1) and lift the handle (5) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame. Using both hands on the handle (5) lift or lower
the tow pin assembly (4), as required. When at the
required height, support the tow pin with one hand and
lower the handle to the horizontal position. The pins will
rotate and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower 201
the P.T.O. guard (6).
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (3) from the tow pin and lift out using the
handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it passes
through the eye of the trailer drawbar. Replace the ‘R’
clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed the rear tyre load capacity or the following
values, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures and
Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
Category D3 tow pin 2500 kg (5500 lb.)
NOTE: A Category D3 tow pin is standard equipment

on your tractor. A Category D2 pin and housing is
available as a dealer installed accessory.
Category D2 tow pin 2000 kg (4400 lb.)
3--134
Slider Frame with Swivelling Tow Pins

(where fitted)
The tow hitches shown are equipped with a height

adjustable, swivelling tow pin assembly with manual
or auto operation.
With reference to Figure 202, adjust the height of the

tow pin assembly, as follows:
Grasp the handle (2) with the right hand. Press and
hold in the button (1) to release the locking mechanism.
Pull the handle (3) down to the horizontal position with
the left hand and release the push button to lock the 202
handle (3) in the horizontal position.
Lowering the handle will rotate the pins and disengage

them from the frame. Using both handles, lift or lower
the complete tow pin assembly. When at the required
height, hold in the push button and lift the left-hand
handle up to the vertical position, as shown in
Figure 202. The pins will rotate and re-engage the
notches in the frame. Lower the P.T.O. guard (4).
WARNING
Before attaching a trailer, ensure that the pins are
fully engaged in the notches, i.e. the handle (3)
Figure 202, is in the vertical position. The tow pin
assembly must not rest on the P.T.O. guard or on the
bolt heads at the end of the slider guides.
3--135
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Auto Engagement
The tow pin (2) Figure 203, is spring-loaded in the

engaged (down) position, as shown. To attach a trailer
to the tow pin, lift the release lever (1) to the vertical
position to retract the tow pin up into it’s housing.
The release lever is connected by the cable (4) to a

handle in the cab. This will permit trailer attachment
without leaving the cab. Pull up the handle (1) Figure
204 to actuate the cable release and retract the tow
pin up into it’s housing.
The pin will stay in the raised position until the trailer 203
drawbar is located beneath it. The eye of the drawbar
will contact the trip lever (3) Figure 203 and cause
the pin to drop down into the engaged position.
Alternatively, the tow pin will drop down into the
engaged position if the lever (1) is pulled down.
WARNING
Do not attempt to trip the lever by hand as the fingers
may be trapped by the action of the spring-loaded
tow pin.
204
Swivelling Tow Pin -- Manual Engagement
To attach a trailer drawbar to the tow pin, remove the

‘R’ clip (1) Figure 205, from the tow pin and lift out
using the handle (2). Re-insert the tow pin so that it
passes through the eye of the trailer drawbar.
Replace the ‘R’ clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow pin must

not exceed 2000 kg (4400 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
205
3--136
Swivel Lock
The tow pin may be allowed to swivel after loosening

the socket-headed screw (1) Figure 206 on the
underside of the tow pin assembly. This feature will
permit a trailer with a non-swivelling drawbar to
articulate relative to the towing tractor.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the tractor tow pin to

swivel if the trailed equipment is equipped with a
swivelling tow pin connector.
206
Fixed Tow Pin (Piton)
An optional fixed tow pin (piton) may be provided at

the bottom of the assembly.
To attach a trailer to the piton, remove the lynch pin

(2) and withdraw the retaining pin (4). Lift the security
latch (1) and lower the eye of the trailer drawbar over
the piton (3). Drop the security latch down, re-insert
the retaining pin and secure with the lynch pin. The
security latch will ensure that the trailer cannot
become accidentally detached from the piton
207
NOTE: The static downward load on the piton must
not exceed 3000 kg (6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load
capacity, whichever is lower. (See Tyre Pressures
and Permissible Loads at the end of Section 3).
208
3--137
Slider Frame with K 80 Ball
The tow hitch shown is equipped with a height

adjustable, 80 mm ball assembly.
Remove the securing clip (2) and lift the handle (1) to
the vertical position. Lifting the handle will rotate the
pins and disengage them from the notches in the
frame.
Using both hands on the handle, lift or lower the tow ball
assembly as required. When at the required height,
support the tow ball with one hand and allow the handle
to lower to the horizontal position. The pins will rotate 209
and re-engage the notches in the frame. Lower the
P.T.O. guard.
NOTE: When setting the height of the tow ball, it

should be adjusted to the lowest position relative to
the correct operating height of the implement
drawbar.
To attach a trailer, lift up the retaining catch (2) and

pull out the locking pin (3). This will allow the security
latch (1) to pivot upwards toward the tractor. When
the implement drawbar has been securely attached,
replace the locking pin so it passes through the
security latch and re--insert the ’R’ clip.
NOTE: The static downward load on the tow ball in

its lowest operable position must not exceed 3000 kg
(6600 lb.) or the rear tyre load capacity, whichever is
lower. (See Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads
at the end of Section 3).
210
3--138
TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEMS

(where fitted)
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
Hydraulic trailer brakes may be connected into the

hydraulic system via a quick--release coupling (1) at
the rear of the tractor.
NOTE: The position of the trailer brake coupling may

vary slightly from that shown, dependent upon the
type of remote control valves installed.
211
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling
the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are

locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking (four wheel drive tractors only).
WARNING
With the tractor engine off, hydraulic pressure cannot
be applied to the trailer braking system. When
parking the tractor/trailer combination apply the
tractor and trailer parking brakes while the engine is
still running. With the footbrakes locked together
apply the parking brake, stop the engine and
immediately block the wheels. Always lock the brake
pedals together when a hydraulically braked trailer is
attached to the tractor.
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap (2) in place when

the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
3--139
HYDRAULIC TRAILER BRAKES

(Italy only)
The hydraulic trailer braking system on tractors for

the Italian market function in a slightly different way
to the universal system previously described.
If the trailer brake hose is connected into the coupling

the trailer brakes will be automatically applied when
the footbrakes are used to stop the tractor or when
the tractor parking brake is applied when the engine
is running. When the engine is switched off, the trailer
brakes will remain applied.
212
NOTE: Always keep the dust--cap (2) in place when
the trailer brake coupling is not in use. It is a legal
requirement in most countries that trailer brakes may
only be connected to the tractor coupling by means
of a compatible female coupling.
IMPORTANT: It is essential that the brake pedals are

locked together to ensure correct operation of trailer
brakes, balanced operation of the tractor brakes and
four wheel braking.
To release hydraulic pressure and free the trailer

brakes, start the engine, depress both brake pedals
and release the tractor parking brake.
NOTE: The light (1), on the instrument panel will

flash, accompanied by critical alarm, to indicate that
hydraulic oil pressure to the trailer brake circuit is low.
Stop the engine and investigate the cause.
ATTENTION: Should the trailer brake warning light

commence to flash, the trailer brakes will apply
automatically.
213
3--140
AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKES

(except Italy)
WARNING The couplers installed at the back of the tractor may

Single line pneumatic trailer braking systems are be connected to single or dual line trailer braking
designed for use up to a maximum speed of 25 km/h systems. Either or both types may be installed. The
(15 MPH). Tractor/trailer combinations with dual line air lines connected to the couplers are colour-coded
braking systems may be used at a higher speed but black, red and yellow. The black line is used for a
must at all times comply with local legal single line system, the red and yellow lines are used
requirements. Gross train weight, i.e., tractor plus for dual line systems.
trailer(s) and/or individual trailer weight must not
exceed that laid down in local regulations governing NOTE: Single line systems (black coupler) are only
the use of trailers. available as a dealer installed accessory.
IMPORTANT: The trailer brakes will only operate

The following text covers operation of the air- when both tractor brake pedals are applied.
operated trailer braking systems that may be Therefore, always lock the brake pedals together
installed as an alternative, or in addition to, when a trailer is attached to the tractor.
hydraulically-actuated trailer brakes.
NOTE: The tractor parking brake is connected to the
The system consists of an engine-driven air main control valve. Whenever the parking brake is
compressor, two air reservoirs, a pressure gauge, applied, the trailer brakes are activated.
control valves, two or three couplers and related
pipework.
A filter/dryer unit in the braking system extracts

moisture from the pressurised air helping to avoid
components in the implement braking system from
freezing in low temperatures. Any moisture collected
is automatically exhausted through the system
unload valve.
IMPORTANT: In extremely humid conditions, or

where the filter/drier unit has not been serviced
correctly, the air brake reservoirs should be manually
drained on a daily basis. To drain the reservoirs,
grasp the ring on the drain valve below the tank and
move laterally. This will allow any accumulated water
to be exhausted from the reservoir.
3--141
Operation
When starting the engine with a trailer connected into

the tractor air brake system, chock the wheels and
release the parking brake and footbrakes. The
warning light (1) Figure 214, will illuminate until air
pressure builds up to 4.5 -- 5.5 bar.
The pressure will continue to rise, as indicated by the

air pressure bargraph in the Dot Matrix Display,
Figure 215. To select the air pressure bargraph, use
the CAL/SEL switch or, where fitted, the enhanced
keypad.
214
The air tank(s) should reach operating pressure

within 3 minutes of start--up but may take longer,
dependent upon the size of the trailer brake
reservoir(s).
Once required pressure has been reached a loud

‘pop’ will be heard, signifying that the unload valve
has opened to allow excess pressure to escape to
atmosphere.
IMPORTANT: Apply the footbrakes several times,

ensuring that the pressure, as indicated by the
gauge, drops as the brakes are applied and rises
again when they are released. Never drive the tractor 215
with the trailer brake warning light on.
IMPORTANT: When the footbrakes are applied ,with

the parking brake off, ensure that the front wheel
drive indicator light (1) Figure 216 illuminates and
that all stop lights are functional.
IMPORTANT: Various types of trailer braking

systems are available. Check the trailer
manufacturers’ instruction manual before making
connections to the tractor air brake system.
Clean the trailer and tractor connectors before

coupling up the hose(s). Ensure that connections are
secure. Check the trailer brakes regularly to ensure
that they are functioning correctly. 216
CAUTION
Do not over use the brakes on steep down hill
gradients. Use the same gear going down hill as you
would use for going up the same hill.
3--142
Dual Line System
For a trailer with a dual line braking system, connect

the supply line hose to the red coupler (2) and the
control line hose to the yellow coupler (1).
IMPORTANT: The dual line system will only operate

if both the red and yellow lines are connected.
Yellow line (control line) -- (1): As the tractor

brakes are applied, increasing air pressure is
supplied, via the yellow coupler, to the control valve
on the trailer until full system pressure is generated.
Application of the trailer brakes is proportional to the 217
pressure applied to the tractor brake pedals.
Red line (brake supply line) -- (2): Air is supplied to

the red coupler at full system pressure. This is the
brake supply line and charges the reservoir(s) on the
trailer. If the trailer braking system is disconnected
from the tractor for any reason, the air pressure will
fall to zero and the trailer brakes will be applied.
218
Single Line System
(where fitted)
If the trailer has a single line system an additional

coupler is supplied. Connect the hose to the black
coupler.
A pressure of 5.5 bar is available at the coupler at all

times when the tractor brake pedals and parking
brake are released. Application of the tractor brakes
causes the pressure to drop to zero allowing the
trailer brakes to be applied.
3--143
AIR OPERATED TRAILER BRAKING SYSTEM

(Italy only)
This system operates in a similar manner to the dual

line system, previously described, except that a
combined dual coupler is utilised. Please read all the
previous text relating to pneumatic trailer brakes plus
the following:
The coupler is protected by a metal cover. To remove

the cover, press the handle (2) down. The handle is
held in position by a stiff spring and some pressure
is required to move it down to release the cover (1).
219
Connections
The lines to the couplers are colour-coded for ease

of use. The supply line to the left-hand coupler (1) is
red and the control line to the right-hand coupler (2)
is yellow. The trailer hoses will have a male dual
coupler. Press down the handle (3) and insert the
trailer coupler. When the handle is released, it will
lock the trailer and tractor couplers together.
220
3--144
TRACTOR/TRAILER BRAKE BIAS CONTROL
When the tractor leaves the factory, this control is set

to allow maximum available braking effort to the
trailer. Under most conditions, the control will remain
in this position and will give well balanced braking.
Occasionally, with some trailers this setting may

provide a greater braking bias to the trailer than is
ideal. In this case the braking force to the trailer may
be reduced slightly by turning the adjuster (1) in an
anti--clockwise direction.
To turn the valve, it is first necessary to pull the knob 221

upwards. After adjustment, push the knob
downwards to lock the setting. The adjuster must be
reset to the fully clockwise position when a different
trailer is used.
WARNING
The trailer brake bias adjustment is extremely
sensitive and should not be rotated more than one
half turn before testing with the attached trailer fully
loaded. If further adjustments are required, they
should be carried out following the same procedure.
Failure to do this may result in an imbalance between
tractor and trailer braking forces if the valve is rotated
too far in the anti--clockwise direction.
AUXILIARY AIR SUPPLY CONNECTOR

(where fitted)
An auxiliary air supply is available for the purpose of

inflating tyres, etc. The air supply operates at full
system pressure -- 7 or 8 bar (100 or 115 lbf. in2) --
dependent upon system installed. When not in use,
ensure protective dust cap is fitted.
Always use a proprietary inflating gun, with gauge,

when inflating tyres. Connect the air hose to the air
outlet (1), located on the left-hand side of the rear
axle.
222
3--145
FRONT WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION
Your tractor is produced with lights that meet lighting
regulations when operating or travelling on the public
highway. If the wheel track setting is adjusted beyond
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
comply with legal requirements. Additionally, before
travelling on the highway, ensure that the overall
tractor width does not exceed the maximum
permitted in your country.
Front Axle Track Width
Front wheel drive tractors have fixed axle

assemblies. However the track width is fully
adjustable by changing the wheel rim relative to the
centre disc, the rim and/or disc relative to the axle
hub or by inter-changing both front wheels. The track
width is the distance between the centre of each tyre
at ground level.
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
ensure, when stored, that they cannot topple and
cause injury.
IMPORTANT: If your tractor is equipped with front

fenders, ensure there is adequate clearance
between fender and wheel under all operating
conditions. With the smaller track settings a foul
condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock
position particularly when the axle is fully articulated.
To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or
steering stops.
WARNING
With a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractor
supported on a stand, never attempt to rotate the
wheel or start the engine. This may cause the rear
wheels to move resulting in the tractor falling from the
stand. Wheels should always be supported such that
the tyres are only just clear of the ground.
3--146
Front wheel track adjustment is effected by changing

the wheel rim relative to the centre disc, the rim
and/or the disc relative to the axle hub or by
inter--changing the wheels.
A
The sectioned drawings shown illustrate the wheel
rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings. The track widths available are as
follows:
Track Settings with Adjustable Rim B
Setting Track Width
A 1552 mm (61.1 in.)

B 1664 mm (65.5 in.)
C 1758 mm (69.2 in.)
C
D 1869 mm (73.6 in.)
E 1952 mm (76.9 in.)
F 2064 mm (81.3 in.)
G 2158 mm (85.0 in.)
H 2269 mm (89.3 in.)
D
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 223, are nominal
and may vary by up to 25 mm (1 in.) dependent upon
tyre size.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or E
disc. Always tighten nuts to the specified torque and
at the recommended intervals. Owners should
ensure that all steering components are maintained
in a reliable and satisfactory condition to ensure safe
operation and comply with legal requirements.
223
3--147
Track Setting -- 50 Km/h Models
Tractors equipped with a 50 Km/h (31 MPH)

transmission will have fixed front wheels offering a
choice of two track settings. To alter the track width, A
interchange both front wheels to provide a narrow (A)
or wide (B) track setting as required.
NOTE: When interchanging left and right--hand

wheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tread at the
top of the tyre remains pointing in the direction of
forward travel.
B
224
Track Settings
4WD Front axle type -- Position All Models

Standard -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Suspended -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
SuperSteer -- min/max. setting A/B 1854mm (73.0 in.) / 2057mm (81.0 in.)
Refitting the Front Wheels
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts

to the following torques then re-check after driving
the tractor for 1 hour and 50 hours operation.
Disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf.ft.)

Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with front fenders,

ensure there is adequate clearance under all
operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops and
or fender position, as necessary.
IMPORTANT: At the narrower track settings a foul

condition may occur between the tyre or fender and
the tractor when the wheels are turned to the full lock
position particularly when the axle is fully articulated.
To avoid this condition, adjust the fenders and/or
steering stops.
3--148
Front Wheel Alignment
After resetting the track width, the front wheel

alignment may require adjustment. For correct
operation, the front wheels should be parallel.
Measure the distance (1) between the wheel rims at

hub height at the front of the wheels. Rotate both 1
front wheels 180 and check the measurements
again, this time at the rear of the wheels (2). This will
eliminate wheel rim run--out errors. The correct
setting is 0 +/ -- 3.0 mm (0+/ -- 0.12 in.).
2
Should it be necessary to adjust the front wheel
alignment, proceed as follows:
NOTE: Before loosening or removing the track rod

(1), note the position of the offset on the centre
section in relation to the front axle and axle support.
This position must be maintained to ensure adequate 225
clearance between track rod and axle when turning.
Loosen the lock nut (1) on the left--hand track rod

end, then remove and discard the self-locking nut (2)
securing the track rod end in the steering arm.
Extract the track rod end from the steering arm.
Screw the track rod end into or out of the track rod (3)
to shorten or lengthen the assembly, as required.
Re-insert the track rod end and, when the alignment

is correct, secure with a new self-locking nut.
Tighten the nuts to the following torques:
Model Self--locking Locknut 226

nut (2) (3)
All 118Nm 196Nm

(87 lbf. ft.) (145 lbf. ft.)
3--149
STEERING STOPS
Two steering stops are incorporated in the axle, one

at each end. The stops are adjustable and should be
set to provide a minimum clearance of 20 mm (0.75
in.) between the tyres and any part of the tractor on
full left and right lock with the axle fully articulated.
To adjust, slacken the locknut (1) and turn the stop

bolt (2) anti-clockwise to reduce the steering angle of
the wheels or clockwise to increase the steering
angle. Tighten the locknut to 150 Nm (110 lbf. ft.).
IMPORTANT: After adjusting both steering stops,

recheck clearance between the tyres and any part of
the tractor with the front wheels on full lock and the 227
axle fully articulated.
IMPORTANT: On tractors equipped with Dynamic

Front fenders, the adjustment of the fender stops
must be checked to ensure excessive force is not
applied to them when the steering is at full lock. See
page 3--153.
FRONT AXLE OSCILLATION STOPS

(Standard Axle Only)
Axle oscillation stops are installed, one each side of
the axle. Each stop consists of a plate (1), secured
to the underside of the front axle support by two flush
fitting, socket head screws. Oscillation of the axle
causes the stop plate to contact the projection (2) on
the axle casing, so preventing further movement.
With the stop plates in position, as shown, axle
oscillation is 8.
Extract the screws and remove the stop plates to

increase axle oscillation to 12.
228
IMPORTANT: If the oscillation stops are removed,
ensure that there is adequate clearance between the
front tyres and any part of the tractor with the axle
fully articulated.
3--150
DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERS

(where fitted)
Two types of optional front fender are available, both

offering a full range of adjustment to suit varying tyre
sizes and track widths. The method of adjustment is
very similar for both, but the following text describes
the setting of the Dynamic steerable fender. Ensure
all fixing bolts are re-tightened after adjustment.
Dynamic fenders turn with the front wheels as the

tractor is steered. As the steering angle increases, a
spring centered pivot in the fender mount restricts
the turn angle of the fenders.
This prevents interference with the tractor hood or

loader frame while allowing the wheels to continue
turning beneath the fender. As a result, tighter turns
can be achieved that would not be possible with a
conventional fender, particularly at narrower track
settings.
IMPORTANT: With certain options and/or tyre sizes,

the smaller track settings may not be attainable due
to minimal clearance between tyre or rim and any
part of the fender or attaching hardware.
Where a combination of narrow track settings and
maximum turn angles are required, it may be
necessary to adjust the fender stops or remove the
fenders to prevent damage to the fenders or tractor.
Steerable fenders are available in four widths, 420,

480, 540 and 620 mm.
FRONT FENDER ADJUSTMENT
A fender may be moved laterally, towards or away

from the tractor, vertically up or down, and may be
tilted forwards or rearwards.
Lateral Adjustment, Fender Support
To move the complete fender assembly laterally,

loosen the two clamp bolts securing the fender
support, (1) to the mounting bracket, (3). Move the
support to the desired position and re--tighten the
bolts.
229
3--151
Vertical Adjustment
The fender may be moved vertically by relocating the

bolts, (2) in the appropriate holes in the fender
support. A number of the holes are elongated
allowing the fender to be tilted forward or rearward.
230
Lateral Adjustment, Fender

The fender support bolt, (1) and bracket attachment
points, (2) beneath the fender, provide further lateral
adjustment allowing the fender to be centered over
the tyre.
NOTE: A second fender support bolt (not shown) is

located on the opposite end of the support bracket.
231
3--152
Fender Turn Stop Adjustment
An adjustable stop bolt, (4) is fitted to both fender

mounting brackets. When turning, the bolt contacts
a fixed stop on the axle housing restricting the angle
at which the fender will turn while allowing the wheels
to continue turning beneath the fender. The stop
bolts may require adjusting if the track width or tyre
size is changed.
Where the axle steering stops are to be adjusted to

provide more lock, the fender stops should also be
reset to prevent excessive force being applied to
them on full lock. 232
 With the front wheels in the straight ahead

position, loosen the fender stop bolts and screw
fully inwards.
 Adjust the axle steering stops to provide the

required steering angle as described on page
3--150.
 With the axle stops adjusted, carefully turn the

steering wheel until the front wheels are on full
RH lock and the axle stop bolt is in contact with
the pad on the front axle.
NOTE: During this procedure the fender may come

into contact with the tractor. Do not move the tractor.
 Adjust the fender stop bolt outwards until there is

sufficient clearance between the fender and the
tractor. Tighten the lock nut. Re--check the
clearance with the axle on full lock and full
oscillation. If necessary re--adjust to provide
adequate clearance.
Repeat the above procedure on the left--hand fender.
3--153
REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

1
(Flange Type Axle -- where fitted)
With a fixed flange type axle rear wheel track

adjustment is effected by changing the wheel rim
relative to the centre disc, the rim and/or the disc
relative to the axle hub or by inter--changing the rear
wheels.
CAUTION
the initial factory position then you may be required 233
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to 2
CAUTION
Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and
cause injury.
There are four different designs of centre disc 234

dependent upon tyre size and tractor model. The
centre discs shown are as follows: 3
Square centre disc -- variable track (Type 1)

Round centre disc -- variable track (Type 2)
Cast centre disc -- variable track (Type 3)
Round centre disc -- fixed track (Type 4)
NOTE: Variable track wheels (type 1, 2 and 3), are

not available on tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
The type of centre disc installed will affect the track

setting. Identify the type of centre disc fitted to your
tractor wheels, then refer to the following table and 235
Figure 237 to see the wheel rim and disc positions 4
necessary to achieve the required track setting.
WARNING
Never operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim or
at the recommended intervals.
236
3--154
The sectioned drawings shown, illustrate the wheel

rim and disc positions relative to the hub at various
track settings.
When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts A

to the following torques then re--check after driving
the tractor for 1 hour and again after 50 hours
operation.
Rear disc to hub nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Rear disc to rim nuts
B
M16 nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Track Settings -- Adjustable Rim

(Types 1, 2 and 3)
Track Disc types 1, 2 and 3
setting Figures 233, 234 and 235
Figure 237
C
A 1530 mm (60.2 in.)
B 1632 mm (64.2 in.)
C 1712 mm (67.4 in.)
D 1834 mm (72.2 in.)
E 1930 mm (75.9 in.)
F 2032 mm (80.0 in.) D
G 2130 mm (83.8 in.)
H 2232 mm (87.8 in.)
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 237 are nominal

and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel
and tyre size. E
NOTE: With the larger tyre sizes, the narrower track

settings may not be attainable due to minimal
clearance between tyres and fenders or equipment.
The dimensions shown in the chart relating to
Figure 237 are nominal and should be used as a
guide only. Track settings may vary dependent F
upon wheel type and tyre size.
237
3--155
Fixed Rim Track Adjustment
A minimal track adjustment of approximately 102mm

(4.0in.) each side, may be achieved by interchanging
wheel assemblies. A
238
3--156
REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENT

(Bar Type Axle -- where fitted)
With bar axles, the same method of adjustment

applies but with the added advantage of being able
to move the wheel hub on the axle shaft. This
provides an infinite range of adjustment between the
narrowest and widest settings.
CAUTION
the initial factory position then you may be required
to reposition the lights or fit auxiliary lighting to
Tractors equipped with a bar axle may have a steel

or cast centre disc (2) Figure 239 mounted on a cast
iron hub (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle (1).
With a cast centre disc, the hub is an integral part of
the disc.
Three bar axle lengths are available -- 2490 mm (98

in.), 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.). The
wheel may be moved along the bar to provide a range
of track widths. Depending on tyre size, a range of
190 mm (7.5 in.) per wheel or 380 mm (15 in.) overall
is available with the 98 inch axle. If the 112 inch axle
is installed, the range is increased to 735 mm (29 in.)
and with the 119 inch axle, 914 mm (36 in.) overall.
239
Track width adjustment is effected by moving the
complete wheel/hub assemblies in or out on the axle
shaft. Additionally, repositioning the wheel rim on the
centre disc and/or the rim on the axle hub or by
inter-changing the rear wheels provides a greater
range of adjustment.
NOTE: Variable track wheels are not available on

tractors with 50 Km/h transmission.
Tractor wheels are very heavy so it is recommended

that you do not remove them to reposition the rims
on the disc unless the track setting required is
outside the slide range of the bar axle.
3--157
Moving a Wheel on the Axle Shaft
Block the front wheels and jack up and support the

rear axle.
Adjustment of the track setting is achieved by sliding

the complete wheel/hub assembly on the axle shaft.
Loosen the two centre wedge bolts (1)Figure 240,

approximately 12 mm (0.5 in.). Remove the four
outer wedge bolts (2).
Clean the threads on the four bolts and the threaded

holes in the wedges before lubricating and installing
the removed bolts at (1) Figure 241. These bolts are
used to push against the wheel or hub to withdraw or
’jack’ the wedges from the hub. Tighten these bolts
evenly until the wedges loosen in the hub and the
wheel assembly can be moved on the axle shaft.
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than

407Nm (300 lbf.ft)) on the jack bolts. The use of 240
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.

Remove the jack bolts and replace them in the
original holes (2) Figure 240.
241
3--158
Tighten all six wedge retaining bolts in increments of

68 Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until the final torque setting is
achieved.
6 x M20 Bolts (Cast centre) 300Nm (221 ft.lbs.)

6 x M22 Bolts Steel centre) 500Nm (369 ft.lbs)
IMPORTANT: The wedge bolts must be tightened

evenly.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making

sure that both rear wheels are the same distance
from the ends of the axle shafts.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 1 hour
and 50 hours operation.
WARNING
3--159
Wheel Track Adjustment
The sectioned drawings shown in Figures 242, 243 and 244 illustrate the wheel rim and disc positions at various
track settings. In each table, two track width settings are quoted for each axle type. These are the minimum and
maximum achievable with both wheel assemblies moved fully in (toward the tractor) and fully out (away from
the tractor).
Track Adjustment Rim and Disc Position
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1828 mm (60 -- 72 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2184 mm (60 -- 86 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2388 mm (60 -- 94 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1727 -- 2032 mm (68 -- 80 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1727 -- 2388 mm (68 -- 94 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1727 -- 2590 mm (68 -- 102 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2235 mm (76 -- 88 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2540 mm (76 -- 100 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2744 mm (76 -- 108 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

2133 -- 2438 mm (84 -- 96 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

2133 -- 2794 mm (84 -- 110 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

2133 -- 2998 mm (84 -- 118 in.)
242
Wheels with steel centre disc bolted to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 242 are
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. wheel and tyre size.
3--160
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2438mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.)
243
Wheels with steel centre disc welded to flange on the rim
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be

possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender.
NOTE: The track widths shown in Figure 242 are

nominal and may vary from that shown dependent on
wheel and tyre size.
Rear Wheel Hardware Torque Values

(with Steel Centre disc)
Disc to Hub Fixings

10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm ( 369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Nuts

All wheels (M16) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts

6 x M22 Bolt 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft)
3--161
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1524 -- 1880 mm (60 -- 74 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1524 -- 2235 mm (60 -- 88 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1524 -- 2438 mm (60 -- 96 in.)
2490 mm axle (98 in.)

1930 -- 2286 mm (76 -- 90 in.)
2845 mm axle (112 in.)

1930 -- 2641 mm (76 -- 104 in.)
3022 mm axle (119 in.)

1930 -- 2844 mm (76 -- 112 in.)
244
Wheels with cast centre disc
NOTE: The track widths in Figure 244 are nominal When refitting or adjusting a wheel, tighten the bolts
and may vary from that shown dependent on wheel to the following torques then re--check after driving
and tyre size. the tractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour and 8
hours operation.
NOTE: With the larger width tyres, it may not be
possible to move the wheels to the narrower settings Wheel Hardware Torque Values
due to limited clearance between the tyre and fender. (with Cast Centre disc)
CAUTION Disc to Rim Nuts

Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with care and All wheels (M16 nuts) 250 Nm (184 lbf.ft.)
cause injury. Split Wedge Bolts
6 x M20 Bolt 300 Nm (221 lbf.ft)
WARNING
3--162
245
DUAL REAR WHEELS

(where fitted)
Dual rear wheels are available as a factory installed Figure 245 shows a typical wheel installation. The
option or dealer installed accessory, in conjunction inner (cast) wheel (4) is clamped onto the bar axle
with the 2845 mm (112 in.) and 3022 mm (119 in.) bar (5). The outer (steel) wheel (1) is attached to the hub
axles equipped with cast iron or steel wheels. The by eight bolts (3). The hub is clamped to the bar axle
dual wheel kit consists of an additional pair of steel by the four bolts (2) in a similar manner to the cast,
wheels, hubs and wheel-to-hub attaching hardware. inner wheel.
Customers may wish to mount their existing wheels When mounting wheels, the clearance between the
to make a dual wheel installation. In this instance, tyres on the inner wheels and the closest part of the
provided that the existing wheels have the same tractor must be no less than 100 mm (4 in.).
mounting dimensions, they will only need to obtain
the hub assembly. Additionally, a minimum clearance of 100 mm (4 in.)
must be maintained between the closest points of the
IMPORTANT: Dual wheels are intended for flotation. tyre walls. The clearance should be checked with the
Use of dual wheels under heavy traction tractor correctly ballasted and the attached
conditions could cause severe transmission implement in the raised position.
overload and is not approved.
Before the outer wheels can be installed, the inner

wheels must be adjusted to the minimum attainable
track width, as described in the previous text.
3--163
Moving the Outer Wheel on the Axle Shaft
Each wedge is retained in the hub by two M22 bolts

which pass through the hub and screw into the
wedge on the inside of the wheel. To loosen the
wedges, remove the bolts from their clamp position
(1) and replace in the threaded holes (2). Tighten the
bolts evenly until the wedges are loosened enough
to allow the wheel to be moved on the axle shaft.
After moving the wheel, replace the bolts in their
original positions (1) and re--tighten to clamp the
wheel to the axle shaft.
Tighten all wedge retaining bolts in increments of 246

68Nm (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torque of 500Nm (369
lbf.ft.) is achieved.
Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, making
sure that both wheels are the same distance from the
outer ends of the axle shaft.
NOTE: Check the torque of all wedge retaining bolts

on each wheel hub after driving the tractor for 200m
(200 yards), after 1 hour and 10 hours operation.
(112 and 119 in. Axle)

Disc to Hub Fixings
10 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Split Wedge Bolts
4 x M22 Bolt 500Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to Rim Bolts
All wheels (M16 nuts) 250Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407

Nm (300 ft.-lbs.) on the jack bolts. The use of
penetrating oil between the wedge, hub and axle
shaft will be of benefit. If difficulty is experienced,
place a shaft protector over the end of the axle shaft
and strike with a hammer to ‘shock’ the wedge free.
WARNING
Take suitable precautions, including the use of safety
glasses, against the possibility of flying metal
particles.
3--164
BALLASTING AND TYRES
GENERAL Factors Affecting Tyre Performance
Maximum tractor performance is dependent upon  Correct air pressure for the load
proper ballasting and tyre selection. Maximum
efficiency will be achieved when tractor weight is  Correct wheel slip
correct for the application.
 Correct tyre size for expected load
The tyres selected for your tractor must be able to
support the weight of the tractor and equipment and
 Correct fill of liquid ballast
must also be able to provide adequate traction to
utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into useful
drawbar horsepower.  Maintaining equal tyre pressure in both tyres on
a given axle.
Always maintain the correct air pressure in the tyre
to carry the load. Do not over inflate tyres. Selecting Ballast
NOTE: Radial tyres will work with lower air pressures When tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimum
and will show up to 20% sidewall deflection or bulge weight of the tractor will change. This means that
when correctly inflated. ballast may have to be added or removed to maintain
the best tractor performance. Proper ballast will
greatly improve tractor operation and ride.
FRONT AXLE SUSPENSION
The amount of ballast required is affected by:
IMPORTANT: On tractors fitted with front axle
suspension, correct ballasting is essential to
optimise suspension operation, particularly when  Weight of tractor
using heavy rear mounted equipment. For this
application, sufficient front ballast must be added by  Soil and traction conditions
the use of wafer weights in preference to liquid
ballast in the tyres.  Type of implement: fully-mounted, semi-
In certain conditions, with insufficient front weight mounted or trailed
added, suspension operation may become disabled
and a five digit error code beginning with 1000? will  Working speed
be displayed.
Stop the tractor, switch off the engine and restart  Tractor horsepower load
again to clear the error code and re--enable the
suspension. If the error code re--occurs, then further  Type and size of tyres
front weight should be added ensuring maximum
axle and vehicle weights are not exceeded.  Tyre pressures
Do not use more ballast than needed. Excess ballast

should be removed when it is not required.
3--165
Too little ballast: For optimum performance and efficiency, two wheel
drive tractors should be ballasted so that
 Rough ride approximately one third of the total tractor weight
(less implement) is on the front wheels. Four wheel
 Excessive wheel slip drive tractors should be ballasted so the weight on
the front wheels is approximately 40 -- 45% of the
 Power loss total tractor weight.
 Tyre wear Add additional front end ballast, as required, for

stability during operation and transport. Ballasting of
 Excessive fuel consumption the front end may not always provide adequate
stability if the tractor is operated at high speed on
 Lower productivity rough terrain. Reduce tractor speed and exercise
caution under these conditions.
Too much ballast:
 Higher maintenance costs When using front mounted implements it may be

necessary to add weight to the rear wheels to
 Increased driveline wear maintain traction and stability.
 Power loss Ballast Limitations
 Increased soil compaction Ballast should be limited by the tyre capacity or

tractor capacity. Each tyre has a recommended
 Excessive fuel consumption carrying capacity which should not be exceeded,
(see page 3--173).
 Lower productivity
If a greater amount of weight is needed for traction,
For maximum performance in heavy draft conditions larger tyres should be used.
weight should be added to the tractor in the form of
liquid ballast, cast iron weights or a combination of
both. Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weights
or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tyres.
Bolt-on cast iron weights are recommended because
Front end ballast may be required for stability and they can easily be removed when not needed.
steering control when weight is transferred from the
front to the rear wheels as rear mounted implement
is raised by the tractor 3--point hitch. IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor gross
vehicle weight shown on the following page. This can
cause an overload condition that may invalidate the
When a rear mounted implement is raised to the warranty and may exceed the load rating of the tyres.
transport position, the weight on the front wheels The maximum recommended gross vehicle weight is
should be at least 20% of total tractor weight. the weight of the tractor plus ballast plus any
mounted equipment such as sprayers, tanks etc. in
CAUTION the raised position. See the following tables:
Additional front ballast may be needed when
transporting large 3-point mounted equipment.
Always drive slowly over rough terrain, no matter
how much front ballast is used.
3--166
Maximum Vehicle Weights and Axle Loads
Gross Vehicle Weight 4WD Front Axle

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight Maximum Front Axle Loading --
4WD and SuperSteer Models#
kg lb
(Continuous Operation)
All Models 13000 28659
kg lb
IMPORTANT: Braking regulations in some countries
may impose lower gross vehicle weight limits for road
transport than the figures quoted in the above table. # Includes a front end loader in the raised position but
with no load in the bucket.
Individual axles (front and rear) are also subject to
weight limitations, as follows: IMPORTANT: For four wheel drive vehicles, the
figures shown in the foregoing table are for
Rear Axle continuous operation. For intermittent operation, the
front axle loading (including loaded loader bucket)
Maximum Rear Axle Loading may be increased to the following levels, provided
kg lb that ground speed does not exceed 8 km/h (5 MPH)
and the track width settings are maintained within the
limits shown:
NOTE: Total rear axle weight is measured with only

Maximum Front Axle Loading -- 4WD
the rear wheels on the scales inclusive of liquid and
(Restricted Operation)*
cast iron ballast and with mounted equipment in the
raised position. Track Setting
kg lb mm in
2WD Front Axle All
9000 19841 1727 -- 2032 68 -- 80
Maximum Front Axle Loading -- Models
2WD# (Continuous Operation)
kg lb *Maximum track width 1829 mm (72.0in.).
# Includes a front end loader in the raised position but

with no load in the bucket.
3--167
CAST IRON WEIGHTS

(where fitted)
Rear Wheel Weights
Up to three cast iron weights (1) may be added to

each rear wheel, as follows:
Max. Weight per Total Weight per

Wheel Axle
All Models 1 x 227 kg (500 lb) 454 kg (1000 lb)
IMPORTANT: It is not recommended to fit rear 247

wheel weights on tractors operating at speeds in
excess of 40 k/mh (25 MPH).
Front Weights
45 kg (99 lb.) wafer weights are available as a set of

10 or 22, mounted on a substantial cast iron carrier.
The maximum recommended front ballast weight is

as follows:
Front Axle Weight Total
Carrier
Type Pack Weight
10 x 45 kg 125 kg 575 kg
2WD/4WD
10 x 99 lb 275 lb 1265 lb
All 4WD 22 x 45 kg 125 kg 1115 kg
(except 248
SuperSteer) 22 x 99 lb 275 lb 2453 lb
4WD 10 x 45 kg 122 kg 572 kg

SuperSteer 10 x 99 lb 268 lb 1261 lb
4WD 22 x 45 kg 122 kg 569 kg

SuperSteer 22 x 99 lb 268 lb 2446 lb
In addition to the wafer weights, a 450 kg (992 lb.)

chassis weight may be fitted below the front of the
tractor behind the wafer weights. The chassis weight
is not compatible with SuperSteer models.
IMPORTANT: Before adding front weight see

reference to front axle suspension on page 3--165.
249
3--168
IMPORTANT: A set of 22 weights should not be

installed on two wheel drive tractors as the front tyre
capacity will be exceeded.
The weights are clamped together by means of the

long through bolts (1) and (3) and secured to the
carrier by the clamp bolts (2).
The weights may be removed as a complete set with

the aid of suitable lifting gear. Loosen the clamp bolts
(2) and slide the clamp assembly sideways out of the
weight pack. With a lifting bar passed through the
central hole in the weights, the complete weight set
may now be lifted off the carrier.
Alternatively, the weights can be removed

individually after loosening the clamp bolts and
removing all four through bolts (1) and (3). 250
CAUTION
The tractor must not be operated unless all four
through bolts and the clamp bolts are in position with
the bolts tightened to 125 lbf.ft. (169 Nm). Recheck
the bolt torques after 50 hours of operation if the bolts
have been disturbed for any reason.
A towing facility is built into the weight carrier.

However, if the weights are installed a tow pin (1) is
available that clamps onto the front of the weight
pack.
Front tow hook adds 8.5 kg to the total weight
251
Where front weights are not required, a tow pin (1) is
available for bolting directly to the front axle support.
252
3--169
LIQUID BALLAST
Filling the front and rear tyres with liquid ballast is a

convenient method of adding weight. A solution of
calcium chloride and water is recommended. This
gives a low freezing point and provides a higher
density than plain water.
IMPORTANT: In some countries it is illegal to use
calcium chloride as a ballast solution for tyres.
Ensure that you comply with the legal requirements
of your country. Use cast iron weights as an
alternative to liquid ballast.
NOTE: When filling a tyre with calcium
chloride/water solution the valve should be at the
highest point on the wheel. The valve should be at
the lowest point when checking or adjusting air
pressure if the tyre contains liquid ballast. Special
equipment is required to water ballast tyres. See
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for details.
The following tables show the quantity of calcium

chloride and water required for each tyre size option
and is based on 0.6 kg of calcium chloride per litre of
water. The figures in the table will give a 75% fill of
the tyre. This calcium chloride/water solution will give
protection from freezing down to an ambient
temperature of --50C (--58F).
WARNING
When mixing the ballast solution it is imperative the
calcium chloride flakes are added to the water and
the solution stirred until the calcium chloride is
dissolved.
Never add water to calcium chloride as considerable
heat is generated. If the flakes should contact the
eyes, wash the eyes immediately with clean, cold
water for at least 5 minutes. Consult a doctor as soon
as possible.
NOTE: Liquid ballasting of front tyres on a 2WD

installation is not recommended.
3--170
Front Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
16.9R -- 28 219 131 350 58 290 774
480/70R -- 28 222 133 355 59 294 785
540/65R -- 28 257 154 411 68 340 907
600/65R -- 28 344 206 550 91 454 1213
14.9R -- 30 174 104 278 46 231 616
16.9R -- 30 230 138 368 61 304 812
480/70R -- 30 234 140 374 62 309 825
540/65R -- 30 273 163 436 72 361 965
600/60R -- 30 309 185 494 82 409 1092
14.9R -- 34 193 115 308 51 255 680
320/85R -- 34 136 81 217 36 180 481
380/85R -- 34 188 112 300 50 248 663
420/85R -- 34 270 162 432 71 357 952
320/85R -- 38 116 69 185 31 154 411
Rear Tyre Ballast

Tyre Size Water Calcium Total Weight Water Calcium Total Weight
Chloride of solution Chloride of solution
per tyre US per tyre
Litres kg. kg. gallons lb. lb.
20.8R -- 38 429 257 686 113 567 1513
580/70R -- 38 467 280 747 124 617 1648
650/65R -- 38 510 306 816 135 674 1800
650/75R -- 38 591 354 945 156 781 2285
710/70R -- 38 648 388 1036 171 856 2174
18.4R -- 42 352 211 563 93 465 1241
20.8R -- 42 453 271 724 120 599 1599
580/70R -- 42 420 252 672 111 555 1481
620/70R -- 42 496 297 793 131 655 1749
650/65R -- 42 526 315 841 139 694 1853
710/60R -- 42 577 346 923 153 763 2036
14.9R -- 46 245 147 392 65 324 865
420/80R -- 46 244 146 390 65 323 862
480/80R -- 46 359 215 574 95 474 1265
520/85R -- 46 439 263 702 116 580 1548
18.4R -- 46 395 237 632 104 522 1393
320/90R -- 50 153 91 244 40 202 539
320/90R -- 54 162 97 259 43 214 571
3--171
TYRE INFLATION
Upon receiving your tractor, check the air pressure  Do not re-inflate a tyre that has been run flat or
in the tyres and re--check every 50 hours or weekly. seriously under-inflated until it has been
The tyres fitted to your tractor may be of the tubed or inspected for damage by a qualified person.
tubeless type.
 Torque wheel to axle nuts to specification after
re--installing the wheel. Check nut tightness daily
When checking tyre pressures, inspect the tyres for
until torque stabilises.
damaged tread and side walls. Neglected damage
will lead to early tyre failure.  Refer to tractor weighting section before adding
ballast to the tyres.
Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that
a tyre may carry.  Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, level surface.
 Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to lift your
Do not exceed the recommended load for the tyre tractor.
pressures in use, see the following page for details.
Do not over or under inflate the tyres.  Use jack stands or other suitable blocking to
support the tractor while repairing tyres.
DANGER  Do not put any part of your body under the tractor
Inflating or servicing tyres can be dangerous. or start the engine while the tractor is on the jack.
Whenever possible, trained personnel should be
called in to service or install tyres. In any event, to  Never hit a tyre or rim with a hammer.
avoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury, follow
the safety precautions below:  Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or
damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repair or
use a damaged rim.
 Never attempt tyre repairs on a public road or  Do not inflate a tyre unless the rim is mounted on
highway. the tractor or is secured so that it will not move
if the tyre or rim should suddenly fail.
 Do not inflate steering tyres above the
manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on  When fitting a new or repaired tyre, use a clip--on
the tyre or beyond the maximum shown in the valve adaptor with a remote gauge that allows
Tyre Pressure and Load tables if the tyre is not the operator to stand clear of the tyre while
marked with the maximum pressure. inflating it. Use a safety cage, if available.
3--172
TYRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

(Radial tyres) 1
Radial tyre performance is denoted by a Load Index

and Speed Symbol replacing the Ply Rating 141 A8 138
commonly found on cross ply tyres. Figure 253 B
shows typical markings to be found on the side wall
2 3
of radial ply tyres.
NOTE: Radial tyres will have a speed symbol of ‘A8’ MAX LOAD AT 40 KM/H
4 2575 KGS AT 1.6 BAR
and/or ’B’ which identifies the maximum speed rating
for that tyre. Tyres marked with the A8 symbol are REPLACES 10 P.R. 5
suitable for speeds up to 40km/h (25 MPH), those
marked with a ’B’ symbol may be operated at speeds
of 50k/mh (31 MPH). 253
The maximum load that may be carried by the tyre is 1. Load Index
dependent upon the Load Index shown on the side 2. Speed Symbol for 40 km/h (25 MPH)
wall. In the following charts the loads given are for 3. Speed Symbol for 50 km/h (31 MPH)
individual tyres operated at speeds up to 40 or 50 km/h 4. Maximum load/inflation pressure at
40 km/h (25MPH)
(25 or 31 MPH). The two right--hand columns indicate 5. Old ply rating mark
the maximum permissible load per tyre at speeds of
40 or 50 km/h (25 or 31 MPH).
WARNING
When operating at high road speeds, tyre pressures
and maximum load capacities advised by the tyre
manufacturer should be strictly adhered to. Consult
your authorised dealer or tyre supplier for the correct
pressures and loads for the tyres fitted to your
tractor.
Inflation Pressure -- bar

Tyre Load 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 40 50
Size Index k/mh k/mh
Load Capacity per TYRE (kg) -- 30k/mh
153A8 - - - - 2210 2410 2460 2865 3140 3350 3350 -

20.8R x 38 (150B) - - - - 2430 2650 2900 3150 3450 3650 3650
155A8 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875 -

580/70R38 (155B) 3095 3355 3615 3875 - - - - - - 3875
169A8 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200 -

650/75R38 (169B) 3800 - 4250 - 4800 5200 5800 6200 - - 6200
171A8 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150 -
710/70R38 (171B) 4190 4560 4930 5300 5515 5725 5940 6150 - - 6150
155A8 - - - - 2275 2550 2800 3050 3320 3550 3550 -

20.8R x 42 (152B) - - - - 2500 2800 3075 3350 3650 3875 3875
158A8 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250 -

18.4R x 46 (158B) 2750 - 3470 - 4000 4120 4400 4500 - - 4250
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
3--173
Inflation Pressure -- lbf/in2

Tyre Load 15 17 20 23 26 29 31 35 37 40 25 31
Size Index MPH MPH
Load Capacity per TYRE (lbs.) -- 18.6 MPH
153A8 - - - - 4872 5313 5423 6316 6922 7385 7385 -

20.8R x 38 (150B) - - - - 5357 5842 6393 6944 7605 8046 8046
155A8 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542 -

580/70R38 (155B) 6823 7396 7969 8542 - - - - - - 8542
169A8 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668 -

650/75R38 (169B) 8377 - 9369 - 10582 11463 12786 13668 - - 13668
171A8 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558 -
710/70R38 (171B) 9237 10251 10868 11684 12158 12621 13095 13558 - - 13558
155A8 - - - - 5015 5621 6172 6723 7319 7826 7826 -

20.8R x 42 (152B) - - - - 5511 6172 6779 7385 8046 8542 8542
158A8 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369 -

18.4R x 46 (158B) 6062 - 7649 - 8818 9082 9700 9920 - - 9369
IMPORTANT: The above table provides an example of the maximum load limitations that occur at various tyre
pressures on a representative range of rear tyre sizes available for your tractor. These figures are per tyre and
should be used for guidance only. For exact information regarding inflation pressures and loads for your particular
tyres, consult your authorised dealer.
SYMBOL MARKED RADIAL TYRES

(North America Only)
Conventional sized radial agricultural tractor drive

tyres are marked with *, **,or *** symbols. The
maximum load rating for tyres marked with a * is
calculated at 18 psi inflation pressure. Tyres marked
with ** or *** have maximum load carrying capacities
at pressures of 24 psi and 30 psi respectively.
For information regarding specific inflation pressures

and load carrying capacities for the tyres fitted to
your tractor, consult your authorised dealer. 254
1. Load symbol
2. Maximum recommended load at marked pressure
3. Maximum load at 20 MPH
4. Previous ply ratings
3--174
SECTION 4
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
GENERAL INFORMATION
INTRODUCTION WARNING SYMBOLS
This section gives full details of the service A number of maintenance items are represented by
procedures necessary to maintain your tractor at symbols that may appear in the Dot Matrix Display.
peak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenance For more information see page 2--79.
chart on page 4--13 provides a ready reference to
these requirements, each operation being numbered CONTENTS
for easy reference.
The subjects covered in this section are as listed
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS below. A full index is provided at the back of this book.
IMPORTANT: Read and observe all safety Page Subject

precautions listed in ‘Servicing the Tractor’ and
’Prevention of Fire or Explosion’ in the General
First 50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Information and Safety Section at the front of this
Manual. Fuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3
Guard removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.
Lubrication and maintenance chart . . . . . . . . . 4--13
CAUTION Lubricants and coolants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--12
Do not check, lubricate, service or make adjustments When the warning symbol appears . . . . . . . . 4--16
to the tractor with the engine running.
10--hour/daily service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--19
50--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--20
DURING THE FIRST 50 HOURS OPERATION
100--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--30
In addition to the regular maintenance operations 300--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--31
listed, check the following items every 10 hours or 600--hour service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--34
daily during the first 50 hours of operation:
1200--hour/12 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--42
 Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
1200--hour/24 month service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--49
 Wheel nuts for tightness Every 3 years . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--56
 Front axle hub oil levels General maintenance -- as required . . . . . . . . 4--58
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and, Cleaning the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--74
where applicable, extend all cylinders before Protecting Electronic Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--75
checking oil levels. With some wheel equipment
fitted, it may be necessary to raise the front or rear Storing the tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--76
of the tractor to ensure it is level before checking the
oil.
4--1
SECTION 4 -- LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE
THE FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICE IMPORTANT: *At the first 50 Hour service the
hydraulic charge filter (3) MUST be changed for the
At the first 50-hour service, ensure that the service larger capacity service replacement filter. Do NOT
operations are carried out by your authorised dealer. replace with one of the same size as this may reduce
The items are listed in the ‘First 50-Hour Service’ hydraulic system performance.
checklist in Section 8.
Filter Dimensions Length Diameter
 Check engine oil level
Original (factory fit) 204mm 94.3mm
 Change hydraulic oil filters (all models)*
Service replacement filter 254mm 116.8mm
 Check transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level
 Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted)
 Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted)
 Check FWD differential oil level
 Check FWD axle hub oil level
 Check and adjust parking brake
 Check all engine air intake connections
 Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts 1

 Inspect Poly V-belt
 Check and adjust compressor drive belt tension

(air operated trailer brakes--where fitted)
 Tighten all cooling system hose connections
 Check torque of safety cab or frame mounting

bolts
 Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts

(where fitted)
Both 50 Hour Service sheets should be signed by

yourself and your dealer and one copy retained by
the dealer for their records (Dealer’s copy).
IMPORTANT: Items listed in the first 50-hour check

are important. If not performed, early component
failure and reduced tractor life may result.
4--2
PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATION FUELLING THE TRACTOR
To prevent contamination when changing oils, filters, CAUTION

etc., always clean the area around filler caps, level When handling diesel fuel, observe the following:
and drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior to removal.
Before connecting remote cylinders, ensure that oil Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under no
contained within them is clean, has not degenerated circumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gasohol or
due to long storage and is of the correct grade. dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel and alcohol) be
added to diesel fuel because of increased fire or
To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt from explosion risks. In a closed container such as a fuel
the grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excess tank they are more explosive than pure gasoline. Do
grease from the fitting after greasing. not use these blends. Additionally, dieselhol is not
approved due to possible inadequate lubrication of
FLEXIBILITY OF MAINTENANCE INTERVALS the fuel injection system.
The intervals listed in the lubrication and  Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.
maintenance chart are guidelines to be used when
operating in normal working conditions.  Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduce
overnight condensation.
Adjust the intervals for environmental and working  Never take the cap off or refuel with the engine
conditions. Intervals should be shortened under running.
adverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty)
working conditions.  Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling the
fuel tank.
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
 Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room for
expansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,
The chart on page 4--13 lists the intervals when replace it with a genuine original equipment
routine checks, lubrication, service and/or cap and tighten securely.
adjustments should be performed. Use the chart as
a quick reference guide when servicing the tractor.
 Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.
The operations follow the chart.
FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE
The fuel injectors on your tractor are electronically

controlled and therefore do not require periodic
servicing or adjustment.
4--3
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The engine in your tractor is of an advanced design Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.5%
capable of providing dependable performance and requires more frequent oil changes as noted in the
good fuel economy. In order to maintain this maintenance schedule.
performance, it is important that tractor maintenance
schedules are carried out at the correct intervals. The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above
1.3% is not recommended.
NOTICE: Diesel approved for your engine must
comply with the Specification Standard ASTMD975 For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-D fuel
(North America) or EN590 (Europe) or equivalent. whenever temperatures allow.
Be aware that use of Diesel not complying with the
above mentioned Specification Standard could lead Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below
to severe damage to the engine and to the fuel --7 C (20 F). The cold temperatures will cause the
system. Be aware that the use of non approved fuel fuel to thicken, which may prevent the engine from
may void the Warranty cover. running. (If this happens, contact your dealer.)
The quality of fuel used is an important factor for To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,
dependable performance and satisfactory engine enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. The
life. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, and responsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplier
non-corrosive to fuel system parts. Be sure to use as well as the fuel user.
fuel of a known quality from a reputable supplier.
BIODIESEL FUEL
Use Number 2-D in temperatures above --7 C (20 F).
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester Biodiesel (Biodiesel Fuel)
consists of a family of fuels derived from vegetable
Use Number 1-D in temperatures below --7 C (20 F). oils treated with methyl esters.
To obtain optimum combustion and minimum engine NOTICE: Biodiesel Fuel blends are approved for
wear, the fuel selected for use should conform to the your engine only if they comply with Specification
application and property requirements outlined in the standards EN14214 or ASTM 06751.
following ‘Diesel Fuel Selection Chart’.
NOTICE: It is imperative that you check which blend
DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART is approved for your engine with your local dealer.
Beware that the use of Biodiesel Fuel that does not
General Final Cetane Sulphur comply with the Standards mentioned above could
Fuel Boiling Rating Content lead to severe damage to the engine and fuel system
Classification Point (max) (min) (max) of your machine. The use of fuels that are not
288 C approved may void Warranty coverage.
No. 1-D 40* 0.3%
(550 F)
357 C
No. 2-D 40 0.5%
(675 F)
NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weather
conditions below 0C (32F) are encountered or
when continuously operating at an altitude above
5,000 ft. (1500 m) use Number 1-D fuel.
*When continually operating at low temperatures or

high altitude, a minimum cetane rating of 45 is
required.
4--4
Biodiesel Fuel Usage Conditions  Biodiesel produces less particulate matter and
reduces smoke emissions.
Introduction to Fatty Acid Methyl Ester (FAME)  Biodiesel is fully biodegradable and non--toxic.
biodiesel
FAME biodiesel, called biodiesel fuel in the following
section, consists of a family of fuels derived from Diesel and biodiesel fuel specifications
vegetable oils treated with methyl esters. Diesel fuel specifications are covered by the
following:
There are two main biodiesel fuel types: Rapeseed
Methyl Ester (RME) and Soybean Methyl Ester  Europe: EN 590 -- Specification of Diesel fuel.
(SME). RME is a blend of rapeseed and sunflower (10ppm sulfur maximum).
methyl ester, and is the preferred crop in Europe.
SME is the preferred crop in the United States.  United States: ASTM D975--08A, Standard
Specification for Diesel Fuel Oils. (15ppm sulfur
Biodiesel fuel is a renewable alternative fuel source. maximum).
Its use and development is promoted worldwide,
especially in Europe and in the United States. Biodiesel blends are covered by:
NOTICE: Your Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR)  European Diesel Fuel Specification EN 590
system is compatible with up to 7 % biodiesel fuel allows up to 7% biodiesel since 2009. European
(B7). Be aware that the use of biodiesel fuel that does fuel suppliers are allowed to use up to 7%
not comply with the standards mentioned in this biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the network.
section could lead to severe damage to the engine
and fuel system of your machine. The use of  United States Diesel Fuel Specification ASTM
non--approved fuels may void Warranty coverage. D6751--09A allows up to 7% biodiesel since
2009. United States fuel suppliers are allowed to
Biodiesel fuel can be used to run diesel engines as use up to 7% biodiesel fuel (B7) to supply the
pure biodiesel fuel or when blended with standard network.
diesel fuel:  United States Biodiesel Fuel Specification
ASTM D7467--09A provides specifications for
 B7: indicates the blend of 7% biodiesel and 93% diesel and biodiesel blends from B6 to B20.
diesel fuels.
Before raw oil can be converted into usable biodiesel
 B20: indicates the blend of 20% biodiesel and fuel, it must undergo transesterification to remove
80% diesel fuels. Do not use. glycerides. During the transesterification process,
 B100: indicates pure biodiesel, or 100% the oil reacts with an alcohol to separate the
biodiesel fuel. Do not use. glycerine from the fat or vegetable oil. This process
leaves behind two products: methyl ester (the
Biodiesel fuel has several positive features in
chemical name for biodiesel) and glycerine (a
comparison with diesel fuel:
byproduct usually sold for use in soaps or other
products).
 Biodiesel fuel adds lubricity to the fuel, which is
beneficial in many circumstances, particularly as NOTICE: Biodiesel fuels approved for use in New
sulfur and aromatics are removed from the fuel. Holland equipment must be transesterified and
 Biodiesel has a greater cetane number and comply with the European Standard EN14214, North
burns cleaner. America Standard ASTM D6751.
4--5
NOTICE: Cold Pressed Biodiesel, Cold Pressed Oil,  Wear and corrosion of internal components due
Straight Vegetable Oil (SVO), or more generally to water content, which affects lubricity.
unrefined vegetable oils used as motor fuel, are fuels  Deterioration of some rubber sealing com-
that are normally made from Rapeseed oil or similar pounds in the fuel system.
high oil content crops. These kinds of fuel are not
 Biodiesel oxidation, which can lead to the
transesterified, so they do not fulfil the EN14214, or
formation of deposits that can harm the fuel
the ASTM D6751 requirements. There is no
injection system.
recognized quality standard available for these types
of fuel. Therefore the use of Cold Pressed Biodiesel, NOTICE: Any problem in the engine fuel injection
Cold Pressed Oil, Straight Vegetable Oil (SVO), or equipment associated with non--compliance to the
more generally unrefined vegetable oils used as following conditions for biodiesel fuel handling and
motor fuel are NOT APPROVED at any blend in any maintenance will not be covered by Warranty.
New Holland product.
Purchase biodiesel fuel from a trusted supplier who
NOTICE: Any engine and fuel injection equipment understands the product and maintains acceptable
fitted to a vehicle found to have run with any blend of fuel quality.
NON--APPROVED fuel (fuel not fulfilling the
specification described in the requirement EN14214 It is highly recommended that you use biodiesel from
for Europe, or ASTM D6751 for the United States will BQ 9000 accredited suppliers to maintain the quality
no longer be covered by Warranty. and consistency of the fuel. The BQ 9000 quality
management program is accredited by the National
The use of biodiesel fuel affects engine performance Biodiesel Board for producers and marketers of
as follows: Biodiesel fuel. See the National Biodiesel Board
website at www.biodiesel.org for more information.
 Up to B7: no effect on performance. Blends
above B7 are not approved for your after--treat- Biodiesel fuel must be pre--blended by the supplier.
ment system. Mixing biodiesel fuels on--site can result in an
 Up to B20: up to 5% reduction in power /torque incorrect mixture that could damage the engine
 Up to B100: up to 12 % reduction in power / and/or fuel system.
torque.
NOTICE: Your warranty may be void if the problem
Biodiesel fuel usage conditions is associated with poor fuel quality due to improper
The biodiesel fuel usage conditions must be blending. It is the responsibility of the fuel supplier
stringently followed by the customer. Incorrect and/or the customer to ensure the right type of fuel
application of the biodiesel fuel usage conditions and blend is delivered and used.
could lead to severe damage to both the engine and
the fuel injection equipment. Maintenance intervals
The main concerns related to operation with No change to maintenance intervals is required
biodiesel fuels are: when using biodiesel blends up to B7.
 Filters and injector blockage caused by poor fuel

quality.
4--6
STORING DIESEL FUEL  To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,

provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the end
Take the following precautions to ensure that stored opposite the outlet pipe.
fuel is kept free of dirt, water and other contaminants.
 If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put a
 Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanized funnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tank
tanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fuel filler neck when refuelling.
and form compounds that will contaminate the
injection pump and injectors.  Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuels
are not held over and used in winter.
 Install bulk storage tanks away from direct
sunlight and angle them slightly so sediment in
the tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.
Storage, handling, and transport

NOTICE: Storage temperatures above 30C (86F) greatly reduce the shelf life of DEF/AdBlue.
DEF/AdBlue has a typical shelf life of 6--12 months. Refer to the SHELF LIFE table below. In order for
DEF/AdBlue to remain in a useable condition, storage requirements need to be met.
 Store between --11C (12F) and 30C (86F).

 Use only an approved DEF/AdBlue container. Contact your dealer to obtain proper storage container(s).
 Keep container tightly closed.
 Keep container in a cool, well--ventilated area.
 Keep away from heat and direct sunlight.
Thawing
 Your machine is equipped with an internal tank heater to thaw frozen DEF/AdBlue. Your machine will still
function until the DEF/AdBlue begins to flow. The SCR system will then function normally.
 Do not heat DEF/AdBlue for long periods of time at temperatures above 30C (86F). This causes the
solution to decompose, which very slowly decreases the expected shelf life.
NOTICE: Do not use an anti--gelling or freeze point improver in your DEF/AdBlue. The 32.5 % solution is
specifically designed to provide the optimum NOx reduction properties. Any further blending or adjusting of the
DEF/AdBlue mixture will lessen its ability to perform correctly and may cause damage to the SCR components.
Handling and supply of additives, if any.

 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) is not required under normal conditions. If splashing is likely, wear eye
protection. For prolonged or repeated contact, impervious gloves are recommended. Follow the precautions
listed in the SAFETY INFORMATION chapter when handling any service fluid.
 No additives are required.
NOTICE: Contaminated DEF/AdBlue can affect the performance of your machine. Follow all instructions in
this
manual when handling DEF/AdBlue.
Shelf life
Constant ambient storage temperature Maximum shelf life

Less than or equal to 10C (50F) 36 months
Less than or equal to 25C (77F) 1 18 months
4--7

Greater than 35C (95F) -- 2
1To prevent decomposition of DEF/AdBlue, prolonged transportation or storage above 25C (77F) should
be avoided.
2 Significant loss of shelf life: check every batch before use. See your dealer for more information on
testing.
NOTE: The main factors taken into account to define the shelf life in the table above are the ambient storage
temperature and the initial alkalinity of DEF/AdBlue. The difference in evaporation between vented and
non--vented storage containers is an additional factor.
NOTE: The information in this table is for reference only and has been provided by the International Organization
for Standardization, Document number ISO 22241--3 Diesel engines -- NOx reduction agent AUS 32 -- Part 3:
Handling, transportation and storage.
Disposal
 Dispose of DEF/AdBlue and any filter accumulations in accordance with all applicable Federal, State, and
local laws governing waste disposal.
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF)/AdBlue refilling

The DEF/AdBlue tank is located on the left--hand
side of the machine, next to the diesel filling port (1).
The DEF/AdBlue tank cap (2) can be identified by

the “blue” color of the cap. A fitting under the cap
prevents the insertion of a diesel fill nozzle.
NOTICE: If any DEF/AdBlue spills or contacts any

surface other than the storage tanks, immediately
clean the affected surface with clear water.
DEF/AdBlue will cause corrosion on painted and
unpainted metallic surfaces, and may distort some
2
plastic and rubber components.
It is recommended that DEF/AdBlue filling equipment should be used having a fill nozzle/pump with the correct
length and diameter, triggered by the magnet in the tank filler neck and with overfill flow cut out.
This will ensure that:
 The screen in the filler neck will not be damaged.

 Impurities are not entering the DEF/AdBlue tank. The standardized DEF/AdBlue nozzle matches the filler
neck diameter.
 The DEF/AdBlue tank is not overfilled, as the DEF/AdBlue pump will stop when the DEF/AdBlue tank
is full.
 DEF/AdBlue is not pumped in the fuel tank, as the DEF/AdBlue nozzle cannot pump when the magnet
is not sensed.
NOTICE: Refilling with a funnel is not recommended as this may lead to damage of the screen in the filler neck.
4--8
NOTE: The information above has been provided by the International Organization for Standardization (ISO),
Document number ISO 22241--4 Diesel engines -- NOx reduction agent AUS 32 -- Part 4: Refilling interface.
FILLING THE FUEL TANK

Clean the area around the fuel cap, 1, to prevent dirt
from entering tank and contaminating the fuel.
Remove the cap and place in a clean area during
refuelling. The cap is attached to the fuel tank by
a chain to prevent loss.
After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuel cap.
FUEL FILLER CAP

The fuel filler cap on your tractor is of the vented type,
should it become lost or damaged always replace it
with one of the same type. Consult your authorized
3
dealer.
FUEL CAPACITY
395 liters (104 U.S. gal).
DEF/AdBlue CAPACITY
48 liters (12.7 U.S. gal), and is sufficient for
approximately two fuel tank fills.
4--9
PROTECTIVE GUARDS
WARNING
Guards are fitted for your protection, if they are
removed for access to service items, they must
be replaced before operating the tractor.
ENGINE HOOD
For safety the hood must be closed and correctly
latched before operating the tractor.
The hood is hinged at the rear to provide easy access

to the engine area for routine maintenance. Two gas
struts (located under the hood) assist in raising the
hood to either of two positions. A safety stay holds
the hood in the selected position.
To open the hood, depress the release button, 2, and

raise the hood using the grab handle, 1. The gas
struts will take over and raise the hood to the first
position secured by the nylon retaining strap located
at the front of the hood. All routine maintenance 4
operations may be performed with the hood raised to
this position.
Additional guards are provided to prevent the fingers

being trapped by the fan/air conditioner drive belt
when the hood is lowered to the operating position.
Should it become necessary to raise the hood to its
full extent, unclip the retaining strap, 1, from its
anchor bracket and, holding firmly onto the strap,
allow the hood to raise fully on the gas struts.
NOTICE: Raising the hood to full height is only

necessary for service requirements that are best left
to your dealer.
To close the hood, pull it fully down ensuring the

retaining strap has been re-fitted to the anchor
bracket. An audible click will signal engagement of
the locking catch. Check that the hood is properly
closed.
5
4--10
Engine Side Panels

The engine side panels are secured by two turn lock
screws, 1. Using a screwdriver with a broad blade,
turn the screws 1/4 turn counter-clockwise to
release. Hold the panel at the center, pull outwards
and slide towards the front of the tractor until it clears
the front and rear support pins.
To refit the side panels, reverse the above procedure

ensuring both screws are locked before operating
the tractor.
6
RIGHT-HAND FOOTSTEPS
The right-hand footsteps on your tractor are secured
by six retaining bolts and cover the battery.
For access to the battery, remove the six retaining

bolts.
When replacing the steps, ensure the six retaining

bolts are tightened securely.
7
RELAY AND FUSE PANEL COVERS
The moulded panel on the right-hand side of the cab
may be easily removed for service. Remove the two
retaining screws, 1, then ease the cover forward and
slide it to the left removing the two retaining tongues,
2, from their recess and allowing access to the fuses
and relays.
8
Maxi Fuses (Starter Motor)
To access the maxi fuses, remove the cover, (2),
from the starter motor. Loosen and remove the
13mm nut, (1), then lift the cover from the starter
motor.
After replacing a fuse ensure the cover and nut are

re--placed to prevent a build up of dust or debris
around the fuses.
4--11
LUBRICANTS AND COOLANTS --30 C --25 C --15 C +20 C +40 C

Lubricants
The correct engine oil viscosity grade is dependent SAE 5W--30

upon ambient temperature. Refer to the chart on the
right when selecting oil for your tractor engine.
SAE 10W--30
NOTE: In areas where prolonged periods of extreme
temperatures are encountered, local lubricant
practices are acceptable; such as the use of SAE
5W30 in extreme low temperatures or SAE 50 in SAE 15W--40
extreme high temperatures.
--22 F --13 F +5 F +68 F +104 F
Biodegradable Transmission and Hydraulic Oil Sulphur in Fuel
A biodegradable oil has been approved for use in the The engine oil and filter change period are shown in
transmission, 4WD front axle and hubs, and the section 4. However, locally available fuel may have
hydraulic system of your tractor. Although the oil is a high sulphur content, in which case the engine oil
90% biodegradable, it is important to follow safe and filter change period should be adjusted as
handling and disposal practices. follows:--
Sulphur Content % Oil Change Period
Ambra Multi Bio oil is available from your authorised Below 0.5 Normal
dealer. From 0.5 -- 1.0 Half the normal
Above 1.0 One quarter normal.
Biodegradable oil should not be used in conjunction
NOTE:Theuseof fuelwithasulphurcontent above
with other oils. Use the following procedure to
1.3% is not recommended.
replace standard oil with biodegradable lubricant.
Coolants
Operate the tractor until the oil that is being changed
To reduce the amount of deposits and corrosion, the
reaches a temperature greater than 60C
water used in the cooling system must comply with
(140F).
the following values.
Stop the engine and immeadiately drain the oil as
outlined later in this section. Total Hardness: Chloride: Sulphate:
300 ppm 100 ppm 100 ppm
Replace all transmission and hydraulic filters.
IMPORTANT: See Operation 32, page 4--49,
Add the biodegradable oil to the correct level and run regarding use of coolant inhibitor where the above
the tractor to circulate the oil. mentioned antifreeze is not available. In those hot
countries where antifreeze is not available, use clean
Check for oil leaks and re--check the oil level. water only.
NOTE: See Operation 32, page 4--49, for further

details before topping up or changing the engine
coolant.
4--12
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART
C C L C A D
Service Operation
h l u h d r Page
Interval No.
Maintenance Requirement e e b a j a
c a e n u i No.
k n g s n
e t
When a 1 Engine air cleaner outer element X X 4--16

warning symbol
appears 2 Fuel filter/water separator X X 4--17
3 Engine coolant level X X 4--18
Every 10 hours
or daily 4 Engine oil level X X 4--19
5 Windscreen washer reservoir fluid level (where fitted) X X 4--19
6 Radiator, intercooler, oil cooler, air conditioner X X 4--20
condenser cores and SCR cover
7 Cab air filters X 4--21
Every 50 hours
8 All grease fittings X 4--23
9 Front and rear wheel nut torque X X 4--29
10 Tyre pressures and condition X X 4--29
Every 100 11 Air brake compressor drive belts (where fitted) X 4--30
hours
12 Battery electrolyte level (tropical climates) X X X 4--31
13 Poly V--belt X 4--32
Every 300
hours 14 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics oil level X X 4--32
15 Parking brake X X 4--33
16 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level X X 4--33
*17 Engine oil and filter X 4--34
18 Charge pump oil filter X 4--36
19 Engine air cleaner outer element X 4--36
20 Engine air intake connections X 4--37
Every 600
hours 21 Transmission oil cooler pipes X 4--38
22 Pre--fuel and secondary fuel filter elements X 4--39
23 Four wheel drive front axle and hubs oil level X X 4--40
24 Front P.T.O. gearbox oil and filter X X 4--41
25 DEF/AdBlue In Line Filter X 4--41
26 Cab air filters X 4--42
27 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic filters X 4--43
Every 1200 28 Transmission/rear axle/hydraulic oil X 4--44
hours or
annually 29 FWD axle differential X 4--45
30 FWD axle hub oil X 4--46
31 Battery electrolyte level (temperate climates) X X X 4--46
32 Engine coolant X 4--49
Every 1200 33 Engine air cleaner inner element X 4--53
hours or two 34 Engine valve tappet clearances X X 4--54
years
35 Engine breather filter X 4--54
36 Air brake dryer reservoir X 4--55
* Oil change interval will be reduced if fuel has a high sulphur content or if the tractor is operated in extremely cold temperatures.
4--13
LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART (continued)
C C L C A D
Service Operation
h l u h d r Page
Interval No.
Maintenance Requirement e e b a j a
c a e n u i No.
k n g s n
e t
Every 3600 37 Main DEF/AdBlue Filter X 4--56

hours / 2 years
Every 3 years 38 Air conditioning system X X X 4--56
39 Fuel system pre--filter and water trap X X X 4--57
40 Bleeding the fuel system X X 4--58
41 Transmission calibration X X 4--59
42 Footbrakes X X 4--61
43 Automatic pick-up hitch X X 4--62
44 Remote control valve drain bottle(s) X 4--62
General
maintenance 45 Cab suspension adjustment X X 4--63
46 Headlight and worklamp adjustment X X 4--64
47 Bulb replacement X 4--65
48 Fuse replacement X 4--68
-- Cleaning the tractor X X 4--74
-- Protecting electrical systems X 4--75
-- Storing the tractor X X X 4--76
4--14
LUBRICANT AND COOLANT SPECIFICATION
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND New Holland International Approximate

APPLICATIONS Specification Specification Quantities
Engine Oil ACEA E7/E5
Ambra Mastergold HSP (15W--40) NH 330 H API CI--4CH--4
15 Litres (3.96 U.S. gals.)
Ambra Mastergold HSP (10W--30) NH 324 H CUMMINS
CES20078/77/76/72
Transmission, Rear Axle and
Hydraulic System Oil
NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46
Ambra Multi G (10W30)
-- Power Command (All models) 100 Litres (26.4 U.S. gal)
Front Wheel Drive Oil
Ambra Multi G (10W30)
-- Axle (All models) NH 410 B API GL4, ISO 32/46 11 Litres (11.6 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (w/out brakes, per hub) 2.3 Litres (2.4 U.S. qts.)
-- Hubs (with brakes, per hub) 3.8 Litres (4.0 U.S. qts.)
Front P.T.O. Gearbox Oil
Ambra Multi G (10W30) NH 410B API GL4, ISO 32/46 3.05 Litres (3.2 U.S. qts.)
Engine Radiator Coolant
System Capacity 26 Litres (6.9 U.S. gal.)
*Water 50%
Ambra Agriflu NH 900 A Ethylene Glycol 50%
Air Conditioning Compressor Oil
Low Viscosity Oil SP10 n/a PAG--E13, ISO100 Viscosity As Required
Grease Fittings and Bearings
Ambra GR9 NH 710 A NLGI 2 As Required
*NOTE Use antifreeze (50%) plus clean, soft water (50%). In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used
in the cooling system should not exceed the following limits:
4--15
WHEN THE WARNING SYMBOL APPEARS
OPERATION 1
SERVICE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Replace the outer element when the restriction

indicator symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display or
every 600 hours, whichever comes first. If the
symbol appears, perform the replacement within one
hour of operation.
IMPORTANT: Replace the outer element only when

the restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning of the
filter is not recommended.
10
The dry air cleaner, which is located under the
left-hand side of the hood, consists of an inner and
outer paper element contained within an easily
accessible housing. See Figure 10.
Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 10, and lift
off the air cleaner assembly cover.
Remove the outer element, 1, Figure 11, from the air

cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end of
the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing, not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
11
IMPORTANT: Do not disturb or remove the inner
element.
Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing using a

damp, lint-free cloth on a probe. Do not damage
the inner filter element. Ensure that the inner end
of the housing is clean and smooth, to ensure a
good seating for the rubber seal on the element.
Ensure the inner element, 1, is located correctly in

the air cleaner assembly before installing the
outer element. Refit the end cover and securely
latch the three retaining clips.
12
4--16
OPERATION 2
DRAIN FUEL SYSTEM WATER SEPARATOR
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
If the symbol appears in the Dot Matrix Display, this

signals the presence of water in the fuel sedimenter,
drain the fuel filter and sedimenter assembly, as
follows:
Open the drain tap on the sedimenter/filter assembly

by rotating the collar (1) approximately 180 on
the water sensor switch. Contaminated fuel will
drain from the tube (2).
NOTE: To loosen the drain tap (1) it may be 13
necessary to remove the sensor wire from the
terminal to allow the knob to rotate.
Allow contaminated fuel to drain until only clean fuel

runs out. Catch the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of properly. Close the drain tap.
IMPORTANT: When tightening the drain tap rotate
until the tap contacts the filter and then rotate a
further quarter turn. Do not overtighten.
The fuel system is self bleeding and should not

require priming after draining the sedimenter. If
priming is required, turn to page 4--58 for details on
priming the fuel system.
NOTE: See also page 4--57 Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap. 14
4--17
EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY

(whichever occurs first)
OPERATION 3
CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the recovery tank (2) when

the engine is cold. The coolant level should be above
the bottom line (3) on the recovery tank. If coolant is
required, remove the cap (1) and add a 50/50 water
and antifreeze mixture as specified on page 4--12 of
this Manual.
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the pressure cap on the coolant
expansion tank. It is dangerous to remove the cap
while the system is hot. When the system has
cooled, use a thick cloth and turn the pressure cap
slowly to the first stop and allow the pressure to 15
escape before fully removing the cap. Never remove
the cap from the top of the radiator unless the
expansion tank pressure cap has first been
removed.
CAUTION
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the coolant filter and
antifreeze container.
NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank,

the coolant level must be checked in the radiator.
Check the system for leaks and repair as required.
Remove the radiator filler cap when the system is

cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level to just
below the top of the filler neck. Install the cap and add
coolant to the recovery tank, as described above.
4--18
OPERATION 4
CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level when the tractor is parked on a

level surface and after the engine has been stopped
for a minimum of five minutes.
Remove the dipstick from the left-hand side of the

engine, wipe clean and re-insert fully.
Pull the dipstick out again and check the oil level. The
oil level should fall between the high and low level
notches on the dipstick.
If more oil is required, remove the filler cap and add

fresh oil until the level is between the two notches
on the dipstick. The quantity of oil represented by
theupperandlowernotchesisapproximately4.0 16
litres (4.2 U.S.qts).
NOTE: Do not fill above the upper notch on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower
notch.
Re-install the filler cap.
See page 4--12 for the correct oil specification and

viscosity.
OPERATION 5
CHECK WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR
(where fitted)
The reservoir for the windscreen washers is located

beneath the rear of the cab on the left-hand side. The
same reservoir is utilised for both front and rear
windscreen washers.
Lift off the cap (1) and fill with washer solvent solution
up to the bend in the filler neck. In cold weather, use
a solvent with anti-freeze properties.
17
4--19
EVERY 50 HOURS
Complete the preceding operations plus the following:
OPERATION 6
CLEAN THE RADIATOR, INTERCOOLER,
OIL COOLERS, AIR CONDITIONER
CONDENSER CORES AND SCR COVER
AIR DUCTS (POWER COMMAND)
Check all cores and SCR cover air ducts, 1, Figure

18, for chaff accumulation or blockage. If any is
noted , clean as follows:
18
CAUTION
Wear eye protection and protective clothing during
the cleaning process. Clear the area of bystanders
so they are not struck by flying particles.
NOTE: Tractors with front P.T.O. will have a small

additional oil cooler fitted.
For cleaning, use compressed air or a pressure

washer not exceeding 7 bar (100 lbf/in2).
The air conditioner condenser (1) Figure 19, is

located in front of the engine intercooler and 19
transmission oil cooler. To gain access to the rear
of the condenser first release the fasteners (2) by
pulling forwards as shown, then swing the
condenser outwards.
Access to the rear of the intercooler and oil cooler is
gained by releasing the spring clip (3) and, using
the grab handle (4), pulling both coolers upwards
and outwards. The coolers will ’lock’ in the raised
position.
Direct the air or water through each core from the

back to the front. Clean the radiator first, then the
air conditioner condenser and, finally, the
driveline oil cooler. Carefully straighten any bent
fins.
To lower the intercooler and oil cooler grasp the

handle (3) and pull upwards, simultaneously
pushing in the top of the intercooler. As the 20
coolers begin to lower allow the grab handle to
drop. Re--attach the spring clip to the hook and
clamp securely.
NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oily

substances, apply a detergent solution and remove
it with a pressure washer.
4--20
OPERATION 7
CLEAN THE CAB AIR FILTERS
Air drawn into the cab by the blower fan passes

through three filters, two externally mounted, and
one recirculation filter located inside the cab.
Before servicing the filters, switch off the blower and

close the roof hatch, all windows and one door.
Forcibly close the other door. The resulting back
pressure will dislodge most of the loose dirt from the
underside of the external filters.
NOTE: In humid conditions, do not switch on the

blower prior to servicing the filter. Damp particles
drawn into the filter may be difficult to remove.
21
External Filters
To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

(1) Figure 21, at the front end of the filter housing.
Allow the housing to drop downwards and lift out the

filter element (2).
NOTE: The filters are made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
22
The filter consists of two elements, a foam pre--filter
and electrostatic main element that traps fine dust
particles.
The pre--filter may be cleaned using low pressure

compressed air, or by washing. If the filter is washed,
ensure it is completely dry before re--fitting to the
tractor.
NOTE: By cleaning the pre--filter on a regular basis,

the life of the main element will be extended.
23
4--21
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the upper surface through the element to the
underside. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm)
from the element to prevent damage to the filter
media
NOTE: The main element should not be cleaned by

washing as this will cause damage to the filter
material.
Clean all filter chambers with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Re--install the filter elements with the clean side
uppermost and re-install the covers.
Internal Filter
The internal filter is located in the panel behind the

operators seat. To remove an internal filter, loosen
the retaining screws (1) anti clockwise and remove
the filter cover.
24
Remove the filter (2) by easing it out and extracting
it from the housing with care.
NOTE: The filter (2) is made of specially treated

media with a rubber sealing strip bonded to the upper
surface. Take care not to damage the element during
removal.
Clean the elements by blowing with compressed air

not exceeding 30 lbf. in2 (2 bar). Blow the dust from
the clean surface through the element to the dirty
side. Hold the nozzle at least 12 in. (300 mm) from
the element to prevent damage to the filter media.
25
4--22
OPERATION 8
ALL GREASE FITTINGS
Oil all pivots and apply a grease gun to the lubrication

fittings, as shown in Figures 26 to 46 inclusive.
See page 4--12 for the correct grease specification.
Right and Left-hand Lift Arm
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fittings, as

shown.
26
Right and Left-hand Lift Rod
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting, as

shown.
NOTE: Tractors equipped with a hydraulically

adjusted lift rod on the right--hand side will not have
this lubrication fitting.
27
Top Link

shown.
28
4--23
2WD Axle, Outer Steering Components and

Front Hubs

shown. (Wheel removed for clarity).
NOTE: The illustration identifies the right side

lubrication fitting, this is repeated on the right side of
the axle.
29
2WD Axle, Centre Steering Components

shown.
30
Front Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
31
Rear Trunnion Pin (standard 4WD axle)

shown.
32
4--24
Front Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
33
Rear Trunnion Pin (Supersteer 4WD axle)

shown.
34
Lower Swivel Bearing (Supersteer 4WD Axle)

shown.
35
Front Trunnion Pin, Suspension Upper and
Lower Damper Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
36
4--25
Panhard Rod Pivot (suspended 4WD axle)

shown.
37
Suspension Arm (suspended 4WD axle)
Apply a grease gun to the lubrication fitting at the rear

of the suspension arm, located beneath the tractor,
in front of the transmission.
38
Drive Shaft Universal Joint (suspended and
Supersteer axles only)

shown.
NOTE: The grease fittings shown is at the rear of the

drive shaft. On some models, the shield completely
covers the drive shaft and a hole is provided for
access.
39
4WD Steering Cylinders and Track Rods

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand end of the axle is shown. There

are similar grease fittings on the left-hand steering
cylinder and track control rod.
40
4--26
4WD Hub Steering and Swivel Bearings

shown (Supersteer axle illustrated).
NOTE: The left-hand hub is shown. There are similar

grease fittings on the right-hand hub.
IMPORTANT: Tractors with steering angle sensor

have a sealed bearing on the right--hand upper
swivel and therefore do not have a grease fitting.
41
Rear Tow Hitch (auto engagement type)

shown.
42
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame)

shown.
43
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and swivel
coupling)

shown.
44
4--27
Rear Tow Hitch (with slider frame and K 80mm

ball)

shown.
45
Heavy Duty Roller Drawbar

shown.
46
Rear Axle Shaft Bearing

shown.
NOTE: The left-hand axle grease point is shown.

There are similar grease fittings on the right-hand
axle.
47
4--28
OPERATION 9
CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEEL NUTS
Check the front and rear wheel nuts for tightness

using a torque wrench (with a torque multiplier,
where necessary).
The specified torque figures are shown in the

accompanying table:
Four wheel drive -- Adjustable front wheels

Front disc to hub nuts 210 Nm (155 lbf. ft.)
Front disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
48
Manual adjust rear wheels -- Flanged axle
Disc to hub nuts 260 Nm (190 lbf. ft.)
Disc to rim nuts 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)
Bar axle
Split wedge bolts
with cast wheel centre 300 Nm (220 lbf. ft.)
with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to hub nuts

with 10 bolt hub 500 Nm (369 lbf.ft.)
Disc to rim nuts (all) 250 Nm (184 lbf. ft.)

49
OPERATION 10
CHECK TYRE PRESSURES AND TYRE
CONDITION
Check and adjust the front and rear tyre pressures.

Inspect the tread and sidewalls for damage.
Adjust the tyre pressures to suit the load being

carried. See ‘Tyre Pressures and Permissible Loads’
in Section 3.
NOTE: If the tyres are ballasted with a calcium

chloride/water solution, use a special tyre gauge as
the solution will corrode a standard-type gauge.
Check pressure with the valve stem at the bottom.
50
4--29
EVERY 100 HOURS

carry out the following checks :
OPERATION 11
COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT TENSION
(Air operated trailer brakes -- where fitted)
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt. Consult your authorised dealer.
Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
51
4--30
EVERY 300 HOURS

carry out the preceding checks plus the following:
OPERATION 12
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CHECK
NOTICE: This operation applies to the battery on
tractors operating in tropical climates. Tractors
operating in temperate climates should have the
battery electrolyte level checked every 1200 hours or
12 months.
To gain access to the battery, remove the six bolts

retaining the right hand foot step.
52
CAUTION
If the battery is being removed, disconnect the
battery leads before proceeding further. Always
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal,
first, place in a safe position and then
disconnect the positive (+) lead.
Remove the two nuts retaining the battery clamp.
Remove the battery cables.
Using the handle on the end of the battery, withdraw
the battery a sufficient amount to gain access to
the vent plugs. Unscrew and remove the six vent
plugs, 1, Figure 90, from the top of the top of the
battery. Check the electrolyte level is above the 53
top of the separator plates in each cell.
If necessary, top up with distilled or de-mineralized
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals

should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly (vaseline or similar)
NOTICE: In the event of the battery being severely

discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below
7 volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure. See your authorized dealer.
54
4--31
OPERATION 13
INSPECT POLY V--BELT
Inspect the belt over it’s entire length, checking for

chafing, cracking, cuts and general wear. If in doubt,
install a new belt.
Ensure that the belt is correctly located on the pulleys

and check that the belt tensioner is operating
correctly.
55
OPERATION 14
CHECK TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE AND
HYDRAULIC OIL LEVEL
Check the oil level with the tractor parked on a level

surface, with all cylinders extended and the engine
shut off for at least five minutes.
Check the oil level in the sight glass on the left hand
side of the rear axle housing. Ensure that the the oil
level is between the marks (2) and (3), in the sight
glass.
NOTE: For normal operation, do not fill above the

mark (2).
56
If necessary , remove the filler cap (1) and add oil, as

required.
IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,

where applicable, extend all cylinders before
checking oil levels. With some front/rear wheel
combinations, it may be necessary to raise the front
or rear of the tractor to ensure it is level before
checking the oil.
See page 4--12 for the correct oil specification.
57
4--32
OPERATION 15
ADJUST PARKING BRAKE
Block the front wheels, jack up the rear of the tractor

and support the rear wheels just clear of the ground.
Unlatch the brake pedals.
Apply the parking brake so that the 4th. notch of the

ratchet is engaged. Remove or ease back the rubber
boot, loosen the locknuts and turn the adjuster nuts
on the operating cables until both wheels start to
lock. Release the parking brake and ensure that both
wheels are free to rotate. Re--apply the parking brake
to ensure that the system operates freely. Tighten
the locknuts.
Road test, using the parking brake to stop the tractor. 58

The tractor should stop in a straight line if the cables
have been correctly adjusted.
ADJUST ELECTRONIC PARK BRAKE

(where fitted)
The electronic park brake (EPB) is available as an

option.
IMPORTANT: Any adjustment of the handbrake or

EPB must be carried out by an authorised dealer.
NOTE: In the event the EPB should fail to release at

anytime, a tool (2) is provided that can be used to
manually release the EPB (1). For further details,
refer to page 2--90.
NOTE: The tractor may be driven a short distance

with EPB engaged, however the speed will be limited
to a maximum of 2km/h (1.2MPH). 59
OPERATION 16
CHECK FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL LEVEL
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) and ensure

that the oil reaches the bottom of the opening. If
necessary, top up through the opening with clean oil
and replace the plug.
60
4--33
EVERY 600 HOURS

ENGINE OIL CHANGE
IMPORTANT: Operation 22 depicts the normal 600

hour engine oil and filter change period. However,
the oil change period may be affected by other
factors:
Cold Temperature Operation

Engines operating in temperatures below -- 12  C
(10  F) or in arduous conditions should have the oil
changed every 300 hours of operation. (The oil filter
need only be changed at the normal 600 hour service
interval).
Diesel Fuel Sulphur Content

In some countries, locally available diesel may have
a high sulphur content, in which case the oil and filter
change period should be adjusted, as follows:
 Sulphur content between 0.5 and 1.0%

-- change engine oil every 300 hours.
 Sulphur content between 1.0 and 1.3%

-- change engine oil every 150 hours.
OPERATION 17
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
Warm the engine to operating temperature. Stop the

engine, remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 61 and
catch the oil in a suitable container. Unscrew and
discard the oil filter (1).
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot engine oil.
If the engine oil is extremely hot, allow it to cool to a
moderately warm temperature before proceeding.
To change the oil and filter:
Remove the engine oil drain plugs which are located 61

at the rear of the sump on either side of the
engine. Catch the oil in a suitable container and
dispose properly.
Replace the drain plugs after the oil has drained.
4--34
Clean the oil filter area. Unscrew the oil filter (1) and
discard. Catch any residual oil and dispose of
properly.
Clean the new filter mounting surface.
Apply a thin coat of oil on the new filter sealing ring

and install the filter. Turn until the sealing ring
contacts the mounting surface, then tighten an
additional 3/4 to 1 full turn. Do not overtighten.
Remove Dipstick/Filler cap and fill with the correct

amount of fresh oil as indicated below. Ensure
the oil is of the correct grade and viscosity.
62
Start the engine and run for 3 minutes at idle speed

then stop the engine.
Check the drain plugs and oil filter areas for leaks.
Wait 5 minutes to allow the oil to drain into the

crankcase, then check the oil level on the
dipstick. The oil level should fall between the
‘MIN’ and ‘MAX’ on the dipstick. Add more oil as
required.
NOTE: Do not fill above the ‘MAX’ indicator on the

dipstick. Excess oil will burn off, creating smoke and
give a false impression of oil consumption. Do not
operate the engine with the oil level below the lower 63
notch.
Re--install the dipstick/filler cap.
Oil Capacity (including filter):
All models 15.0 litres

(3.96 U.S gals.)
4--35
OPERATION 18
CHANGE CHARGE PUMP OIL FILTER
All the filters are installed under the right-hand side

of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge pump filter (1)
which is a disposable type.
IMPORTANT: The main filter cartridge (3) as shown

in Figure 64, should be changed at the 1200 hours
service period and is covered in Operation 27.
Before changing the charge filter (1), clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
64
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter
mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of
the new filter and install on the tractor.
Screw up until the faces just meet, then tighten a

further 3/4 of a turn. Do not overtighten.
OPERATION 19
CHANGE THE ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER
ELEMENT
Remove the outer element (1) as described in

Operation 1 and discard it.

damp lint--free cloth on a probe, taking care not to
damage the inner element. Install a new outer
element.
NOTICE: Replace the outer element only when the

restriction indicator symbol appears or at the
recommended service intervals. Cleaning of the
filter is not recommended.
65
4--36
OPERATION 20
CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKE CONNECTIONS
Working from both sides of the engine, check all

intake system connection clamps for tightness.
From the left--hand side of the engine, check the air

cleaner intake connections at points (1) and (3) and
the intake pipe support bracket bolts at (2). Do not
overtighten.
66
From the right--hand side of the engine, check the
intercooler to inlet manifold connections at points (4)
and (2). Do not overtighten.
It is essential that the clean air side of the filtration

system is sealing correctly at the connections (1) and
(3).
67
Also on the right--hand side of the engine, check the
exhaust aspirator connections at points (1) and (2)
for proper sealing and the clamps for tightness.
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine

hoses, to check the clamp for tightness it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner.
Use a pair of pliers to carefully pull off the alloy cover,
this will expose a conventional screw head. Turn
clockwise to tighten.
68
4--37
OPERATION 21
TRANSMISSION OIL COOLER PIPE QUICK
RELEASE COUPLINGS (where fitted)
The transmission oil cooler delivery and return pipes,

below and behind the cooler radiator have quick
release connections fitted. Make sure these are
sealed correctly and there are no signs of oil leaks.
69
Two more quick release connectors can be found in

the transmission oil cooler delivery and return pipes
beside the engine block. Make sure these are sealed
correctly and there are no signs of oil leaks.
70
4--38
OPERATION 22
CHANGE FUEL PRE--FILTER AND FUEL FILTER
ELEMENTS
FUEL PRE--FILTER
IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnecting

any part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly clean
the area to be worked on to prevent contamination.
The primary and secondary fuel filters are both of the

disposable type. The primary filter incorporates a
water drain on the base of the filter.
Unscrew and remove the drain tap (1) at the base of

the primary filter/sedimenter. Allow the fuel to
drain out. Catch the fuel in a suitable container
and dispose of properly
NOTE: To allow removal of the drain tap it may be 71

necessary to remove the sensor wire (2).
NOTE: See also page 4--57 Fuel System Pre--Filter

and Water Trap.
Unscrew and remove the filter from the filter head

and dispose of properly.
Install a new filter to the head assembly.
Before installing the new filter lightly coat the filter

gasket with oil.
Rotate the filter until the filter gasket is touching the

filter head. Then give the filter a further 3/4 turn
to tighten to correct torque (15Nm). Do not
overtighten.
Lubricate the contact surface of the water drain tap

then replace on the filter. Rotate the tap until it
contacts the filter then rotate a further quarter
turn. Do not overtighten.
Remove and replace the secondary fuel filter in the

same manner.
After replacing the fuel filters it will be necessary to

prime the fuel system before starting the engine. See
Operation 40, page 4--58.
4--39
OPERATION 23
FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LUBRICATION
Front Axle
Remove the combined level/filler plug (1) Figure 72

and ensure that the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. If necessary, top up through the opening
with clean oil and replace the plug.
72
Front Hub
Position a front wheel with the combined level/filler

plug (1) at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
Remove the level/filler plug and ensure that the oil

reaches the bottom of the opening. If necessary, top
up through the opening with clean oil until oil just
overflows from the opening. Re-install the plug.
Repeat on the other front wheel.

73
4--40
OPERATION 24
CHANGE FRONT P.T.O. GEARBOX OIL
Park the tractor on level ground and engage the park

brake.
Place a suitable container below the gearbox and

remove the level plug (1) and drain plugs (3).
Allow the oil to completely drain into the container
then replace the drain plugs. Dispose of oil
properly.
Remove the snap ring (2) and loosen the M8 bolt (4)
on the filter cover. Withdraw the cover and filter
from the P.T.O. gearbox and clean using a
suitable solvent. Dry the filter and refit to the
gearbox ensuring the cover seal is undamaged.
74
Refill the gearbox through the combined level/filler
plug until the oil reaches the bottom of the
opening. Start the tractor and run the P.T.O. for
a short period, stop the engine and re--check the
oil level.

OPERATION 25
CLEAN IN--LINE DEF / AdBlue FILTER
It is recommended that cleaning of the DEF / Adblue

inline filter be performed by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Figure 75 shown for reference with SCR

Dosing unit removed from machine.
75
4--41
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (whichever occurs first)

OPERATION 26
CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERS
External Filters
To remove the external filter, loosen the thumbscrew

at the front end of the filter housing. Allow the housing
to drop downwards and lift out the filter element (2).
Dispose of the filter elements properly.
The filter consists of two elements, a foam pre--filter

and electrostatic main element that traps fine dust
particles. Clean both filter chambers with a damp,
lint--free cloth.
Install new filter elements. A flow direction arrow is

moulded into the side of the filter. Install the filters 76
with the arrow pointing upwards. Re--install the
covers.
NOTE: Take care not to damage the element during

installation.
Internal Filter
The internal filter is located in the panel behind the

operators seat. To remove the internal filter turn
captive screws (1) until the cover is loose.
Remove the filter cover and the filter element (2)

Figure 78. Dispose of the filter element properly.
Clean the filter chamber with a damp lint--free cloth.
77
Install the new filter element making sure that the
arrow on the filter points to the rear of the tractor.
Re--install the filter cover.
78
4--42
OPERATION 27
CHANGE MAIN FILTER CARTRIDGE AND
CHARGE PUMP FILTER
All the filters are installed under the right-hand side

of the cab floor.
There are two filters, the main filter (3) which has a
replaceable cartridge, and the charge pump filter (1)
which is a disposable type. The charge pump filter (1)
should be replaced every 600 hours and is also
covered in Operation 18.
Before changing the charge filter (1), clean the area

around the mounting plate and filter, then unscrew
and discard safely.
Clean the inlet channel and the face of the filter

mounting. Smear clean oil around the rubber seal of 79
the new filter and install by screwing up until the faces
just meet, then tighten a further 3/4 of a turn. Do not
overtighten.
Access to the main filter cartridge (3) in Figure 79,

is gained by first removing the three 19mm bolts
retaining the guard plate below the filter as shown in
Fig 80.
Before changing the main filter cartridge (3) in Figure

81, first release the air bleed valve (2) by unscrewing
fully. This will allow air into the filter so that most of
the oil can drain back into the hydraulic system.
80
Wait a few moments and then remove the 19mm plug

(5) from the filter casing and allow the oil to drain out.
Using a 41mm socket or ring spanner, remove the
filter support plate by turning approximately 45 to
the left. Both plate and filter can now be removed
from the tractor.
Ensure the support plate is clean before installing the

new cartridge, lightly oil the sealing ring and refit the
assembly to the tractor. Ensure the plate locks into
place and the lug (4) aligns correctly with the arrow
on the filter casing.
81
4--43
OPERATION 28
CHANGE TRANSMISSION / REAR AXLE /
HYDRAULIC OIL
Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operate

the hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park the
tractor on level ground, lower the 3-point hitch and
stop the engine. Apply the parking brake and block
wheels on both sides.
WARNING
Be very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oil is
extremely hot, allow it to cool to a moderately warm
temperature before proceeding.
There are two drain plugs for the oil reservoir, one
below the transmission and one below the rear axle.
To ensure the reservoir is completely drained, both 82
drain plugs should be removed using a hexagon key.
To change the oil:

Remove the drain plugs (1) Figure 82 and
completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly.
Re-install both drain plugs (1) after the oil has

drained.
IMPORTANT: Perform Operation 27 (change
transmission rear axle and hydraulic oil filters) before
refilling with oil.
Remove the filler plug cap (1) Figure 83 and refill with
new oil. 83
Run the engine and operate the hydraulic system.

Fully extend all of the cylinders.
Stop the engine and wait five minutes while checking

the system for leaks.
Check the oil level by means of the sight glass. Add

oil as required until the oil level is between the
marks (2) and (3).
NOTE: For normal operation, do not fill above the

max mark (2).
Oil Capacity:
Power Command: 82.0 litres (21.6 U.S. gal.)
See page 4--12 for the correct oil specification. 84
4--44
OPERATION 29
CHANGE 4WD DIFFERENTIAL OIL

brake.
To change the oil:
Remove the drain plug (1) Figure 85 and completely

drain all oil into a suitable container. Dispose of
the oil properly.
Re-install the drain plug. Remove the level/filler plug

(1) Figure 86.
Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of the

level/filler plug hole. Re-install level/filler plug. 85
Oil Capacity:
All models 11 litres

(11.6 U.S. qts.)
86
4--45
OPERATION 30
CHANGE 4WD PLANETARY HUB OIL

brake.
To change the oil:
Position the wheel so the filler/drain/level plug (1) is

at the lowest point. Remove the plug and
completely drain all oil into a suitable container.
Dispose of the oil properly.
Rotate the wheel so that the combined level/filler

plug (1) is at the 3 o’clock position, as shown.
Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches the bottom 87
of the level/filler plug hole (3). Install the plug.
Repeat the process on the other hub.
Oil Capacity (each hub):
W/out brakes 2.3 litres

(2.4 U.S. qts.)
With brakes 3.8 litres
(4.0 U.S. qts.)
OPERATION 31
BATTERY ELECTROLYTE CHECK AND
REMOVAL PROCEDURE
Checking the Electrolyte
NOTICE: This operation applies only to batteries on
tractors operating in temperate climates. Tractors
operating in tropical climates should have the battery
electrolyte level checked every 300 hours. See
Operation 12.
To gain access to the battery, remove the six bolts

retaining the right hand foot step.
88
4--46
CAUTION
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal,
Using the handle on the end of the battery, withdraw
the battery a sufficient amount to gain access to
the vent plugs. Unscrew and remove the six vent
plugs, 1, Figure 90, from the top of the top of the
battery. Check the electrolyte level is above the 89
top of the separator plates in each cell.
If necessary top up with distilled or de-mineralized
water until the level is correct. Do not overfill. Never
use tap water or water from a rain barrel or other
source.
To prevent the formation of corrosion the terminals

should be cleaned and lightly coated with petroleum
jelly (Vaseline or similar).
NOTICE: In the event of the battery being severely

discharged, such that the terminal voltage is below
7 volts, recovery will require a special charging
procedure. See your authorized dealer.
90
4--47
Battery Removal
CAUTION
disconnect the lead from the negative terminal
Using the handle on the end of the battery, carefully
withdraw the battery, ensure the battery is
supported and using the other handle carefully
lift and remove the battery from the carrier. 91
Tractor batteries are very heavy, ensure the

battery is safely supported during the removal
process.
To refit the battery, reverse the above procedure.

Ensure battery leads and cables are positioned so
they do not become trapped or chafe on a sharp
edges.
NOTICE: When installing the battery leads, always

connect the Positive lead before the Negative.
Refit the battery cover.
4--48
EVERY 1200 HOURS OR 2 YEARS (whichever occurs first)

OPERATION 32
COOLING SYSTEM
During manufacture, the engine cooling system is

filled with a high quality antifreeze and water solution.
The antifreeze contains a chemical inhibitor. This
inhibitor increases and extends the protection
offered by conventional antifreezes.
The inhibitor will:

 Increase rust prevention.
 Reduce scale formation.
 Minimise cylinder wall erosion (pitting).
 Reduce foaming of the coolant.
The chemical inhibitor must be replenished, at

intervals, to maintain the optimum protection level.
This protection is provided by draining and flushing
the system and refilling with a 50% solution of Ambra
Agriflu antifreeze or, where this antifreeze is not
available, with a measured dosage of chemical
inhibitor. See the following text.
Draining and Refilling the Cooling System
WARNING
The cooling system operates under pressure which
is controlled by the radiator pressure cap (1)
Figure 92. It is dangerous to remove the pressure 92
cap while the system is hot. When cool, use a thick
cloth and turn the cap slowly to the first stop and allow
the pressure to escape before fully removing the cap.
Coolant should be kept off the skin. Adhere to the
precautions outlined on the antifreeze and inhibitor
containers, where used. Never remove the cap from
the top of the radiator unless the expansion tank
pressure cap (1) Figure 93 has first been removed.
When cold the coolant level in the recovery tank (2)

should be above the bottom line (3).
IMPORTANT: It is essential that an approved

pressure cap is used. If the cap is mislaid or
damaged, obtain a replacement from your dealer. 93
4--49
Turn the heater control knob to the maximum heat

position (fully clockwise).
94
Remove the recovery tank cap and radiator cap. This
will also increase the drainage rate.
Disconnect the radiator lower hose and drain all the

coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the
coolant properly.
NOTE: A special hose clamp is used on the engine

coolant hoses, to loosen the clamp it will be
necessary to remove the alloy cap from the head of
the screw tensioner. Using a pair of pliers, carefully
pull off the alloy cover, this will expose a conventional
screw head. Turn anti--clockwise to loosen.
95
Remove the coolant drain plug (1) from the
right--hand side of the engine block. Drain all the
coolant into a suitable container. Dispose of the
coolant properly. It may be necessary to remove
the guard to gain access to the hose.
Flush the system with a commercial cooling system

cleaner. Follow the instructions supplied with the
cleaner. Drain the cleaner and let the engine
cool.
IMPORTANT: Never put cold coolant in a hot

engine. The difference in temperature could cause
the the block or head to crack.
96
4--50
Re--install the radiator lower hose. Using Plain water
Fill the system with clean water and run the engine If you reside in a country where antifreeze is not
for 10 minutes, then drain all the water. Allow the available, use clean water premixed with 5%
engine to cool. chemical inhibitor. The inhibitor is available from your
authorised dealer and is supplied in 16 fl. oz. (473 ml)
Fill the system with a blend of antifreeze and clean bottles, the side of the bottle being marked in 1 fl.oz.
soft water. Add coolant slowly through the increments.
radiator filler neck until the coolant reaches the
bottom of the filler neck.
Mix three complete bottles of inhibitor with 28.5 litres
(7.5 U.S. gal.) of clean water. This will provide more
Replace the radiator cap and top up the system
coolant mixture than is actually required. The excess
through the coolant recovery bottle, replace the
coolant should be kept in a specially marked
cap.
container and used for top up purposes.
NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill the
radiator as slowly as possible thereby allowing any WARNING
air pockets to disperse. Inhibitor solution is irritating to eyes and skin . It
contains buffered potassium hydroxide.
The coolant to be used is dependent upon local  Avoid contact with eyes or prolonged or
availability. See the following text: repeated skin contact.
Using Ambra Agriflu antifreeze (NH900 A)  Wear protective eyewear when using.
 In case of contact with eyes, flush with water for
Use a solution of 50% clean water and 50% 15 minutes and obtain medical attention.
antifreeze. The inhibitor already in this antifreeze is
sufficient to protect your engine for a further 1200  Wash skin with soap and water after use.
hours or two years, whichever occurs first.
 Keep out of reach of children.
See page 4--12 for coolant specifications.
4--51
After Refilling the System -- All Coolant

Solutions
Inspect cooling system hoses and connections for

leaks.
Fill the coolant recovery tank to the cold fill mark (1).
Start the engine and run it until normal operating

temperature is reached.
NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant is

pumped around the system.
97
Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.
Remove the radiator cap (1) and add coolant to the

radiator to bring the level to the bottom of the filler
neck. Re--install the radiator cap. Add coolant to
the recovery tank as required to bring the level up
to the cold mark (1) Figure 97 then replace the
cap.
NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operated

immediately following this coolant change, run the
engine for one hour to ensure that the antifreeze
and/or chemical inhibitor is dispersed throughout the
cooling system. Allow the engine to cool and make
a final check to ensure that the coolant level is 98
satisfactory. Turn on the heater and blower fan to
ensure the cab heater is operating correctly and
there are no air locks in the system.
Clean Water Specification: Chemical Inhibitor

Total Hardness 300 parts per million There are three part numbers for the inhibitor. The
Chlorides 100 parts per million content of each bottle is identical, only the
Sulphates 100 parts per million instructions on the label differ, by language:
Part No. Languages on Label
Antifreeze:
Ambra Agriflu Anti--Freeze (NH 900A) is available 83958743 English, French, Spanish,
from your authorised dealer in the following Portuguese and Greek
quantities.
83958744 English, French, German,
Part No. 2715 1502 (4x5 litre) Italian and Dutch
2715 1900 (20 litre)
2715 1100 (200 litre) 83958745 English, Danish, Norwegian,
Finnish and Swedish
Coolant Capacity
All models 26.0 litres (6.9 U.S. gal.)
4--52
OPERATION 33
CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER
ELEMENT
The air cleaner is accessible from the right--hand

side of the engine
Unlatch the three retaining clips (1) Fig. 99, and lift
off the air cleaner assembly cover.
99
Remove the outer element (1) Fig. 100 from the air
cleaner assembly by gently twisting the end of
the filter clockwise to disengage the seal. Then
pull the filter straight out of the housing ,not at an
angle, ensuring the inner element remains in
place.
NOTE: Examine the inside of the outer element. If

dust is present, the outer element is defective and
must be replaced.
100
Pull the inner element straight out of the housing and

dispose of properly.

damp lint--free cloth.
Install a new inner element and a new outer element

(if required). Ensure both elements are correctly
seated before replacing the housing cover.
IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filter

element properly could result in engine damage.
Therefore it is recommended that the element be
installed by an authorised dealer.
101
4--53
OPERATION 34
CHECK VALVE TAPPET CLEARANCE
It is recommended the valve tappet clearance be

checked and adjusted by your authorised dealer as
it entails the use of special tools to rotate the engine
crankshaft to the correct position before the valve
lash can be checked.
OPERATION 35
CHANGE ENGINE BREATHER FILTER
With the engine cold, loosen the retaining clamp and

ease the ventilation tube from the valve rocker cover.
Undo the retaining nuts and remove the valve cover.
Remove the breather pipe elbow by turning 1/4 turn

anti--clockwise and withdrawing from the valve
cover. Loosen and remove the thumb screw (1) to
release the filter assembly from inside the valve
cover.
NOTE: Should severe oil staining appear around the

pressure regulator (2), it would indicate the breather
filter requires replacing.
102
Remove the 3 screws (2) holding the pressure

regulator (1) and extract both regulator and filter (3)
from the valve cover.
Thoroughly clean the valve cover before fitting the

new regulator, filter and breather pipe. Tighten the
regulator retaining screws to 5 Nm (3.6 lbf. ft.).
Reassemble the valve cover on the engine using a

new gasket and tighten the retaining nuts to 25 Nm
(18.4 lbf. ft.).
103
4--54
OPERATION 36
CHANGE AIR BRAKE DRIER RESERVOIR
Removing the protective guard
A protective guard (1) now fitted over the drier

reservoir (3) will have to be released before
removing the drier reservoir. The guard is
retained by a clamp around the axle secured with
two bolts. Loosen the bolts (2) and position the
the guard clear of the drier reservoir.
104
Removing the Drier Reservoir
Before attempting to change the drier reservoir (1),

thoroughly clean the area around the reservoir to
prevent debris from entering the air braking system.
Exhaust all air pressure in the system by opening the

drain tap on the main air tank/s located in front of
the rear axle.
Using a filter release tool, unscrew and remove the

drier reservoir. Dispose of properly according to
local regulations.
105
Installing a New Drier Reservoir
Clean the seal flange on the drier body and the

threaded pin, check for damage to the pin and
the seal contact surface of the flange.
Lightly grease the sealing ring on the reservoir and

the threaded pin on the drier body.
Screw the reservoir onto the drier body until the seal
touches the contact surface of the flange.
Tighten a further half--turn by hand. DO NOT
overtighten.
Pressurise the reservoir and check for leaks. If 106

further tightening is necessary, depressurise the
system before tightening.
Re--pressurise the air braking system and check

again for leaks.
4--55
EVERY 3600 HOURS OR 2 YEARS carry

out the following:
OPERATION 37
CHANGE DEF / AdBlue FILTER
It is recommended that replacement of the DEF /

Adblue filter be performed by your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Figure 107 shown for reference with SCR

Dosing unit removed from machine.
107
EVERY 3 YEARS carry out the following:
OPERATION 38
SERVICE THE AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
After 3 seasons, the performance of the air

conditioner may to be reduced. At this time it is
recommended to have the receiver/drier changed
(1), and the complete system checked by your
authorised dealer using specialised equipment.
WARNING
The refrigerant used in the air conditioner system
has a boiling point of --12  C (10  F).
 Never expose any part of the air conditioner
system to a direct flame or excessive heat
because of the risk of fire or explosion.
 Never disconnect or disassemble any part of the 108
air conditioner system. escaping refrigerant will
cause frostbite. Allowing refrigerant to escape
into the atmosphere is illegal in many countries.
 If refrigerant should contact the skin, use the
same treatment as for frostbite. Warm the area
with your hand or lukewarm water at 32 -- 38  C
(90 --100  F). Cover the area loosely with a
bandage to protect the affected area and to
prevent infection. Consult a doctor immediately.
 If refrigerant should contact the eyes, wash the
eyes immediately with cold water for at least 5
minutes. consult a doctor immediately.
4--56
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
(to be performed as and when required)
OPERATION 39
FUEL SYSTEM PRE--FILTER AND WATER
TRAP
The fuel system on your tractor is protected by a
pre--filter and water trap. If water appears in the
glass bowl of the pre--filter (1), stop the engine and
clean out the filter bowl. To remove the bowl, loosen
the knurled clamp screw (2), and swing the retaining
clip out of the way.
With the retaining clip out of the way, the glass bowl
and filter can be removed by pulling downwards.
Empty the contents of the bowl into a suitable
container and dispose of properly.
Clean the glass bowl and wash the filter gauze in

clean fuel to remove the contaminants. Check the
sealing ring in the filter head for damage and replace 109
if necessary. Refit the filter into the glass bowl and
re--attach the assembly to the filter head ensuring the
raised boss on the filter is correctly located in the
housing.
Re--tighten the knurled clamp screw.
After this operation, should it be necessary to prime

the system see Operation 40.
4--57
OPERATION 40
BLEEDING THE FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
To Bleed the Fuel System
It may be necessary after carrying out maintenance

work on the fuel injection system or, after running out
of fuel, to purge the system of air to allow the engine
to start.
If the engine fails to start after several turns, after one

of the above situations has occurred, bleed the
system using the following procedure:
Ensure the tractor has adequate fuel and the battery

is fully charged.
Unscrew the primer pump knob and proceed to pump

until a high resistance is felt when pushing the
pump downwards.
Slowly push the plunger down against the resistance

until the pump knob can be screwed fully home
into the filter head.
The fuel injectors and fuel injection pump are of the

self bleed type and therefore any air remaining in the
system will be purged as the engine is cranked to
start.
110
4--58
OPERATION 41
TRANSMISSION CLUTCH CALIBRATION
Power Command Transmission
The Power Command transmission has a number of

clutch packs that may require periodic calibration to
compensate for wear. Calibration of the clutches
should be performed at the 50 Hour Service and
thereafter only if a deterioration in gear shift quality
is noted.
NOTE: During the calibration procedure the

electronic management system detects precisely the
point at which the clutches start to engage. The
engagement is detected by a reduction in engine
speed. During calibration it is essential that no action
is taken to to cause the engine speed to vary. Be sure
that the air conditioner and all electrical equipment is
111
switched off.
Do not operate the steering wheel, footbrakes, PTO
or any hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot
throttle.
Preparing the Tractor for Calibration Error Codes for Power Command
Transmission
NOTE: Clutch calibration should be carried out when
the transmission oil temperatures are between: Code Meaning
20 C (68 F) and 50 C ( 122 F).
U16 Engine speed reduced too early during clutch
calibration.
Park the tractor on level ground, away from
obstacles (in case of unexpected tractor movement). U17 Operator seat switch not depressed.
U19 Oil temperature below 10 C (50 F).
Place the transmission shuttle lever in neutral and U20 Handbrake not applied.
apply the parking brake. Switch off all electrical U21 Engine RPM below 1100.
equipment and air conditioning. Lower hydraulic
equipment to the ground, place all remote levers in U22 Engine RPM above 1300.
neutral and stop the engine. U23 Shuttle lever not in forward drive position.
U26 Clutch pedal not fully released.
With the operator in the seat, depress and hold down
U31 Tractor wheel movement detected.
the clutch pedal. With the key start in the off position
depress and hold both transmission upshift and U36 Clutch calibration value exceeded.
downshift buttons, Figure 111. Start the engine and U55 PTO engaged.
release the buttons to initiate the calibration mode.
U58 PTO sensor open circuit.
Carefully release the clutch pedal.
U59 PTO sensor short circuit.
NOTE: In ’automatic calibration sequence’ the seat U75 Clutch fill calibration value too high.
switch is constantly monitored, if the operator leaves U76 Clutch fill calibration value too low.
the seat the sequence will be stopped.
U77 Damper calibration value too high.
U78 Damper calibration value too low.
4--59
The transmission oil temperature is now displayed in

the upper Central Display and will be shown in
degrees centigrade. Depress the upshift button
twice and If the temperature is between 10C and
60C, ’CL’ will be displayed.
If ‘U19’ is displayed calibration will not be possible

and the oil will have to be warmed before proceeding.
If the temperature is too high, above 105C, ‘‘CH” will

be displayed.
With ’CL’ shown in the display, depress the upshift

control again and a calibration value will appear in the 112
display.
Depress the upshift button again and the display will

change to ’Dt’.
Depress the clutch pedal and move the shuttle lever

into forward drive. Release the clutch pedal slowly.
Momentarily depress the auto switch, the engine

speed will increase to 1200 r.p.m. and the calibration
sequence will start. The clutches will now calibrate
one by one automatically. A sequence of letters and
numbers will appear in the display as each clutch is
calbrated.
NOTE: On tractors without the Auto Shift feature,

depress the clock minute button to initiate the
calibration procedure.
IMPORTANT: Do not operate the steering wheel,

footbrakes, PTO or any hydraulic lever or move the
hand or foot throttle. 113
If an error occurs while in auto mode the sequence

is stopped and the relevant code displayed. Press
the auto function push button or the upshift/downshift
button to clear the error.
4--60
When the clutch calibration sequence is complete,

’End’ will appear in the Central Display and the
engine speed will reduce to idle.
Key off the engine and wait for 10 seconds to allow

the calibration to be stored in the memory. The
tractor is now ready for normal operation.
CAUTION
The tractor is drivable even if calibration has not been
completed. Pay attention in this condition as the
tractor could be jerky or sluggish. Always pull away
using the clutch pedal very carefully.
114
OPERATION 42
CHECK BRAKE PEDAL LATCHING/UNLATCHING
CAUTION
Owners should be aware of local regulations
concerning the braking system. Regularly maintain
the brakes to ensure compliance with the law and
ensure your safety. If in doubt, contact your dealer.
The hydraulically actuated brakes require no

adjustment. However, if any part of the brake pedal
linkage or the master cylinder assembly is replaced
or if the pedal latch will not readily engage the hole
in the right--hand pedal shank, adjust the pedal as
follows:
115
Adjust the clevis by loosening the locknut . The

distance from the bulkhead to the centre of the clevis
hole should be 147mm (5.7 in.). Adjust both pedals
and ensure pedal latch engages properly.
147
116
4--61
OPERATION 43
AUTOMATIC PICK--UP HITCH ADJUSTMENT
Lift Rod Adjustment
Loosen the locknuts (3) and turn the adjuster (2) on

each lift rod equally. Ensure that both hitch lift arms
are supporting the hitch equally at the start of raise.
Check the hitch latches fully support the hitch when

the hitch is in the working position. Latch and unlatch
the hitch to ensure smooth operation.
When fully raised ensure that the hydraulic system

relief valve does not blow or that the hitch lift rods are
not under tension. Both these symptoms indicate
that the hitch lift rods are too short. 117
Tighten the locknuts to 100 Nm (72 lbf. ft.).
NOTE: On hydraulically extending hitches (as

shown) ensure the drawbar is fully retracted before
carrying out any adjustment procedures.
With the hitch latched in the raised position, adjust

the operating cable by means of the adjuster nuts (1)
to remove all slack from the inner cable.
OPERATION 44
CHECK REMOTE CONTROL VALVE DRAIN
BOTTLES
Every time a hydraulic hose is connected or

disconnected, a small amount of oil is discharged
from the remote control valve coupler. Drain bottles
are located below each remote control valve to catch
the discharged oil.
Visually check the oil level in the bottles. If necessary,

unclip the bottle (2) by releasing the spring catch (1),
remove the cap and empty the oil into a suitable
container. Re-install the bottle, ensuring it is correctly
seated below the valve.
118
4--62
OPERATION 45
CAB SUSPENSION ADJUSTMENT
(where fitted)
On tractors with a suspended cab the pre--load on

the suspension unit (1) Figure 119, may be adjusted
to suit heavier or lighter weights carried in the cab.
NOTE: Depending on track setting, the tractor rear

wheel may need to be removed for easy access to
the cab suspension adjuster.
Suspension Setting
The pre--load adjuster is used to set the cab

suspension so it operates in the optimum comfort
zone for normal driving conditions. Position II
provides the ideal setting for a 68kg (150 lbs.)
operator plus additional equipment weighing 22kg 119
(48 lbs.) carried in the cab.
NOTE: To provide optimum suspension

performance, the weight of any heavy items carried
in the cab (tow chains, linkages, toolboxes etc.) must
always be taken into consideration when adjusting
the suspension.
The cab suspension adjustment has five pre--load

settings which can be ’clicked’ into position by
rotating the upper pre--load adjuster. Each setting is
identified by vertical markings (2) on the lower collar.
When adjusted correctly, the arrow on the upper
collar (1) will align with the vertical markings on the
lower collar.
Select position I for operators having a lighter body

weight than 68kg (150 lbs.), positions III and IIII are
used for operators with a heavier body weight. With
two people in the cab, positions IIII and IIIII should be
used.
120
IMPORTANT: For correct suspension operation it is
vital that both suspension units are adjusted to the
same setting. An imbalance in adjustment will cause
unnecessary wear on the suspension units.
A ’C’ spanner is included in the tractor tool kit for

adjusting the cab suspension. Engage the ’C’
spanner in the slot of the pre--load adjuster and rotate
to the desired position.
NOTE: Use only the special tool provided to carry out

any pre--load adjustment, using alternative
equipment may damage the adjuster components.
4--63
OPERATION 46
HEADLIGHT AND WORKLAMP ADJUSTMENT
Headlights
To avoid blinding on coming drivers, adjust the angle

of the headlight beams.
Each headlight is adjusted by rotating the two

adjusters (1) clockwise or anti--clockwise according
to the amount of correction required.
NOTE: The hood mounted worklamps are

non--adjustable.
121
Worklamps
Dependant upon model and specification, adjustable

worklamps may be installed on the front and rear of
of the cab roof, low down at the front of the cab or on
the rear fenders. Non--adjustable worklamps are
mounted on the front of the hood , adjacent to the
headlights.
Cab roof mounted work lamps are fully adjustable by

moving the light unit on its fixing axis, downwards,
upwards or sideways.
122
The rear cab roof mounted worklamps are fully
adjustable by moving the light unit on its fixing axis
(1) downwards, upwards or sideways.
123
4--64
OPERATION 47
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights and Hood--mounted Worklamps
IMPORTANT: All headlights and worklamps have

halogen bulbs. Never touch a halogen bulb with the
fingers. Natural moisture in the skin may cause the
bulb to fail prematurely when switched on. Always
use a clean cloth or tissue when handling halogen
bulbs.
The headlights and two non--adjustable worklamps

are mounted in a moulded unit attached to the front
hood assembly. All bulbs are accessible from the
rear of the lamp unit inside the hood area.
124
To remove bulb from front headlight assembly, raise

hood as previously described in this section. Press
the retaining clip, 1, to unhinge the rear part of the
headlight. Detach the retaining spring and remove
the bulb, 2.
To remove the bulb from the integral work lamp

simply rotate the bulb holder assembly, 2,
counter-clockwise approximately 20 degrees. The
bulb can then be removed by pressing in the bulb and
then releasing it.
125
Adjustable Worklamps
Grabrail and Cab Mounted Work Lamps

To replace the bulbs in the work lamps, remove the
two retaining screws, 1. Pull out the lens housing
from the main lamp housing.
126
4--65
Squeeze together the ends of the wire retaining clip,

1, and pull the bulb holder from the assembly.
Remove the bulb making sure to use a clean cloth or
tissue.
127
Turn/Position Lights
To gain access to the rear turn and position/brake

lamp bulbs remove the four retaining screws and
take off the lens. To remove the bulbs (1) rotate
counter--clockwise and extract from the holder.
NOTE: To gain access to the bulbs, slide out the

dividing reflector between the upper and lower
lamps.
128
The front turn/position lamps are located on the
grabrails. Remove the two retaining screws.
Remove the lens. To remove the turn indicator bulb
(2) or the position bulb (3) rotate counter clockwise.
When re--fitting the lens ensure the sealing rubber (1)
is fully seated in the lamp housing.
129
4--66
Puddle Lights
Remove the two retaining screws. Remove the lens

housing assembly (1) from the cab roof. Disconnect
the harness connector and remove the light
assembly. To remove the bulb housing (3) rotate the
harness connector counter clockwise. To remove the
bulb (2) rotate counter clockwise.
130
Rocker Switch Bulbs
Rocker switch assemblies are retained by a sprung

tag (1) at either end. Use a small screwdriver to pry
one end of the rocker switch from its housing and
withdraw the switch assembly.
Various rocker switches are internally illuminated.
Should the light fail the rocker switch assembly

should be replaced.
131
Rear Number Plate Lights
The light unit is retained by spring clips (1) one

located each side. It can easily be removed by
gripping the unit firmly and pulling assembly out from
its housing. The bulb housing (2) can then be
removed by rotating it counter clockwise giving
access to the bulb which can also be removed by
rotating it counter clockwise.
132
4--67
Interior Light
To replace the bulb the lens is clipped in each side of

its housing. It can be eased out giving access to the
bulb.
To change the bulb turn it anti clockwise to remove.

When removing the bulb form the holder, make sure
to use a clean cloth or a tissue.
133
OPERATION 48
FUSES AND RELAYS
The fuse box is located behind a panel on the top of

the right --hand control console.
To check or change fuses, remove the two screws

securing the panel to the console. The fuses and
relays are shown diagrammatically in Figures 138
and 139. In addition to the main fuses there are
additional ‘maxi’ fuses which are provided to protect
the main fuses and electrical circuit.
There is provision for 60 fuses although they may not

all be fitted to your tractor. In addition, certain items
of equipment may not be installed on your tractor.
However, the fuses for these features are still fitted 134
and may be used as spares.
IMPORTANT: Do not replace a blown fuse with

another of a different rating.
The fuses are numbered and colour--coded. Their

position and rating are shown in the chart on the next
page.
More relays are located behind the front of the

right--hand control console, Figure 135.
135
4--68
Mega and Power Fuses
In addition to the fuses in the internal fuse box, there

are also extra fuses located on the starter motor and/
or battery tray. A 250A (PF1) ’MEGA’ fuse (1)
protects the main electrical system, a 30A (PF2) fuse
(2) protects the cab electronics and a 30A (PF9) fuse
(3) protects the front implement socket.
The 10A fuse, F70 (A), protects the keep-- alive

memory (K.A.M.) circuit. This circuit provides power
for electronic memory functions when the battery
power isolator is used.
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No. 136
F70 10A Keep Alive Memory (K.A.M.)
PF1 250A Power B+ Main Supply
PF2 30A Power B+ Electronic Supply
PF9 30A Power B+ Front Implement
Socket
To access the fuses, remove the cover (2) from the

starter motor. Loosen and remove the 13 mm nut (1)
then lift the cover from the starter motor.
After replacing a fuse ensure the cover and nut are
replaced to prevent a build up of dust or debris
around the fuses.
137
4--69
Relay Descriptions 1--13
Relay Function K006 Blower Motor

K001 Front Windscreen Wiper Module K007 Dipped Beam Headlamps
K002 Rear Window Wiper Module K008 Stoplamps
K003 Starter K009 Main Beam Headlamps
K004 Side/Tail Lights and Illumination Ignition K010 Hydraulic Trailer Brake Supply
Relay
K011 Electronic park brake
K005 Electronic Engine ECU Ign K012 Pneumatic Trailer Brake
138
4--70
Relay Descriptions 14--19 26 15 Main Beam Headlamps

27 30 Front Worklamps (Hood)
Relay Function 28 20 Worklamp Roof Rear
K015 Worklamp hold 29 30 Worklamp Roof Front + Grabrail
K016 Work lamp C pillar 30 15 Worklamps C--Pillar
K017 Power supply ignition 31 15 Beacon ECU
K018 Battery isolator 32 15 Flasher Unit
K019 Air conditioning 33 25 Diagnostic Connector 1 + 2
K020 Top link control 34 10 Instrument Cluster & Handbrake
switch
Fuses general
35 10 EDC Mem + SCM + ACM
No. Amps Protected Components 36 15 ??
1 10 Interior and puddle lights + heated 37 15 ??

mirrors 38 10 ??
2 25 Cigar Lighter + Power Studs 39 10 ??
3 10 A/C Clutch 40 10 Radio
4 10 Accessory Sockets Power Studs 41 15 Front PTO
5 30 Blower Motor 42 10
6 10 Radio KAM + Worklamp ECU
43 10 Electronic Engine ECU Ign.
7 20 Main Lights + Hazard Switch
44 25 Front Implement Power Socket
8 20 Starter Switch
45 25 8 Amp Socket, C--Pillar left hand
9 25 Loader Power
46 15 Electronic Engine ECU B+
10 30 Rear Accessory Socket
48
11 15 Front Windscreen Wiper
12 10 Rear windscreen wiper and Front 51 25
and rear windscreen washer 60 10 Timer Relay Battery Isolator
13 15 Stop Lamps
Maxi Fuses 1--6
14 15 Main Light Switch + Flasher Unit
15 20 Stop Lamp Switch + Pedal Latch No. Amps Protected Components
16 15 Trailer Brake MF1 80 Engine, Ignition Relay
17 25 IGN+ to Accessory Sockets
MF2 30 Lighting, Ignition Switch, Main
18 15 Blower motor, Seat, Armrest adjust Lighting Switch, Radio, Worklamp
19 15 Heated Mirrors ECU, Fender Worklamps, Front
Worklamps, Roof Worklamps
20 10 Radar Socket + ADIC KeyPad +
Radar MF3 80 B + KAM ADIC, Engine ECU,
21 15 Water In Fuel Sensor + Brake Fluid Transmission ECU, Fender Work-
Level Switch lamps, Roof Worklamps, Front
Worklamps
22 15 Sidelamps RH
MF4 80 Implement Socket Rear, Hood
23 15 Sidelamps LH Worklamps, Grab Rail Worklamps
24 10 Gear display Illumination, cigar MF5 80 Lighting
lighter, VT
MF6 80 Accessories Cab
25 15 Dip Beam Headlamps, Get U
Home
4--71
139
4--72
ISO BUS Power Fuses (where fitted)
Fuse Amps Protected Supply

No.
PF4 30 ISO BUS Implement socket Rear
PF5 30 ISO BUS Implement socket Rear
PF6 30 ISO BUS DIA Front Implement
socket.
PF7 30 ISO BUS DIA Front Implement
socket.
Located behind the right hand step are a further two

30A fuses to protect the rear implement ISO BUS
circuit
PF4 and PF5, 1, are for the rear ISO BUS implement
circuit plug (where fitted). Provision for 2 more ISO
BUS implement circuit plug fuses (PF6 and PF7) are
provided should the option for the front ISO BUS
circuits be required.
140
Power Adjust Mirror Heater Relay and Follow

You Home Lights Relay (where fitted)
The timer relays for the Power Adjust Mirror heating

elements (1), and Follow You Home lights (2), are
located below the transmission shift lever panel on
the right--hand console.
Remove the four screws in the lower front panel to

gain access to the relay.
141
4--73
CLEANING THE TRACTOR
Cab Interior
When the soft trim material inside the cab becomes

dirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warm
water/detergent solution and squeeze out as much
of the water as possible.
The rubber floor covering is designed to allow water

to flow out through the open doors. Wash the
covering carefully and allow to dry naturally. Avoid
getting water under the mat.
NOTE: When operating with chemical sprayers,

clean the interior of the cab on a more frequent basis 142
to prevent a build up of chemical residue.
Cleaning the Seat and Seat Belt -- When fully dry, apply a good quality polish and
buff to a shine.
The belt may be sponged with clean, soapy water. Do
not use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as these Maintenance of the paintwork is normally carried out
chemicals will weaken the webbing. by washing, at intervals that depend on the
conditions of use and the environment. In areas
prone to atmospheric pollution and coastal zones,
Replace the belt when it shows signs of fraying, washing should be carried out more frequently,
damage or general wear. whereas if organic or chemical substances are
present, wash immediately after the tractor is used.
Do not use solvents to clean the seat. Use only warm Use a low pressure water spray, sponge down with
water with a little detergent added or a proprietary a solution of automotive shampoo and water, rinsing
brand of automotive upholstery cleaner. Avoid the sponge frequently. Rinse the tractor thoroughly
wetting the seat more than is absolutely necessary. and dry off.
Avoid washing the tractor if it is hot or has been

Cleaning the Exterior of the Tractor standing in the sun. This will help to protect the shine
on the paintwork.
In the event of abrasions or deep scratches that
expose the metal under the paintwork, the area Protect the paintwork by means of periodical
concerned will need to be retouched and treated polishing with special products (silicone waxes)
immediately with specified original products as which are available from your authorised dealer. Use
follows: wax polish should the paintwork start to dull as this
has a slightly abrasive action.
-- Rub down the immediate area surrounding the
damage with fine abrasive paper. NOTE: When carrying out operations involving
-- Apply a coat of primer. materials or crops which may become airborne,
frequently check the tractor for build up of debris
-- Leave to dry and then rub down with fine abrasive around the radiator, engine and exhaust system to
paper to ’key’ the surface. prevent overheating or the possibility of catching fire.
-- Apply the paint. For best results apply several
light applications of paint rather than one heavy
coat. Paint and primer are available from your
authorised dealer.
4--74
PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC AND

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DURING BATTERY
CHARGING OR WELDING
Precautions If welding is to be carried out in close proximity to a

computer module, then the module should be
To avoid damage to the electronic/electrical removed from the tractor. It is recommended that
systems, always observe the following: this procedure be carried out by an authorised
dealer.
Never make or break any of the charging circuit
Never allow welding cables to lay on, near or across
connections, including the battery connections,
any electrical wiring or electronic component
when the engine is running.
while welding is in progress.
Never short any of the charging components to
Always disconnect the negative cable from the
earth.
batteries when charging the batteries in the
Do not use a slave battery of higher than 12 volts tractor with a battery charger.
nominal voltage.
WARNING
Always observe correct polarity when installing the Batteries contain sulphuric acid. In case of contact
batteries or using a slave battery to jump start the with skin, flush the affected area with water for five
engine. Follow the instructions in the operator’s minutes. Seek medical attention immediately. Avoid
manual when jump starting the tractor. Connect contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear eye
positive to positive and negative to negative. protection when working near batteries.
Always disconnect the earth cable from the batteries

before carrying out arc welding on the tractor or IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two earth
on any implement attached to the tractor. cable connections at the battery prior to charging the
batteries or welding on the tractor or attached
Position the welder earth cable clamp as close to the implement will result in damage to the electronic and
welding area as possible. electrical systems.
4--75
STORING THE TRACTOR PREPARATION FOR USE AFTER STORAGE
The following text is given for your information and After extended storage, prepare the tractor for
guidance. For further information concerning long further use, as follows:
term storage of your tractor, please consult your
authorised dealer.  Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure and lower
the tractor to the ground.
TRACTOR STORAGE
 Refill the fuel tank(s).
Before storing the tractor for an extended period, the
following precautions should be taken:  Check the radiator coolant level.
 Clean the tractor.  Check all oil levels.
 Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle and  Install fully charged batteries.
refill with clean oil.
 Remove the exhaust pipe covering.
 Drain the fuel tank(s) and pour approximately
two gallons of special calibrating fuel into the  Start the engine and check that all instruments
tank. Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to and controls are functioning correctly. Using the
ensure complete distribution of the calibrating tractor hydraulic system in Position Control, fully
fuel throughout the injection system. raise the 3--point hitch and remove the supports.
IMPORTANT: Refer to page 4--5 regarding tractor  Check operation of heating and air conditioning
storage when using biodiesel fuels. systems (where fitted).
 Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant is  Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that it
within 200 hours of the next change, drain, flush is operating satisfactorily.
and refill the system. See Operation 32 in
Section 4. Run the engine for one hour to
disperse the coolant throughout the system.
 Lubricate all grease fittings.
 Using the tractor hydraulic system in Position

Control, raise the 3--point hitch and support the
lift arms in the raised position.
 Lightly coat all exposed hydraulic piston rods

with petroleum jelly, e.g., power steering cylinder
rams, lift assist rams, spool valves, etc.
 Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dry

atmosphere. Recharge periodically.
 Raise the tractor and place supports under the

axles to take the weight off the tyres.
 Cover the exhaust pipe opening.
4--76
SECTION 5
FAULT FINDING
INTRODUCTION
The following information is intended as a guide to
assist in identifying and correcting possible tractor
malfunctions and fault conditions.
The information provided is as follows:
 ERROR CODES
 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
ERROR CODES
Your tractor makes extensive use of electronics to

control and monitor major components within the
driveline, electrical and hydraulic systems. In the
unlikely event of a fault occurring in one of these
areas, the malfunction will be identified with a symbol
and a four or five digit error code in the Dot Matrix
Display on the instrument panel. The first digit(s) of
each number provide the general location of the fault
and the subsequent numbers confirm the exact 1
nature of the fault.
The code indicates the faulty circuit or sensor and the SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
type of fault, e.g., open circuit, short circuit, etc. Each
error code will be supported by the relevant symbol The following information lists possible problems,
displayed above the number. their cause and corrective action. The systems are
listed as follows:
Should a fault occur causing the tractor to become
disabled, an error code will be displayed in the Subject Page
instrument panel. If this should happen and you are
unable to rectify the fault yourself, contact your Fault codes and symbols 5--2
authorised dealer and report the error code
Engine 5--4
displayed.
Transmission 5--7
Hydraulics 5--8
3-point hitch 5--9
Brakes 5--10
Cab 5--10
Electrical 5--11
5--1
SECTION 5 -- FAULT FINDING
FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION
-- 1------ Electronic draft control.
-- 2------ Transmission.
-- 3------ Engine.
-- 4------ Rear electronic remote valves.
-- 45---- Front electronic remote valves.

F
ACTION
-- 5------ Rear PTO system. The system fault symbols relate
to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
-- 6------ Front wheel drive. components, either electrical,
mechanical or hydraulic.
The appearance of a fault

-- 7------ Rear differential lock. symbol may be accompanied by
a four or five digit fault code.
Consult your authorized dealer.

-- 8------ Front PTO system.
-- 9------ Front 3--point hitch.
-- 10------ Front suspension.
-- 15------ Fast Steer system.
-- 16------ Cab auto temperature control
Selective Catalytic Reduction

-- 19------
(SCR)
5--2
FAULT CODES and SYMBOLS
DMD LAMP FAULT CODE AREA of FAULT ACTION
-- 14------ Instrument cluster.
-- 14------ Electronic system malfunction.
-- 14------ Data network system.
The system fault symbols relate

-- 14------ Steering sensor. to an operational fault in one or
more of the tractors main
components, either electrical,
mechanical or hydraulic.
-- 14------ 5 volt supply voltage.
The appearance of a fault
symbol may be accompanied by
-- 14------ Starter motor power supply. a four digit fault code.
-- 14------ Fuel level sensor.
-- 14------ Air brake system fault.
-- 14------ Alternator charging failure.
Intelliview monitor present but

-- 14------ Configure to ’ON LINE’ status.
not configured ’ON LINE’.
5--3
ENGINE
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION
Engine will not start Incorrect starting procedure. Review starting procedure.
or is difficult to start
Low or no fuel. Check fuel level.
Air in fuel lines. Bleed fuel system.
Low ambient temperature. Use cold starting aid.
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Malfunctioning fuel pump See your authorised dealer.

or injectors.
Malfunctioning fuel solenoid or See your authorised dealer.

solenoid relay.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity. Use correct viscosity oil.
Incorrect fuel for operating Use correct type fuel for temperature
temperature. conditions.
Slow starter speed. See slow starter speed in Electrical.
Engine runs roughly Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
and/or stalls
Contaminated fuel system. Clean and bleed fuel system.
Fuel solenoid incorrectly adjusted. See your authorised dealer.
Fuel cap vent blocked. Wash cap in clean fuel oil.
5--4
ENGINE (continued)
Engine lacks power Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or
ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Clogged fuel filter(s). Replace fuel filter element(s).
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
Malfunctioning fuel injection See your authorised dealer.

pump.
Maximum ‘no--load’ speed set See your authorised dealer.

too low.
Leaking air intake boost pipes or Check and rectify or see your authorised
exhaust manifold. dealer.
Turbocharger malfunctioning. See your authorised dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
Engine knocks Fuel injection pump timing. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine oil pressure. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operating Check thermostats.

temperature.
Engine overheats. See Engine overheats.
Engine overheats Low engine oil level. Add oil, as required.
Low engine coolant level. Fill coolant recovery tank. Check cooling
system for leaks.
Defective thermostat(s). Check thermostat(s).
Dirty/blocked radiator core. Clean.
Excessive engine overload. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
5--5
ENGINE (continued)
Engine overheats Faulty radiator pressure cap. Replace cap.
Cooling system blocked. Flush cooling system.
Loose or worn fan belt. Check tension, adjust or replace belt

if worn.
Leaking hose or connection. Tighten connection and/or replace hose.
Malfunctioning temperature See your authorised dealer.

gauge or sender.
Malfunctioning vistronic fan. See your authorised dealer.
Low engine operat- Malfunctioning thermostat(s). Replace thermostat(s).

ing temperature
Vistronic fan locked up. See your Authorised dealer.
Low engine oil pres- Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
sure
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Excessive engine oil Engine oil level too high. Reduce oil level, as required.
consumption
Wrong oil grade or viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
External oil leaks. Repair leaks.
Worn valve guides/seals. See your authorised dealer.
Excessive fuel con- Low engine operating See Low engine operating temperature.
sumption temperature.
Malfunctioning turbocharger. See your authorised dealer.
Engine overloaded. Shift to lower gear, reduce draft load or

ballast carried.
Air cleaner restricted. Service air cleaner.
Incorrect fuel. Use correct type fuel.
5--6
ENGINE (continued)
Excessive fuel con- Malfunctioning fuel injectors. See your authorised dealer.
sumption
(continued) Malfunctioning fuel injection pump. See your authorised dealer.
Leaking air intake or exhaust Check and rectify or see your authorised
manifold. dealer.
Implement incorrectly adjusted. See implement Operator’s Manual.
TRANSMISSION
Tractor does not Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
drive in any gear malfunction. authorised dealer.
Gear shift sequence Error code will indicate source of Recalibrate the transmission or see your
incorrect or gears malfunction. authorised dealer.
missing
Jumping out of gear Worn synchronisers/couplers. Recalibrate the transmission or see your
or holding in gear authorised dealer.
Poor inching control Transmission clutches require Perform transmission clutch calibration
when using inching calibration. procedure or see your authorised dealer.
pedal (clutch pedal)
or jerky gear shifting
High transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

operating tempera-
ture Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Dirty or blocked transmission Clean.

oil cooler.
Low transmission oil Low oil level. Add oil, as required.

pressure
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Blocked transmission oil filter. Replace filter.
Noisy transmission Low oil level. Add oil, as required.
Incorrect oil grade/viscosity. Drain and refill with oil of the correct
specification.
Worn bearings or failed parts. See your authorised dealer.
5--7
HYDRAULICS
Hydraulic system Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
does not operate malfunction.
Hydraulics oil level very low. Add oil, as required.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Hydraulic oil over- Hydraulics oil level too low or Adjust oil level, as required.
heats too high.
Hydraulics oil cooler blocked. Clean.
Blocked hydraulic oil filter(s). Replace oil filter(s).
Flow control incorrectly adjusted. Allow to cool, adjust flow control before
operating again.
Hydraulic load not matched to See your authorised dealer.

tractor.
Remote control valve Detent release pressure set too low. Adjust detent pressure or see your
detent disengages authorised dealer.
prematurely
Remote equipment Flow control incorrectly set. Adjust flow control.

cylinder operates too
fast or too slowly
Remote equipment Hoses not correctly connected. Attach hoses correctly.

does not operate
Load exceeds system capacity. Reduce load or use correct size cylinder
(see your authorised dealer).
Remote control valve lever Adjust cables or see your authorised

movement restricted. dealer.
5--8
THREE--POINT HITCH
3--point hitch does Error code will indicate source of See your authorised dealer.
not move when con- malfunction.
trol lever is moved
Hitch not in phase with the control Put lift control lever back in phase with
lever. lower links.
Fast raise switch in external control Put switch in correct position.

position.
Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.

positioned.
External power lift Fast raise switch not in external Centralise switch (external control
control does not op- control position. position).
erate
3--point hitch does Height limit control incorrectly Adjust height limit control.
not raise fully positioned.
3--point hitch drops Drop rate control incorrectly Adjust drop rate control.
slowly positioned.
3--point hitch slow to Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.

respond to draft adjusted.
loads
Drop rate too slow. Adjust drop rate control.
Implement not functioning properly. See implement operator’s manual.
3--point hitch too re- Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
sponsive to draft adjusted.
loads
3--point hitch status Position/draft control incorrectly Adjust position/draft control.
light flashes continu- adjusted.
ally
5--9
BRAKES
Pedal(s) feel spongy Air in system. System requires bleeding. See

Excessive brake Brake piston seal leaking. See your authorised dealer.
pedal travel
Brake bleed valve leaking. See your authorised dealer.
Leakage in brake valve(s) See your authorised dealer.
Worn brake discs. See your authorised dealer.
CAB
Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filter Check seal condition.
element(s).
Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.
Defective filter. Replace filter.
Damaged seals around Replace seal(s).

doors/windows or roof hatch.
Low pressuriser air Blocked filter(s). Clean or replace filters.

flow
Heater or evaporator core blocked. See your authorised dealer.
Air conditioner does Heater control turned on. Turn temperature control knob fully anti-
not produce cool air clockwise.
Condenser blocked. Clean radiator, condenser and oil cooler.
Drive belt slipping, worn or Check automatic belt tensioner and belt
damaged. condition.
Low refrigerant level. See your authorised dealer.
5--10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Electrical system Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.

completely inopera- connections.
tive
Sulphated batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for
minimum 12.6 volts. Check electrolyte
level and specific gravity.
Starter speed slow -- Loose or corroded battery Clean and tighten connections.
engine cranks slowly connections.
Low battery output. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Incorrect viscosity engine oil. Use correct viscosity oil for ambient
temperature.
Starter inoperative Loose or corroded battery or Clean and tighten connections.

starter motor connections.
Dead batteries. Charge or replace batteries.
Starter safety switch(es) operative. Place all gear shift levers in neutral and
fully depress clutch pedal.
Alternator light stays Low engine idle speed. Increase engine idle speed.
on with engine run-
ning Broken/loose drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

authorised dealer.
Batteries will not Malfunctioning alternator Have alternator checked by your

charge authorised dealer.
Loose or corroded terminals. Clean and tighten connections.
Loose or worn drive belt. Check belt and automatic belt tensioner.
Replace belt, if required.
Malfunctioning batteries. Check battery open circuit voltage for

5--11
NOTES
5--12
SECTION 6
ACCESSORIES
This section of the Manual describes the function Subject Page

and operation of a selection of additional features
that are available for your tractor as dealer installed Rotating Beacon 6--2
accessories. Unless otherwise stated, these
features may also be available as factory fitted Auxiliary Headlights 6--2
options.
Battery Isolator Switch 6--3
Maintenance requirements for these features will be
found in Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance.
This subjects covered in this section are shown on

the right. A comprehensive index is provided at the
end of this book.
A comprehensive range of optional equipment is

available to enhance the versatility of your tractor,
consult your authorised dealer for more information.
6--1
SECTION 6 -- ACCESSORIES
ROTATING BEACON
The beacon switch is located in the control panel in

the roof. Press in the button identified with the
beacon symbol to provide power to the rotating
beacon socket outlet.
NOTE: Less cab models will have the beacon switch

located on the main switch panel on the right--hand
control console.
The roof beacon kit consists of a rotating beacon,

support bracket and fitting hardware to attach to the
roof of the tractor. 2
A socket connected to the tractor electrical circuit (1),

is provided each side of the cab at the rear of the
tractor. When not in use, ensure the socket cover is
replaced to prevent water ingress.
AUXILIARY HEADLIGHTS
A set of additional dipping headlights are available for

use with front mounted equipment. Located on the
upper right and left--hand grab rails, the headlight
beams pass over front mounted equipment to
illuminate the road ahead.
To turn on the auxiliary headlights, depress the

switch on the left--hand ’C’ pillar in the cab. When
switched on the auxiliary headlight beams may be
dipped using the multi--function switch on the left of
the steering column.
4
6--2
BATTERY ISOLATOR SWITCH
Before disconnecting battery power with the isolator,

ensure the key--start and any other electrical
switches are turned OFF.
IMPORTANT: After turning the tractor key--start off,

wait for 60 seconds before isolating the battery
power. This will permit any unsaved information in
the tractor electronic processors to be memorised.
An inbuilt power reserve will maintain a small amount

of power to supply the electronic processors and
radio memories when the tractor battery is isolated.
The solenoid operated battery isolator is controlled

by a switch located on the left--hand cab ’C’ pillar.
Depress the top of the switch to disconnect battery

power, an audible warning will sound for
approximately 5 seconds. Depress the bottom of the
switch to re--connect battery power.
IMPORTANT: When in the ’ON’ position, the isolator

switch solenoid consumes a small amount of
electrical power. If the tractor is left for an extended
period of time with the isolator on, battery power may
be reduced. Always turn the battery isolator switch
’OFF’ when the tractor is not in use. 5
NOTE: The key--start switch must be in the ’OFF’ or

’ACCESSORIES’ position to operate the battery
isolator, it will not function with the key--start in the
’ON’ (run) position.
6--3
6--4
SECTION 7
SPECIFICATIONS
General Subject Page
General Dimensions 7--2
The specification figures in this section are provided
for your information and guidance. For further Vehicle Weights 7--6
information concerning your tractor and equipment,
consult your New Holland dealer. Lubricant and Fluid Capacities 7--7
Engine 7--8
New Holland policy is one of continuous
improvement and the right to change prices, Fuel System 7--8
specification or equipment at any time without notice
is reserved. Cooling System 7--9
Transmission Options 7--9
All data given in this manual is subject to production
variations. Dimensions and weight are approximate Maximum Operating Angles 7--10
only. The illustrations do not necessarily show
tractors in standard condition or imply that these Rear Power Take Off 7--10
features are available in all countries. For exact
information about any particular tractor, please Front Power Take Off 7--10
consult your New Holland dealer. Hydraulic System 7--11
Rear 3--Point Hitch 7--11
Remote Control Valves 7--15
Front 3--Point Hitch 7--15

Brakes 7--16
Steering 7--16
Electrical Equipment 7--17
Hardware Torque Tables 7--18
7--1
SECTION 7 -- SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL DIMENSIONS ALL MODELS
NOTE:The following dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with tyre sizes as shown.
Allowance must be made for tyres of larger or smaller dimensions:
T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

Standard Suspension SuperSteer
The following dimensions are based Front 11.00 x 16 480/70R30 (4WD models)
on tractors with tyre sizes shown: Rear 580/70R42 (2WD and 4WD)
A. Width across fenders

Standard fenders All models, 2158 mm (84.9 in.)
Extended fenders All models, 2334 mm (91.8 in.)
Extra wide fenders All models, 2682 mm (105.5 in.)
7--2
GENERAL DIMENSIONS T7.220, T7.235, T7.250 and T7.260
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

B. Maximum ground clearance ---- All 4WD models, 613 mm (24.1 in.)
below front axle
C. Front track setting mm 1545 -- 2187 All 4WD models, 1552 -- 2269
in 60.8 -- 86.3 All 4WD models, 61.1 -- 89.3
D. Rear track setting

-- with flange axle All models, 1426--2026 mm (56.1 -- 79.8 in.)
-- with 98 in. bar axle All models, 1524--2438 mm (60.0 -- 96.0 in.)
-- with 112 in. bar axle All models, 1524--2794 mm (60.0 -- 110.0 in.)
-- with 119 in. bar axle All models, 1524 -- 2998 mm (60.0 -- 118.0 in.)
E. Height to top of exhaust All models, 3165 mm (124.6 in.)
F. Height to:
-- Top of cab All models, 3065 mm (120.6 in.)
G. *Ground clearance below drawbar

Swinging drawbars All models, 398 -- 523 mm (15.6 -- 20.5 in)
Tow hooks All models, 314 -- 392 mm (12.3 -- 15.4 in)
H. Front hitch projection

Links horizontal ---- 4WD models only, 855 mm (33.6 in.)
Links in transport position ---- 4WD models only, 415 mm (16.3 in)
*Ground clearance below the swinging drawbar or tow hook will be dependent on type of drawbar and tyre size.
The figures shown are for guidance only.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--3
2WD 4WD 4WD 4WD

J. Wheelbase mm 3028 2884 2884 2977

in 119.2 113.5 113.5 117.2
K. Overall length to end of mm 4918 4918 4918 4918

lower links in 193.6 193.6 193.6 193.6
Minimum turn radius

(refer to illustration below)
L. Turning Radius
-- without brakes (min. track setting) m 4.83 -- -- --
ft. 15.8 -- -- --
-- without brakes at 61.0 in. front m -- 6.90 6.90 5.94
track setting (16.9 R28 tyres) ft. -- 22.6 22.6 19.4
track setting (600/65R28 tyres) ift. -- 20.5 20.5 18.7
M. Turnaround Diameter
-- without brakes (min. track setting) m 5.76 -- -- --
ft. 18.8 -- -- --
track setting (16.9 R28 tyres) ft. -- 36.0 36.0 28.5
track setting (600/65R28 tyres) ift. -- 30.3 30.3 25.5
Minimum Turn Radius
(L) SAE Turning Radius. Measured from the centre

point of the circle to the centre of the tread on the
outside front tyre.
(M) Turnaround Diameter. Measured from the centre

point of the rear axle, in line with the drawbar.
NOTE: All turn radius figures are measured without front fenders and steering stops adjusted to provide 20 mm
(0.78in) wheel to chassis clearance on full lock with 0 front axle oscillation.
NOTE: If your tractor has tyres of a different size then the above dimensions will vary due to the difference in
the rolling radius and section width of the tyres fitted.
7--4
Axle Width -- Flange to Flange

Front axle
-- 2WD (min -- max) 1560--1960 mm (61.4--77.1 in.) --
-- 4WD 1900 mm (74.8 in.)
Rear axle
-- Flange type 1900 mm (74.8 in.)
-- 98 in. bar axle (min -- max) All models,
Hub Dimensions
(refer to illustration below)
Front axle
-- 2WD A 152.4 mm (6.0 in.)
B 203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 210 Nm (154.8 lbs.ft.)
-- 4WD A 362 mm (14.2 in.)
B 405 mm (15.9 in.)
C 8, M16x1.5 -- 210 Nm (154.8 lbs.ft.)
Rear axle
-- Flange and Bar axle A 281 mm (11.0 in.)
B 335 mm (13.1 in.)
(T7.220 and T7.235) C 10, M25x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
(T7.250 and T7.260) C 10, M22x2.5 -- 500 Nm (368.7 lbs.ft)
A Diameter of clearance hole (hub)

B Stud to stud diameter (centre to centre)
C Stud number, dimension and torque
7--5
TYPICAL OPERATING WEIGHTS T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
*2WD -- with cab

On front axle 1970 kg (4343 lbs)
On rear axle 4454 kg (9819 lbs)
Total weight 6415 kg (14142 lbs)
2WD Maximum Permissible Weight

**4WD -- with cab, standard axle

**4WD -- with cab, SuperSteer axle

**4WD -- with cab, Suspended axle

4WD Maximum Permissible Weight

NOTE:The above weights are approximate and are based on standard production tractors with full fuel
tank, but without driver, or additional equipment.
* Standard tractor without front or rear ballast and with 100 ltrs (26.4 US gals) of fuel.
** Includes front weight pack ’C’ (1087 kg (2396 lbs).
7--6
CAPACITIES T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Fuel tank 395 litres (104 US gals)

(Total, both tanks) (NOTE: Before using Biodiesel fuels, refer to page 4--5)
DEF/AdBlue tank 48 litres (12.6 US gals)
Cooling system 26 litres (6.9 US gals)
Engine 15 litres (3.96 US gals)

(including filter)
Transmission/rear axle/hydraulics 100.0 litres (26.4 US gals)
Front P.T.O. 3.05 litres (3.2 US qts)
4WD Front hubs (w/o brakes) 2.3 litres (2.4 US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front hubs (with brakes) 3.8 litres (4.0 US qts)

(quantity for one hub only)
4WD Front axle differential 11.0 litres (11.6 US qts)

(All axles)
Rear Axle/Hydraulics Oil Level when using Remote Hydraulic Equipment
When checking the rear axle oil level, it is good practice to ensure that the oil is up to the full mark on the dipstick
with the tractor parked on level ground. However, when connecting auxiliary equipment to the remote control
valves it should be remembered that the equipment utilises oil from the rear axle and could seriously lower the
oil level. Operating the tractor with a low oil level may result in. damage to the rear axle and transmission
components. See page 3--107 for further details.
7--7
ENGINE T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Engine power (unboosted) Kw 123 136 147 158

at rated speed, (ECE R120) cv 167 185 200 215
at rated speed, (ECE R120) bhp 165 182 197 212
Engine power (boosted) Kw 151 162 173 181
at rated speed, (ECE R120) cv 205 220 235 246
at rated speed, (ECE R120) bhp 202 217 232 243
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders
Valves per cylinder 4 valves per cylinder
Aspiration Turbocharged and air to air intercooled
Bore 104 mm (4.0 in)
Stroke 132 mm (5.19 in)
Displacement 6728 cm3 (410 in3)
Compression ratio 16.5 : 1
Firing order 1.5.3.6.2.4
Rated engine speed rev/min All Models, 2200 e.r.p.m.
Idle speed rev/min All Models, 650 +/ -- 50 e.r.p.m.
Maximum no--load speed rev/min All Models, 2375 e.r.p.m.
FUEL SYSTEM
Type Electronically controlled, high pressure common rail
Dynamic timing (BTDC) 3.4 5.5 6.3 6.3
7--8
COOLING SYSTEM T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Type Pressurised, with full flow bypass and recovery tank
Vistronic fan
-- Number of blades 7 blades
-- Diameter 510 mm. (20.0 in)
Thermostat
-- Begins to open at C 81 degrees
F 178 degrees
-- Fully open at C 96 degrees

F 205 degrees
Radiator pressure cap bar 1.0 bar (14.5 lbf.in2)
TRANSMISSION
Type Full Powershift with Power Shuttle
Depending on tractor specification,

a number of transmission options
are available
17 x 6 -- 2WD and 4WD 30 km/h (18.4 MPH)*
18 x 6 -- 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 Economy -- 4WD only 40 km/h (24.8 MPH)*
19 x 6 -- 4WD only 50 km/h (31.0 MPH)*

(with front brakes & suspension)
Creeper Gears
34 x 12 -- 2WD and 4WD 0.29 -- 30 km/h (0.18 -- 18.4 MPH)*
36 x 12 -- 4WD only 0.29 -- 40 km/h (0.18 -- 24.8 MPH)*

(with front brakes & suspension)
Creeper Gear Operation Electronic switch
*Approximate speeds depending on tyre size
7--9
MAXIMUM OPERATING ANGLE T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Front end up 30 degrees

Rear end up 30 degrees
Right side up 30 degrees
Left side up 30 degrees
REAR POWER TAKE OFF
Type
-- Standard (except North America) 540E/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540/1000 shiftable, independent
-- Optional 540/1000 non--shiftable, independent
Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 540 1950 e.r.p.m.
-- 540E 1570 e.r.p.m.
-- 1000 (shiftable and non--shiftable) 2154 e.r.p.m.
Maximum P.T.O. power Kw 121.7 134.1 141.2 151.4

(Unboosted) Hp. 163.1 179.8 189.3 203.0
Fender mounted PTO controls Optional

(except North America)
FRONT POWER TAKE OFF

(4WD only)*
Type Single speed, fully independent

-- Shaft 6 or 21 Spline 39.4mm (1.375 in.)
-- Actuation Elecro--hydraulic
-- Direction of rotation Anti--clockwise
Engine speed @ PTO speed

-- 1000 rpm only All Models, 1850 e.r.p.m.
Maximum Power Output Kw All Models, 96.9 Kw

Hp. All Models, 130 Hp
*Not SuperSteer models
7--10
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Type Variable displacement hydraulic pump with Electronic Draft

Control (EDC)
Maximum system pressure

at rated engine speed
@ 2100 e.r.p.m. 200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 lbf.in2)
Flow at rated engine speed

-- with standard pump 120.0 l/min (31.7 US gal/min)
-- with optional ’Hi--Flow’ pump 150.0 l/min (39.6 US gal/min)
THREE POINT HITCH
Linkage Category
-- with EDC, standard Category II/III w/quick attach link ends
-- with EDC, Optional Category II/III w/flexible link ends
7--11
LIFT CAPACITY T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link ends
through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:
with 2 x 90mm assist rams

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 4874 (10745)
-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) 5037--5364 (11106--11825) -- --
Manufacturers’ figures to OECD criteria -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum hydraulic
pressure, links horizontal:

Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity, 610 mm (24 in) behind link
ends through full lift range at 90% of maximum hydraulic pressure:

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) -- -- 6536--6618 (14410--14590)
Manufacturers’ figures to SAE J283/ASAE -- maximum lift capacity at link ends at maximum
hydraulic pressure, links horizontal:

NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical--
7--12

(Continued)

pressure, links horizontal:



NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical
7--13

(Continued)

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 6885 (15178)
pressure with links horizontal:

-- with Flexible link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 8673 (19120)

-- with Quick attach link ends kg (lbs) All Models, 8341 (85054

NOTE: All lift capacity values are theoretical6536--6618 (14410--14590)
7--14
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
With mechanical remote Std. 3 configurable valves

valves Opt. 4 configurable valves
Opt. 3 configurable valves + ISO connector
Maximum pressure at 200 +/ -- 5 bar (2750+/ -- 72 psi)

rated engine speed
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
ISO Power Beyond couplers Opt. Compatible with configurable and electronic valves
FRONT 3--POINT HITCH
Linkage Category Category II (ISO 8759/2)
Lift capacity through full lift range:

@ ball ends Standard and suspended axles -- 3859 kg.
. with Supersteer axle -- 3074 kg.
@ 610 mm (24 in) Standard and suspended axles -- 3788 kg.
in front of link ends with Supersteer axle -- 3074 kg.
FRONT REMOTE VALVE

COUPLERS
With mechanical rear mount Opt. Dealer installed accessory

remote valves
With electronic mid mount Opt. 2, 3 or 4 valves

remote valves and joystick
Maximum flow through one 95+/ -- 5 l/min (25+/ -- 1.3 US gal/min)

valve at rated engine speed
7--15
BRAKES T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Service brake Self adjusting, oil immersed disc acting on differential shafts
with power assistance
Number of discs per side 2 friction and 2 steel
Front brakes (optional 4WD) Oil immersed disc in each hub
Handbrake and Electronic Oil immersed discs acting on bevel pinion shaft
Park Brake
-- Number of discs 6 discs
STEERING
Type Hydrostatic with tilt/telescoping steering wheel
Turns from lock to lock

-- 2WD All Models 4.4 turns
-- 4WD Std/Suspended axles All Models 4.3 turns
-- 4WD Supersteer axles All Models 4.0 turns
-- 4WD with Fast Steer 10 left or right from the sraight ahead position
Maximum angle of turn

-- 2WD standard axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD standard axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD suspension axle 55 degrees
-- 4WD SuperSteer axle 65 degrees
Front wheel toe in

-- 2 wheel drive 3 -- 6.5 mm (0.11 -- 0.25 in.)
Front wheel alignment

-- 4 wheel drive 0 +/-- 3 mm (0 +/-- 0.12 in.)
7--16
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT T7.220 T7.235 T7.250 T7.260
Alternator 12 volt, 150 amp
Battery Minimum maintenance 12 volt 1300 cca

-- Isolator, mechanical Optional
-- Isolator, electronic Optional
Starting motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated

4.2 kw -- geared reduction
Cold starting aid Optional inlet manifold grid heater and fuel heater
Bulb rating and type

-- headlights 60/55W -- H4
-- parking lights (front) 5W -- R5W
-- parking lights (rear) 5W -- P21/5W
-- work lights (hi--mount) 55W -- H3
-- work lights (auxiliary) 50W -- GE866
-- turn indicators (front) 21W -- PY21W
-- turn indicators (rear) 21W -- R21W
-- stop lights 21W -- P21/5W
-- licence plate lights 5W -- R5W
-- rotating beacon 55W -- H1
-- SMV lights (N America only) 21W--P21W
and extremity lights
7--17
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C
SIZE or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr or w/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8
PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLT
SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD
1/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8)
5/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20)
3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35)
7/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57)
1/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88)
9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125)
5/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172)
3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (305)
7/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494)
1.0 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATION
CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
SAE SAE SAE

GRADE 2 GRADE 5 GRADE 8
REGULAR SAE SAE
NUTS GRADE 5 GRADE 8
HEX NUTS NUTS
LOCKNUTS
GRADE IDENTIFICATION GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES GRADE A NO MARKS
GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFRETIAL NOTCH GRADE B THREE MARKS
GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFRENTIAL NOTCHES GRADE C SIX MARKS
MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED
GRADE IDENTIFICATION AT CORNERS
GRADE A NO MARK
GRADE B LETTER B
GRADE C LETTER C
7--18
MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUES
IN FOOT--POUNDS (NEWTON METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS
METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS
CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9 LOCKNUT

CL.8
NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED w/CL8.8
SIZE w/ZnCr w/ZnCr w/ZnCr BOLT
M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)
M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)
M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)
M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)
M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)
M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)
M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)
M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)
NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.
IDENTIFICATION
HEX CAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS
CLASSES 5.6 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS
HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTS

CLASSES 05 AND UP
MANUFACTURERS IDENTIFICATION
PROPERTY CLASS CLOCK MARKING
7--19
7--20
SECTION 8 -- 1ST 50 HOUR SERVICE SHEETS
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Dealer’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:

1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16  C (60  F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted) . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
10. Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted) j Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
11. Check front axle differential 7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j 8. Calibrate Power Command
transmission clutches (see page 4--59) . j
13. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j 6. All optional equipment and accessories j
21. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
22. Check air intake and intercooler 1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
23. Check cooling system hose connections j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
24. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--1
8--2
CHECK AND ADJUST, AS REQUIRED (Owner’s copy)
INOPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS: OPERATIVE SERVICE CHECKS:

1. Check engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j All operative checks are to be performed with the
tractor at normal operating temperature.
2. Tyre pressures and condition . . . . . . . . . j
1. Lights and instruments for proper operation j
3. Radiator coolant level and specific
gravity (1.071 -- 1.083 at 16  C (60  F) j 2. Windscreen wipe/wash operation . . . . . . j
4. Inspect engine Poly V-belt . . . . . . . . . . . . j 3. Fluid and oil leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
5. Inspect air compressor Poly V--belt 4. Maximum no-load speed and idle speed
(air operated trailer brakes only) . . . . . . j adjustments and fuel shut-off . . . . . . . . . j
6. Inspect air conditioner Poly V--belt . . . . . j 5. P.T.O. operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
6. Hydraulic System:
7. Change hydraulics/transmission filters . j
Draft and Position Control operation . . . . j
8. Check transmission/rear axle oil level . . j
Flow control operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
9. Clean front P.T.O. filter (where fitted) . . j Remote control valve operation . . . . . . . j
10. Check front P.T.O. oil level (where fitted) j Joystick operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
11. Check front axle differential 7. Transmission clutch pedal disconnect
and hub oil levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j switch adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
12. Check brake pedal equalization . . . . . . . j 8. Calibrate Power Command
transmission clutches (see page 4--59) . j
13. Check and adjust parking brake . . . . . . . j
PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS:
14. Wheel-to-rim clamp bolts and lock nuts
for tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j 1. Engine operation including throttle and
governor operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
15. Wheel disc-to-hub nuts for tightness . . . j
2. Transmission, including clutch . . . . . . . . j
16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness j
3. Steering control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
17. Front wheel track alignment (2wd/4wd) . . j
4. Differential lock engagement and
18. Fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j disengagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
19. Grease front wheel bearings (2WD) . . . j 5. Brake action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
20. Lubricate all grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . j 6. All optional equipment and accessories j
21. Clean air cleaner primary element . . . . . j SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:
22. Check air intake and intercooler 1. Cab or frame mounting bolt torque . . . . j
hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
2. Neutral start switches operative . . . . . . . j
23. Check cooling system hose connections j
3. Seat belt and coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . j
24. Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts . j
SERVICE PERFORMED
Tractor Model Tractor Serial Number
Owner’s signature Date Dealer’s signature Date
8--3
8--4
SECTION 9 -- INDEX
A Clutch pedal, 2--93

Console light, 2--9
Accessories
Coolant temperature gauge, 2--36
Auxiliary headlights, 6--2
Battery isolator switch, 6--3 Cup holder, 2--19
Rotating beacon, 6--2
Additional oil supply for remote services, 3--104
Adjustable air vents, 2--10
D
Air conditioner control, 2--11 Differential lock operation, 2--118
Air--operated trailer brakes, 3--141 Digital clock, 2--44
Airborne noise emission, 1--25 Dot matrix display, 2--40
Area accumulator, 2--52
Alarm functions, 2--76 Area per hour forecaster, 2--51
Analogue and digital instrument cluster, 2--36 Error codes, 2--77
Odometer (distance record), 2--51
Armrest Colour Display, 2--61
Drawbars and towing attachments, 3--123
Audible alarms, 2--76
Automatic pick--up hitch, 3--130
Automatic cab temperature control, 2--13 Rear tow hitch, 3--133
Automatic engine shutdown, 3--12 Safety chain, 3--132
Swinging drawbars, 3--125
Dual wheels, 3--163
B
Ballasting and tyres, 3--165 E
Ballast charts, 3--171
Front weights, 3--168 Ecology and the environment, 1--6
Liquid tyre ballast, 3--170
Electrical power connectors, 2--20
Rear wheel weights, 3--168
Implement sockets, 2--23
With front axle suspension, 3--165
Electrical switch panels, 2--2
Bar type rear axle, 3--157
Track adjustment, 3--158 Integrated control panels (ICP), Additional switch
panels, 2--3
Beacon power socket, 2--22
Electro--Hydraulic remote valves
Brake controls and operation, 2--87 Timed programme operation, Replaying a
Electronic park lock, 2--87 timed programme, 3--70
Footbrakes, 2--92 Transport Locks, 3--74
Electronic draft control, 3--81
C Control pod, 3--82
Draft control operation, 3--88
Cab air filters, 2--15 Dynamic ride control, 3--93
EDC control panel, 3--82
Cab air recirculation, 2--15 External 3--point hitch controls, 3--94
Cab climate controls, 2--10 Hitch position display, 3--85
Indicator lights, 3--85
Cab Introduction, 2--4
Position control operation, 3--92
Cab pressurisation monitor, 2--16 Pre--operation settings, 3--87
Centre display (LCD) , 2--40 System malfunction warning, 3--86
3--Point hitch position, 2--41 Transport lock, 3--93
Power take off speed, 2--41 Electronic remote valves, Visual displays, 3--63
Rear wheel slip, 2--40
Engine power management, 3--14
Cleaning the tractor, 1--1 Engine speed management, 3--16
Cleaning the cab interior, 4--75
Cleaning the exterior, 4--75 Engine tachometer, 2--36
Seat and seat belt, 4--75
9--1
SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Enhanced keypad, Changing settings, 2--44 Heater temperature control, 2--10

Enhanced keypad and performance monitor, Hydraulic remote control valves
2--42 Configurable detent operation, 3--98
Error codes and warnings, with Colour Display, Control levers, 3--96
2--79
External rear view mirrors, 2--8
I
Implement cable/harness routing, 2--19
F Implement monitor installation, 2--18
Fast Steer Operation, 3--36 Important information, 1--1, 2--1, 3--1
Fault finding Before operating the tractor, 3--1
Brakes, 5--10 In cab storage, 2--19
Cab, 5--10
Indicator and warning lights, 2--37
Electrical system, 5--11
Engine, 5--4 Instructional seat, 2--31
Error codes, 5--1 Interior light, 2--9
Hydraulics, 5--8
Power Command transmission, 5--7 International symbols, 1--24
Three--point hitch, 5--9
First 50 hour service, 1--2
Flange type rear axle, 3--154
K
Foot throttle, 2--93 Key--start switch, 2--32
Four wheel drive, 2--120

Operating precautions, 2--121
L
Front 3--point hitch, 3--57
External controls, 3--78 Lubrication and maintenance
Hitch operating mode, 3--71 4WD axle oil level, 4--41
Hitch settings and adjustments, 3--75 Adjust headlamp/worklamp beam, 4--65
Transport locks, 3--74 Adjust parking brake, 4--34
Adjust pick--up hitch latching, 4--63
Front axle oscillation stops, 3--150
Air brake drier reservoir, 4--56
Front axle suspension, 2--122 Bleed fuel system, 4--59
Front fenders (4WD), 3--151 Cab air filters, 4--22, 4--43
Cab suspension adjustment, 4--64
Front P.T.O., 3--55 Calibrate transmission clutches, 4--60
Front P.T.O. and 3--point hitch, 3--55 Change 4WD axle oil, 4--46, 4--47
Change engine breather filter, 4--55
Front tow hitch, 3--169 Change fuel filters, 4--40
Front wheel alignment, Four wheel drive, 3--149 Check battery, 4--32, 4--47
Check brake pedal latch, 4--62
Front wheel track adjustment, Four wheel drive,
Check drive belt tension, 4--31
3--146
Check engine air intake connections, 4--38
Fuel level gauge, 2--36 Check engine valve tappet clearance, 4--55
Check wheel nut torque, 4--30
Drain cooling system, 4--50
H Drain remote valve reservoir, 4--63
Electrical system protection, 4--76
Hand throttle, 2--93 Engine air cleaner, 4--17, 4--37, 4--54
Hazard warning lights switch, 2--34 Engine coolant level, 4--19
Engine oil and filter change, 4--35
Headland turn sequence, 3--19 Engine oil level, 4--20
HTS symbols, 3--25 First 50 hour service, 4--2
Heater blower control, 2--10 First 50 hours of operation, 4--1
9--2
SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Front P.T.O. gearbox oil level, 4--34, 4--42

Fuel pre--filter and water trap, 4--58
P
Fuel requirements, 4--4 Panel light dimming control, 2--41
Fuel system water separator, 4--18
Fuelling the tractor, 4--3 Parking brake, 2--87
Fuse and relay locations, 4--69 Performance monitor, 2--51
General information, 4--1 with Colour Display, 2--69
Inspect poly V--belt, 4--33
Light bulb replacement, 4--66 Power Command transmission, 2--93
Lubricant and coolant specification, 4--16 Auto shift function, 2--99
Biodegradable transmission oil, 4--13 Changing gear shift threshold, 2--104
Lubricants and coolants, 4--13 Creeper gears, 2--111
Lubricate grease fittings, 4--24 Driving the tractor, 2--97
Lubrication and maintenance chart, 4--14 Error codes, 2--112
Safety precautions, 4--1 Go To mode, 2--106
Service air conditioner, 4--57 Ground speed charts, 2--113
Transmission and rear axle oil level, 4--33 Powershift control, 2--95
Tyre pressures, 4--30 Programming reverse gear ratios, 2--108
Windscreen wash reservoir, 4--20 Shuttle lever, 2--96
Speed matching, 2--107
Pre--operation checks, 3--2
M Pressure washing the tractor, 3--2
Mid mounted remote valves, 3--59 Product identification, 1--3
Operating with a front loader, 3--79 Programming the Displays
Multi--function light switch, 2--33 with Colour Display, 2--73
Setting implement width, 2--73
with Enhanced Keypad
N Programming a service reminder, 2--75
Setting slip alarm point, 2--74
Numerical Listing, 4--17 Programming the visual displays, 2--53
Every 10 hours of operation, 4--19 Audible beep, 2--54
Every 100 hours of operation, 4--31 Calibrating for wheel slip, 2--56
Every 1200 hours or 12 months of operation, Programming keys, 2--53
4--43 Service period reminder, 2--58
Every 1200 hours or 24 months of operation, Setting implement width, 2--55
4--50 Setting wheel slip alarm, 2--57
Every 300 hours of operation, 4--32
Every 36 months of operation, 4--57 Programming tractor functions, 3--1
General maintenance, 4--58 R
When the warning symbol appears, 4--17
Radio/cassette player, 2--17
Rear power take--off (PTO), 3--38
O Attaching equipment, 3--53
Auto PTO function, 3--48
Operating in cold temperatures, 3--4 Brake operation, 3--40
Cold start aid, 3--10 Changing the output shaft, 3--51
Coolant immersion heater, 3--6 External PTO controls, 3--51
Fuel heater, 3--6 General information, 3--42
Transmission oil heater, 3--7 Operating precautions, 3--54
Warming the transmission oil, 3--5 Two speed shiftable PTO, 3--45
9--3
SECTION 9 -- INDEX
Two--speed with interchangeable shafts, 3--43 Top link adjustment, 3--112

Remote valves, load sensing type, 3--96 Hydraulic adjust, 3--113
Bleeding remote cylinders, 3--103 Top link bracket, 3--113
Connecting double--acting cylinders, 3--100 Three--point linkage, Removing equipment,
Connecting remote cylinders, 3--99 3--110
Connecting single--acting cylinders, 3--101 Towing the tractor, 3--3
Continuous flow hydraulic equipment, 3--102
Operating remote valves and hydraulic lift sim- Tractor ground speed display, 2--45
ultaneously, 3--103 Calibrating the ground speed display, 2--46
Ground speed calibration numbers, 2--50
Running in procedure, 3--2
Tractor noise level information sheet, 1--34
Tractor Specification
S Brakes, 7--16
Capacities, 7--7
Safety decals, 1--16 Cooling system, 7--9
Driving the tractor, 1--9 Electrical equipment, 7--17
Engine, 7--8
Safety precautions, 1--8 Front 3--point hitch, 7--15
Diesel fuel, 1--15 Front power take off, 7--10
Operating the P.T.O., 1--11 Front remote control valves, 7--15
Operating the tractor, 1--10 Fuel system, 7--8
Personal safety, 1--8 General dimensions, 7--2
Prevention of fire, 1--13 Hardware tightening torques, 7--18
Servicing the tractor, 1--12 Hydraulic system, 7--11
The tractor, 1--8 Maximum operating angle, 7--10
Using chemical sprays, 2--15 Rear power take off, 7--10
Seat belt, 2--31 Remote control valves, 7--15
Steering, 7--16
Seats, 2--24
Three--point hitch, 7--11
Deluxe air suspension seat, 2--26
Transmission, 7--9
Standard air suspension seat, 2--24
Weights, 7--6
Selective Catalytic Reduction (SCR), 1--26
Trailer braking systems, 3--139
Service parts, 1--2
Transporting the tractor, 3--2
Starting the engine, 3--9
Tyre inflation, 3--172
Steering column adjustment, 2--32 Tyre pressures and permissible loads, 3--173
Steering stops, 3--150 Tyre symbol markings, 3--173, 3--174
Stopping the engine, 3--12
Storing the tractor, 4--77
U
Using battery booster, 3--8
T Using Biodiesel fuels, 1--2
Three--point hitch, 3--109 Using remote hydraulic equipment, 3--107, 7--7
Attaching equipment, 3--109
Automatic stabilisers, 3--119
Flexible link ends, 3--114
Hitch float, 3--112
W
Lift rod adjustment, 3--111 Warning and advisory symbols, 2--80
Hydraulic adjust, 3--113
Warranty, 1--2
Quick hitch, 3--115
Sway block stabilisers, 3--121 Windscreen wash/wipe control, 2--35
Telescopic stabilisers, 3--117 Worklamp/beacon switch panel, 2--17
9--4
xx
Dealer’s stamp
CNH Europe Holding S.A. reserves the right to make improvements in design and changes in specifications
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold.
Specifications, descriptions, and illustrative material herein are as accurate as known at time of publication,
but are subject to change without notice.
Availability of some models and equipment builds varies according to the country
in which the equipment is being used. For exact information about any particular product,
please consult your New Holland dealer.
Your success - Our specialty
Printed in France
Copyright © 2011 CNH Europe Holding S.A. All Rights Reserved. New Holland is a registered trademark of CNH Europe Holding S.A.
13 Rue Aldringen 13, L-118 Luxembourg

T7 Power Command LWB - A4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T7 Power Command LWB - A4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS - according to Directives 2006/42/EC, Annex I 1.7.4.

Part Number 84411764

1 -- General Information and Safety

2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

8 -- First 50 hour Service Forms

Represented by Giuseppe Gavioli,

Name and signature of the authorised per-

HEALTH AND SAFETY RELATED STANDARDS APPLIED TO YOUR TRACTOR

Section 1 -- General Information and Safety

Section 2 -- Controls, Instruments and Operation

Section 3 -- Field Operation

Section 4 -- Lubrication and Maintenance

Section 5 -- Fault Finding

Section 8 -- First 50--hour Service Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1

Section 9 -- Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1

RECOMMENDED SI (METRIC) UNITS IMPERIAL UNIT

PRESSURE or STRESS (FORCE PER AREA)

degrees Celsius C degrees Fahrenheit F

TORQUE (includes BENDING MOMENT, MOMENT OF FORCE, and MOMENT OF A COUPLE)

VOLUME PER TIME (includes DISCHARGE and FLOW RATE)

SOUND POWER LEVEL and SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL

GENERAL INFORMATION AND SAFETY

GENERAL CLEANING THE TRACTOR

FIRST 50 HOUR SERVICE WARRANTY

It is prohibited to carry out any modifications to the

Tractor identification data must be supplied to the

The following provides the locations of the

Vehicle Identification Plate

The vehicle identification plate, (1) Figure 2 is

The serial number and model identification

The engine serial number and date of manufacture

Engine Serial No.

The details are repeated on the information plate

Further information relating to engine adjustments

NOTE: The details displayed on the engine

Power Command Transmission

The serial number plate (1) is located on the

Driveline Serial No.

The cab serial number and other information is on the

Cab Serial No.

Product Identification Number Plate

The Product Identification Number plate provides

The figures shown are the maximum permissible

ECOLOGY AND THE ENVIRONMENT

NOTE: The engines installed on the tractors

ASAE S441.3 FEB04

VERSION -- FEB ’08

ATTENTION: This text warns the operator of potential

IMPORTANT: This text informs the reader of

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while starting or

2. When driving on public roads, have

3. Use a rotating beacon and/or Slow Moving

12. To avoid overturns, drive the tractor with care and

6. On four wheel drive tractors, the drive to the front

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the P.T.O. control

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls (other

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shift

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

6. If the power steering or engine ceases operating,